N RTI sat A MODERN FRENCH GRAMMAR IN TWO PARTS: I. ACCIDENCE.—II. SYNTAX. WITH VOCABULARIES, CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS, AND COPIOUS EXERCISES WITH FOOT-NOTES. NEWLY COMPOSED FROM THE STANDARD AUTHORS OF THE PRESENT DAY. A ¥ BY LEON CONTANSEAU, Professor of the French Language and Literature in the late Royal Indian Military “College, Addiscombe, and Examiner for Military and Civil Appointments ; Author of ‘The Practical French and English Dictionary’ &e. SEVENTEENTH EDITION. 4 LONDON : LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 1886. NCO452/6/ : ne Ce PC2109 CLs 1886 PREFACE. The first edition of this Grammar was drawn up with an especial view to the wants of my own pupils at Addiscombe, rather than to the requirements of the French class in public and private schools; and I was far from anticipating the more than favourable reception it soon met with, both from the press and the public. The sale of three large editions having made me more confident, I have been induced, now that Addiscombe College has been broken up, to remodel my book without departure from its original an, and to adapt it for more general use in English hools where French is taught. I need scarcely say that the point at which I have con- antly aimed in‘this as well as in the other works of my Course, is the utmost conciseness of expression consistent ith perspicuity, and the sedulous avoidance of all redun- ancy and repetition. No person who has mastered a reign tongue, or taught one with success, will dispute hat every rule must be learnt; and this once admitted, the ystem of ‘imitation and frequent repetition’ must be dis- arded, unless many hours are devoted to doing exercises every week for a much longer period than is sufficient to cquire a competent knowledge of French, by assigning a ngle hour a day to this essential branch of education. My Grammar, without having been appreciably enlarged r much increased in price, will now be found to contain, in 12! 93 iad iv PREFACE. addition to the Accidence and Syntax of the Frenck tongue, copious Vocabularies and Conversational Lessons} and numerous Exercises for translation from French intel English and from English into French, accompanied by: brief Notes pointing out from the earliest stage such real: difficulties as a judicious Professor would explain verbally} in setting the task ;—a feature which it is believed has} saved Masters who have adopted this Grammar some: trouble, as well as increased the utility of the book to selt- teachers. But in these Notes I have abstained in every instance from suggesting the application of any rule which a pupil ought to have passed and retained in his memory. The Syntax (written in. English) is followed in an APPENDIX by a few simple rules for the Genders of Nouns, and à comparison of some of the most usual French and English Idioms. A set of Miscellaneous Exercises are now first added, carefully graduated in difficulty, and intended for more advanced scholars,— I mean pupils who have fairly mastered all that precedes, and can read an easy French author with some facility. L. C. UPPER NoORWOOD : May 1863, eich alphabet; vowels, con- PAGE CONTENTS. Introduction. Vowels, nasal vowels . . . sonants . +... . . . . 1 | Diphthongs, consonants . . ccents : acute, grave, circum- Union of words . =... vi «i. 5 Sex . 2 | Elision of e unaccented, punc- he apostrophe, the cedilla, tuation, capital letters . . the diæresis, the s hori « 8 | Vocabulary and phrases . . ¥ PART LIL Accidence. lartsofspeech . + « » « 18 Indefinite adjectives , FICLE, definite © « «e . 18 Numeral adjectives . . The possessive cause. « « 19 | PRONOUNS; personal . . . i Indefinite article. . . . 20 Possessive pronouns . . ME Got 21 Demonstrative pronouns . Number . . . 22 Relative pronouns . . . ormation of the plural of Interrogative pronouns . substantives . 22 Indefinite pronouns . . . JECTIVE ; its concord with VERBS ; subject and ohjeet . thenoun . . 24 Active, passive, neuter, re-- Formation of the feminine flective, pn + M ofadjectives . . . . 24 Moods tt, Position of adjectives . 27 Tenses, numbers, persons . Formation of the degrees Conjugation of verbs; re- of comparison .* . . . 28 gular, irregular, defec- Possessive adjectives . . 30 tive -. +, . emonstrative adjectives . 22 Conjugation of Avoir . PAGE 5 9 10 11 | 83 24 a (SL, Em 41, A ; 43/ TT ce, 44 4 de Vey po ! 48 ol + 9 Ÿ 50 CA9! { ery 51 51 vi CONTENTS. PAGE PAGE Conjugation of Etre, 54 conjugation — Connaître, Use of Avoir and Etre as Conduire, Craindre . . 82 auxiliaries . . 56 Verbs used interrogatively | Conjugation of Avoir and and with a negation . 85 Être negatively, interro- Terminations of French gatively, and interroga- verbs . . 87 tively with a negation . 57 Formation of the tenses 88 Observations on the verbs Passive and neuter verbs . 90 used interrogatively, &e. 57 Reflective verbs . . . . 91 Regular Verbs; first con- Conjugation of a reflective jugation —Aimer . . . 62 verb negatively, interro- j Remarks on the orthogra- gatively, &e. . . . 93 phy of verbs . . . . 65 Impersonal verbs; Y avoir Model of the second con- and Falloir . . . . . 97 jugation— Finir . . . 67 Fuire used impersonally . 100 Remarks on the second Idiomatic tenses of verbs . 102 conjugation . . . 69 Irregular verbs . . . . 104 Division of the second con- PARTICIPLES . = 118 jugation — Sentir, Of, ADVERBS; their formation 119 onir . . 71 | PREPOSITIONS . . . 122 Model of the third conjuga- Repetition of the preposi- tion— Recevoir. . 75 tions + + à - … 108 Model of the fourth conju- CONJUNCTIONS . . . . . 124 gation — Rendre . . 79 | INTERJECTIONS . . . . . 126 Division of the fourth PART II. Syntax. Use and repetition of the Number of proper names 140 ARTICLE . - 129 Plural of compound sub- Use of the article with stantives … … -,- — 14H names of countries, fing: ADJECTIVE ; its agreement. 148 doms, &e. ivi» i» . 130 Position of adjectives . 145 Le, la, les, used with nouns Government of adjectives 14! of mse weight, num- Adjectives of dimension, À ber, & gle | Âc. - » + + nvoroutiôg Suppression. of the article 133-7 Comparatives and super- ; SussTANTI 7 ; difference of latives . :. x > 10t Tee TON construction with the Possessive adjectives, mon, English ; + 40 = +0138 ton, son, &c. oho 15 Compound substantives . 138 Le, la, les, used instead of Nouns collective . . 139 mon, ton, son, &c. . . 1 A CONTENTS, vil PAGE PAGE Demonstrative adjectives. 156 Subjunctive mood, its use Indefinite adjectives 156-9 199-203 Numeral adjectives . ‘160 | PARTICIPLES ; present . . 205 Personal PRONOUNSs ; of their Past; its agreement . . 206 position . . 161 | ADVERBS; proper use of Table showing the order of negative expressions . 212 the personal pronouns. 163 Distinction between pa Disjunctive personal pro- and point . . . 212 nouns. >. . 164 Omission of pas and point 213 Repetition of the personal Remarks on some adverbs 215 prenoun . 166 | PREPOSITIONS ; repetition of Use of the pronoun le, la, the prepositions . . . 217 les, when relating to a The English preposition noun or to an adjective 167 to, used before an in- Use of the pronoun so: 168 flnitive . . . 217 Useofenandy. . . . 169 Remarks on the use of Le, la, les, en, y, used in some prepositions : answering questions 170 avant, Deity dans, Idiomatic expressions used en, cher, £e. ; - . . 218 jnanswers. - . . . 172 English preposition on, Possessive pronouns; dif- used with dates . . 221 ference of construction CoNJUNCTIONS ; use of que. 222 with the English . . 174 English and French con- Demonstrative pronouns; junctions compared. . 223 ce instead of i/, elle, &c. 175 | Observations on some inter- C'est compared with il est 176 jections . . . 225 C’est,cesont. . 177 ‘Celui, celui-ci, celui-là, Ke. 178 Relative and interrogative pronouns . . 179 ie Difference between dont, de qui, duquel . . . 180 Indefinite pronouns; on, APPENDIX. gunn ie, chacun, au- Of the gender of nouns . 226 Bui, Do. + eee 183 | Observations on some sub VERBS; their agreement . 187 stantives of both gen- Government or direct ob- dors 8 293 | ject of verbs, its posi- Distinction in ; French de- tion . . . « 189 tween words which are | Government of passive expressed in the same DITS es prirent € rest a IR manner 1 Englteh ; as jx vousÀandc'estävousDE 191 di, duncer" Jour, Journée $ A — amener, apporter — Use of Avoir and Être marier, épouser, se ma- with other verbs . . 192 rier, ee. ee . - . 2239-38 Proper use of the tenses Modèle d’analyse : «7 amati- ofveabs . ., . . 193 cale. + . - 235 Distinction between the Conversational lessons . » 236 Imperfect and the Past Recapitulated exercises to be nite . vi . 194 retrarslated into French . 252 FREE EXERCISES. Familiar conversations . Biographical sketches: — Corneille— Racine — Mo- lière— La Fontaine — Boi- leau — Bossuet et Bourda- loue— Fénelon— Mussillon, Voltaire— J.-J. Rousseau — Montesquieu — Buffon — Chateaubriand . . . Miseellaneous exercises :— À lesson . Napoleon and the British sailor, >, sie CONTENTS. PAGE 276 279 284 284 The old man and his ass . Anecdote of Frederic IL. . Rural life in England. . Louis XI, King of France, and Philippe de Com- mines . The burning of Moscow . The Normans : Execution of Mary Stuart The family of Wakefield before the loss of their fortune. . The family of Wakefield after the loss of their fortune . . … ve PAGE 285 286 286 288 289 292 293 295 FRENCH GRAMMAR. INTRODUCTION. 1 The French Alphabet consists of twenty-five letters, viz. rADCDEFGHIJELMNOTYAQ BRSTUVXY Z These letters, by some grammarians, are named in French as follows : — fe, bé, cé, dé, é, effe, gé, ache, 1, Ji ka, elle, emme, enne, o, pe, qu, erre, esse, té, u, vé, ikse, i-grec, zéde. By others they are pronounced (e after each consonant being sounded as e in flattery) a, be, ce, de, e, fe, gue, he, i, je, ke, le, me, ne, 0, pe, ke, re, se, te, u, ve, kse, i-grec, ze.* There are two sorts of letters— vowels and consonants. 2 The vowels are a, e, i, 0, u, and y. They are so called because they form a perfect sound when uttered alone. 3 The other letters are called consonants, because they ae be sounded without the assistance of a vowel. The French language has no t : this letter is only found in words derived from the English or German languages ey can only be acquired hy the ear, and with the help of a good master, * The student must bear in mind that the true sounds cannot be conveyed by rules : B 7 2 FRENCH GRAMMAR. A SYLLABLE is a sound produced by one letter or more, uttered by a single articulation of the voice, and forming a vord or a part of a word; as lot law, a-mi friend. Hence we call monosyllable a word of one syllable; dissyllable a word of two; ¢risyllable a word of three; and polys yin a word of several syllables. The six vowels express only five sounds, à and y being pronounced alike; but as the French language has several other sounds, the deficiency of letters to convey them is partly supplied by marks called accents, and by various combinations of letters. - ACCENTS. 4 Accents generally alter the pronunciation of the vowels over which they are placed: some, however, serve to distin- guish words spelt alike, but of different signification. 5 There are three accents : the ACUTE (*), l’accent aigu ; the GRAVE (‘), l’accent grave ; and the CIRCUMFLEX ("), l’accent circonflexe. 6 The acute is placed over the vowel e only, and gives it an acute sound much resembling that of ¢ in English; as été, vérité, témérité. 7 The grave placed over e generally gives that vowel an open sound ; as père, succès, près. 8 The grave accent is also placed over à to, at a has là there to distinguish | la the où where them from } ou or dès from des of, from the 9 The circumflex is placed over the vowels âû, ê, 1, 6, à, =. gives them a broad and long sound ; as grâce, tête, gîte, dome, Slates The circumflex accent denotes the suppression of some letter for- merly used ; as dge, épilre, téte, which used to be written aage, épistre, teste, &c. The circumflex accent is also placed upon mir ripe mur a wall 7) pi tips . sur upon sur ste to distinguish po crû grown then cou à 78 believed dû due 2 du of or from the pi grazed | pu participle cf pouvoir INTRODUCTION. 8 APOSTROPHE. 10 The apostrophe, Papostrophe (’), denotes the suppres- sion or clision of the final vowel of a word placed before mother word beginning with a vowel or an % mute ; as ‘ami the friend, for le ami; l’ême the soul, for la âme ; homme the man, for le homme ; &c. The apostrophe is never used but to supply the place of a, e, à: it s done to avoid the harsh sound occasioned by the meeting of two rowels. a is suppressed in la when the next word begins with a vowel or ; mute, as l’âme, l’histoire, je Uestime. e is suppressed (1) in le, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que, when followed y a word beginning with a vowel or h mute ; as lami, l’homme, j'aime, e m’amuse, je t'invite, il s'occupe, c’est vous : but the elision of e in je nd ce does not take place when je and ce come after the verb; as ai-je té docile ? est-ce à vous ? (2) in lorsque, parceque, puisque, quoique, followed by il, elle, on, un, me; as lorsqu’il parle, puisqu'elle le veut, quoiqu’on dise. (8) in quelque, when it precedes un or autre; as quelqu’un, quel- w’autre. i is snppressed in the conjunction si if, before il, ls; as s’il vient, ils disent. NoTE.— a and e do not suffer elision in Ze, la, ce, de, que, before oui, huit, huitaine, uitieme, onze, onxi€me ; nor in le, la, after a verb inthe imperative mood, as le oui et 2 non ; le huit ou le onze du mois; amenez-la ici. CEDILLA. 11 The cedilla, lu cédille (ç), is placed under the ¢ when t precedes a, o, %, to give it the soft sound of s; as in fa- ade facade; leçon lesson ; reçu received, which are pro- rounced fasade, leson, resu. DIÆRESIS. 12 The diæresis, le tréma (”), consists of two dots placed ver the vowels e, 7, @#, to denote that they are not of the ame syllable as the vowel preceding, and must be pronounced eparately ; as in Noël Christmas, hair to hate, Saül, &c. HYPHEN. 13 The hyphen, le trait d’union or tiret (-), is used (1) fter a verb followed by one of the pronouns je, moi, tu, E 2 4 FRENCH GRAMMAR. toi, nous, vous, il, ils, elle, elles, le, la, les, lui, leurs, y, en, ce, ou ; as suis-je ? am 1?, dis-moi tell me, voyez-vous ? do you see ?, &c. (2) Between words so joined that they make but one; as chef-d'œuvre, arc-en-ciel ; between très and the following word, très-riche, très-souvent ; between même and the pronoun which precedes, moi-même, eux-mêmes; between the particles cà and là and the word which precedes or follows them, celui-ci, cet homme-là, ci-dessus, &c. (3) Be- tween the numerals from dix-sept to quatre-vingt-dix-neuf, except when et is placed between the numbers, as in vingt et un, &c. VOWELS. 14 VoweLs are either long or short. EXAMPLES. A is long in pâte dough It is short in patte paw E 5s béche spade > brèche breach I 5 gite a home » petite little 0 apbtre apostle o mode fashion U » Jie fue 2 hutte hut y between two vowels is sounded like two #s; as in moyen, joyeux, pronounced moi-ten, joi-ieux : also in pays, paysan, paysage, which are pronounced pai-is, pai-i-san, pai-i-sage, &c. y in all other cases has the sound of a single à; as yeux, style, mystère, jury. Beside the six vowels mentioned, there are sounds, produced by the combination of letters, that may be termed compound vowels ; such as ai as in mai May au as in autel altar éat , geût jay eau , beau fine aie ,, haie hedge eu , jeune young el ,, seigneur lord où, clon nail = NASAL VOWELS. 15 There is a class of sounds called nasal: they occur generally when zn or m is preceded by one or more vowels. They are the following : — an as in ange angel in as in vin wine am ,, ambition ambition im ,, ‘impôt tax en , enfant child ain , pain bread em ,, emploi office aim ,, faim hunger ANTRODUCTION. 5 en as in bon good un as in un one om , ombre shade um ,, parfum perfume eon ,, pigeon pigeon eun ,, jeun (a) fasting NoTE.— When #2 is followed by », and ém by 2, or whenever in and #m are imme. diately followed by a vowel or %z mute, the pronunciation is no longer nasal; as in inno sent, imenortel, inutile, tmiler, inhumain. DIPHTHONGS. 16 A diphthong is the coalition of two vowel sounds in the same syllable, which, though pronounced by the same impulse of the voice, conveys to the ear a double sound ; as eoi in bourgeois citizen ia 5 piano piano ian = viande meat ie » amitié friendship ie > rivière river ien > bien well ieu 5 lieu . place io i Siole vial ion > nation nation ad 5 poêle stove oi > loi law oie 2 Joie joy oin 2 soin car ou » out yes ue 2 ruelle alley ui i nuit night NoTE.— The termination ent of the third person plural of all French verbs has the sound of e unaccented, as ils aiment they love, ils lisent they read. Several adjectives and nouns in French are written exactly like the third person plural of some verbs, but the last syllable is differently pronounced : as, ent has the nasal sound in ent is mute in différent different ils diffèrent they differ excellent ezcellent ils excellent they excel négligent negligent ilsnégligent they meglcct président president ils president they preside il pressent ke foresees ils pressent they press. CONSONANTS. 17 Final consonants, with the exception, of c, f, {, r, are almost always silent ; as grand, petit, bas, doux, &c. b final is generally silent. It is heard in proper names, as Jacob, Joab, Job. e is sounded like Æ before a, o, u, as cabinet, copie, curieux ; like s before e, à y, as Cicéron, Cyclope ; like g in second and its derivatives. is silent in blanc, franc, flanc, banc, clerc, estomac, 6 FRENCH GRAMMAR. tabac, almanach, porc, broc, cric, croc, escroc, trone, jonc, échecs, ch is generally sounded like the English sk; as cheval horse, chien dog, chapeau hat, archevéque archbishop. ch has the sound of % before a consonant, and in most words derived from the Greek or Hebrew; as chrétien, Chersonèse, Chaldéen, archange, chaos, écho, &e. d is silent at the end of words, except in proper names; as David, and in sud (south). Final d takes the sound of ¢ when the next word begins with a vowel or 2 mute; as grand homme, which is pro- nounced gran-tomme. f final is generally heard, but silent in cerf, clef, chef- d'œuvre, œuf frais, bœuf gras, and in the plural œufs, bœufs, nerfs. It is sounded like v in neuf nine, before a vowel or k mute. g is sounded hard before a, o, u, as gâteau, gosier, guttural. g is soft and sounded like j before e¢, à, y, as genou, agir, gymnase. gn has a liquid sound, as in Champagne, vigne, compa- gnie ; except some words, as ignée, inexpugnable, stagnation, &ec., in which gz is sounded hard. gui is sounded gu-7 in aiguille, and its derivatives ai- guillon, aiguiser. his either mute, as in l’homme; or aspirated, as in le héros. There is no difference in the pronunciation of this letter, whether mute or aspirated. The latter merely pre- vents the elision of the e, or the union of the consonant which precedes it, as le héros, les héros, and not l’héros, les héros. No general rule can be laid down for distin- guishing the % aspirated from the À mute. h is aspirated in the following words and their deriva- tives :— Ha ! hableur (and its derivatives), hache (and its derivatives), hagard, haie, haillon, haine, haïr, halbran, halbrené, hâle, halener, haletant, halle, hallebarde, halte, hamac, hameau, hanche, hangar, hanneton, hanse, hanter, happer, haquenée, haquet, harangue (and its derivatives), laras, harasser, harceler, hardes, hardi (and its derivatives), harem, hareng, hargneux, haricot, haridelle, harnais, haro, harpe, harper, harpie, harpon, hasard (and its derivatives), hase, hate, hater (and iis derivatives), haubans, haubert, hausse-col, hausser, haut, haute (and its derivatives), hautbois, Havre, havresac, hennir, héraut, hére, hérisser, INTRODUCTION. 7 hérisson, hernie, héron, héros,* hersage, herse, herser, hétre, heurter, hiboux, hideux, hiérarchie, hisser, hobereau, hocher (and its derivatives), holà ! Hollande, Hollandais, homard, Hongrie, honnir, honte (and its derivacives), hoquet, hoqueton, horde, hors, hotte, Hottentot, houblon (and its derivatives), houille, houlette, houleux, houppe, houppelande, houspiller, houssaie, housse (and its derivatives), houssine, houssoir, houx, hoyau, huche, hucher, huées (and its derivatives), Huguenot, huit (and its derivatives), humer, hune, hunier, Huns, huppe (and its derivatives), hure, hurlement, hurler, hussard, hutte, hutter. J is always sounded like s in pleasure ; as in je I, jamais never. k is sounded as in English, and is found only in proper names, and in a few words derived from foreign languages. l final is generally heard, as in fil, civil, seul, moral, mortel, aïeul. l is silent at the end of baril, chenil, coutil, fusil, gril, outil, persil, sourcil, gentil (pretty), fils (son). l is liquid in fille, famille, soleil, paille, travail, réveil, gentilhomme, &c., pronounced nearly as gl in the word seraglio. l is not liquid in mille, ville, tranquille, &c.; nor in words beginning with ill, as illustre, illégal, illégitime, &c. There are two distinct ways of uttering this /. The first is to pro- nounce it as if followed by ?, as in the words billet, feuillage, billard, which are pronounced biliet, feuillage, billard. The second is to change /l into y, and pronounce biyet, feuiyage, biyard. These two pronunciations may be used in familiar conversation ; but the first is preferred for public speaking or reading. m final has generally the sound of n, as in faim, nom, parfum, &c.; except in many proper names, as in Abraham, Jérusalem, Amsterdam. m is sounded as» in nasal vowels, when followed by à or p ; as combien, empire. n is sounded as in English, but is often nasal. p final is generally silent, as in champ, camp, drap, coup, galop, sirop, trop, loup ; but is heard in cap, Gap, cep, Alep. p in the body of words is generally sounded ; but it is silent in baptême, baptiser, exempt, exempter, compte, compter, dompter, indomptable, prompt, corps, temps, sept and its derivatives. ph is sounded like f; as in philosophie, phosphore. # Though aspirated in héros, h is mute in héroïne, héroïque, héroïquement, héroïsmee 8 FRENCH GRAMMAR. q has generally the sound of k, as in quatre, question, quitter, quinze, acquérir. qu has the sound of cou in aquatique, aquarelle, équateur, équation, in-quarto, quadrupède, quadruple, loquacité, liqua- tion, &c. qu has the sound of ku before e or à, as in équestre, questeur, équitation, équiangle, équilatéral, quintuple, &c. r should invariably be heard at the beginning and in the body of words, as in rare, rouge, garçon. r final is generally heard, as in char, fer, hiver, amer, hier, enfer, agir, voir, trésor, futur, &c. The final 7 is silent (1) at the end of verbs ending in er, as aimer, parler, unless when followed by a vowel, as aller au combat, aimer à chanter: (2) in words of more - than one syllable ending in ier, ers, ger, and cher; as officier, volontiers, berger, boucher. s at the beginning of words has the same sound as in the English word soldier : sage, séjour, site, soldat, sucre. s has the sound of z between two vowels, and in some words after the syllable ¢ran, as maison, rose, oser, transi- tion, transaction; except in a few compound words, as in préséance, vraisemblance, parasol, &c. s final is silent in most words, as pas, bas, compas, amas, confus, &c.; in Christian names, Nicholas, Thomas, and Paris (city). But s final is heard in atlas, as, hélas, blocus, mars, jadis, gratis, vis, lis ; also in foreign proper names, Léonidas, Gil-Blas, Minos, Pâris, Argos, Vénus, &e. t has two sounds: the first as in the English word ractic—e.g. totalité, titre, tambour; the second as in the French syllable ci, patient, partial, ambition. ¢ not preceded by s or xis sounded like ¢ (1) in all words ending in tion ; as perfection, action: (2) in words ending in tial, tiel, tient, tieux; as martial, essentiel, patient, ambi- tieur: (3) in most words ending in tie; as primatie, démocratie, prophétie, impéritie, minutie, &c.; also in the verbs initier, balbutier, and in names of nations or persons: as Béotien, Égyptien, Vénitien, Domitien, Dioclétien. When s or æ precedes the ¢ it preserves its natural sound; as bastion, mixtion. th is always sounded like &; as thé, théâtre, Panthéon, Élisabeth. INTRODUCTION. 9 ¢ final is generally silent, but sounded in brut, dot, Sat, net, rapt, but, contact, correct, exact, direct, alert, subit, distinct, déficit. t is invariably silent in the conjunction ef; and also in Jésus-Christ, though it is heard in Christ used alone. w (double v) in French is sounded like » in German words, and like ou in English words, as Westphalie, Wur- temberg, pronounced Vestphalie, &c.; and Westminster, Windsor, pronounced Ouestminster, &c. 1 has the five following different sounds :— { | ks as in maxime, excuse, extrême 92 , exemple, examen, exiger ss ,, Bruxelles, Aix, soixante k ,, excellent, exciter, exception z , deuxième, sixième, dixième z is generally pronounced as in English, except in a few words ; as assez, chez, nez. It is heard at the end of words when followed by a vowel or 2 mute; as venez tei; allez checeux UNION OF WORDS. 18 In speaking and in reading, the final consonant of a word is generally sounded with the initial vowel (or % mute) of the next, when the two words are so connected with each other, that the second word is necessary to complete the sense. Before a vowel or £ mute s and x have the sound of z; d has the sound of ¢; g has the sound of k, and f that of v; as Pronounce les enfants the children lè-zenfants vous, avez you have vou-zavez dix, ans ten years di-zans grand, homme great man _ gran-tomme rang_ élevé elevated rank ran-kélevé neuf, heures nine hours neu-veures son _ âge his age son-nâge prenez__ en tahe some prenez-zen pensez__y think of it pensez-zy Nore. — The ¢ in the conjunction ef, and, is never joined with the following vowel. for the sake of distinguishing this conjunction from the word est :— T1 est, _anssi âgé et aussi grand que vous. B 3 10 FRENCH GRAMMAR. ELISION OF Æ UNACCENTED. 219 In conversation and in familiar reading, the e unac- cented is frequently omitted ; as Pronounce si je vous le donne if I give it you sij voul donne je vous remercie 1 thank you jvous rmercie venez avec moi come with me vnez avec moi un petit chien a little dog un pti chien PUNCTUATION. 20 Punctuation is used in writing to aistinguish one sentence from another, and to mark the different parts of à sentence. The French names of these grammatical signs are GY TFiqule, . . , = 0 Comm (3) Point et virgule . . . Semicolon () Deux points . . . . Colon GG) Joint . .. . . . Full stop, or period (?) Point d'interrogation . Note of interrogation (!) Point dexclamation Note of exclamation (...) Points de suspension . Notes of suspension Parenihése. . . .. . .Parenthesis (”) Guillewets.. . . . .. Inverted commas CAPITAL LETTERS. 21 Capital letters (les majuscules) are used at the begin- ning of every sentence in prose; of every verse in poetry ; of all Christian and proper names of persons, as Virgile, Pierre Corneille ; of places, as l’Europe, la France, Paris, le Louvre ; of people, as les Européens, les Anglais, les Parisiens ; of seas, rivers, mountains, &c., as la Méditerranée, le Rhin, les Alpes, &c. 11 VOCABULARY AND PHRASES TO BE USED AS EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION. pm min I. Du monde. Of the ‘world. La terre the earth Lair air Le feu fire L’eau water La mer the sea Le ciel the heavens Le soleil the sun La lune the moon Les étoiles the stars Une comète a comet XI. Les saisons, Le printemps spring L’été summer L’automne autumn L’hiver winter Le froid the cold La chaleur the heat Le vent the wind La pluie the rain La grêle the hail La gelée the frost La glace the ice La neige the snow XIX. Des jours, des mois Dimanche Sunday Lundi Monday Mardi Tuesday Mercredi Wednesday Jeudi Thursday Vendredi Friday Samedi Saturday Janvier January Février February Mars March Avril April Mai May Une montagne a mountain Un volean a volcano Une rivière a river Un lac a lake Une île an island La campagne the country Un village a village Une ville a town Un hameau a hamlet Un arbre a tree &c. The seasons, &c. Le verglas sleet Le dégel the thaw Le brouillard the fog Un nuage a cloud Le tonnerre the thunder La foudre the thunderbolt L’arc-en-ciel the rainbow Le jour the day La nuit the night La rosée the dew Beau temps fine weather Mauvais temps bad weather , &c. Of the days, months, &c. Juin June Juillet July Août August Septembre September Octobre October Novembre November Décembre December Noël Christmas Le jour de l’an New Year’s Day Le jour des Rois Twelfth Night Pâques Faster L’Ascension Ascension [2 FRENCH GRAMMAR. La Pentecôte Whitsunday La Saint-Jean Midsummer La Saint-Michel Michaelmas La Toussaint Allsaints IV. Des parties du corps. Parts of the body. La taille the figure La téte the head La figure 1. by oy the face Le teint the complexion Les cheveux the hair Le front the forehead Le cerveau the brai La tin ¢ brn Un œil an eye Les yeux the eyes La paupière the eyelid Le sourcil the eyebrow Les oreilles the ears Le nez the nose La joue the cheek La bouche the mouth Les lèvres the lips Le palais the palate La langue the tongue Les dents the teeth Le menton the chin Le cou the neck La gorge the throat V. De la toilette. La poitrine the chest Le cœur the heart L’estomace the stomach Les épaules the shoulders Le bras the arm Le coude the elbow Le poignet the wrist La main the hand Le doigt the finger Le pouce the thumb. » Les ongles the nails La jambe the leg Le genou the knee Le mollet the calf Le pied the foot La cheville du pied the ancle Le cou-de-pied the instep Le talon the heel Le dos the back Le côté the side Les côtes the ribs La peau the shin Les os the bones Le sang the blood Of dressing. (For Gentlemen.) Un chapeau a hat Une casquette a cap Un habit a coat Un gilet a waistcoat Une veste a jacket Un paletot a great-coat Un pantalon trowsers Une redingote a frock-coat Un manteau a cloak Une chemise a shirt Une cravate a neckeloth Un col a collar Des gants gloves Des bretelles braces Un sous-pied a strap Des bas stockings Des chaussettes socks Un mouchoir a hardker- chief Du linge linen Des bottes boots Des souliers shoes Des pantoufles slippers Des guêtres gaiters Un bouton a button - Des boutons de chemise studs Une épingle a pin Une montre a watch Un tire-botte a boot-jack Une canne a cane Une brosse a brush Un peigne a comb Un parapluie an umbrella i VOCABULARY AND PHRASES. 13 (For Ladies.) Une robe a dress Un chapeau a bonnet, a hat Un voile a veil Un ruban a ribbon Des plumes feathers De la dentelle lace Un bonnet a cap Un chile a shawl Un manteau a cloak Une écharpe a scarf Un fichu a neckerchief Des manchettes cuffs Des manches sleeves Une jupe a skirt Un corsage a body VI. Le déjeuner, le diner. = La salle à manger the dining- room La table the table Les chaises the chairs La nappe the table-cloth Une serviette a napkin Un couteau a knife Une fourchette a fork Une cuiller a spoon Une cuiller à soupe a soup-ladle Une cuiller à ragoût a gravy- spoon Une petite cuiller a tea-spoon Une assiette a plate Une tasse a cup Une sous-coupe a saucer Un coquetier an egg-cup Une théière a teapot Une cafetière a coffee-pot La salière the salt-cellar L’huilier the cruet-stand Le sucrier the sugar-basin Une soupière a soup-tureen Un saladier a salad-dish Un verre a glass Une carafe a decanter Une bouilloire a ketile Un porte-rôtie a toast-rack Une saucière a sauceboat Le sel the salt Le poivre the pepper Une fourrure a fur Un manchon a muff Un boa a boa Des bottines boots Une ceinture a sash, a belt Des volants flounces Un collier a necklace Des boucles d’oreilles, ear-rings Des bracelets bracelets Une bague a ring Une alliance a wedding-ring Une broche a brooch Une coiffure a head-dress Un éventail a fan Une ombrelle a parasol Breakfast, dinner. Le vinaigre the vinegar I huile the oil Du pain bread Du beurre butter Du lait milk De la crême cream Du thé tea Du café coffee Du chocolat chocolate Du cacao cocoa Des rôties toast Des tartines de beurre bread and butter Des petits-pains rolls Un œuf an egg Du jambon ham De la viande froide cold meat Du sucre sugar De la cassonade moist sugar La soupe ] Le potage f Du bœuf beef Du veau veal Du mouton mutton Un gigot a leg of mutton Un aloyau a sirloin Des côtelettes chops Une longe de veau a loin of veal Des biftecks beefsteaks Un ragoût a stew Le rôti the roast the soup 14 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Du pore pork De la volaille poultry Un poulet a chicken Une volaille a fowl Un canard a duck Un dindon a turkey Une oie a goose Une perdrix a partridge Une caille a quail Un faisan a pheasant Une bécasse a woodcock Une bécassine a snipe Des légumes vegetables Des pommes de terre potatoes Des petits-pois green peus Des haricots beans Des navets turnips Des carottes carrots Des asperges asparagus Des champignons mushrooms Des choux-fleurs cauliflowers Du poisson fish Du saumon salmon De la morue cod Une sole a sole Un merlan a whiting De l’anguille eel Un brochet a pike Une carpe a carp Une truite a trout Une tanche a tench Des anchois anchovies Des crevettes shrimps “ Un homard a lobster La salade the salad Le fromage the cheese Des petits-pâtés patties Un gâteau a cake Une tarte a tart Du dessert dessert Des pommes apples Des poires pears Des prunes plums Des pruneaux prunes Des cerises cherries Des raisins grapes Des amandes almonds Des abricots apricots Des péches peaches Des brugnons nectarines Des groseilles currants Des figues figs Des fraises strawberries Des framboises raspberries Des marrons chestnuts Un melon a melon Des oranges oranges Des avelines filberts Des noisettes nuts Des noix walnuts Des mires mulberries Des ananas pine-apples Du vin wine Du vin de Bordeaux Bordeaux, claret Du vin de Bourgogne Bur- gundy Du vin de Champagne cham- paign Du vin de Xéres sherry Du vin d’Oporto port De la bière beer Du cidre cider De l’eau-de-vie brandy VIT. De la maison. Of the house. Une maison a house La porte the door La porte de la rue the street door La porte de derrière the back door La porte-cochère the gate La serrure the lock La clé or clef the key Le portier ; Le ny de porter La loge du portier, the porter’s e La cour the yard L’escalier the staircase Les marches the steps La rampe the balustrade Le rez-de-chaussée the ground floor Le premier étage the first fleor Les fenêtres the windows Les vitres the panes Un balcon a balcony Les stores the blinds Des persiennes window-blinds VOCABULARY Des jalousies Venetian blinds Les volets the shutters Le marteau the knocker La cloche, la sonnette the bell Le vestibule the hall Le salon the drawing-room La salle à manger the dining- room Le boudoir the boudoir Une bibliothèque a library, a bookcase Une chambre a room Une chambre à coucher a bed- TOOM Un cabinet de toilette a dres- sing-room Une salle de bain a bath-room Un bureau an office Un cabinet a study Une mansarde an attic 1e ei the landing-place Le plancher the floor Le plafond the ceiling AND PHKASES. 15 Le toit the roof Le grenier the garret La cave the cellar La cuisine the kitchen Le fourneau the stove L’arrière-cuisine the back kitchen Un tourne-broche a turnspit, a jack L'office the pantry Un garde-manger a safe L’écurie the stable La remise the coach-house Une étable a cattle-shed Un puits à well Une pompe à pump Un jardin a garden Une serre a green-house Un cabinet à summer-house Un verger an orchard Un colombier a pigeon-house Une basse-cour a poultry-yard Un poulailler a poultry-house Un chenil a kennel. VIII. Des meubles. Furniture. Un canapé a sofa Un sofa a couch Une chaise a chair Un fauteuil ar arm-chair Une bergere an easy char Une console a console Un secrétaire a bureau Une table de jeu a card-table Un pupitre a writing-desk Une glace a looking-glass Une pendule a clock, a time- piece Une horloge a clock Des candélabres sconces Un chandelier a candlestick Les mouchettes the snuffers Un lustre a chandelier, a lustre Des vases vases Des tableaux paintings, pictures Des gravures engravings Une lampe a lamp Un tabouret a stool Un coussin a cushion Un tapis a carpet Ua tapis de table a table-cover Les rideaux the curtains Le garde-feu the fender La pelle the shovel Les pincettes the tongs Le fourgon the poker Le soufflet the bellows Un écran a fire-screen Un paravent a screen Du bois wood Du charbon coals Une boîte à charbon a coal- scuttle Un lit a bed Un bois de lit a bedstead Un matelas a mattress Des draps sheets Une couverture a blanket Un oreiller a pillow Un traversin a bolster Une commode « chest of drawers Une garde-robe a wardrobe Une armoire a cupboard Un lavabo a washstand Une psyché a cheval gluss IX. La famille the family Le grand-père the grandfather La grand’mère the grandmother Le père the futher La mère the mother Le fils the son La fille the daughter Le frère the brother La sœur the sister L’oncle the uncle La tante the aunt Le cousin the cousin La cousine the cousin Le cousin germain the first CONSUN Le neveu the nephew =. D'une école. Une pension Ne boarding- Un pensionnat | school Un externat a day-school Un professeur a professor Un maitre a master Une maîtresse a mistress Un sous-maître an assistant Une sous-maitresse a governess Un livre a book Une grammaire a grammar Un dictionnaire a dictionary Du papier paper Une plume a pen De l'encre ink Un encrier an inkstand Un canif a penknife Un crayon a pencil Une règle a ruler XI. Comment vous portez-vous ? Quel beau temps! Quel jour viendrez-vous? A quelle heure dinez-vous? La voiture est-elle prête ? Donhez-moi mon chapeau Où est votre manteau ? Il est dans le vestibule J'ai oublié mes bracelets Des degrés de parenté. FRENCH GRAMMAR. Of relatives. La niéce the niece Le mari the husband La femme the wife Les enfants the children Le petit-fils the grandson La petite fille the granddaugh- ter Le beau-frère the brother-in-law La belle-sœur the sister-in-law Le beau-fils the son-in-law La belle-fille the daughter-in-luw Le beau-père the father-in law La belle-mère the mother-in-law Les parents the relatives Le parrain the godfuther La marraine the godmother Of a school. Un cahier a copy-book Du papier-brouillard blotting- paper Un pupitre a desk Un élève a pupil Une leçon a lesson Un devoir a task Un thème an exercise Une faute a mistake Un pensum a task La lecture the reading La traduction the translation L’analyse parsing La cour the playground La classe the class, the class-roow La promenade the walk Les vacances the holidays La sortie the breaking up Questions et phrases diverses. How do you do ? What fine weather ! What day will you come? At what o'clock do you dine? Is the carriage ready ? Give me my hat Where is your cloak? It is in the hall 1 Lave forgotten my lracrlets VOCABULARY AND PHRASES. 17 Le diner est-il prét? Que prendrez-vous? Que vous offrirai-je ? Buvez-vous du vin ? Je préfère la bière Où prendrons-nous le café? Prenons-le dans le jardin Voulez-vous des gâteaux ? Ces dames sont au salon; voulez- vous descendre Avez-vous vu mon paletot ? Le voilà Où sont mes gants ? Ils sont sur votre lit Voilà votre éventail A quelle heure vous couchez-vous? A dix heures et demie Bonsoir, messieurs N’oubliez pas votre canne Fait-il beau temps? Il fait un beau clair de lune Il tombe de la grêle Entendez-vous le tonnerre? Voulez-vous un parapluie ? Non; le ciel est sans nuages Mes compliments chez vous Quand viendrez-vous nous voir ? La semaine prochaine Irez-vous à Paris l’été prochain ? Je ne sais pas Par quel convoi partez-vous ? Par le convoi de huit heures Avez-vous pris votre billet ? Oui; je l’ai dans ma bourse Votre bagage est-il enregistré ? Le garçon l’a fait enregistrer Partons ; j'entends la cloche Dépêchez-vous ! Is the dinner ready? What will you take? What shall I offer you? Do you drink wine? 1 prefer beer Where shall we take coffee ? Let us take it in the garden Will you have some cakes? The ladies are in the drawing- room ; come down Have you seen my great-coat ? There it is Where are my gloves ? They are on your bed Here is your fan At what o'clock do you go to bed At half-past ten o'clock Good night, gentlemen Do not forget your stick Is it fine weather ? The moon shines brightly It hails Do you hear the thunder ? Will you have an umbrella ? No ; the sky is cloudless My compliments at home When will you come to see us ? Next week Shall you go to Paris next sum- mer ? I do not know By which train do you go? By the eight o’clock train Have you taken your ticket ? Yes; I have it in my purse Is your luggage booked ? The waiter had it booked Let us go ; I hear the bell Make haste! 13 FRENCH GRAMMAR, Bart Z ACCIDENCE. 22 There are in French ten classes of words called parts of speech, namely, the article, the substantive, the adjective, the pronoun, the werb, the participle, the adverb, the pre- position, the conjunction, and the interjection. The first six are variable, and the four others invariable — ARTICLE. 23 The article is a word placed before substantives to specify the extent of their signification. The English definite article tke is expressed in French as follows : — le before a noun masec. in the opr | the la before a noun fem. in the singular les before all nouns in the plural & EXAMPLES. le mérite the merit les hommes the men la vertu the virtue les femmes the women les talents the talents les enfants the children The article may be modified in two different ways— by elision or by contraction. 24 The article le and la suffers elision (2 instead of le or la, § 10, p. 3) when the foilowing word begins with a vowel or an ~ mute, for the sake of euphony ; as l’ami the friend le ami l’âme the soul |. la âme l’homme fie man {10582407 le homme l'humanité humanity la humanité Mn ARTICLE. 19 25 When le or les is joined to the preposition de or à, they form the contracted or compound articles and are rendered as follows: — du before a noun m. beginning with a cons. or % asp. de 1a before a noun f. beginning with a cons. or h asp. | of, from de I’ before a noun beginning with a vowel or 2 mute the des before any noun in the plural au before a noun m. beginning with a cons. or À asp. à la before a noun f. beginning with a cons. or A asp. al’ before a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute aux before any noun in the plural to, at the 9» de les au >> à le du is a contraction of de le never used aux 93 à les EXAMPLES. € la mère, of the mother des plantes, of the plants du père, of the futher | de l’histoire, of the history de l’enfant, of the child des oiseaux, of the birds a la fille, fo the daughter aux frères, to the brothers à l’oncle, to the uncle aux sœurs, to the sisters au fils, to the son | a Pamitié, to the friendship 26 The English possessive case, expressed by ’s, as the king's palace, having no equivalent in French, is rendered thus: the palace of the king, le palais du roi. Such con- struction as the king's palace is altogether foreign to the genius of the French language. 27 In French, when we mention the name of the sub- stance of which a thing is made, the words are also ren- dered in an inverted manner, with de between the two nouns; as une montre d’or a gold watch une robe de soie a silk dress une plume d’acier à steel pen 28 Nouns used in a partitive sense, that is, expressing a portion of anything or a few, are preceded, according to gender and number, by the compound article du, de la, de l’, or des, expressed in English (if expressed at all) by 20 FRENCH GRAMMAR. some 1n affirmative, and by any in interrogative sentences; as donnez-moi du pain give me some bread nous avons de la viande we have meat avez-vous des livres ? have you any books ? 29 When a substantive taken in a partitive sense is preceded by an adjective, the preposition de is used instead of du, de la, des ; as il a de bon pain he has (some) good bread il a de bonne viande he has (some) good meat i. a de bons fruits he has (some) good fruits Un, une. À, cn. 30 The English indefinite article, @ or an, is rendered in French by un for the masculine, and une for the femi- nine ; as Masculine Feminine un homme, a man une femme, a woman d’un homme, of a man d’une femme, of a woman a un homme, to a man a une femme, to a woman Read and translate. Le père, la mère et les enfants sont malades. ZL'oncle, la tante et Jes nieces sont ici. L'hirondelle est lu messagère du printemps. Le fils et les filles de mon frère. Le printemps, l’été, l'automne et l'hiver sont les quatre saisons de l’année. Les portes de l'église sont fermées. Le clocher du village est blanc. Les rues de la ville sont très-larges. La vie de l’homme est courte. Il chante du matin au soir. J'ai parlé «u père, à la mère et aux fils. Il a donné son cheval au neveu, et sa maison aux nièces. Voici du thé, du café, du pain, du beurre, de la viande et des œufs. Le chapeau de mon cousin est dans la chambre. Le jardin de la reine est grand. Ma sœur a de jolies robes. Il a de beaux chevaux dans son écurie. J’ai un chien, des vaches et des moutons. Avez-vous une plume et un crayon ? La couronne d’un roiet d’une reine. J'ai parlé à unami. N.B.— The learner should parse a few words in each of the French exercises through- out the book. Exercise on the Article. The book! he table?” The pens’. The master! of the house’. The lesson® of the pupil’. The oaks® of the forest’. The tree! of the 1livre m. 2 tablef. 3 plumes pl. 4 maitre m * maison f. Sleçon f. 7 élève 7 8 chênes pl. 2 forêt f. 19 arbre m. re SUBSTANTIVE. 21 garden". The history! of the revolution. From the north to the south'!. Give’ the penknife! to the boy", and the pencil’ to the girl™, The general spoke” to the king”, to the queen”, and to the princes. The rays® of the sun“. The windows? of the room?. The lustre? of the stars?. The beauties® of (the) nature. The courage of the sol- diers®, The head® of a horse’. The door® of a carriage’. Give me® bread®, butter, eggs®, and water®. I have! some ink", and some pens’. (Here are**) pears**, peaches*, and cherries. He has* good bread'$, good meat®, and good apples®. I have fine fruits® in my garden. 11 jardin 72. 12 histoire f. 13 nord 7. M sud mm. 15 Donnez 16 canif m. !7 gargon m. 18 crayon mm, 19 fille f. 20 parla 2! roi m. 22reinef. 23 rayons pl. 2isoleil mm. 25 fenêtres pi 26 chambre f. 27 éclat m. 28 étoiles ai 29 beautés pl. 39 soldats pl. 31 têètef. 32 cheval mz. 33 portière f. 34 voiture f. $5 moi 36 pain m. 37 beurre 7m. 38 œufs pl. 39eauf. 49 J’ai 4! encref. 42 plumes pl. 43 Voici 44 poires 45 pêches “6 cerises 47 Ila “8 bon pain 49 bonne viande 59 bonnes pommes 5! beaux fruits, = SUBSTANTIVE. 31 A substantive or noun is a word which expresses the name of a person, or an object material, spiritual, or ideal ; such as homme man, cheval horse, arbre tree, vertu virtue, espérance hope. There are two sorts of nouns — common and proper. The noun common belongs to all persons or things of the same kind: homme man, livre book, soldat soldier, &c. The noun proper belongs only to one person or thing ; as Napoléon, Paris, les Alpes, &c. A noun common in the singular, which represents seve- ral persons or things, is called a noun collective ; as armée army, nation nation, flotte fleet. GENDER. 32 Gender marks the distinction of sex. The French language has but two genders : the masculine, as un homme a man, un lion a lion; and the feminine, as une femme a woman, une lionne a lioness. There is no neuter gender in French, and consequently the names of inanimate objects are either masculine or feminine ; as Masculine Femmine le soleil the sun la lune the moon le livre the book la ville the town Nore.—Being convinced that practice and dictionaries are the best, as it were, the only means to determine the gender of nouns of inanimate objects, I only give a few general rules for that purpose in the Appendix, which see. 22 FRENCH GRAMMAR. NUMBER. 33 There are two numbers—the singular, which denotes one object, as enfant the child, la plume the pen; the plural, which denotes more than one, as les enfants the children, les plumes the pens. ; ; VY Formation of the Plural of Substantives. 34 GENERAL Rurr.— The plural of substantives, and also of adjectives, is formed by adding an s to the singular; as Singular Plural le jardin the garden | les jardins the gardens la fleur the flower les fleurs the flowers 35 Substantives ending in s, æ, 2, in the singular, do not vary in the plural; as Singular Plural le héros the hero les héros the heroes la voix the voice les voix the voices le nez the nose les nez the noses 36 Substantives ending in au and eu take x in the plural; as Singular Plural le château the castle les châteaux the casiles le bateau the boat les bateaux the boats le jeu the game les jeux the games ExcEPT bleu, blue, which takes s in the plural. 37 Substantives ending in ou likewise take x in the plural; ns : .. Singular : Plural un bijou a jewel des bijoux jewels un joujou a toy des joujoux toys EXcePT clou nail, verrou bolt, and a few more, which take an s in the plural. 38 Substantives ending in al or ail in the singular, be- come plural by changing al or ail into aux ; as Singular Plural un cheval a forse des chevaux horses un canal a canal des canaux canals un travail a work des travaux works Except the following, Den take an s in the plural : bal, carnaval, chacal, détail, tventail, gouvernail, oped, , portail, régal, sérail, and travail, when signifying hor se- shoeing. Ail, garlic, makes in the plural ails and aulx. Détail, cattle, has no plurad; but bestiaux is often used for the plural of that word. SUBSTANTIVE. 23 39 The three words, ciel, æil, aïeul have a double plural; thus :— makes in the plural ciels for skies of pictures bed-testers, ceiling of a stone quarry, and cli- mate : l’Italie est sous un des plus beaux CIELS i cel de l’Europe. makes cieux in the sense of heaven: le royaume des CIEUX. makes yeux when signifying the sight; and makes ail œils in other cases: des œuLs-de-bœuf (oval windows). makes aïeuwæ when designating the ancestors: la gloire de ses ATEUX. aieulq makes aieuls when designating precisely the pa- ternal and maternal grandfather : ¢/ possède en- core ses deux AÏEULS. 40 Note 1.— All words of more than one syllable, ending in ant or ent, should always retain ¢ final in the plural, though it is omitted by some authors; thus write des enfants, and not des enfuns. The French Academy and the best modern grammarians retain that letter. 41 Note 2.—Some substantives have no plural, as la fuim, la soif, l’or, l’argent, la charité, and all the names of virtues and vices. Some others have no singular, as pleurs, ancêtres, mœurs, ténèbres, funé- railles, &e. Read and write the following in the plural. La maison, le toit, le livre, la loi, la chaleur, le bois, le fils, le progrès, la noix, le gaz, la croix, le feu, le chapeau, le gâteau, le verrou, le bijou, le général, l’hôpital, le soupirail, l’éventail, le bal, le ciel, un œil bleu, le genou, un tableau, l’aïeul, le remords. Exercise on the Plural of Substantives. The children! of the hamlet’. The palace® of the king* The palaces of the kings. ‘The voice of the child. The voices of heaven®. The castles’ of the queen®. The birds? of the fields". A blue" eye'”. She has’ blue eyes. The bolts! of the door'>. Have you! some nails’? He fell’® on his knees. Your sister” has fine jewels? The horses? are” ready*. The labours® of the country®. The hos- pital” of the town®. AIll® the hospitals are full®. I will give you® ! enfant pl. 2hameau mn. (h asp.) 3 palais m. 4roim. 5voixf Scielm. 7 châ- teau 7 8 reine f. 9 oiseau pl. 19 champp/. " bleu 12 œilm. 13 Ellea 14 verrou pl. 15 porte f. 16 Avez-vous !7 clou p/. 1811 tomba 19 genou pl. 20 Votre sœur “! bijou pl, 22 cheval pl. sont ? prêt pl_ travail pl. 2 campagne f. 27 hôpitas m. (hm.) ville i Z tous 20 plein pl. 31 Je vous donnerai 24 FRENCH GRAMMAR. some details” on this affair’. The kingdom® of heaven®. The heavens declare® the glory of God®. His* two grandfathers (are still alive!!). I have seen? the pictures at the Exhibition. 32 détail pl. 33 sur cette affaire 34 royaume m. 35 ciel m. 36 annoncent 37 gloire f. 38 Dieu 39 Ses 40 aieul pl. 4! sont encore en vie 42 J’ai vu 43 tableau pl. 44 Ex- nosition. —— ADJECTIVE. Adjectives are divided into five classes, viz. the quali- ficative, possessive, demonstrative, indefinite, and numeral. QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVES. The qualificative adjective is that which expresses some quality or modification of a substantive or noun; as sage, beau, poli, noir, rond, &e. 42 The adjective, in French, agrees in gender and num- ber with the substantive to which it relates; as un homme prudent a prudent man une femme prudente a prudent woman des hommes prudents prudent men des femmes prudentes prudent women Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives 43 GENERAL RULE.— The feminine of adjectives is gene- rally formed by adding an e mute to the masculine ; as ‘un homme savant a learned man une femme savante a learned woman il est poli he is polite elle est polie she is polite il est estimé he is esteemed elle est estimée she is esteemed un habit noir : a black cout une robe noire a black dress 44 SecoND RULE.— Adjectives ending in e mute in the masculine singular do not change for the feminine ; as il est aimable he is amiable elle est aimable she is amiable 45 Trmrp RuLE. — Adjectives ending in 2 become femi- nine by changing x into se; as Masc. Fem. heureux heureuse happy jalour jalouse Jealous ADJECTIVE. 25 46 Fourtm RULE. — Adjectives ending in f become feminine by changing f into ve; as Mase. Fem. ; vif vive quick neuf neuve new 47 FirrH RULE.— Adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, et, as, form their feminine by doubling the final consonant and adding an e mute to it; as Masc. Fem. cruel cruelle cruel pareil pareille like ancien ancienne ancient bon bonne good muet muetie dumb gras grasse Jat But complet, concret, discret, secret, inquiet, replet, make in the feminine complète, concrète, discrète, &c. 48 The following adjectives also become feminine by doubling the final consonant and adding e mute ; as épais épaisse = thick ‘ mat matte unpolished exprès expresse express nul nulle no, null gentil gentille pretty, nice paysan paysanne countrylike gros grosse big sot sotte silly 49 SixTH RULE.—Adjectives ending in eur (when derived from a participle present by changing ant into eur) change eur into euse; as Mase. Fem. trompeur trompeuse deceitful danseur danseuse dancer flatteur flatteuse Slattering EXxCEPTIONS. — Exécuteur, inspecteur, inventeur, persécuteur, make exécutrice, inspectrice, inventrice, persécutrice. Gouverneur, tutor, makes gouvernante, governess. 50 Words in teur (not derived from a participle) become feminine by changing eur into rice ; as Masc. Fem. acteur actrice actor accusateur accusatrice accuser créateur créatrice creator protecteur protectrice protector Words ending in érieur, such as supéricur, inférieur, and also majeur, mineur, facilleur, follow the general rule — that is, take e mute for the feminine. Cc 26 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 51 There are a few adjectives in eur, often used as nouns, which make their feminine in eresse; such as Masc. Fem. bailleur bailleresse lessor défendeur défenderesse defendant enchanteur enchanteresse enchanting, charmer pécheur pécheresse sinner vengeur vengeresse avenger 52 The following adjectives have two feminines : — Masc. Fem. chanteur singer chanteuse, cantatrice chasseur huntsman chasseuse, chasseresse 71a retailer débiteuse débiteur f Ai - | debtor débitrice w hs demandeuse demandeur he who asks f ge plaintiff | demanderesse vendeuse vendeur seller (law) venderesse 53 The following adjectives forin their feminine irregu- larly : — ic Fem. , Masc, ; a ] ; eau umeau Jumelle twin bel belle fine ve longue long bénin bénigne benign malin maligne malicious blanc blanche white mou mol oft caduc caduque decrepit mol he su coi coite still nouveau | Il dissous … dissoute dissolved nouvel NOUVELE Jew doux douce sweet public publique = public faux fausse Salse roux rousse red favori favorite Javourite sec sèche dry fou : : tiers tierce third fol folie Foolish traître traîtresse traitor frais fraîche JSresh ture turque Turkish franc franche frank vieux Fk vieille old grec grecque Greek vieil 54 Beau, fou, mou, nouveau, vieux, make bel, fol, mol, nouvel, vieil (and vieux occasionally), before a noun masculine singular beginning with a vowel or % mute ; as bel homme, fol espoir, nouvel habit, vieil ami. 55 Note 1.— The following words do not change in the feminine: ckétain nut- brown, dispos active, nimble, fat coxcomb ?émoin witness, imposteur impostor, auleur, prête, professeur, Écrivain, peintre, &c. NoTE 2. — The plural of adjectives is formed like that of substantives, and the rules givenat page 22 can be applied to adjectives, with only three exceptions — in fou, nou, and bleu, which take an s. ADJECTIVE. 27 POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 56 GENERAL RuLe.—Adjectives in French are generally placed after the substantives to which they relate; as un homme riche a rich man un livre utile a useful book un habit neuf a new coat 57 Many adjectives, expressing some moral qualities, may be nlaced either before or after the substantive; as un ami fidèle, or un fidèle ami. (See Syntax, page 145.) 58 This is one of the greatest difficulties of the language, aad the best way to avoid mistakes is to put the adjective after the substantive, unless it be one of the following, which usually precede, but only with the meanings here stated : — beau fine meilleur better bon good moindre less cher (affection) dear noir atrocious digne worthy nouveau other, new franc downright - parfuit consummate galant civil pauvre poor, paltry grand great petit little gros big propre own, very honnête honest pur sheer, plain jeune young saint holy joli pretty simple common, mere long long sot foolish maïgre scanty, poor triste mean, poor malhonnête dishonest véritable real mauvais bad vieux old wicked vilain ugl méchant { wretched vrai prio right Le jardin du chateau est petit. Le passage est très-étroit. Lesrues de la ville sont étroites. de jolies roses et de jolis dahlias. petit garçon est aussi sage que sa sœur. la duchesse n’est pas généreuse. et sur une mer orag'euse. femme est encore plus active. Ils sont bien contents. une robe neuve. C’est mon premier voyage, et m Read and translate. La porte de la ville est petite. Voici Votre sœur est très-sage. Le duc est généreux, mais Nous étions sous un ciel orageux, Le père de mon ami est très-actif, et sa Mon fils a un habit neuf, et ma fille Ce vin est bon, mais cette ‘bière n’est pas bonne ; le vin est frais, et la bière n’est pas fraiche. a première visite. Mes petits amis, 28 FRENCH GRAMMAR. soyez dociles et atlentifs. Donnez-moi un mouchoir blanc, une cravate blanche, et des gants blancs. Ce chemin est bien long. Quelle longue histoire ! Exercise on the Adjective. An elegant lady'. À pretty house? Idleness is fatal to health? A cultivated® country® is always’ admired®. An agreeable news’ is always well received!®. Your lesson! is easy!’ Her brother! is happy. His mother!® is happy. These! two ladies!” are graceful'S, The Romans'® were? courageous®. The stars? are very numerous?. Your sister“* is very attentive”. That? child” is quick® That woman® is revengeful®, I have new boots*!. The mutual® inclination of those** two children. The soul®* is immortal®. The tiger® is cruel, but°” the hyena® is still more cruel. The Christian religion is admirable. Read“! the ancient‘? history. That young girl® is dumb®. My son, be‘ good to others‘ A good girl is loved! by everybody*, Appearances'® are often deceitful® The protecting” hand’ of Providence. That actress®® has an enchanting® voice®’. Fear“ the avenging® thunderbolt®. He has a fine square room*. Your brother is a fine man® We saw® a fine bird yesterday. She has a white® gown®. He always wears® a white hat. This liquor®® is very sweet”. It is my favourite® song”. He made”! a long speech”, After a long absence’£ You have a new servant”* He has a new apprentice”. The earth™ is very dry””. The grass”° of the meadow”? is already thick®. She is very silly® Give him®? my old coat*, An old friend® is a great treasure®’. This woman® is very old. ! élégant dame f. 2joli maison f. 3 paresse f. 4 santé f. 5 cultivé 6 campagne f. 7 toujours 8 admiré 9 nouvelle f. !reçu !! leçon f. !2 facile !3 frére mm. !4 heureux 15 mère f. 16 Ces 17 dames f. pl. 18 gracieux 19 Romains 20 étaient 2! courageux 22 étoiles f. pl. 23 nombreux 24 Votre sceur f. 25 attentif 26 Cet 27 enfant m. 2 vif 29 femme f. 30 vindicatif 3! botte f. 32 mutuel 33 ces * âme f. 35 immortel 36 tigre me. 37 mais 38 hyène f. 39 encore 49 chrétien 4! Lisez 42 ancien 43 fille f. 44 muet 43sois 46envers autrui 47 aimé 48 tout le monde “9 apparences f. pl. 50 trompeur 5! protecteur 52 main f. 93 actrice f. 34 enchanteur 35 voix f. 56 Craignez 57 vengeur 58 foudre f. 39 chambre f. “homme m. 6! Nous vimea 62 oiseau m. 63 blanc 6t robe f. © porte 66 liqueur f. doux © C’est €9 favori 70 romance f. 7! fit 72 discours m. 73 absence f. 74 domestique m. 75 apprenti m. 76 terre f. 77 sec 78 herbe f. 79 prairie f. 80 épais 8! sot 82 Donnez-lui 83 vieux 4 habit sz. 8° ami mn. 86 trésor m. 87 femme f. FORMATION OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 59 There are three degrees of comparison,— the Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 60 The Positive is the adjective itself; as il est savant he is learned. 61 The Comparative is the adjective preceded by one of the words plus more, moins less, or aussi as; so that there DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 29 are three sorts of Comparatives, called of superiority, infe- riority, and equality. 62 The Comparative of superiority is formed by placing plus, mare, before the adjective, and que, than, after it; as il est plus savant que moi he is more learned than I 63 The Comparative of inferiority is formed by placing soins, less, before the adjective, and que, than, after it; also by putting a negation before the verb, si, so, before the adjective, and que, as, after it; as je suis moins heureux que vous I am less happy than you il n’est pas si riche que vous he is not so rich as you 64 The Comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi, as, before the adjective, and que, as, after it ; as il est aussi studieux que vous he is as studious as you 65 There are two sorts of Superlatives — the relative and the absolute. 66 The relative is formed by prefixing to the adjective plus or moins, preceded by le, la, les, or one of the posses- sive adjectives, mon, ton, son, &c. ; as le plus grand de vos fréres the tallest of your brothers la moins instruite de ses sœurs the least learned of his sisters mon plus cher ami my dearest friend 67 The absolute is formed by prefixing the adverb très, fort, bien, extrêmement, &c., to the adjective ; as Néron était très-cruel Nero was very cruel vous êtes bien bon you are very kind 68 THE FOLLOWING ARE IRREGULAR:— Positive Comparative Superlative bon good meilleur better le meilleur the best mauvais das LEE oF wansé le pire or the plus mauvais le plusmauvais | worst moindre or } less Ji: moindre 07 } the © petit little 1 petit le plus petit lenst 80 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 69 The three adjectives just mentioned must not be con- founded with the three corresponding adverbs: — bien well mieux better le mieux the best pis or A le pis or the ial badly plus mal f LOTSE Ve plus mal worst peu little moins /ess le moins the least Read and translate. Le Palais de Cristal est plus grand que le Palais de l'Industrie à Paris. La tour du château est plus haute que le clocher du village. Mon banquier est moins riche que le vôtre. L'’acier français n "est pas si estimé que l’acier anglais. Napoléon était aussi ambitieux qu’ Alexandre, Homère est le Plus grand poète grec, et Virgile le plus grand poète latin. Je suis le plus jeune de la famille. L’au- tomne est moins varié que le printemps. La reine Victoria est très-estimée et infiniment populaire. Le Parlement anglais est un des plus beaux monuments de Londres. Je suis bien content d’avoir vu le musée. Edimbourg est une fort belle ville, mais Glasgow est la ville /7« plus considérable de l’Ecosse. Votre vin est bon, mais le mien est encore meilleur. Les Zouaves sont les meilleurs soldats de l’armée française. Votre chambre est mauvaise, mais la mienne est encore pire (ou plus mauvaise). Ma cousine dessine bien, mais vous dessinez encore mieux. ; Exercise on the Degrees of Comparison. Your brother is (taller than’) you. His garden is larger” than mine*, You are! less attentive® than your sister. (She is not®) so old’? as you. Be® as good as your father. The tulip® is as beautiful’ as the rose. My horse! is as good as yours'>. London'® is the most populous't city! in!° Europe. This pear!” is better than that apple's. The best officers’ of the army®. That writing? is worse than yours. You sing? better than he? Of his” three sons the youngest draws* best. Of your three horses the grey? is the best. The climate of Italy® is not so warm as that® of Turkey®. The fog* was very thick®® here, but it was still thicker in?! London. He writes®® better than he speaks®. 1 grand que 2grand 3le mien 4 étes 5 attentif 6 Elle n’est pas 7 vieux B Sois 9 tulipe 10 beau !! cheval m. 12]e votre 13 Londres 14 peuplé 15 ville f. !€ de 17 poire f. 18 pomme f. 19 officiers 20 armée f. 2! écriture /. la vôtre Z chantez Jui 2 ses “fils 27 dessine 28 gris 29 Italie 30 celui 3! Furquie 32 brouillard m. 39 épais 3*à 35 écrit 36 ne parle POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 70 The possessive adjectives determine the signification POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE. 31 of substantives, by adding to them an idea of possession. They are the following : — SINGULAR PLURAL Masculine Feminine Masc. and Fem. mon ma mes my ton ta tes thy son sa ses Lis, her, its, one’s notre notre nes our votre votre vos your leur leur leurs their 71 The possessive adjectives, in French, agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and never (as in English) with the possessor: — son mari her husband son frère her brother sa femme his wife sa sœur his sister 72 Mon, ton, son are used instead of ma, ta, sa befors a noun feminine beginning with a vowei or an % mute, to avoid the hiatus caused by the meeting of two vowels ; as mon âme my soul | ton humeur thy temper ton épée thy sword | son amitié his friendship 73 Possessive adjectives must be repeated before every noun to which they relate ; as mon frère, ma sœur et mes amis | my brother, sister, and friends sont à la campagne are in the country / Read and translate. Jai laissé mon chapeau, ma canne et mes gants dans fa chambre. Ma sœur a reçu une lettre de son mari. Je regrette mon ancienne maison (f.). Connaissez-vous ses parents ? Votre fils, votre fille et vos deux domestiques sont arrivés. Ils ont vendu leur voiture et leurs chevaux. Nos armées ont combattu vaillamment. Charles a donné sa montre à son frè ere, et un bracelet à sa sœur. J’estime votre père, son amitié (f.) m'est précieuse. Bonjour, ma tante, comment vous portez-vous # ? Avez-vous vu mon amie (f.)? Non, mais j'ai parlé a son fils. Mon papier, ma plume et mes livres sont dans le tiroir. Ezercise on the Possessive Adjectives. My father! is gone?. Thy mother? is here. His house* is finished®, Her piano® is beautiful. Her children’ are obedient’, Our friend- ! père m. Zparti 3 mere f. 4 maisonf fini 6 piano m. 7 enfant pà S obéissart pl. 32 FRENCH GRAMMAR. ship® is constant'®. Our horses!! are in the stable”, Your book! is on' the table. Your pens'* (are not'°) good. I have seen!” your uncle, aunt'®, and cousins®. Their friends”! (will come”) to-morrow. Their conduct® is very good. His application is very great? Her imprudence caused” her loss?. His history? of England? is excel- lent. My harp” is in his room®. Where is my coat? She has seen“ her uncle and aunt. (Do you know®) her age? Every country“ has its customs, laws, and prejudices®. Samitiéf. 10 constant 11 cheval pl. !2 écurie f. !S livre m. 14 sur 15 plume pl. 16 nesont pas !7 vu 18oncle !9tante 2 cousines 2! ami pl. viendront 2 con- duite f. 74 grand 25 causa 26 perte f. 77 histoire f. 23 Angleterre 29 harpe / 30 chambre f. 3! vu 32 Savez-vous 33 pays 34 préjugés pl. DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 74 Demonstrative adjectives serve to denote and point out objects. Like other adjectives, they agree in gender and number, and must be repeated when there are several nouns in the sentence. They are :— Masc. Singular Fem. Singular Plural both genders ce before a cons. or À asp. this these cet before a vowel or h 5 ceute { that C81 those EXAMPLES. Masculine Feminine ce soldat that soldier cette fille that girl ce héros that hero cette école that school cet enfant that child cette herbe that grass cet homme that man ces dames those ladies ces garçons those boys ces armes those arms ces arbres those trees | ces herbes those herbs 75 ci and là (here and there) are sometimes added to the noun, to point it out more distinctly ; as ce livre-ci this book ce livre-la that book ces hommes-cà these men ces hommes-là those men Read and translate. Ce boulanger est très-ponctuel. Ce hameau est bien situé. Cet avocat est très-éloquent. Cette orange est amère. Cette gravure n’est pas chère. J'ai acheté ces deux volumes ce matin. Je n’aime pas ces abricots, ces pêches sont meilleures. Ce cheval- ci est plus fort que celui-là. Cette maison-là est très-humide. Cet homme-là n’est pas très-complaisant. Cette prairie-ci rap- portera plus que ce champ-id. Ces pommes-ci sont bonnes, mais 0 poires-/à sont encore meilleures. Ce jour-là nous étions à la chasse. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVE. 23 Exercise on the Demonstrative Adjectives. That general is young'. This tree? is very old. That man* says“ the truth®. This sword® is beautiful. That table is (quite new’). These books (belong tof) your father. These gloves® (do not fit!®). Those children are studious. Take? that apple’. Open'* that desk'®, and put’® those papers (in it”), Have you seen'® those gentle- men'®? ‘These matches” are damp”. That field?, this meadow®, and those trees are (to be sold). (Will you have”) this (75) bonnet? or that one? (75). This pen is better” than that (75). These boys and girls (74) are very attentive”. ! jeune Zarbrem. 3 homme m.(hmute) 4dit 5 vérité f. 6épée f. 7 toute neue 8 appartiennent à 9 gant pl. 19 ne vont pas 11 studieux !? Prenez 13 pomme f. uvrez pupitre 7%. !6 mettez !7 dedans 18 vu !9 messieurs 20 allumette pl. 2 humide 2 champ m. 2 prairie f. 2 à vendre 25 Voulez-vous 2 chapeau m. 27 meilleur f. 28 attentif m. pl. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 76 The indefinite adjectives refer to nouns spoken of in a general and indeterminate manner. They are — aucun; pas un no, not any, not one autre other certain certain, some chaque each, every même same, very, very same, self nul no plusieurs several, many quel what, which quelconque whatever quelque some, a few, whatever tel such, like tout all, every, each, any Read and translate. Aucun chemin de fleurs ne conduit à la gloire. Je (138) n’ai aucune inquiétude sur cette affaire. J'ai aperçu au salon un cer- tain homme que je n’aime pas. À certaines époques de l’année le fleuve inonde la campagne. Chaque climat a ses oiseaux bienfai- teurs. Les souverains ont partout les mêmes devoirs à remplir. C’est la même femme que j'ai vue ce matin. Votre père est la bonté même. Il est venu lui-même me remercier. Je l'ai vu Te jour même de son départ. Nul homme n’est heureux, nulle chose ne peut le rendre tel. Nos troupes ont livré. plusieurs combats. Je ne sais quel auteur a dit cela. Quelle heure est-il? Quelle résolution extraordinaire! Quels hommes! Une ligne quelconque étant donnée. Connaissez-vous güelque personne ici? J'ai quelques sous dans ma poche. Quelques efforts que vous fassiez, vous ne ca ; 34 FRENCH GRAMMAR. réussirez pas. Tel père, tel fils. Une telle conduite est indigne. Tous les habitants de la ville vinrent a sa rencontre. Zout homme doit faire son devoir. Faites-moi foute autre question, et j'y répondrai. Exercise on the Indefinite Adjectives. I have! no (178) idea” of his plan. Each volume cost? three francs, Have you still‘ the same house? We have the same friends. (I met him?) the very day of his death, Which day (will you come”)? What a woman! Eat? a few plums? and then a few grapes. All the soldiers had" a glass of brandy'2. He lost’ all his fortune in one day. Every man is subject! to death. (Give him'*) any other book, and he (will be'®) pleased!’ “1 Jen’ai Zidéef. 3 coûte 4 toujours 5 Je l’ai rencontré 6 mort /._7 viendrez-rous ? # Mangez ? prune p/. _!©raisinp/. !!eurent !eau-de-vie !* perdit 14 sujet 15 Donnez-lui 16 sera 17 content. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 77 The numeral adjectives are of two sorts—the car- dinal and the ordinal. 78 The cardinal are the numbers which denote quantity without marking the order; the ordinal are the numbers which denote the order or disposition of things. CARDINAL NUMBERS. 1 unm, une f. 19 dix-neuf 2 deux 20 vingt (gt mute) 3 trois 21 vingtetunfi) 4 quatre 22 vingt-deux 5 ecing® 23 vingt-trois 6 six* 24 vingt-quatre 2 ] 7 sept* 25 vingt-cinq 5% is sounded 8 huit* 26 vingt-six 9 neuf* 27 vingt-sept 10 dix* 28 vingt-huit 11 onze 29 vingt-neuf J 12 douze 30 trente 13 treize 31 trente et un 14 quatorze 32 trente-deux 15 quinze 33 trente-trois 16 seize 34 trente-quatre 17 dix-sept 35 trente-cinq 18 dix-huit 36 trente-six * The final consonant of these numbers is sounded before a vowel or A mute, or when used alone; but it is silent before a consonant or 4 aspirated. t From vingt to soirante the conjunction ct may or may not be used before un. nm 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. trente-sept trente-huit trente-neuf quarante quarante et un quarante-deux quarante-trois quarante-quatre quarante-cinq quarante-six quarante-sept quarante-huit quarante-neuf cinquante cinquante et un cinquante-deux cinquante-trois cinquante-quatre cinquante-cinq cinquante-six cinquante-sept cinquante-huit cinquante-neuf soixante soixante et un soixante-deux soixante-trois soixante-quatre soixante-cinq soixante-six soixante-sept soixante-huit soixante-neuf soixante-dix * soixante-onze soixante-douze soixante-treize soixante-quatorze soixante-quinze 76 v7 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 - 97 98 99 100 101 200 201 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 100,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 soixante-seize soixante-dix-sept soixante-dix-huit soixante-dix-neuf quatre-vingts quatre-vingt-un quatre-vingt-deux quatre-vingt-trois quatre-vingt-quatre quatre-vingt-cing quatre-vingt-six quatre-vingt-sept quatre-vingt-huit quatre-vingt-neuf quatre-vingt-dix quatre-vingt-onze quatre-vingt-douze quatre-vingt-treize quatre-vingt-quatorze quatre-vingt-quinze quatre-vingt-seize quatre-vingt-dix-sept quatre-vingt-dix-huit quatre-vingt-dix-neuf cent cent un, &c. deux cents deux cent un, &e. trois cents quatre cents cinq cents six cents sept cents huit cents neuf cents mille cent mille un million deux millions 79 Vingt and cent are the only numeral adjectives of the cardinal kind that may take an s when multiplied by a number; as quatre- vingts ; deux cents, &c. (See the Syntax, No. 329.) 80 Mille in expressing the date of the year is spat mil ; as Pan mil huit cent douze, the year 1812 (332). 83 The conj. and, used in English after the word hundred, is not expressed in French ; as one hundred and twenty— cent vingt. Nor is * Formerly, septante (70), octante (80), and nonante (90) were used instead of soixante-dix, quatre-vingts, and quatre-vingt-diæ. 36 FRENCH GRAMMAR. the word one generally expressed before /undred and thousand, as it is in English; as one hundred and ten—cent diz; one thousand eight hundred and sixty years—mille huit cent soirante ans. Jer 21 Qe 3e qe 5e 6° 7e 8e ge 10e [Ie +125 13° 14e 15e 16° 17° premier second deuxième } troisième quatrième cinquième sixième septième huitième neuvième dixième onzième douzième treizième quatorzième quinzième seizième dix-septième 82 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Tth 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th 18° 192 20€ 21° 922 30° 40° 50° 60° 70e 80e 90€ 100° 101€ 102e 200° 1000° dix-huitième dix-neuvième vingtième vingt et unième vingt-deuxième trentième quarantième cinquantième soixantième soixante-dixième quatre-vingtième quatre-vingt-dix- ième centième cent-unième cent-deuxième deux-centième millième 18h 19th 20th 21st 22nd 30th 40th 50th 60th 70th 80th 90th 100th 101st 102nd 200th 1000th The ordinal numbers become adverbs by adding ement or ment; as premièrement ; secondement or deuxièmement ; troisièmement, &c. No. 213.) (See There are three other sorts of numbers, called Fractional, Collective, and Proportional. demi demie } the half moitié le tiers the third le quart the fourth une couple a couple nne douzaine a dozen une demi-douzaine half a dozen une quinzaine about 15 une vingtaine … 20 une trentaine 83 Fractional. 84 Collective. » 80 les deux tiers two thirds les trois quarts three fourths un cinquième one fifth un sixième onz sixth " un septième, &c. one seventh une quarantaine about 40 une cinquantaine 5 50 une soixantaine > 60 une centaine » 100 un millier » 1000 des milliers thousands PRONOUNS. 37 85 Proportional. ie double the doubie le triple the treble le quadruple the fourfold le quintuple the fivefold le centuple, &e. the hundredfold Read and translate. (The numbers must be read and spelt in French.) Cet homme, qui gagne 3 schellings par jour, a 12 enfants, 7 garçons et 5 filles ; l'aîné a 18 ans et le plus jeune a 6 mois. Le 21 juin le soleil se lève à 3 heures 4% minutes du matin, et se couche à 8 heures 18 minutes du soir. Il est déjà 6 heures moins un quart, et je dois partir à 9 heures et demie. Au ac avril 1859, l’armée française se composait de 568,000 hommes. La France est divisée en 89 départements, 373 arrondissements, 2,842 cantons, et 39,381 communes. L'armée a perdu 80 ofliciers et 900 hommes. J'ai besoin d’une demi-douzaine de crayons et d’une vingtaine de plumes. Exercise on the Numeral Adjectives. My cousin has five horses, eight dogs, and two carriages’. Napoleon died? (on the?) Saturday, the fifth of May, one thousand eight hundred and twenty-one, at seven o'clock? (in the?) morning. That bridge has seven archesS, and is” six hundred feet long? and eighty feet wide’. I want! about fifty pounds to!! buy a horse. I have paid? thirty-two francs and eighty centimes for forty pounds and a half of sugar. 1 voiture pZ. Z mourut 3le 4heurepl 3du Sarchepl. 7a Sdelongueur 9 de largeur 10 Ii me faut 1! pour 12 payé. deere PRONOUNS. Pronouns are words used instead of nouns to avoid repetition. There are five sorts of pronouns—the personal, posses- sive, demonstrative, relative, and indefinite. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 86 Personal pronouns are used instead of the names of persons and things. They are divided into conjunctive and disjunctive. 87 The conjunctive personal pronouns are those that are placed immediately before or immediately after the verb ; as JE lis ; parles-TU ? IL vient ; chantez-vous ? Te vl TTP PN AR YN owt. @® FRENCH GRAMMAR. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns, SuBsecT (112) Ossecr (113) : or / he = Nominative case Direct (115) Indirect (116) je 7 me me me tome tu“ , hou te* thee te* to thee il he, it le him, it lui J to him, to elle she, it la her, it 5 \ her, toit nous we nous us nous tous vous you vous you vous to you ils, elles they les them “leur to them se (accusative or dative) is used in reflective verbs for one’s self, himself, herself, itself, themselves, &c. En, of or from it, them, that, &e. (See the Syntax, p. 169.) ¥, to or at it, them, that; there, &c. (See the Syntax, p. 169.) 88 The conjunctive pronoun, used as subject, is placed immediately before the verb in affirmative or negative sentences, and immediately after it in asking questions; as je parle français I speak French il ne parle pas anglais he does not speak English avez-vous de l’argent ? have you any money ? 89 The conjunctive pronoun, used as object, is placed before the governing verb, except in the imperative used affirmatively (90) ; as - votre père me connaît your father knows me je le vois tous les jours I see him every day mon frére vous attend my brother expects you il nous écrira he will write to us 90 Conjunctive pronouns, used as objects, are placed after the verb, when the verb is in the imperative, used affirmatively; and then the pronouns moi and éoi, which are disjunctive (93), are used instead of me and te; as remerciez-la thank her envoyez-lui ma lettre send him my letter donnez-moi du vin give me wine 91 * The expressions fu, fot, te, as well as ton (70), le tien, &c. (95), are fre- quently used in familiar language, as when parents address their children, and also children their parents, and generally when relatives and intimate friends converse or correspond with cach other, or when speaking to inferior persons; as Papa, VEUX-TU me donner une montre ?—Je TE la donnerai si TU ES sage.—DIs-moi vm petit garçom &9-TU vu Mon chien? PRONOUNS. ; 39 ~ 92 But when the imperative is negative, the pronoun object precedes the verb ; as ; ne la remerciez pas do not thank her ne lui envoyez pas ma lettre do not send him my letter ne me donnez pas de vin do not give me wine 93 The disjunctive personal pronouns are those that are separated from the verb by a preposition or a conjunc- tion, or that stand alone; as venez avec LUI; qui est la? MOL Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. ( moi 7 or me toi* thou > thee Subject | lui he, it > him, àt and elle she, it 5 her, it Object neus we i us vous you > you eux, elles they = them Disjunctive Pronouns used with MEME. moi-méme myself nous-mêmes ourselves toi-même thyself vous-méme yourself lui-même himself vous-mêmes yourselves elle-même herself eux-mêmes themselves soi-même one’s self elles-mémes themselves 94 Disjunctive pronouns are generally used for the sake of emphasis or contrast; as qui a fait cela? lui who did that? he moi, je ne le crois pas I do not believe it il est parti avec eux he is gone with them elle est plus riche que to: she is richer than thou lui et moi nous marcherons he and T will walk N.B — For further rules on the Conjunctive and Disjunctive Pronouns, sce the Syntax (334). Read and translate. Je connais cet homme. 7% étudies ta legon. I7 travaille avee application. Elle n’est pas jolie. Nous irons au spectacle. Avez- vous vu l’éclipse de soleil? Ils sont tous partis. Sont-elles arri- vées? Je les ai vues hier. Nous vous montrerons le chemin. Vous lui direz que je lui écrirai demain. 11 me donne beaucoup d'ouvrage. Rendez-moi l’argent que je vous ai prêté. Ne me trompez pas, car je le saurais. Je ne vous trompe pas. Si vous le voyez demain, parlez-lui de moi. Je luien parlerai. Parlez-vous de 40 FRENCH GRAMMAR. la guerre? Oui, nous en parlons. II vous prop.se cet arrange- ment, y consentez-vous ? Je n’y consentiral jamais. Nous irons avec ui. Mon frère est plus fort que moi, mais je suis plus savant que lui. Moi je suis Français, mais lui est Italien. Je lui ai écrit moi-même. Allez-y vous-même. Exercise on the Personal Pronouns. CONJUNCTIVE (87).—I read! every day? Thou speakest® too fast! He sings® a song®. She plays” the® piano. We walk® slowly. You see!° the sea. They work! ten hours. Are they pleased’? They (.f-) will come'* this evening'*. Where is he? Give! him his hat, She will write!® to you. He spoke!” to them. Lend'® us that book. I like! it. He saw? you. We eat? them. I consent to it. We speak of it. DISJUNCTIVE (93).—(It is not) I; itishe. You are more learned than they. He is taller than I. Who knocks? at the door? (It is“) he. (Will you?) sing with me? Is this book for me or for her? I alone” could”° do it. Go“ with them. He wrote® the letter himself. Speak to*? him and not®® to her. We make** them ourselves. I have heard® him myself. His wife is German, but he is a Frenchman®. 1 lis 2 tous les jours 3 parles 4 vite 5chante 6 romance f. 7 joue 8du 9 marchona 10 voyez !! travaillent 12 content pl. !S viendront !4 soir m. !5 Donnez 16 écrira 17 parla 18 Prétez !9 aime Z vit 2! mangeons 72 consens 73 Ce n’est pas 24 savant 25 frappe 26 C’est 27 Voulez-vous 28 seul 29 ai pu 30 Allez 3! écrivit 32 Parlez 2 et non pas 34 faisons 35 entendu 36 Français POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 95 Possessive pronouns are used instead of nouns already mentioned, and agree in gender and number with those nouns. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS ARE :— SINGULAR PLURAL Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. le mien la mienne les miens les miennes mine le tien la tienne les tiens les tiennes thine le sien la sienne les siens les siennes his, hers, its le nôtre la nôtre les nôtres les nôtres ours le votre la votre les vôtres les vôtres yours le leur la leur les leurs les leurs theirs The article le, la, les, which precedes these pronouns, when accompanied by de or a, becomes du, de la, des, and au, a la, aux (25); as du mien de la mienne] ; des miens des miennes | of. wine; Se. au mien ala mienne J mine, §e. aux miens aux miennes PRONOUNS. 41 Read and translate. Ce n'est pas votre avis, mais c’est le mien. Il a mangé sa por- tion et la mienne. Ce n’est pas mon chapeau, c’est le tien. Vos affaires sont les miennes. J'ai aperçu sa sœur et la tienne. Voici votre lit et voilà le sien. Ma maison et la sienne sont neuves. Montrez-lui vos bijoux, elle vous montrera les siens. Votre armée est plus forte que la nôtre. Votre pays est plus peuplé que le nôtre. Vous avez vos raisons, et nous les nôtres. Nos bœufs sont blancs, les vôtres sont noirs. Notre musique est bien meil- leure que la leur. Votre théâtre est-il plus grand que le leur? Mes amis sont aussi les leurs. Je préfère son cheval au tien. Parlez-vous de son père ou du mien? Je préfère ma maison à la sienne. Exercise on the Possessive Pronouns. Your book! and mine. His pen? and mine. My gun® and thine. Their horses* and ours. Our house® and theirs. My hat® and his. Her mother is older? than® yours. Your sister is younger® than hers. His carriage! is lighter! than thine. My father, thine, and hers, are good friends. He spoke? to your cousin'® and to mine. The conduct of your brother, of his, and of mine, is praiseworthy'. My friends and his are gone'®. Your daughters'” and mine are here. His dogs'® are stronger'° than yours. My relations’ and theirs are friends. Have you written? to your father and to mine? I have spoken to his mother and to yours. We have spoken of your house and of his. 1 livre m. 2 plume f. 3 fusil m. 4 cheval pl. 5 maison f. © chapeau m. 7 vieux S que 9 jeune 10voituref. !! léger 12 parla 13 cousinef. !4 conduitef. 19 louable 16 parti pl. !7 fille pl. 18 chien m. pl. 19 fort pl. 20 parents 2! écrit 22 parlé. p Pp DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 96 Demonstrative pronouns serve to denote and point out the persons or things which they represent. They are the following : — SINGULAR PLURAL Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. ce it, that ceci this cela (or ga, which is familiar) . that celui celle ceux celles that, those celui-ci celle-ci — ceux-ci celles-ci = this, these celui-là celle-]IX ceux-là = celles-là = that, those 97 CE, it or that, before or after the verb étre, to be, is used 42 FRENCH GRAMMAR. for the person or the thing we wish to designate or point out; it is often followed by qui, que, or dont ; as ce n’est pas moi it is not I qui est-ce? who is it? ce n’est pas vrai it is not true ce que je vois what I see what pleases me ce qui me plait that of which you speak ce dont vous parlez 98 Crcr this, CELA (or GA) that, refer to an object under stood ; as donnez-moi ceci prenez cela cect est bon this is good cela est mauvais that is bad give me this take that 99 CELUI, CELLE, that, and CEUX, CELLES, those, are always followed by de, or by one of the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, à qui, &c.; as mon fils et ce/ui de mon ami ma plume et celle de mon frère mes gants et ceux de ma sœur my son and that of my friend my pen and that of my brother my gloves and those of my sister celui qui est devant vous that which is before you ceux que j'ai achetés those which I bought 100 CELUI, CELLE, CEUX, CELLES, before qui, que, dont, frequently signify ke or him, she or her, they or them; as he who speaks she whom I see - they who sing celui qui parle celle que je vois ceux qui chantent 101 Opserve. — The particles cà and la (75) are often placed after celui, celle, ceux, celles, to indicate more par- ticularly persons and things, or to denote the nearest or farthest in point of place or time ; as take this or that these are good those are bad I prefer that one to this prenez celui-ci ou celui-là ceux-ci sont bons ceux-là sont mauvais je préfère celle-là à celle-ci 102 Nore.— This is or these are may be rendered in French by voici, and that is or those are by voilà ; as voici un beau cheval zoilà une belle voiture Joici ce que j'ai appris this is a fine horse that is a pretty carriage this is what I heard PRONOUNS. 43 Read and translate. Est-ce vous qui avez fait cela? Non, ce n’est pas moi, c’est lui. Je sais ce qui le tourmente. Je vous dirai ce que j'aurai vu, et vous me direz ce que vous en pensez. Ceci est bien fait, mais cela est détestable. Ce chien n’est pas celui que j'ai acheté. Donnez- moi celle qui est dans la chambre. Votre fusil est très-bon, mais celui de Charles est meilleur. Celui dont je parle est très-cher. La meilleure leçon est celle des exemples. De tous ces tableaux celui-là est le plus remarquable. Voici deux jolies robes, laquelle voulez-vous ; celle-ci ou celle-là? Ceux-ci aiment le travail, ceux- là les plaisirs. Voici une belle pendule; où l’avez-vous achetée ? J'ai acheté celle-ci à Paris, et celle-là à Londres. Voilà ce que mon chien a trouvé. Voici ce que je pense. Ces chevaux-ci sont moins forts que ceux-là. De ces deux montres, voici celle qui est pour votre fils. Celui à qui j'ai parlé, est un général distingué. Exercise on the Demonstrative Pronouns. It is my advice. It was? a great misfortune* for them*. It (will be*) a pleasure (to mef). This is better’ than that. Why? have you done? that? That (must be'®) very beautiful. The climate! of Italy! is much" warmer than that of England. My watch'® and that of my sister. These horses (belong to me?) ; these come! from Spain", those from Germany”. Of those two castles’!, this beiongs to my father, and that to my uncle. What you say” is reasonable, Which of these two swords? (will you have?!) ; this or that? That which is on? the table. He who is idle is not liked by? his masters. They who work? well are rewarded®. This is what I like”. That is what I have found® on the road. Of these three horses, this is the one which I prefer®!, l avis. Zfut 3malheurm. *poureux 5sera S6pourmoi 7 mieux 8 Pour- quoi 9 fait 10 doit étre !! climat mm. 12 d’Italie !3 beaucoup !4*chaud !5 d’Angle- terre !6montref. 17 m’appartiennent 18 viennent 9 d’Espagne 2 d’Allemagne 21 chateau pl. 22 vous dites 23 épées f. 2 voulez-vous 2° sur 26 de 27 travaillent 28 récompensés 29 aime 20 trouvé ©! préfeére. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 103 The relative pronoun relates to a substantive or pronoun which precedes, and which is called its antecedent. They are the following : — qui (nom.) who, which, that de qui (speaking of persons only) whose, of or from whom dont (of persons and things) of or from whom or which a qui (of persons only) to whom que (ace.) whom, which, that quoi what où where, in which lequel, laquelle, &c. who, whom, which 14 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 102 Qui, que, and dont are used for both genders and numbers of all sorts of objects; as l’homme qu: parle the man who speaks la lettre qui est arrivée the letter which has arrived l’enfant que je vois the child whom I see ies lois que nous observons the laws which we observe l’officier dont vous parlez the officer of whom you speak la maison dont je parle the house of which I speak les enfants qui obéissent the children who obey 105 Lequel applies to persons and things. It changes according to the gender and number of the noun to which it relates, and is thus declined : — SINGULAR PLURAL Masc. Fem. Masc. lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles duquel de laquelle desquels desquelles auquel à laquelle auxquels auxquelles 106 Qui after a preposition, as de qui, à qui, pour qui, applies to persons only ; duquel, auquel, &c., must alone be used when applied to things ; as l’homme à qui (or auquel) j'ai the man to whom I have spoken parlé la lettre à laquelle (not à qui) j'ai the letter to which I have replied répondu la dame avec qui (or avec laquelle) the lady with whom you came vous êtes venu la plume avec laquelle (not avec the pen with which I write qui) j'écris INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 107 The interrogative pronouns are the following : — te} qui? (nom.) or qui est-ce qui? who ? de qui? à qui? &c. qui (acc.) or qui est-ce que? whom ? que or qu’est-ce que? what ? de quoi? à quoi? of what? to what ? lequel? m. s., laquelle? f. s. 3 lesquels? m. pl., lesquelles? f at} whick? duquel ? of which? &c., auquel ? to which? &c. quel? m., quelle ? f., &ec., which? or what? De qui, à qui, as interrogative pronouns, refer to per- sons only, que, quot, de quoi, à quoi, &c., refer to things. and lequel, duquel, auquel, quel, &c., refer to both persons and things. PRONOUNS. 45 EXAMPLES. qui (or qui est-ve qui) l’a fait? who did àt ? qui voyez-vous ? (or qui est-ce whom do you see? aue vous Voyez ?) de qui parle-t-il ? of whom does he spea*? que dites-vous? (or qu'est-ce what do you say ? que vous dites ?) de quoi parlez-vous? what do you speak of ? lequel préférez-vous ? which do you prefer ? quel auteur lisez-vous ? what author do you read ? 108 À qui, in a question formed with être, in the sense of to belong, means whose ; as à qui est ce livre ? whose book is this? à qui sont ces gants ? whose gloves are these ? 109 Relative pronouns must always be expressed in French, though omitted in English; as the horse I bought le cheval que j'ai acheté the book you are reading le livre que vous lisez Read and translate. C’est le soleil qui nous éclaire, et que mûrit les fruits de la terre. C’est le facteur qui m’a apporté cette nouvelle. Connaissez-vous les personnes qui étaient dans la loge de la reine? Non, qui sont- elles? Ce château que vous voyez sur la montagne est très-ancien. La place dont vous me parliez est déjà prise. À qui avez-vous donné ce beau bouquet? À quoi pensez-vous de partir si tard ? Je ne sais à laquelle de ces deux couleurs donner la préférence. Qui est-ce qui a inventé l’imprimerie? De qui attendez-vous une lettre? Qui attendez-vous ce soir? Que faites-vous là? Avec quoi avez-vous ouvert la porte de ma chambre? Qu'est-ce qui vous empêche de venir demain? Pour qui traduisez-vous cet ouvrage? À qui appartient-il ? “3xercise on the Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. RELATIVE Pro. (LO3).— The gentleman! who (is speaking”) is my friend. ‘The ladies* whom we expect* are very amiable”. The lion which roars® in the mountain. The wolf which howls? in the forest. The roses which are in your garden are beautiful. The horse of which I speak® is lame®. The man whose arm'® has been cut off’! 1 monsieur 2 parle 3dame pl. 4attendons 5aimablepl Srugit 7 hurle B parle 9 boiteux 10 bras m. ! coupé 2 ; 5 FRENCH GRAMMAR. erson to whom I give lessons is absent. The persons with whom e spent’? the evening'®. The house to which I give the pre- ference. The errors into which he (has fallen'!). The town in which he lives' is very small’. The dictionary with which I translate’ my ~ exercise® is very good. INTERROGATIVE Pro. (267).— Which of these two books (will you have?) ? What (will they say“)? Who (will come”) with me? In what have I offended”? you? Whom (do you call)? What (do they speak?) of? Who makes that noise? What have you done? What is it? Which books will you buy? What do you think? of him? To whom will you send” this parcel? Who has written this letter ? From? whom have you received that present? The ring® (109) you (gave me”) is broken“. The books I bought™ yesterday are interesting”, 32 passé 13 soirée !4est tombé 15 demeure 6 petit !7 je traduis 18 thème m, 19 voulez-vous ? 2 diront-ils 2! viendra 22 offensé 2 appelez-vous 21 parlent-ils 2 acheterez-vous ? 26 pensez-vous 27 enverrez-vous? > ] 23 De 2 baguef. 39 m'avez donné f. 3! casséf. 32 j'ai acheté pZ. 33 intéressant. pi INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 42 37 110 The indefinite pronouns are words which denote persons and things in a vague and general manner ; as aucun any, (with ne) none autrui others, other people chacun every one, each lun et l’autre l’unlautre l'an ou l'autre ni l’un ni l’autre nul on personne plusieurs quelqu'un quiconque tout both one another, each other either neither no one, nobody one, people, they, we nobody, (interrog.) anybody several, many somebody, some one whoever, any one who everything, all Read and translate. Ces chandeliers colitent 20 francs chacun. plaisir où il le trouve. Avez-vous vu mes chiens? Non, je n’en ai vu aucun. On dit que Sébastopol est pris. On croit que nous aurons la guerre. Il n'y a personne dans la chambre. Personne a-t-il jamais été content de son sort? Quiconque n’observera pas cette loi sera puni. Quelqu'un a-t-il jamais douté sérieusement de l’existence de Dieu ? Ne faites pas à autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vous fit. Plusieurs pensent que la lune est habitée. Tout a péri au milieu des flammes. Nul n’est exempt Chacun prend son VERBS. d'erreur. Ces deux hommes se craignent l'un l’autre. Ils sc morts l'un et l’autre. Ni l’un ni l’autre n’est venu. Ni l'unn l'autre n’ont réussi. : Exercise on the Indefinite Pronouns. They say! that” he is ill’. People think* he is dead’. Whoever is honest is always esteemed’. Some one (told me”) that he was gone® Every one (must do?) his duty!®. Each of them'! shall have’? a prize. Do good to'® others. Never speak ill! of others, Nobody is more amiable than she is. No one is satisfied with!® his fortune. 1 know!® nobody so learned!” (as he is'®). Those two great generals esteemed? each other. Both will come® to-morrow. Neither (has done it”). Somebody knocks at the door. Either will have a prize. All was lost? in one day. (Tell me?) something of this man. He knows everything. 1dit 2que 3 malade “pense 5 mort Sestimé 7m’a dit 8 parti 9 doit faire 10 devoir m. 1l1d’eux !Zaura 13 Faites du bien 8 14 Ne médisez jamais !5 content de 16 connais 17 sisavant 18 que lui !°s’estimaient 29 viendront 2! ne l’a fait 22 perdu 2 Dites-moi. — VERBS. 111 À verb is a werd which expresses existence, posses- ston, or action ; as je suis j'ai je lis Iam 1 have I read 112 The subject or Nominative of a verb is the word causing the action of that verb, or experiencing the effect caused by the action of that verb; as JE parle I speak ; IL est aimé he is loved. 113 The Object or Government (in French régime or complément) is the word that completes the idea suggested by some. other words ; as j'aime MA MÈRE, I love my mother ; je vous vois, I see you. 114 There are two sorts of objects or governments, — the direct and indirect. 115 The Direct object (or accusative case) is that word which completes the signification of the verb, without tlie assistance of any other word ; as j'écris UNE LETTRE, Î write à letter ; elle vous attend, she expects you. 116 The Indirect object (in English the oblique case) i 48 , FRENCH GRAMMAR. any word that completes the signification of the verb by the help of a preposition (expressed or understood); as écrivez à VOTRE SŒUR write to your sister je LUI parlerai I shall speak to him pensez-vous à MOI ? do you think of me? 117 The verb être, as it expresses existence only, is called | a verb substantive; all other verbs, as they contain an attri- bute or quality, are called attributive or adjective; as je lis, formed of je suis lisant. "There are five sorts of verbs adjective : — The Active Les Verbes Actifs The Passive Les Verbes Passifs The Neuter Les Verbes Neutres The Reflective Les Verbes Réfléchis The Impersonal Les Verbes Impersonnels 118 The Active or Transitive verb expresses an action done by the subject or nominative, and has a direct object or government ; as j'étudie l’histoire I study history il aime la gloire he loves glory 119 The Passive verb expresses an action received or suffered by the subject, and performed by another ; as mon père est aimé d’eux my father is loved by them son fils est instruit par lui his son is taught by him 120 The Neuter or Intransitive verb expresses either a state, as 1L DORT Âe sleeps; or an action confined to the subject, as je marche I walk; or an action passing to an object by the help of a preposition; as je vais en Italie I am going to Italy il travaille avec courage he works with courage NoTE.—A verb is active when quelqu’un or quelque chose, added to it, makes sense ; as j'estime quelqu’un, je chante quelque chose. It is neuter when it does not admit of those words after it: thus we cannot say plaire quelqu’un, languir quelque chose. 121 The Reflective or Pronominal verb is that which is conjugated with two pronouns of the same person, thus: — Je me nous nous tu te vous vous à or elle se ils or elles se VERBS. 49 * It is sometimes rendered in English by a neuter or a passive verb : — je m’habille I dress myself vous vous lavez you wash yourself il se repent he repents ce drap se vend cher that cloth is sold dear 122 The Impersonal verb is that which is used in the third person singular only ; as il faut it is necessary il arrive it happens il pleut it rains il neige it snows Verbs are necessarily subject to moods, tenses, numbers and persons. MOODS. 123 Moods are the different ways of using a verb. There are five moods, viz.: the Infinitive, the Indicative, the Conditional, the Imperative, and the Subjunctive. FD) The Infinitive expresses action or state in an inde- finite manner, without any relation to number or person; as | parler to speak | donner to give avoir fini to have finished [ | (2) The Indicative afirms in a direet and positive man- ner; as j'écris I write nous lirons we will read | | | (3) The Conditional affirms with a condition ; as je chanterais si je pouvais I would sing if I could viendrait-il s’il était invité ? would he come if he were invited ? (4) The Imperative commands, exhorts, desires, or re- jjuests ; as ‘ | répondez-moi answer me aimez Dieu love God restons ici let us stuy her: | (6) The Subjunctive expresses affirmation in a subordinate | D a sass ana RA TE 50 FRENCH GRAMMAR, manner, and dependent on another verb, to which it is united by a conjunction; as je doute qu’il vienne I doubt whether he will come il faut que j’écrive I must write croyez-vous qu’il lise? do you think that he reads ? TENSES. 124 The Tenses refer to the time. There are three prin- cipal tenses, viz. | The present Le présent The past or preterit Le passé ou prétérit The future Le futur 125 ‘The tenses are divided into Simple and Compound. The Simple tenses are expressed by one word ; as je parle 1 speak il lisait he was reading nous écrirons we will write 126 The Compound tenses are formed with the verbs avoir to have, and être to be (then called auxiliary), and the past participle of any other; as j’ai parlé I have spoken il avait lu he had read = nous aurons écrit we shall have written Note.—Besides the above tenses, there are others called idiomatic tenses, which are formed with the verbs aller, venir, and devoir (205). NUMBERS. 127 There are two numbers in verbs—the singular, which speaks of one, as l'enfant dort the child sleeps, and the plural, which speaks of more than one, as les enfants dorment the children sleep. PERSONS. 128 There are three persons in each number : the first is the person who speaks; the second is the person spoken to; the third is the person spoken of; as Singular Plural I® jelis nous lisons Que tulis vous lisez gr ills ils lisent VERBS. 51 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. To write or to repeat a verb with all its changes of moods, tenses, numbers, and persons, is to conjugate it. 129 There are in French four conjugations, which are distinguished by the termination of the present of the In- finitive : — The 1st ends in er, as aimer to love » ond 1 ir Snir : to finish we Srd 33 oir, ,, recevoir to receive » Âth » Te , rendre to render 130 French verbs are formed of two distinct parts: the root, which is unchangeable, and the termination, which is changeable ; as, chant-er, je chant-¢, chant-ons, chant-ez. Verbs are cither regular, irregular, or defective. 131 A verb is regular when it is conjugated in all its tenses and persons like one of the four conjugations. 132 It is érregular when it deviates from the rules by which regular verbs are conjugated. 133 It is defective when it wants some mood, tense, or person. The two auxiliary verbs avoir and étre, helping to conjugate all other verbs in their compound tenses, should be learnt first, — 134 Auxiliary verb AVOIR, to have. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. — Avoir, to have PasT.— Avoir eu, to have had PARTICIPLES. PRESENT.— Ayant, having Pasr.—Eu (eue, f:), had INDICATIVE MOOD. | Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses, PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE Jai, I have Jai eu, I have had Tu as, thou hast Tu as eu, thou hast had Il a, he has Il a eu, he has had | Nous avons, we have Nous avons eu, we have had | Vous avez, you have Vous avez eu, you have had Ur ont, they have Ils ont eu, they have had p2 52 Simple Tenses. IMPERFECT. Javais, I had Tu avais, thou hadst Il avait, he had Nous avions, we had Vous aviez, you had Ils avaient, they had PAST DEFINITE. J’eus, Z had Tu eus, thou hadst Il eut, he had Nous eûmes, we had Vous eûtes, you had Ils eurent, they had FUTURE. Jaurai, I shall have Tu auras, thou wilt have Il aura, he will have Nous aurons, we shall have Vous aurez, you will have Ils auront, they will have FRENCH GRAMMAR. Compound Tenses. PLUPERFECT. Javais eu, I had had Tu avais eu, thou hadst had Il avait eu, he had had Nous avions eu, we had had Vous aviez eu, you had had Ils avaient eu, they had had PAST ANTERIOR. J’eus eu, 7 had had Tu eus eu, thou hadst had Il eut eu, he had had Nous eûmes eu, we had had Vous eûtes eu, you had had Ils eurent eu, they had had FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai eu, I shall have had Tu auras eu, thou wilt have had Il aura eu, he will have had Nous aurons eu, we shall have had Vous aurez eu, you will have had Ils auront eu, they will have had CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. J'aurais, I should have Tu aurais, thou wouldst have 11 anrait, he would have Nous aurions, we should have Vous auriez, you would have Ils auraient, they would have PAST. J’aurais eu, Z should Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst Il aurait eu, he would Nous aurions eu, we should Vous auriez eu, you would have had Ils auraient eu, they would IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ayons, let us have Aie, have (thou) Ayez, have (ye) Qu’il ait, let him have Qu'ils aient, let then have SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Que j'aie, that I may have Que tu aies, that thou mayst have Qu’il ait, that he may have Que nous ayons, that we may have Que vous ayez, that you may have Qu'ils aient, that they may hare Que j'aie eu, that I may Que tu aies eu, that thou mayst Qu’il ait eu, that he may Que nous ayons eu, that we may Que vous ayez eu, ‘hat you may Qu’ils aient eu, that the, may have had & : VERBS 1M PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Que j’cusse, that I y Que j'eusse eu, that I might Que tu eusses, that thou 3 Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst = Qu’il eût, that he = Qu'il eût eu, that he might = Que nous eussions, that we < Que nous eussions eu, that we might | 8 Que vous eussiez, that you | 3 Que vous eussiez eu, that you might 2 Qu’ils eussent, that they Qu’ils eussent eu, that they might NoTE.— Avoir to have, besides being an auxiliary verb, is also frequently used in the active voice; as j'ai un ami, 1 have a friend. Read and translate. J’ai un grand jardin. Tu as une tache sur ton habit. Elle a des aiguilles et du fil. Nous avons des nouvelles de mon frère. Vous avez un beau chien. Vos sœurs ont de jolies robes. J'avais deux livres et six schellings dans ma bourse. Il avait beaucoup d’amis. Nous avions 20 mille hommes, et ils en avaient 30 mille. Demain vous aurez sa réponse, et j'aurai le temps d’écrire ma lettre. Ma mère vous aurait invité si elle n’avaît pas été indis- posée. Nous eûmes beaucoup de pluie pendant notre voyage. Si J'étais plus riche, j'aurais une jolie maison bien meublée. Le général eut deux chevaux tués sous lui. Nous aurons un beau concert jeudi prochain, et j'aurai deux places à vous offrir. Mon fils a eu deux prix cette année ; mais il en aurait eu davantage s’il avait bien travaillé. Exercise on the Verb AVOIR. Indicative Present. I have a gold! watch. Thou hast a new hat? He has French® boots (28). She has a golden chain, My friend has paper and ink. We have two horses’. You have a fine dog® They have some pens’. Imperfect. I had a good master® Thou hadst twelve shirts®, She had a good piano. We had three rooms. You had a blue car- riage'® They had good (29) friends! Our neighbours had a very good cook. They had a beautiful house. Past definite. I had a large garden. Thou hadst six handker- chiefs'”. He had a new gun'®> My cousin (f.) had red ribbons. We had five servants, You had three cows”. They had ten young lambs'®, His father and mother had good (29) servants. Future. I shall have a large bookcase'”. Thou wilt have a prize's, My sister will have a new gown'®, We shall have four musicians®, You will have nine francs. The children will have a good dinner. Past indefinite. I have had a good share“. Thou hast had two fine pictures? He has had copies® We have had copy-books?. You have had wafers®. They have had an interview”, . ! dor 2chapeau 7. 3 francais 4 chaîne f. 5 cheval pl. % chien m. 7 plume pl. maître m. 9 chemise pl. 10 voiture f. !! ami m.pl. 12 mouchoir pl. 1% fusil 7m. 14 domestique pZ. 15 vache pl. 16 agneau pl. 17 biblisthèque f. 18 prix m. 19 robe f. = Huse mp 2! partf. 22 tableau pl. 23modele pl. 2 cahier pl. 25 pain à cacheter 54 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Pluperfect. I had had pencils”. Thou hadst haa u penknife® She had had some ripe? apples. My father had had a conversation with him. We had had (a great many®) pears. You had had the fever”. They had had a dozen (of) glasses® Past anterior. I had had great misfortunes®®. Thou hadst had courage. He had had stockings®. We had had great success. You had had a long visit®. Henry and Charles had had four prizes. Future anterior. I shall have had pretty flowers. Thou wilt have had a letter. Your sister will bave had a fine nosegay“”. We shall have had some shoes®. You will have had presents. Trey will have had some fruits. Conditional present. I would have an answer”. Thou wouldst have the prize. Our gardener would have flowers. She would have much trouble”. We should have more“! profit. You would have a golden pin‘? They would have a carpet®. Conditional past. I should have had my gloves*. Thou wouldst have had a white waistcoat®, She would have had much pleasure“, We would have had some music’. You would have had a coneert. They would have had company®. The soldiers would have had shoes. These children would have had a good dinner. Imperative. Have (thou) patience. Let ushave (pity on*) him. Have (ye) more courage. Let us have a pretty carriage. 27 crayon pl. @canif m. mûr 30 beaucoup de 3! fièvre f. 32 verre pl. 33 mal- heur pl. 34 bas 35 succès m. 35 visite f. 37 bouquet m. 38 soulier pl. 39 réponse f. 40 peine 4! plus de 4% épingle f. 4 tapis m. <4 gants 45 gilet m. 48 plaisit 47 musique f. ‘8 compagnie f. 4° pitié de 5° voiture f. N.B.—For exercises on the Subjunctive mood, see Regular Verbs. 4; 135 Auxiliary verb ÊTRE, to be. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT.— Être, to be Pasr.— Avoir été, to have been PARTICIPLES. / PrESENT. —Ktant, being Past.—Eté (unchangeable), been INDICATIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. Je suis, Z am Jai été, I have been Tu es, thou art Tu as été, thou hast been Il est, he zs Il a été, he has been Nous sommes, we are Nous avons été, we have been Vous êtes, you are Vous avez été, you have been Ils sont, they are Ils ont été, they have been Simple Tenses. IMPERFECT. Vétais, I was Tu étais, thou wast Il était, he was Nous étions, we were Vous étiez, you were Ils étaient, they were PAST DEFINITE, Je fus, I was Tu fus, thou wast 1 fut, he was Nous fümes, we were Vous fites, you were ls furent, they were FUTURE. Je serai, I shall be Tu seras, thou wilt be I] sera, he will be Nous serons, we shall be Vous serez, you will be Ils seront, they will be VERBS. 55 Compound Tenses. PLUPERFECT. J’avais été, I had been Tu avais été, thou hadst teen Il avait été, he had been Nous avions été, we had beer Vous aviez été, you had been Ils avaient été, they had been PAST ANTERIOR. J’eus été, Z had been Tu eus été, thou hadst been Il eut été, he had been Nous eûmes été, we had been Vous eûtes été, you had been Ils eurent été, they had been FUTURE ANTERIOR. Jaurai été, I shall have been Tu auras été, thou wilt have been 11 aura été, he will have been Nous aurons été, we shall have becn Vous aurez été, you will have been Ils auront été, they will have been CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. Je serais, I should be Tu serais, thou wouldst be Il serait, he would be Nous serions, we should be Vous seriez, you would be Ils seraient, they would be PAST. J’aurais été, I should Tu aurais été, thou wouldst Il aurait été, he would Nous aurions été, we should Vous auriez été, you would Ils auraient été, they would have been IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sois, be (thou) Qu’il soit, let him be Soyons, let us be Soyez, be (ye) Qu'ils soient, let them be SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Que je sois, that I may be Que tu sois, that thou mayst be Qu’il soit, that he may be PAST. Que j'aie été, that I may Que tu aies été, that thou mayst Qu’il ait été, that he may Que nous ayons été, that we may Que vous ayez été, that you may Qu’ils aient été, that they may Que nous soyons, that we may be Que vous soyez, that you may be Qu'ils soient, that they may be have been 56 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Simple Tense. Compound Tense. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Que je fusse, that I Que j’eusse été, that I might Que tu fusses, that thou Que tu eusses été, that thou mightst Qu’il fût, that he = Qu’il eût été, that he might Que nous fussions, that we (3 Que nous eussions été, that we might Que vous fussiez, that you | § Que vous eussiez été, that you might Qu'ils fussent, that they Qu'ils eussent été, that they might sv = * have been Use of Avorr and ÊTRE as Auxiliaries. 136 The verb Avoir serves to conjugate 1. Its own compound tenses. 2. Those of the verb être. 3. Those of all active and impersonal verbs. 4, Those of neuter verbs, except a few conjugated with étre. 137 The verb Etre serves to conjugate 1. All passive verbs. ; 2. The compound tenses of all reflective verbs. 3. Those of some neuter verbs. Read and translate. Je suis très-heureux de vous voir. Tu es bien aimable de me donner ce beau bouquet. Il est toujours malade. Elle est très- bonne musicienne. Nous sommes trois, et vous éfes quatre. 1ls sont pauvres, mais honnêtes. J’éiais a Paris quand votre lettre m'est arrivée. Marie Stuart était d’une grande beauté. Nous étions sur le sommet de la montagne. Tu seras puni si tu n’es pas ~ obéissant. Ma tante sera ici à six heures du soir. Ces messieurs seront à Londres avant nous. Je serais bien surpris s’il ne venait pas. Ces demoiselles seraient bien contentes d’aller à Paris. Vous seriez plus heureux si vous éfiez à la campagne. J'ai été malade sur mer. Nous aurions été plus malades sur l’autre bateau. Vous seriez plus riches si vous étiez plus économes. Vos parents eussent élé bien contents si vous aviez eu un prix. Exercise on the Verb ÊTRE Indicative present. I am very sick!. Thou art obedient. He is late, She is obliging*. We are very happy®. You are lazy® They are courageous’. They (f.) are timid®. Imperfect. I was gone’. Thou wast arrived. He was tall’; We were sick on! the sea. You were (at home'). They were very rich. His friends were in the country.' Past definite. I was his greatest!” friend. Thou wast robbed’. ! malade Zobéissant 3en retard 4 obligeant 5 heureux © paresseux 7 courageux Ftimide Ÿ parti !°grand !!sur !2 chez vous !3 campagnef. !4 plus grand 15 volé 4 VERBS. 57 Zhe was jea.ous-. We were surprised’®. You were blameable. They were punished'”. Our parents were satisfied (satisfuit). Future. [shall be inflexible. Thou wilt be astonished's. He will be very glad' to see you. We shall be there. You will be tired. They will be brave (31) soldiers?. Past indefinite. I have been studious?>. Thou hast been in? danger. She has been (to church®*). We have been attacked”. You have been attentive. They have been generous. Pluperfect. I had been invited”. He had been reprimanded by? his master. We had been frightened®. You had been punished. They had been charitable. Past anterior. I had been more diligent. She had been ready“. You had been very polite“? They had been examined, Future anterior. I shall have been invited. Thou wilt have been condemned®. He will have been surprised. We shall have been too severe. They will have been tired. Conditional present. I should be very sorry® if he had the prize. My mother would be too busy®. We should be very happy to see your brother. You would be very kind”. They would be re- fused®. Your sisters weuld be happy if they were here. Conditional past. I should have been very ungratefal®. Thou wouldst have been more prudent. She would have been warned. We should have been pleased!’ to hear? the concert. They would have been murdered* if they had been in the town. Imperative. Be (thou) faithful*, Let us be kind (to every- body*). Gentlemen’, be polite. Let them be ready in two hours. 15 jaloux 16 surpris !7 puni !8 étonné !9 bien aise de 20 fatigué 2! soldat 22 studieux Zen 2 à l’église 25 attaqué 26 attentif 27 généreux invité 29 réprimandé par 30 effrayé 3! prêt 32 poli 33examiné 34 condamné = 35fâché 36 occupé 37 bon 38 refusé 39 ingrat 40 averti 4! content ‘2 d’entendre 43 assassiné 44 fidèle 45 envers ‘tout le monde 46 Messieurs, CONJUGATION OF AVOIR AND ÊTRE, Negatively, Interrogatively, and Interrogatively with a Negation 138 The negation is generally expressed in French by two words, ne (not) before the verb, and pas, point, plus, jamais, rien, or some other negative expression (173), which is put after the verb, in simple tenses, and generally between the auxiliary and the past participle in compound tenses ; as je me vois pas I do not see , je n’ai pas vu I have not seen il ne rit jamais he never laughs je n’ai rien dit I have said nothing 139 The interrogation is formed by placing the nomina- D3 58 FRENCH GRAMMAR. tive pronoun after the verb or its auxiliary, to which it is joined by a hyphen ; as parlez-vous? do you speak ? avez-vous parlé? have you spoken ? 140 When the third person singular of a verb used interrogatively ends with a vowel, it is parted from the pronoun ¢, elle, on, &c., by the euphonic letter -t-; as aura-t-il ? willhe have? | parle-t-elle? does she speak ? 141 When the nominative cf a verb is a noun, it is placed before the verb, and the pronoun #, elle, &c., is put after the verb, to form the interrogation ; as votre frère est-il riche ? is your brother rich? votre sœur a-t-elle un piano ? has your sister a piano? 142 When a noun is the direct object of an active verb employed with a negation, de alone is used, instead of the article du, de la, des, before that noun ; as je n’ai pas de pain I have no bread je n’ai pas de viande I have no meat je n’ai pas de livres 1 have no books je ne bois pas de vin I do not drink wine 143 Neither the Imperative nor the tenses of the Subjunctive and Infinitive moods are used interrogatively. pn AVOIR. Simple Tenses. PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. Negatwely. Interrogatively. Interrog. with a Neg. 1 have not &c. Have 1? &c. Have I not? &c. Je n’ai pas Ai-je? N’ai-je pas? Tu n’as pas As-tu? DN'as-tu pas? Il n’a pas A-t-il? N’a-t-il pas? Nous n’avons pas Avons-nous? N’avons-nous pas? Vous n’avez pas Avez-vous? N’avez-vous pas? Ils n’ont pas Ont-ils ? N’ont-ils pas? IMPERFECT. I had not &c. Had I? &c. Had I not? ec. Je n’avais pas Avais-je? N’avais-je pas? Tu n’avais pas Avais-tu? N’avais-tu pas? Il n’avait pas Avait-il? N’avait-il pas? Nous n’avions pas Avions-nous? N’avions-nous pas? Vous n’aviez pas Aviez-vous? N’aviez-vous pas? Ils n’avaient pas Avaient-ils? N’avaient-ils pas? VERBS. 59 PAST DEFINITE. 1 had not &e. Had I? &c. Had I not? &e. Je n’eus pas Eus-je? N’eus-je pas? Tu n’eus pas Eus-tu? N’eus-tu pas? Il n’eut pas Eut-il ? N’eut-il pas ? Nous n’eûmes pas Eümes-nous? N’eûmes-nous pas? Vous n’eûtes pas Eûtes-vous? N’eûtes-vous pas? Ils n’eurent pas Eurent-ils? N’eurent-ils pas? FUTURE. 1 shall not have &c. Shall I have? &c. Shall I not have? &u. Je n’aurai pas Aurai-je? N’aurai-je pas? Tu n’auras pas Auras-tu? N’auras-tu pas? I1 n’aura pas Aura-t-il ? N’aura-t-il pas? Nous n’aurons pas Aurons-nous ? N’aurons-nous pas? Vous n’aurez pas Aurez-vous? N’aurez-vous pas ? Ils n’auront pas Auront-ils ? N’auront-ils pas ? CONDITIONAL PRESENT. I should not have §c. Should I have? §e. Should I not have 2 §e. Je n’aurais pas Aurais-je ? N’aurais-je pas? Tu n’aurais pas Aurais-tu? N’aurais-tu pas ? Il n’aurait pas Aurait-il ? N’aurait-il pas? Nous n’aurions pas Aurions-nous ? N’aurions-nous pas ? Vous n’auriez pas Auriez-vous ? N’auriez-vous pas ? Ils n’auraient pas Auraient-ils ? N’auraient-ils pas ? Compound Tenses. PAST INDEFINITE. I have not had &c. Have I had? &c. Have T not had? &e, Je n’ai pas eu Ai-je eu? N’ai-je pas eu? Tu n’as pas eu As-tu eu? N’as-tu pas eu? Il n’a pas eu A-t-il eu ? N’a-t-il pas eu ? Nous n’avons paseu Avons-nous eu? N’avons-nous pas eu? Vous n’avez pas eu Avez-vous eu? N’avez-vous pas eu ? Ils n’ont pas eu Ont-ils eu? N’ont-ils pas eu? PLUPERFECT. 1 had not had &e. Had I had? ec. Had I not had? &e. Je n’avais pas eu, &c. Avais-je eu? &e. N’avais-je pas eu ? &c. PAST ANTERIOR. I had not had ec. Had I had? &e. Had I not had? &e. Je n’eus pas eu, &c¢. Eus-je eu? &c. N’eus-je pas eu? &e FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall not have had Shall I hare had? Shall I not have had? Je n’aurai pas eu, &e. Aura-je eu? Ke. N’aurai-je paseu?&c, PR 60 FRENCH GRAMMAR. CONDITIONAL PAST. I skouid not have had ~~ Should I have had? Should I not have had * Je n'aurais paseu,&e. Aurais-je eu? &c. N’aurais-je pas eu?&c. + A ETRE. PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE Negatively. Interrogatively. Interrog. with a Neg. 1 am not §e. Am I? &e. Am I not? &c. Je ne suis pas Suis-je ? Ne suis-je pas ? lu n’es pas Es-tu? N’es-tu pas? 11 n’est pas Est-il ? N’est-il pas ? Nous ne sommes pas Sommes-nous ? Ne sommes-nous pas? Vous n’étes pas Etes-vous ? N’êtes-vous pas ? Ils ne sont pas Sont-ils ? Ne sont-ils pas ? - PAST INDEFINITE. I have not been &c. Have I been? &c. Have I not been ? &c. Je n’ai pas été, &c. Ai-je été? &c. N’ai-je pas été? &ec. N.B —Conjugate the whole verb in the same manner. Read and translate. Avez-vous des plumes et de l’encre? Je ne suis pas prêt. N’êtes-vous pas Italien? Non. tes-vous Espagnol? Oui. N’ai-je pas un beau gilet bleu? Votre cousine avait-elle sa robe rose? Non ; elle n’était pas en grande toilette. Es-tu content de ton tailleur? Ma sœur aura-t-elle son chapeau neuf? N’aurez- vous pas quelques amis ce soir? Je n’étais pas sur le bateau. Auriez-vous été effrayé si vous y aviez été? Nous n’aurons pas de pluie aujourd’hui. Serez-vous visible à onze heures? Non; je ne serai pas chez moi. Votre fils n’aura-t-il pas un fusil? rs père serait-il content si vous veniez avec moi? Ces dames sont-elles au salon ? Ces messieurs n’auront-ils pas bientôt leur café? Ont-ils eu le thé? Non, il n’est pas encore prêt. Promiscuous Exercise on the two verbs AvoIir and ÊTRE, used negatively, interrogatively, and interrogatively with a negation. Indicative present. I have no (142) pencils. Have you any (28) pens? Have they no messages® for® him? I amnot pleased’. Are you ready*? Is your sister (141) happy? Thou art not punc- tual®. Hast thou any sisters? Are they not (at home”)? ) crayon pl. 3 cominission pl. 3 pour 4 centent ' mêt 5 ponetael 7 chez eux VERBS. 61 Imperfect. I had not a good penknife’. Had he not a good master’? Had we not your dog'® this morning? You were not very happy". Was she with you? Were they not in the garden? Were not these horses (241) sold ? Past definite. He had not the courage to refuse’. Had she a reward'® for her work!*? Had they not a supper? I was not pru- dent enough! Were we not very generous’? Were you repri- manded'®? Were your brothers at the concert? Future. I shall not have time'®. Wilt thou have a horse ? Shall you have a carriage®? Will they not have new gloves? ? Will your sister be here to-morrow??? No; she will not be with us. Will they not be examined? Will my pupils be ready at nine o'clock ? Conditional present. Your brother would have no success”. Should we have guns®? Would she not have (new-laid eggs®)? 1 would not be troublesome®”. Would that man be a good soldier?? Would they not be very ridiculous? ? Past indefinite. I have had no fruits. Have you had almonds® ? Has she not had lace®? Have you been wet®?? Have the children (141) had their dinner? I have not been absent. Have they not been defeated®®? Has he not been scolded**? Has your friend had prizes? Has not your father had a letter this morning? Pluperfect. [ had had no plums®. Had we had rain®? Had they not had hail*’? She had not been vaccinated. Had you been deceived® ? Had not his cousin (f.) had the fever? Past anterior. I had had no assistance®. Had she had a holi- day*? Had you not been wounded*, They had not been pleased*:. Future anterior. I shall have had no excuse. Will he have had a tutor? Will she not have been scolded? They will not have been perceived®. Will not your daughters have had new (56) dresses? Conditional past. You would have had no charity, Would be have had diamonds’? Would my master have been pleased®. We should not have been admitted’. Would they not have been dis- appointed®? The soldiers would not have had bread. %canif m. 9 maitre m. 10 chien 1lheureux !2 de refuser 13 récompense f. 14 travail m. 15souper m. 16 assez 17 généreux 18 réprimandé 19]e temps 20 voi- ture f. 2 gant pl. 22 demain 2 examiné 24 succes fusil pl. 2 œuf frais pl. 27 importun 2 soldat m. 29 ridicule 30 amande 3! dentellef. 32mouillé 33 défait 31 grondé 35 prune pl. 36 pluie f. 37grèlef. 38 vacciné 39 trompé 49 secours 4! congé 42 blessé 43 content 44 précepteur m. 45 aperçu 46 charité 47 diamant 48 content 49 admis 50 désappointé. N.B.— Negative and fnterrogative sentences will henceforth be intermixed in the subsequent exercises. FRENCH GRAMMAR. REGULAR VERBS. 144 FirsT CONJUGATION IN ER, AIMER, (0 love. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT.— Aimer, to PRESENT.—Aimant, loving love Past.— Avo ~ aimé, to have loved PARTICIPLES. Past. — Aimé, loved INDICATIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. J’aime* Tu aimes Il aime Nous aimons Vous aimez Ils aiment J’aimais Tu aimais I aimait Nous aimions Vous aimiez Tis aimaient J'aimai Tu aimas Il aima Nous aimâmes Vous aimâtes Ils aimèrent J’aimerai Tu aimeras Il aimera Nous aimerons Vous aimerez Ils aimeront PRESENT. I love, do love or am loving Thou lovest He loves We love You love They love IMPERFECT. 1 loved or was loving Thou wast loving He was loving We were loving You were loving They were loving PAST DEFINITE. FUTURE, I loved Thou lovedst He loved We loved You loved They loved I shall love Thou wilt love He will love We shall love You will love They will love # NoTE. — The French has no emphatic auxiliary like do, does, or did, and the par- ticiple present is never used as in the English expressions I am ing, Twas loving, K€ but all the simple tenses are formed with one word only, j'aime, j'aimais, &c. VERBS. 63 Compound Tenses. PAST INDEFINITE, J'ai aimé Tu as aimé Il a aimé Nous avons aimé Vous avez aimé Ils ont aimé PLUPERFECT. J'avais aimé Tu avais aimé Il avait aimé Nous avions aimé Vous aviez aimé Ils avaient aimé 1 have loved Thou hast loved He has loved We have loved You have loved They have loved I had loved Thou hadst loved He had loved We had loved You had loved They had loved PAST ANTERIOR. d’eus aimé Tu eus aimé Il eut aimé Nous eûmes aimé Vous eûtes aimé Ils eurent aimé I had loved Thou hadst loved He had loved We had loved You had loved They had loved FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai aimé Tu auras aimé Il aura aimé Nous aurons aimé Vous aurez aimé Ils auront aimé 1 shall have loved Thou wilt have loved He will have loved We shall have loved You will have loved They will have loved CONDITIONAL MOID. PRESENT, Jaimeras Tu aimerais {1 aimerait Nous aimerions Vous aimeriez Ils aimeraient PAST. Jaurais or eusse aimé Tu aurais or eusses aimé Il aurait or eût aimé Nous aurions 07 eussions aimé Vous auriez or cussicz aimé lis auraient 07 eussent aimé I should love Thou wouldst love He would love We should love You would love They would love I should have loved Thou wouldst have loved He would have loved We should have loved You would have loved They would have loved 64 FRENCH GRAMMAR. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Aime Love (thou) Qu’il aime Let him love Aimons Let us love Aimez Love (ye or you) Qu’ils aiment Let them love SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Que j'aime That I may love Que tu aimes That thou mayst ioze Qu’il aime That he may love Que nous aimions That we may love Que vous aimiez That you may love Qu’ils aiment That they may love IMPERFECT. Que j’aimasse That I might love Que tu aimusses That thou mightst love Qu’il aimat That he might lone Que nous aimassions That we might love Que vous aimassiez That you might love Qu’ils aimassent That they might love Compound Tenses. PAST. Que j'aie aimé That I may have loved Que tu aies aimé That thou mayst have lcved Qu'il ait aimé That he may have loved Que nous ayons aimé That we muy have loved Que vous ayez aimé That you may have loved Qu'ils aient aimé That they may have loved PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse aimé That I might have loved Que tu eusses aimé That thou mightst have loved Qu'il eût aimé That he might have loved Que nous eussions aimé That we might have loved Que vous eussiez aimé That you might have loved Qu’ils eussent aimé That they might have loved Conjugate like aimer: apporter. fo bring ; blamer, to blame; chanter, fo sing; commencer, fo begin ; cultiver, to cultivate ; donner, to give ; étudier, fo study ; ensei- gner, fo teach; flatter, to flatter; frapper, to strike; garder, to keep , honorer, ta honour ; inventer, to invent ; juger, to judge ; laisser, to leave; marcher, fo walk ; nommer, to name; parler, to speak; porter, to carry ; raconter, to relate ; remercier, m thank ; sonner, fo ring ; travailler, to work ; trouver, to find ; voyager, to travel. VERBS. 65 REMARKS ON SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 145 In verbs whose Infinitive ends in ger, g¢ must always he followed by e mute, before a and o, in order to preserve the soft sound of g; as manger to eat, je mangeai ; juger to judge, nous jugeons. 126 Verbs ending in cer, as placer, menacer, take a cedilla under the c, before a, o, u, to preserve its soft articulation ; as :l plaça he placed, nous menaçons we threaten. 147 Verbs ending in eler, eter, generally double the / and ¢, when followed by e mnte ; as appeler to call, j'appelle ; jeter to throw, je jette. Except bourreler, congeler, déceler, geler, harceler, peler, acheter, colleter, coqueter, décolleter, étiqueter, and the verbs where the e preceding the / or t is an é accented, as recéler, empiéter, which require a grave accent over the e before the / or t; as il gèle it freezes, il achète he buys, àl révéle he reveals. 148 When the last syllable of the Infinitive of a verb in er is pre. ceded by é acute, or e mute, that letter is changed into à grave before a mute syllable ; as céder, je cède ; espérer, j'espère ; mener, je mène. 249 Verbs which end in ayer, oyer, uyer, in the Infinitive, retain : after y in the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, and the present of the subjunctive; as nous payions, nous employions, vous appuyiez; que nous payions, que vous payiez; from payer, employer, appuyer. When y would be followed by e mute, it is changed into à ; as payer, je paie, j’emploierai. 150 Verbs ending in ier in the Infinitive, as prier, lier, are written with double à in the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative, and present of the subjunctive ; as nous priions, vous priiez ; que nous liions, que vous litez. 151 Verbs ending in éer in the Infinitive, as créer, agréer, preserve the two ce throughout their conjugation, except before a, o, 4, and take three eee in the participle past feminine ; as eréé, m., créée, f. Lead and trunslate. Je travaille six heures par jour. Blâmes-tu ma conduite? Ma fille parle trois langues, le français, l'anglais, et l’allemand. Nous déjeunons à huit heures du matin, et nous entrons en étude à huit heures et demie. Dinez-vous avec nous aujourd’hui? Non. Vos deux fils dessinent très-bien, et chantent de même. J’admirais l’heureuse situation de cette grande ville. Pendant qu’il parlait ainsi, Télémaque baissait les yeux. Nous habitions alors la cam- pagne. Les étoiles brillaient au ciel. Nous errdmes longtemps dans la plaine. Ccs messieurs arrivèrent-ils à temps pour le con- cert? Je passerai un mois avec mon cousin, et nous chasserons tous les jours. Apporterez-vous votre fusil? Je chasserais souvent si j'avais le temps. Aimeriez-vous venir 3 Rome avec nous? Ces chevaux mangeraient toute cette avoine si vous la leur 66 FRENCH GRAMMAR. donniez. Ne jugeons pas les autres trop sévèrement. Nous longeâmes cette île, et le lendemain nous arrivâmes en face de sept montagnes de glace. La brume commençait à nous envelopper. Comment appelez-vous cette montagne? On l’appelle le Mont Blanc. Je désirerais que vous parlassiez français. Je ne crois pas que nous arrivions avant la nuit. Exercise on the FIRST CONJUGATION. Indicative present. I water" my garden. Thou speakest? French®. Does (175) he sing! every® morning? She dances® well We blame? these gentlemen®. You brush? your coat'°. Do they barri- cade!! the street? They (f.) do not speak German'% Imperfect. I esteemed'® my friend because he was very just. Did (175) he sweep'* the room? My friend taught'* French, German, and Italian. We were correcting our exercise when you called the master. Were you (175) listening’® at the door? They (used to give’) bread to the poor. We studied our lessons every morning. Past definite. I bought'® a French dictionary yesterday. Chou announcedst!? good news?. Did not that (young lady“) (play on?) the harp with taste? We met? your father in the streets of Paris in 1860. You forgot? your books and pens. They unsealed” the letter. Future. I shall eat? some chicken?”. He will not neglect his duty. We shall decide” the question. Shall you attack® the enemy ? They will buy* your horses. Will my son soon speak French ? Conditional present. I would cultivate®” the flowers of our garden. Would your father accept‘ my invitation for to-morrow ? We would breakfast with you if we could®. You would correct® the faults of your exercise. Would your friends accept those proposi- tions? Should we refuse their presents ? Imperative. Study® thy lesson. Let us love® justice, peace, and virtue. Let us celebrate® this great event”. Lend" me fifty guineas. Do not lend him your money. Subjunctive present. I wish‘? that he (may find") a good situation. In order that** you (may admire**) the beauty of that land- scape’. He wishes that you (may think of‘) their misfortunes. I wish that they (may forget**) my faults. Imperfect. Provided” I (might surmount®) the obstacles. (It would be necessary’) that we (might shut®®) the shutters®®. Your master wished that you (might conjugate®) these verbs with facility. I wished that they (should protect) that young lady. 1 arroser Zparler 3 Français “chanter Stousles ®danse 7blAmer © messieurs 9 brosser 10 habit !! barricader 12 Allemand !3 estimer !#* balayer !5 enseigner 16 écouter 17 donner 18 acheter !’annoncer 2 nouvelle f. 2! demoiselle f. Z jouer de 2 rencontrer 2‘ oublier 2 décacheter 26 manger 2 poulet m. négliger 29 décider 3 attaquer 3lacheter 32 cultiver 33 accepter 3*déjeâner 3° pouvoir 36 corriger 37 étudier 38aimer 39 célébrer 49 événement 4! prêter 42 souhaiter o7 désirer 43 trouver 44 Afin que 45 admirer 46 paysage m. 37 penser à “8 oublier 49 Pourvu que 59 surmonter 5! I] faudrait 52 fermer 55 volet 54 conjuguer 55 protéger. 5 VERBS. 67 Promiscuous Exercise Oa the Compound Tenses of the First Conjugation. 1 have worked! three hours this morning. Has he not finished® his letter ? They have not studied® their lessons. I had (hesitated to*) tell him that news. Thou hadst not thought of® the message. Had your tutor” corrected® your exercise ? When he had dined® he went' into the garden. As soon as! he had counted? the money, he dis- appeared'3. I should sccn have dispatched'* that man. When you shall have spoken'® to your master, you shall come’ and see me. Would you bave played!” if you had been with us? We would not have walked'® if we had found" a carriage. Would your uncle have given? his consent? ? I do not believe? that he has spent? more than! two hundred francs. Do you think® that I have offended®® him? Was it possible that we should have danced so late?’ ? travailler Zachever Sétudier “hésiter à 5penserä commission f. 7 précepteur 8 corriger 9 diner 10 aller !! Dès que !2 compter 13 disparaître 14 expédier 15 parler 16 venir 17 jouer 18 marcher 19 trouver 2 donner 2! consentement 7m. 2 croire dépenser 24 de 25 penser 2 offenser 27 si tard. 152 SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. FINIR, (0 finish. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT.—Finir, to finish Pasr.— Avoir fin, to have finished PARTICIPLES. PrESENT.—Finissant, finishing Past.—Fini, finished INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT, Je finis 1 finish Tu finis Thou fimshest Il finit He finishes Nous finissons We finish Vous finissez You finish Ils finissent They finish PAST INDEFINITE. J'ai fins, Ke. 1 have finished FRENCH GRAMMAR. IMPERFECT. Je finissais I was finishing T'u finissais Thou wast finishing Il finissait He was finishing Nous finissions We were finishing Vous finissiez You were finishing Ils finissaient They were finishing PLUPERFECT. J'avais fini, &e. PAST DEFINITE. I had finished Je finis I finished Tu finis Thou finishedst 11 finit He finished Nous finimes We finished Vous finites You finished Ils finirent They finished J’eus fini, &c. PAST ANTERTOR. I had finished FUTURE. Je finira: I shall finish Tu finiras Thou wilt finish Il finira He will finish Nous finirons We shall finish Vous finirez You will finish Ils finiront They will finish J'aurai fini, &c. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have finished CONDITIONAL MOOD. : PRESENT. Je finirais I should finish Tu finirais Thou wouldst finish Il finirait He would finish Nous finirions We should finish Vous finiriez You would finish Ils finiraient They would finish PAST. J'aurais or cusse fini, &c. I should have finished IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fines Finish (thou) Qu’il finisse Let him finish Finissons Let us finish Finissez Finish (ye or you) Qu’ils finissent Let them finish VERBS. 69 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Que je finisse That I may finish Que tu finisses That thou mayst finish Qu'il finisse That he may finish Que nous finissions That we may finish Que vous finissiez That you may finish Qu’ils finissent That they may finish PAST. Que j'aie fini, &e. That I may have finished IMPERFECT. Que je finisse That I might finish Que tu finisses That thou mightst finish Qu’il finét That he might finish Que nous finissions That we might finish Que vous finissiez That you might finish Qu'’ils finissent That they might finish PLUPERFECT. Que j’eusse fini, &c. That I might have finished Conjugate like finir : applaudir, fo applaud ; avertir, fo warn ; batir, to build, chérir, fo cherish ; choisir, to choose ; démolir, to demolish ; fleurir, to blossom ; fournir to furnish ; nourrir, to feed ; punir, to punish ; remplir, to fill ; ternir, to tarnish, to sully ; trahir, to betray ; vernir, to varnish, &c. REMARKS ON A FEW VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 153 All verbs in ir, the present participle of which is not in issant, do not belong to the regular form. 154 The verb bénir, to bless, has two participles past, bénit, m., bénite, f.; as du pain BÉNIT, de l’eau BÉNITE ; and béni, m., bénie, f., blessed ; as peuple BENI de Dieu, famille BENTE du Ciel. 155 The verb hair, to hate, preserves the two dots on ÿ throughout the conjugation ; except in the three persons singular of the present of the indicative : je hais, tu hais, il hait; and in the second person singular of the imperative, hais. 156 The verb fleurir, signifying to blossom, and to be prosperous, has two imperfect tenses of the indicative, and two participles present. When fleurir means to blossom, it wakes fleurissait, fleurissant; whey it signifies to be prosperous, it makes fluriss-1it, florissant. 70 FRENCH GRAMMAR, Read und translate. Cette pauvre femme nourrit ses enfants par son travail, et tous ses enfants la chérissent. Awvertissez-le que deux de ses vaisseaux ont péri la nuit dernière. L'armée envahissait tout le pays. Quand réunirez-vous vos amis pour leur apprendre cette nouvelle? Nous bâtissons une église pour les habitants de cette paroisse. Les fleurs embellissent la nature, et nourrissent les abeilles. Avez-vous choisi les fleurs que vous voulez acheter? Non, je ne les ai pas encore choisies. Quand les choisirez-vous? Je les choisirai de- main matin, et vous les planterez tout de suite, de peur qu’elles ne périssent. Il faut que je finisse ma lettre avant diner, car si je ne la finissais pas, il serait trop tard après diner. Ne désobéissea jamais à vos parents, Dieu vous punirait. Exercise on the SECOND CONJUGATION. Indicative present. I cherish! those good friends. He punishes? his pupils® too severely. We demolish? that old castle. Do you not polish® that marble? They applaud® all that’ he says’. Do those children fulfil® their duties? They do not obey" their master. Imperfect. I was (reflecting on'?) his letter when he (came in'®). Wast thou not building! a stable ? He was warning'® your brother of his danger. We were finishing'® our work when he passed. Were you not demolishing!” the wall of the garden ? Were they not enjoy- ing'® the pleasures of the country'®? They enslaved® all the van- quished? nations. Your uncle ani cousin were building a castle. Past definite. I furnished? all the money. Didst thou succeed”* in thy project? That girl disobeyed®* her parents. We filled the bottle with? water. Did you perform® the duties of his office" during his absence ? They invaded” our country®. All the spectators applauded. Did we not warn that man? Future. I shall punish him for his disobedience. Thou wilt not finish thy work this evening. This tree will soon blossom®. Will your son climb®# the hill with us? Shall we not warn® his friends ? You will succeed in your undertaking®. Those thieves will languish® a long time in their prison. Will they finish this evening? Conditional present. I should convert® the impious. Thou wouldst enjoy*” a good health. Would your brother blemish® his name? We (would sympathise with®) their sorrows. You would embellish that residence if it were yours*. They would not betray their country. Would they not sully their glory? Imperative. Fill thy glass. Punish the crime. Let us build a 1 chérir 2punir Sélève “démolir 5 polir 6 applaudir 7tout ce que 8 dire 9 remplir 10 devoir 1 obéira 12 réfléchir sur 12 entrer !4 batir 15 avertir_ 16 finir M démolir !Sjouir de 19 campagne f. 20 asservir 2! vaincu 2 fournir 7 réussir M désobéir 2 remplir de remplir place envahir 30 pays 5! fleurir ?* gravir? avertir 34 entreprise languir 36 convertir 97 jouir de 35 Lernit 9 Compatir à 4° embellir 4) & vous 4? trahir VERBS. 71 fine house. ‘Let us establish*® wise laws. Polish* the barrel® of that musket. Let them bless*$ Providence. Subjunctive present. Come! before I demolish my work. He wishes® tnat I should reflect on that proposal®. (In order that!) she may not perish®2. Let us work, for fear®® we should undergo the punishment. Unless® you establish wise laws. Do you think“ that those bankers will fulfil*” their engagement ? Imperfect. I (trembled for fear®®) he (should blemish) his repu- tation. In order that she (might soften®) that unfeeling® heart. Tt would be (desirable®") that we (should act“) in concert. It would be necessary that you should finish your exercise before dinner. We expected® that they (would rebuild®) that farm. 43 établir 44 polir 45 canon m. 46 bénir 47 venir 48 avant que 49 vouloir 50 propo- sition f. 5! Afin que 52 périr 53 de peur que* 54 subir 55 A moins que* 56 penser 57 remplir 58 trembler que* 59 adoucir 60 insensible 6! A désirer 62 agir 63 de 64 attendre © rebatir. Promiscuous Exercise On the Compound Tenses of the Second Conjugation. I have warned! him of his errors. We have not enjoyed? our holi- days. Have you not finished your exercise? I had not reflected’ seriously. Had you not chosen’ a red cloak? When he had built his house, he sold®it. As soon as we had finished our lesson, we (went out’). Would they not have been punished, f they had not obeyed? I did not know® that they had abolished? that law. Had they not betrayed! their general? These tulips would have blossomed! sooner, if the pots had been filled'” with good soil'* When I shall have embellished'* my residence, I will invite!“ all my friends. Do you think'6 that they have accomplished'” their task'*? Would not these fish have perished’, if they had not been fed? ? avertir “jouirde réfléchir “choisir bâtir © vendre ”sortir “savoir Pabolir ‘trahir ** fleurir 2 remplir -'* terre /. '* embellir ‘inviter ‘° croire accomplir ‘°tâche '° périr “nourrir. Division of the SECOND CONJUGATION. 157 The second conjugation is divided into four classes, ‘which are distinguished by the present participle, the present of the Indicative, and the past definite. The first class is like finir (152); the three others are as | follows : — | 2. To feel sentir sentant je sens je sent 8. Tooffer offrir offrant = j'offre j’offris 4. Tohold tenir tenant = je tiens je tins * The conjunctions marked * require ne before the vert, FRENCH GRAMMAR, 158 MODEL-VERBS. TX. Class XII. Class IV. Class INFINITIVE PRESENT. Sentir, to feel Offrir, to offer Tenir, to hold PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Sentant, feeling Offrant, offering Tenant, holding PARTICIPLE PAST, Senti, felt Offert, offered Tenu, held INDICATIVE. PRESENT. 7 feel I offer I hold Je sens Joffre Je tiens Tu sens Tu offres Tu tiens Il sent Il offre Il tient Nous sentons Nous offrons Nous tenors Vous sentez Vous offrez Vous tenez Ils sentent Ils offrent Ils tiennent IMPERFECT. I was feeling I was offering 1 was holding Je sentais, &c. J’offrais, &e. Je tenais, &» PAST DEFINITE. I felt 1 offered I held Je sentis J’offris Je tins Tu sentis Tu offris Tu tins Il sentit Il offrit Il tint Nous sentimes Vous sentites Ils sentirent I shall feel Je sentirai, &c. 1 should feel Je sentirais, &e. Nous offrimes Vous offrites Ils offrirent FUTURE. I shall offer J’offrirai, &c. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 1 should offer Joffrirais, &c. Nous tinmes Vous tintes Ils tinrent I shall hold Je tiendrai, &c I should hold Je tiendrcis, &e ei 4 Feel (thou) Sens Sentores Sentez VERBS. IMPERATIVE, Offer (inou) Offre Offrons Offrez SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. That I may feel Que je sente Que tu sentes Qu’il sente Que nous sentions Que vous sentiez Qu’ils sentent That I myht feal Que je sentisse Que tu sentisses Qu'il sentit Que nous sentissions Que vous sentissiez Qu'ils sentissent That I may offer Que j’offre Que tu offres Qu'il offre Que nous offrions Que vous offriez Qu'ils offrent IMPERFECT. That I might offer Que j’offrisse Que tu offrisses Qu’il offrit Que nous offrissions Que vous offrissiez Qu'ils offrissent 73 Hold (thon) Tiens Tenons Tenez That I may hold Que je tienne Que tu tiennes Qu’il tienne Que nous tenions Que vous tenez Qu’ils tiennent That I might hold Que je tinsse Que tu tinsses Qu’il tint Que nous tinssions Que vous tinssiez Qu'ils tinssent 159 Tle first class consists of about three hundred conjugated like finir (152). 160 The second class contains the following verbs, which ROOTS Sentir, to feel { Mentir, to lie Partir, to set out Sortir, to go out Dormir, to sleep Servir, to serve Se repentir, to repent are conjugated like sentir :— DERIVATIVES Consen-tir Pressen-tir Ressen-tir Démen-tir Dépar-tir Repar-tir Ressor-tir* Redor-mir Endor-mir Endor-mir (s’) Se rendor-mir Desser-vir (See the Reflective Verbs, 191, 192) verbs, the present participle of which is in issant, and are to consent to foresee to resent to give the lie to divide to set out again to go out aguin to sleep ayain to lull asleep to fall asleep to full asleep agein to clear the table ® Ressortir, meaning to be under the jurisdiction of, is conjugated like fizér, E TA FRENCH GRAMMAR. 161 The third class comprises the following verbs, which are conjugated like offrir : — RCOTS DERIVATIVES ; Rou-vrir to open again Ou-vrir, to open ; pen GOT 200 Entr’ou-vrir to half-open ; Décou-vri } Cou-vrir, to cover 727 to discover : Recou-vrir to cover again OF-frir, to offer Mésof-frir to underbid Souf-frir, to suffer (No derivatives) 162 The fourth class contains the following verbs, which are conjugated like tenir : — ROOTS DERIVATIVES ( Abst-enir to abstain Appart-enir to belong Cont-enir to contain Dét-enir to detain T-enir, to hold 4 Entret-enir to keep up Maint-enir to maintain Obt-enir to obtain Ret-enir to retain | Sout-enir to uphold ( Av-enir to happen Contrev-enir to contravere Conv-enir io agree Dev-enir to become Disconv-enir to deny Interv-enir to intervene V-enir, to come < Par vrenit to reach ; Prév-enir to warn &e. Prov-enir to proceed Rev-enir to come back Subv-enir to relieve Surv-enir to befall Souv-enir (se) to remember (Se ressouv-enir to recollect Read and translate. Sentez-vous le parfum de ces violettes? Il pressentait son malheur. Consentira-t-il à ce mariage? Quand partons-nous pour la campagne? Ces jeunes gens ne sortaient-ils pas trop souvent ? Nous dormions jusqu'a trois heures, puis nous partions pour la chasse. Nos soldats se sont couverts de gloire en Crimée. Ouvrez la fenêtre, s’il vous plaît, car je souffre trop de la chaleur. Viendrez-vous nous voir dimanche prochain ? Je ne crois pas qu’il vienne, car il est sorti fort tard. En revenant, nous découvrimes un affreux précipice. Je me souviens toujours avec plaisir de mon VERBS. 75 voyage en Suisse. Les troupes frangaises souffrirent beaucoup dans la campagne d’'Egypte, mais elles servirent leur patrie avec un courage héroïque. Votre ami convient-il de ses torts? A-t-il cbtenu la permission qu’il avait demandée ? Exercise on the XII. FIX. and IV. Classes. He consents’ to the marriage of his son. We (set out?) for India next week. Do (275) they offer’ you a good sum of money? My children (were sleeping!) very soundly. That officer suffered® with much courage. Did (278) you discover® his malice? This house will belong” to his daughter after his death. The troops did not re- - strain® the populace. Columbus discovered America in 1492 (the date to be given in words). We agree’ with you that he (was in the wrong"°). Those horses belong to my friend. We did not return’! home before ten in the evening. Did they not keep!? their promise? The French (covered themselves!*) with glory at Solferino. My mother (fell down'!) in opening'® the door. Have you covered the table? When will you come’ and see me? I (go out'”) very seldom. Did you sleep well last night? Have you opened the window ? No ; but I shall open it before'® we go out. ! consentir 2 partir 3 offrir “dormir souffrir 6 découvrir 7 appartenir 8 con- tenir 9 convenir IV avoir tort !! revenir !2tenir 13se couvrir !4tomber 15 ouvrir 16 venir 17 sortir 18 avant que (with the subjunctive) 80 163 THIRD TONJUGATION IN NIR. RECEVOIR, (0 receive. INFINITIVE MOOD. \ PRESENT. — Recevoir, to receive Pasr.— Avoir regu, to havc received PARTICIPLES. | Parsent.— Recevant, receiving Pasr.—Recu, received | | INDICATIVE MOOD. | | | PRESENT. Je reçois I receive i Tu reçois Thou reccivest ! Il recoit He receives = Nous recevons We receive | Vous recevez You receive | Ils reçoivent They receive 76 J'ai regu, &e. Je vecevais "lu recevais Il recevait Nous recevions Vous receviez Ils recevaient J’avais regu, &ec. Je reçus ‘lu reçus ll reçut Nous regimes Vous reçûtes Ils reçurent J’eus reçu, &c. Je recevrai Tu recevras Il recevra Nous recevrons Vous recevrez Ils recevront- J'aurai reçu, &c. FRENCH GRAMMAR. PAST INDEFINITE. I have 1 cceived IMPERFECT. 1 was receiving Thou wast receiving He was receiving We were receiving You were receiving They were receiving PLUPERFECT. I had received PAST DEFINITE. 1 received Thou receivedst He received We received You received They received PAST ANTERIOR. I had received FUTURE. I shall vecoive Thou wilt receive He will receive We shall receive You will receive They will receive FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have received CONDITIONAL MOOD. Je recevrais Tu recevrais Il recevrait Nous rerevrions Vous receuriez Ils recevraient J'aurai reçu, &e. PRESENT. I should receive Thou wouldst receive He would receive We should receive You would receive They would receive PAST. I should have reecived 4 # À ; VERBS. 77 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Reçois Receive (thou) Qu'il reçoive Let him receive Recevons Let us receive Recevez Receive (ye or you) Qu'ils reçoivent Let them receive SUBJUNCTIVE MOO. PRESENT. Que je reçoive That I may recewe Que tu reçoives That thou mayst receive Qu’il reçoive That he may receive Que nous recevions That we may receive Que vous recevez That you may receive Qu'ils reçoivent That they may receive PAST. Que j'aie reçu, &c. That I may have received IMPERFECT. Que je reçusse That I might receive Que tu reçusses That thou mightst recewe Qu’il reçüt That he might receive Que nous reçussicns That we might receive Que vous reçussicz That you might receive Qu'ils reçussent That they might receive PLUPERFECT. Que j’eusse reçu, &c. That I might have received Conjugate like recevoir : apercevoir, fo perceive ; concevoir, to conceive ; devoir, fo owe ; percevoir, Lo collect ; redevoir, Lo owe still. 164 Verbs in evoir only are conjugated after recevoir ; all others in oir, like voir, savoir, &ec., are irregular. 165 In all the verbs of the 3rd conjugation, the ¢ of the root takes a cedilla (21) whenever it is followed by o or u; as japergois, J apergus. 166 Devoir and redevoir take a circumflex accent on the # of the participle past: as di, redii ; but the accent is not used when the par- ticiple is feminine or plural : due, dues, dus. Read and translate. J’apergois les tours du chiteau; les aperccvez-vous? Vous les apercevrez bientôt, elles doivent être dans la direction du soleil couchant. Je conçois que vous ne les aperceviez pas si vous avez la vue basse. Nous reçumes un panier de raisins la semaine 73 FRENCH GRAMMAR. dernière, et nous recevrons un panier de pêches la semaine pro- chaine. Cet architecte conçoi/-il votre plan? Je ne crois pas qu’il le conçoive très-bien, mais peut-être le concevra-t-il mieux quand je le lui aurai expliqué. Ils ont déçu mes plus chères espérances. Si nous montions sur cette colline, nous apercevrions la mer et les navires qui voguent vers l’Amérique. Je ne savais pas que vous dussiez tant d’argent ; si je l’avais su, j'aurais été fort inquiet. Exercise on the THIRD CONJUGATION. Indicative present. I perceive! his house in the distance’ Thon owest® me twelve pounds’. My brother receives® three hundred and fifty pounds (a year®). We do not perceive’ your intention. You receive your friends well. Do they not owe? much gratitude’ to your father ? Do those ladies receive visits ? Imperfect. I already conceived great (29) hopes. - Didst thou not perceive that star'®? She received a letter every day. We received! our income? quarterly’®. Did you not owe him two hundred guineas? They perceived the danger (soon enough). Past definite. I received a visit from'® your sister. Thou con- ceivedst a good plan. Did your brother receive my letter (in good time'6)? We owed the victory to their courage. You perceived your error before!’ me. They conceived a great horror for'® his conduct. We did not perceive the comet. Future. I shall receive a parcel from France next! week. He will easily perceive the beauties of that work®. Will he not receive money? in (a f:w*) days? Shall we perceive the setting” of the sun? You will receive a reward® for your trouble. Will they not enter- tain®* a bad* opinion of me? Conditional present. I would receive his advice? with pleasure. Would her mother receive her’ with kindness®? We ought® to avoid® the company of this man, You ought not to neglect®® your lessons. They would receive your presents with joy. Imperative. Receive my thanks® for all*® thy kindness. Let us conceive the importance of our duties. Receive that stranger with kindness. Do not receive his letters. Subjunctive present. Stay®® with me until®’ I receive assistance®. Although® he receives my letters, he never answers them. I do not think that we shall perceive the sun to-day. It is not likely* that you will receive your money. Is it possible that those men should owe more than (they possess)? Imperfect. (He wished me to*?) receive his money this morning, that he might pay** the workmen. I wrote*“ to him (by post‘”), that l apercevoir ?lointain mm. 3devoir “livre 5recevoir Spar an 7 concevoir € devoir 9 reconnaissance f. !9 étoile f. !! percevoir !2revenu !3 tous les trois mois !‘’assez tôt 13de 15a temps !7avant 18de !9prochain @ ouvrage m. ?! de l’argent 22 quelques 23 coucherm. 24 récompense f. ? peine 76 concevoir 27 mauvais £3 avis. 2°la 3 Lonté 3! devoir 32 éviter 33 négliger 34 remerciment 35 tout #8 Restor 37 jusqu’a ce que 38des secours $9 Quoique 4 probable 4! ils ne possèdent +2 {1 voulait que je 43 afin que 44 payer ‘5 ouvrier “6 écrire 47 par la poste = VERBS. 79 he might receive my letter (in time). He wished” that we might conceive the depth® of his plan. Was it possible that they should not conceive my design®' ? 48 3 temps 49 vouloir °° profondeur f. 3! desscin m 167 Fourrin CONJUGATION IN Zeki RENDRE to render. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. — Rendre, to render PAsTr.— Avoir rendu, (0 kuve rendered PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. —Rendant, rendering ~~ Past.—Rendu, rendered INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Je rends I render Tu rends Thou renderest 11 rend Ë He renders Nous rendons We render Vous rendez You render Ils rendent -They render PAST INDEFINITE. J’ai rendu, &c. I have rendered IMPERFECT. Je rendais I was rendering Tu rendais Thou wast rendering Il rendait 2c was rendering Nous rendions We were rendering Vous rendiez You were rendering Ils rendaient They were rendering PLUPERFECT. J’avais rendu, &ec. I had rendered PAST DEFINITE, Je rendis I rendered Tu rendis Thou renderedst Il rendit He rendered Nous rendimes We rendered | Vous rendites You rendered | Ils rendirent They rendered 80 J'eus rendu, &c. Je rendraz Tu rendras Il rendra Nous rendrons Vous rendrez Ils rendront FRENCH GRAMMAR. PAST ANTERIOR. FUTURE. I had rendered I shall render Thou wilt render He will render We shall render You will render They will render FUTURE ANTERIOR. J’aurai rendu, &ec. I shall have rendered CONDITIONAL MOOD Je rendrais Tu rendrais Il rendrait Nous rendrions Vous rendriez Ils rendraient PRESENT. PAST. J'aurais rendu, &c. I should render Thou wouldst render He would render We should render You would render They would render I should have rendered IMPERATIVE MOOD. Rends Qu’il rende Rendons Rendez Qu’ils rendent Render (thou) Let him render Let us render Render (ye or you) Let them render SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Que je rende Que tu rendes Qu’il rende PRESENT. Que nous rendzors Que vous rendiez Qu’ils rendent PAST. Que j'aie rendu, &c. That I may render That thou mayst render That he may render That we may render That you may render That they may render That I may have rendered VERBS. 81 IMPERFECT. Que je rendisse That I might render Que tu rendisses That thou mightst render Qu'il rendit That he might render Que nous rendissions That we might render Que vous rendissiez That you might render Qu’ils rendissent That they might render PLUPERFECT. Que j’eusse rendu, &c. That I might have rendered 188 Conjugate like rendre: attendre, fo expect ; confondre, fo confound ; défendre, fo for bid ; entendre, to hear ; fondre, to melt ; mordre, to bite ; perdre, to lose ; pendre, to hang ; répandre, to spill, to spread ; répondre, to answer, to reply ; suspendre, fo suspend ; tondre, fo shear ; vendre, to sell, &c. Read and translate. Entendez-vous le bruit qui se fait dans la montagne? Non, je n’entends rien. Avez-vous répondu à la lettre de mon avocat? Non, j'y répondrai tout à l'heure. Nous attendions le courrier avec grande impatience, mais il a perdu ses dépêches en traversant la montagne. Je perdis dix mille francs d’un coup. Les Russes défendirent Sébastopol avee beaucoup de courage et de talent. J'uttendrai que vous ayez refondu votre ouvrage pour en acheter un exemplaire. Mon père vendra sa voiture dès qu’il aura vendu son cheval. Mon oncle et mon cousin vous attendront à la station du chemin de fer, et là vous prendrez une voiture qui vous amenera jusqu’ici. La neige fondrait si le soleil paraissait. Ven- driez-vous cette ferme si vous en trouviez un bon prix ? Exercise on the FOURTH CONJUGATION. Indicative present. I expect’ some friends this evening. Dost thou hear? what® he says? He sells? all his estates’. We do not answer® for that gentleman. You defend” your country. Those children lose® their time. Do those hens (lay eggs?) every day ? Imperfect. I was waiting for! your answer. He was spreading!! terror everywhere. Was your sister corresponding? with him? We were condescending'® to their desires. You were defending him! in vain. They (were melting into'®) tears. Past definite. I sold forty sheep and two cows. Didst thou lose three hundred thousand francs ? Did she hear you? We (went down'®) the hill. You did not return'” the salute. Did you not hang your coat in the hall”? They spilt® all the wine which was in the cellar”, We heard a great noise in the room. lattendre Zentendre 3ceque 4 vendre Sterres Srépondre 7 défevrdre 8 perdre 9 pondre !° attendre !! répandre !2 correspondre !3 condescendre !<}e :5 fondre en !6 descendre 17 rendre !8 pendre !9 vestibulem. Z répancre 71 cave f. E 3 #2 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Future. Shall I answer (in a few?) words? He will render® you a great service. Will he not lose his place? Shall we shear”* our sheep next week? You will hear his speech”. They will sell their (country-house®). Will not your dogs bite”” me? Conditional present. I would defend her (at the peril®) of my life. Wouldst thou pretend® (to be right’)? My brother would wait for an answer. Would she not suspend her judgment? We would defend that honest man. Would you not confound® his pride ? The judges would render justice to everybody®. Imperative. (Come down®) immediately. Let us expect our bappiness from®? ourselves. Let us wait (a little longer®). Hear that noise. Do not lose your time. Let them sell their horses. Subjunctive present. Speak louder®, that I may hear what‘ you say. He always (goes out'!), although we (forbid him“) to do it. Iced" that horse well, (in order that‘) you may sell it better. The general (wishes them®) to defend the town (to the last‘”). I do not wish* them to sell wine. ‘Imperfect. He wished® that I should not answer’. I wished that thou mightest hear the music of the new opera. In order that she (might correspond®®) with her friends. They would be sorry* that we should wait (the whole day®!). We (were afraid*) you would lose your way®. I wished that the children should not spill” (any water) on the carpet. Our master (would not allow us*) to correspond with the other pupils. 22 en peu de rendre 24 tondre 2 discourse. 2° maison de campagne 27 mordre 28 Ja 29 au péril 30 prétendre 3! avoir raison 32 suspendre 33 confondre 3* orgueil m. 35 tout le monde 36 Descendre 37 de 38 un peu plus longtemps 39 plus haut 40 ce que 41 sortir 42 lui défendre 43 de faire ** Nourrir “5 afin que 48 vouloir qu’ils 47 jusqu’à l’extrémité 48 vouloir que 49du vin 59 vouloir *! répondre 52 correspondre 53 fiché 5* toute la journée 55 craindre que 36 chemin 57 répandre 58 d’eau 59 ne voulait pas que nous Division of the FOURTH CONJUGATION. 169 The fourth conjugation, like the second, is divided into four classes, the Infinitive of which ends thus: — -andre as Rép-andre to spread &e. -endre ,, R-endre to render The I class ends in -ondre ,, Rép-ondre to answer -erdre ,, P-erdre to lose -ordre ,, Maordre to bite A -aitre » Conn-aître to know The IL class ends in | -oitre ,, Cr-oitre to grow The IIL classends in + -uire » Cond-uire to conduct f-aindre , Cr-aindre to fear The IV. class ends in < -eindre ,, P-eindre to paint -oindre ,, J-oindre to join ‘ j i ii AN PERTE i Lg 1 VERBS. 88 The first class is conjugated like rendre (167), the three others are as follows :— II. Class. Connaître, to know Connaissant, knowing Connu, known 1 know &e. Je connais Tu connais Il connaît Nous connazssons Vous connaissez Ils connaissent I knew Je connaissais, &c. 1 knew §ec. Je connus Tu connus Il connut Nous connûmes Vous connûtes Ils connurent I shall know Je connaîtrai, &ec. 1 should know Je connaitrais, &c. MODEL-VERBS EXT, Class. INFINITIVE PRESENT. Conduire, to conduct PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Conduisant, conducting PARTICIPLE PAST. Conduit, conducted INDICATIVE. PRESENT. I conduct &e. Je conduis Tu conduis Il conduit Nous conduisons Vous conduisez Ils conduisent IMPERFECT. I was conducting Je conduisais, &c. PAST DEFINITE. I conducted ec. Je conduisis Tu conduisis T1 conduisit Nous conduisimes Vous conduisites Ils conduisirent FUTURE, I shall conduct Je conduirai, &ec. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 1 should conduct Je conduirais, &e. IV. Class. Craindre, to fear Craignant, [ parlent-ils pas ? VERBS. IMPERFECT. { was not speaking &c. Was I speaking ? §c. Je ne parlais pas Parlais-je? Tu ne parlais pas Parlais-tu ? Il ne parlait pas Parlait-il ? Nous ne parlions pas Parlions-nous? Vous ne parliez pas Parliez-vous ? Ils ne parlaient pas Parlaient-ils ? PAST DEFINITE. 1 did not speak &e. Did I speak? §e. Je ne parla: pas Parlai-je ? Tu ne parlas pas Parlas-tu Il ne parla pas Parla-t-il? Parlâmes-nous? Parldtes-vous ? Parlèrent-ils ? Nous ne parlâmes pas Vous ne parlâtes pas Ils ne parlérent pas PAST INDEFINITE. I have not spoken §ec. Have 1 spoken? &c. Je n’ai pas parlé Ai-je parlé? Tu n’as pas parlé As-tu parlé? Il n’a pas parlé A-t-il parlé? Nous n’avons pasparlé Avons-nous parlé? Voas n’avez pas parlé Avez-vous parlé? Ils n’ont pas parlé Ont-ils parlé ? 87 Was I not speaking? &c. Ne parlais-je pas ? Ne parlais-tu pas? Ne parlaët-il pas ? Ne parlions-nous pas? Ne parliez-vous pas? Ne parlaient-ils pas? Did I rot speak? §e. Ne parlai-je pas? Ne parlus-tu pas ? Ne parla-t-il pas? Ne parldmes-nous pas? Ne parlâtes-vous pas? Ne parlèrent-ils pas ? Have I not spoken 2 gc. N’ai-je pas parlé? N’as-tu pas parlé ? N’a-t-il pas parlé N’avons-nous pas parlé? N’avez-vous pas parlé? N’ont-ils pas parlé ? ~ N.B.—Conjugate the whole verb in the same manner. et 179 Terminations of French Verbs. INFINITIVE. 1 =er, 2 =ir, 3 =oir, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT.— -ant, in all verbs INDICATIVE PRESENT. Singular Ist. pers. 2nd. 3rd. 1st. je tu il, elle nous -@ -es -e -8 -8 -t -ons -ds -de -d IMPERFECT. ais -ais -ait -ions 4 -re. PasT.— -é, -i, -u, -t Plural 2nd. 3td. vous ila, elles -ez -ent -iez -aient 88 -ral -Tais No 1st pers. -asse -isse -usse -insse N.B The verbs which deviate from the above terminations will be found in the -A3 -is -ins -ras -rais «€ O7 -S -asses -isses -usses -insses FRENCH GRAMMAR. PRETERIT. -a -âmes -it -imes -ut -ûmes -int -inmes FUTURE. -ra -rons CONDITIONAL. -rait -rions «e SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT. -e -ât -Ît -ût -int IMPERATIVE. -Ons -ions IMPERFECT. -assions -issions -ussions -inssions list of Irregular and Defective Verbs (208). derivative. -âtes -ites -ûtes -intes -rez -riez -assiez -issiez -ussiez -inssiez FORMATION OF TENSES. 180 The tenses of verbs are divided into prumitive and to form all the others; they are The Present of the Infinitive Participle present Participle past Present of the Indicative Past Definite -èrent -irent -urent -inrent -ront -raient -ent -ent -assent -issent -ussent -inssent The primitive tenses are those which serve - Aimer, &c. Aimant, &ec. Aimé, &e. J’aime, &c. J’aimai, &ec. The derivative tenses are those which are formed from the primitive. Rules for the Formation of Tenses. 181 From the INFINITIVE PRESENT are formed : — VEhBS. 89 The Future and the present of the Conditional, by chang - ing the terminations r, oir, re, into ra: and rais :— aime-r j'aime-rai j'aime-rais fini-r je fini-rai je fini-rais recev-oir je recev-rai je recev-rais rend-re je rend-rai je rend-rais 182 From the PARTICIPLE PRESENT are formed : — 1 The three persons plural of the Present of the Indica- tive, by changiig ant into ons, ez, ent :— aim-ant nous aim-ons - vous aim-ez ils aim-ent finiss-ant nous finiss-ons vous finiss-ez ils finiss-ent* recev-ant nous recev-ons vous recev-ez ils reçoiv-ent* rend-ant nous rend-ons vous rend-ez ils rend-ent 2 The Imperfect of the Indicative, and the Present of the Subjunctive, by changing ant into ais and into e :— aim-ant j'aim-ars que j’aim-e finiss-ant je finiss-ais que je finiss-e* recev-ant Je recev-ais que je reçoiv-e* rend-ant je rend-ais que je rend-e 183 With the PARTICIPLE PAST are formed : — All the compound tenses, by means of the auxiliary verbs avoir and être ; as j'ai aimé, il est aimé ; yavais regu, tu seras reçu, &c. 184 From the PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE is formed :— The Imperative, by suppressing the pronouns je, nous, vous ; as jaime, aime; nous finissons, finissons, vous re- cevez, recevez. 185 From the Past DEFINITE is formed : — The Imperfect of the Subjunctive, by adding se to the 2nd person of the singular :— tu aimas que j’aimas-se tu finis que je finis-se tu reçus que je reçus-se tu rendis que je rendis-se *# Exyept verbs of Class IV. of the second conjugation, and verbs of the third cone Jugatiofi sce pages 72 and 75. 30 FRENCH GRAMMAR. PASSIVE VERBS. 186 An active or transitive verb (and a transitive verb only *) becomes passive by adding its participle past to every mood and tense of the auxiliary verb être: and the participle agrees, as an adjective (42), in gender and num- ber with the subject to which it relates; as le roi est estimé the king is esteemed la reine est estimée the queen is esteemed votre frère fut puni your brother was punished votre sœur fut punie your sister was punished The conjugation of all passive verbs being simply the conjugation of the auxiliary verb être in all its moods and tenses, to which is added the participle past of any transi tive verb, two tenses only are given as a model. PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. Je suis 1 aimé I am loved Tu es or Thou art loved Il or elle est aimée He or she is loved Nous sommes aimés We are loved Vous êtes or You are loved Ils or elles sont J aimées They are loved PAST INDEFINITE. J’ai été aimé I have been loved Tu as été aimé Thou hast been loved Il a été aimé He has been loved Nous avons été aimés We have been loved Vous avez été aimés You have been loved Ils ont été aimés They have been loved NEUTER VERBS. 187 The neuter or intransitive verbs are conjugated like active verbs. Their compound tenses are generally formed with the auxiliary verb avoir ; as jai langui, j’avais dorms; except some which are conjugated with étre; as Aller, to go Devenir, to become Arriver, to arrive clore, to blow open Décéder, to die Entrer, to enter * Nore.—The two intransitive verbs obéir to obey, convenir to agree, may become passive ; as le maitre est 0béi, la chose est convenue. i ] 1 VERBS. ol Intervenir, to intervene Provenir, to proceed Mourir, to die Revenir, to come again Naître, to be born Survenir, to come unexpectedly Parvenir, to succeed Venir, to come 188 Some neuter verbs are conjugated with both avoir and être ; with avoir they express an action, with être the state resulting from that action ; such as demeurer, de- scendre, disparaître, monter, rester, &c. (See Syntax, p. 198.) EXAMPLES. With Avoir. on ÊTRE. \l a resté six jours à Paris il est resté à Paris he stopped six days at Paris he remained at Paris il a sorti un peu ce matin | il est sorti depuis une heure he has been out a little this morning | he went out an hour ago REFLECTIVE VERBS. 189 The reflective or pronominal verbs (121) are conju- gated with wo pronouns of the same person (or with a noun and a pronoun) throughout all their tenses, except in the Imperative mood. The pronouns are je me, tu te, il or elle se, mous nous, vous vous, ils or elles se. They are conjugated in their simple tenses like the regular verbs given as models; but in their compound tenses they always require the auxiliary verb être TO BE, whereas in English they take To HAVE, and the participle past must agree in gender and number with the objective pronoun, if it be direct; as je me suis coupé I have cut myself elle s’est coupée she has cut herself son fils s’est coupé his son has cut himself sa fille s’est coupée his daughter has cut herself 190 The French generally use the reflective form instead of the passive, as in English. Thus instead of saying la France est divisée en 89 départements, they prefer saying la France SE DIVISE, &c. FRENCH GRAMMAR, 191 Conjugation of a Reflective Verb. SE FLATTER, fo fluiter one’s self. INFINITIVE. PrESENT. — Se flatter, to flatter one’s self Pasr.—S’être flatté, to have flattered one’s self PARTICIPLES. PreseNT.— Se flattant, flattering one’s self Past. —S'étant flatté, having flattered one’s self INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. I flatter myself 1 have flattered myself Je me flatt-e Je me suis Tu te flatt-es Tat es Il se flatt-e is est Nous nous flatt-ons Nous nous sommes flatt-és Vous vous flatt-ez Vous vous êtes Is se flatt-ent Ils se sont IMPERFECT. Lethe ; ) PLUPERFECT. h Je nie flatt-Es Jem’ étais Ta te flatt-ais Ta > étais Il se flatt-ait ns était Nous nous flatt-ons Nous nous étions flatt-és | Vous vous flatt-iez Vous vous étiez flatt-és lis se flatt-aient Ils s’ ‘étaient flatt-és PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. Je me flatt-ai Je me fus Tu te f'att-as Tu te fus Il se flatt-a H se fut Nous nous flatt-âmes Nous nous fümes Vous 7ous flatt-âtes Vous vous fltes flatt és Ils se flatt-èrent Ils se furent flatt-és FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. | Je me flatt-erai Je me serai flatt-é Tu te flatt-eras Tuite seras flatt-é Il se flatt-era Il se sera flatt-é Nous nous flatt-erons Nous nous serons flatt- Vous vous flatt-erez Vous vous serez flatt- Ils se flatt-eront Ils se seront sd a wi VERBS. 95 CONDITIONAL. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. | PRESENT, PAST. Je me flatt-erais Je me serais flatt-é Tu te flatt-erais Tu te serais flatt-é Il se flatt-erait Il se serait flatt-é Nous nous flatt-erions Nous nous serions flatt-és Vous vous flatt-eriez Vous vous seriez flatt-és Ils se flatt-craient Ils se seraient flatt-és IMPERATIVR. ; Flatt-e-toi (90) Flatter thyself Flatt-ons-nous Let us flatter ourselves Flatt-ez-vous Fi-tter yourself (or yourselves) SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PAST. Que je me flatt-e Que je me sois flatt-¢ Que tu te flatt-es Que tu te sois flatt-é Qu’il se flatt-e Qu’il se soit flatt-é Que nous nous ‘flatt-ions Que nous nous soyons flatt-és Que vous vous flatt-iez Que vous vous soyez flatt-és Qu’ils se flatt-ent Qu’ils se soient flatt-és IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Que je me flatt-asse Que je me fusse flatt-é Que tu te flatt asses Que tu te fusses flatt-é : Qu’il se flatt-ât Qu’il se fût fatt-é Que nous nous fatt-assions Que nous nous fussions flatt és Que vous vous flatt-assiez Que vous vous fussiez flatt-és Qu'ils se flatt-assent Qu'ils se fussent flatt-és —_— 192 Reflective Verb, Conjugated Negatively, Interrogatively, and Interrogatively with a Negation. INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT.—Ne pas s’habiller not to dress PasT.-—Ne s’être pas habillé, not to have dressed one’s self PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Ne s’habillant pas not dressing one’s self PARTICIPLE PAST. Ne s’étant pas habillé not having dressed one’s self v4 FRENCH GRAMMAR. INDICATIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. Wegatively. PRESENT. I do not dress myself &ec. Je ne m’habille pas Tu ne t'habilles pas Il ne s’habille pas Nous ne nous habillons pas Vous ne vous habillez pas Ils ne s’habillent pas IMPERFECT. I was not dressing myself Je ne m’habillais pas, &c. PRETERIT. 1 did not dress myself Je ne m’habillai pas, &e. FUTURE. I skall not dress myself Je ne m’habillerai pas, &e. PAST INDEFINITE. I have not dressed myself §u. Je ne me suis pas habillé Tu ne t’es pas habillé Il ne s’est pas habillé Nous ne nous sommes pas habillés Vous ne vous êtes pas habillés Ils ne se sont pas habillés PLUPERFECT. I had not dressed myself Je ne m’étais pas habillé, &c. PAST ANTERIOR. I kad not dressed myself. Je ne me fus pas habillé, &c. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall not have dressed myself Je ne me serai pas habillé, &ec. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. “I should not dress myself Je ne m’habillerais pas, &c. 193 When the Imperative of a reflective verb is negative, the pro- PAST. I should not Lave dressed myself Je ne me serais pas habillé, &e. noun precedes the verb in all persons (92). IMPERATIVE MOOD (92). Ne t’habille pas Ne nous habillons pas Ne vous habillez pas Do not dress thyself Let us not dress ourselves Do not dress yourselves Interrogatively (143). PRESENT. Do I dress myself? &c. M’habillé-je ? (176) T’habilles-tu ? S’habille-t-il ? Nous habillons-nous ? Vous habillez-vous ? S'habillent-ils ? PAST INDEFINITE. Have I dressed myself? &e. Me suis-je habillé ? T’es-tu habillé ? S’est-il habillé ? Nous sommes-nous habillés ? Vous êtes-vous habillés ? Se sont-ils habillés ? VERBS, 98 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Was I dressing myself? Had I dressed myself ? M'habillais-je? &c. M’étais-je habillé ? &c. PRETERIT. PAST ANTERIOR. Did I dress myself ? Had I dressed myself? M’habillai-je ? &c. Me fus-je habillé ? &c. FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Shall I dress myself? Shall I have dressed myself f M’habillerai-je ? &ec. Me serai-je habillé ? &e. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Should I dress myself ? Should I have dressed myself ? M’habillerais-je ? &c. Me serais-je habillé ? &c. Interrogatively with a Negation (143). PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE. Do I not dress myself ? Have I not dressed myself? Ne m’habillé-je pas? Ne me suis-je pas habillé ? Ne t’habilles-tu pas ? Ne t’es-tu pas habillé ? Ne s’habille-t-il pas ? Ne s’est-il pas habillé ? Ne nous habillons-nous pas? Ne nous sommes-nous pas habillés Ne vous habillez-vous pas ? Ne vous êtes-vous pas habillés ? Ne s’habillent-ils pas ? Ne se sont-ils pas habillés ? IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Was I not dressing myself ? Hud I not dressed myself? Ne m’habillais-je pas? &c. Ne m’étais-je pas habillé? &ec. PRETERIT. PAST ANTERIOR. Did I not dress myself ? Had I not dressed myself? Ne m’habillai-je pas, &c. Ne me fus-je pas habillé ? &e, FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Shall 1 not dress myself ? Shall I not have dressed myself? Ne m’habillerai-je pas ? &c. Ne me serai-je pas habillé ? &e. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Should I not dress myself ? Should I not have dressed myself? Ne m’habillerais-je pas? &ec. Ne me serais-je pas habillé ? &e. 96 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Tèead and translute. Je me couche ordinairement à onze heures. Nous nous pro- menons (559, 560) tous les jours vers trois heures de l’après- midi. Vous vous levez trop matin. Comment vous portez-vous ? | Je me porte bien, merci. Ma sœur s’est enrhumée à la promenade. Ils se repentent de ce qu’ils ont fait. Comment s'appelle cette ville? Je ne me rappelle pas le nom. Il se plaignait d’un mal de tête. Vous vous fatiguez trop, reposez-vous un peu. Nous nous | proposions de vous écrire. Ils se réjouiront de votre succes. | Vous êtes-vous lavé ce matin? Non, je me suis levé trop tard. Je me fâcherai si cela vous arrive encore. Votre frère se souvient-il de ce que je lui ai dit? Ne vous tromperiez-vous pas dans votre calcul? On voulait que je me conformasse aux règles de la maison. Il s'était servi de votre recommandation pour obtenir la place. Vous vous seriez exposés an plus grand danger, si vous vous étiez promenés sur cette route. Exercise on Reflective Verbs. Simple Tenses. Indicative present. I rise! every morning at six o'clock. She “(dresses herself?) at ten o'clock. We do not (amuse ourselves®). Do you remember! what® I told® you yesterday? They (torment them- selves”) in vain. Are the children dressing themselves? Imperfect. 1 used to bathe® every day in summer. The queen was walking® in her park. Did he not laugh'® at you? We were complaining’ without reason. They (were warming themselves'?) before the stove!®. Were you not warming yourself? Past definite. I distrusted!* that man. Did his son behave'® well towards'® you ? We (rejoiced at'’) his departure. They (were very well'®) during the winter. Did you amuse yourself much ? Future. [| shall remember!” your birthday. Will he soon (fall. asleep?) ? We shall walk” an hour before dinner. Will you not (interfere with?) the conversation? They will embark® the fifth of May. Will not your friends complain if you come ? Conditional present. [ should (enrich myself?!) by that trade. Would she (devote herself?) to drawing and painting®? We (wculd defend ourselves?) with courage. (Would you not make your escape®) if you could? They would (expose themselves®) to the greatest danger. Would your sisters remember my birthday ? ] Imperative. Remember that thou art mortal. Do not rejoice to see your cnemies unhappy. Rest® a little, my friend. Let us not (de- ceive ourselves®). Refresh® yourselves. 1se lever 2s’habiller 3 s’amuser “serappeler 5ceque Sdire 7 se tourmen- ter S8se baigner 9se promener !9°se moquer !!se plaindre !2se chauffer !3 poële m. 14 se méfier de !* se comporter !Senvers !7 se réjouir de !8se porter très-bien 19se souvenir de (162) 20 s’endormir (180) 2! se promener ?2se mêler à 3 s’embarquer_ 2 s'enrichir 2 s’appliquerà 26 peinture f. 77 se défendre @s’échapper Z s’exposer 30 se reposer 3! se tromper 32 se rafraîchir VERES. : 97 Subjunctive present. I must (inquire after?) him. I wish? he (may devote himself®®) to this study with more zeal. We must® {accustom ourselves®”’) to work. I do not think that you repent? of your errors. Do you think that they will perceive® our designs ? Emperfect. My father wished that I (should excuse myself), Was it necessary"! that we should trust’? those men? We wished you (to rejoice at*®) that news. It was required! that they should rise at daybreak, 33 s’informer de 31 vouloir que 35 s'appliquer 36 [1 faut que 37 s’accoutumer 3 se repentir (180) 39 s’apercevoir de 4 s’excuser 41 Fallait-il 42sec fierd 43 se réjouir de 44 On exigeait “5 au point du jour. Compound Tenses. Past indefinite. I have trusted to! your father. Has Le (enriched himself?) at your expense® ? You have not subscribed! to the concert. These flowers have (faded away?®). Pluperfect. I had dressed myself too late. Had he not repented of his imprudence ? We had confided® too inconsiderately” in® him. Your father and mother had complained® of you. Past anterior. When I had (amused myself!®), I returned home!2. When we had approached' him, he rose, and spoke thus!* You had submitted'® to their orders. Future anterior. (As soon as) I (shall have taken rest'?), I will (begin again'®). She will have (degraded herself:?). We shall have (grown rich”) before them. They will have seized® their arms before daybreak. ; Conditional past. I should have repented® of my temerity. Would he have (devoted himself”) to the service of his country”! ? Those soldiers would have revolted. Subjunctive past. Is it possible he should have (disguised him. self 6) so cleverly” ? I do not believe? that she has fled® (It is feared™®) that they have (drowned themselves*). Do you believe that they have been deceived*? so grossly* ? Pluperfect. Ile feared** that I should have (lost myself *) in the forest. We would have wished°9 you to remember” that message*s. Would he have wished that you should have (meddled with®) that affair ? 1se fierd 2 s'enrichir 3 dépens pl. 4 s'abonner 5sefaner Sseconfier 7 légère- ment “à 9se plaindre (172) 10 s’amuser !! revenir (162) !?chez moi !3 s’ap- procher de !4 ainsi 15 se soumettre (irr.) 16 Dès que !7 se reposer !8 recommencer 9 se dégrader 20 s'enrichir 2! s’emparer de 22se repentir 23 se dévouer 2 pays m. 25 ge révolter 26 se déguiser 27 si adroitement 28 croire (irr.) 29 s’enfuir (777.) # On craint 3! se noyer 32ge tromper 33si grossièrement 34 Il craignait 3 s’égarer 36 vouloir que 37 se rappeler 38 commission f. 39 se mêler de. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 194 The impersonal verbs are conjugated, siloriiog 6 to fhe termination of their Infinitive mood, on one of the four F 98 FRENCH GRAMMAK. conjugations ; they are used in the third person singular only ; as neiger to snow il neige il neigeait il a neigé geler to freeze il gèle il gelait il a gelé pleuvoir to rain il pleut il pleuvait , ila plu tonner to thunder il tonne il tonnait il a tonné 195 Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs. Y AVOIR, there to be. INFINITIVE MOOD. PreSENT. — Y avoir, there to be Past. — Y avoir eu, there to have been PARTICIPLES. Presext. — Y ayant, there beiny Past. —Y ayant eu, there having been INDICATIVE Simple Tenses. PRESENT, Ilya “There is or are IMPERFECT. Il y avait There was or were PAST DEFINITE. Ii y eut Thère was or wcre FUTURE. Il y aura There will be MOOD. Compound Tenses: PAST INDEFINITE, Il y a eu There has or have been PLUPERFECT. M y avait eu There had been PAST ANTERIOR. I! y eut eu There had been FUTURE ANTERICE I y aura eu There will have been CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. Il y aurait There would be PAST. H y aurait eu There would have beer VERBS. … (B : SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST, Qu'il y ait Qu’il y ait eu That there may be That there may have been IMPERFECT, PLUPERFECT. Qu'il y eût Qu’il y eût eu That there might be That there might have been 296 Ezamples of Y AVOIR, used negatwely, interrogatively, $e, Il n’y a pas Y a-t-il? N'y a-t-il pas? Il n’y avait pas Y avait-il? N’y avait-il pas? Il n’y eut pas Y eut-il? N’y eut-il pas ? Il n’y aura pas Y aura-t-il ? N’y aura-t-il pas? 107 NoTE—Z est is frequently used in the sense of i y a; as Il est des moments critiques dans la vie. There are critical moments in one’s life. + 198 FALLOIR, (o Le necessary, must, INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. — Falloir, to be necessary Past. — Avoir fallu, to have been necessary PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. — (None) Pasr. — Fallu, ayant fallu, having been necessary INDICATIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses; PRESENT. PAST INDEFINITE, Il faut T1 a fallu 1t is necessary (it must) It has been necessary ie IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. | M fallait Il avait fallu | Il was necessary It had been necessary PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR. Il fallut Il ent failu It was necessary lt had been necesecry ; 2 100 : FRENCH GRAMMAR. FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Il faudra Il aura fallu It will be necessary It will have been necessary CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. PAST Il faudrait Il aurait fallu It would be necessary It would have been necessas y SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Qu’il faille Qu'il ait fallu That it may be necessary That it may have been necessary IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Qu’il fallàt Qu'il eût fallu That it might be necessary That it might have been necessary 139 The English defective verb must, is expressed by the impersonal verb falloir in two ways; as I must go il faut que je parte or il me Thou must go il faut que tu partes or il te He must go il faut qu’il parte or il lui ; We must go il faut que nous partions or il nous faut parte You must go il faut que vous partiez or il vous They must go il faut qu'ils partent or il leur 200 Falloir is generally followed by the subjunctive with gue ; as 1 il faut que j’éerive J must write il fuudra qu’il parte he will be obliged to go 201 Falloir generally implies need or want, and is then preceded by one of the objective pronouns, me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, or followed by a substantive governed by the preposition a; as il me faut un habit I want a coat il lui faut de l’argent he wants mone" il vous faut du repos you want rest il faut une robe à ma sœur my sister wants a dress 202 The vert Faire is used impersonally, when applied VERBS. 101 to the state of the weather, and with the werds jour, nuit, soleil, vent, &c. ; as il fait it is il faisait it was il fit beau temps it was ÿ fine wcatier il fera it will be J il ferait it would be il fait chaud it is warm il faisait froid it was cold il fait jour it 1s daylight il faisait nuit it was night il fait du vent it is windy il fait de l'orage il is stormy il fait de la poussière, &c. it is dusty, §c. 203 But when (speaking of the weather) the subject to the verb to be is either weather, doy, night, morning, even- ing, &ec., TO BE is expressed by étre, and not by fuire; as the weather is very fine le temps est très-beau the evening was beautiful la soirée était belle 204 Many verbs in French are frequently used imper- sonally ; as il arrive, il happens il semble, it seems il s’agit, the matter is . il se peut, it is possible il convient, it becomes il sied, it is becoming il s’ensuit, it follows il suffit, it is enough il fait, it is (202) il reste, there remains il importe, it matters il me tarde, Z long il paraît, it appears il tient, it depends Reed and translate. Combien y a-t-il d'années que vous habitez l'Angleterre? Il y aura quinze ans au mois de janvier prochain. Je ne croyais pas qu’il y eût si longtemps. ll faut que je réponde à mon père aujourd’hui. Il me faut du papier et des enveloppes. 11 fallait venir plus tôt. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de monde à la soirée de l'ambassadeur russe? Il n’y avait pas plus de cent personnes la dernière fois. Y a-t-il loin d’ici au lac de Genève? Je crois qu’il y a à peu près deux lieues. Faut-il monter pour y arriver ? Non, il nous faudra descendre. Croyez-vous qu’il faille prendre une voiture? Non, je ne pense pas que nous en ayons besoin. Quel temps fait-il? Il fait beaucoup de vent. Il aurait fallu prendre un parapluie, 102 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Exercise on the Impersonal Verbs Y avoir and Fulloir. (Is there') any? fire in the drawing-room*? No; (there is not any*), I want* a large house. My father must® buy two horses. - You must go” and see her®. There has been a great accident. There were several® men killed. There was one woman wounded’. It (was necessary!) to carry’? her on a litter’. Has it been necessary to (cut her!) leg? There were (more than) fifty guns'® on the walls of the town. There will be a concert to-morrow night!”. Will it be neces- sary (to get up'®) early? There would be more! pleasure if you were with us. It would be necessary to warn® him. There would have been more people? if the weather had been fine. It would have been necessary (to send her”) a carriage. Do you think” that there may be any? danger? I did not think that it was necessary to write (to him). Is there (any one”°) who (wishes for””) water? weather is® (202) it? Is it warm or cold? It is bad weather. It was very? windy yesterday, and to-day it is very dusty. 1Y avoir 2du 3salonm. 4n’yen avoir pas 5 me falloir 6 falloir que 7 aller 8la 9 plusieurs 10 blessé !! falloir 12 porter 13 brancard m. !4lui couper la 15 plus de 16 canon 17 soir 18se lever 19 plus de 20 prévenir 2! monde lui envoyer 2 penser 2*du lui 26 quelqu’un 27 désirer 2 faire 29 beaucoup de. Idiomatic Tenses of Verbs. 205 The idiomatic tenses of verbs are formed with the assistance of venir, aller, and devoir. As all verbs may be conjugated with the same idiomatic constructions, the verb avoir only is given as a model. ‘What sort of PAST JUST ELAPSED. I have just had §ec. Je viens d’avoir Tu viens d’avoir Il vient d’avoir Nous venons d’avoir Vous venez d'avoir Is viennent d’avoir PAST DEFINITE ANTERIOR. I had just had &c. Je venais d’avoir Tu venais d’avoir Il venait d’avoir Nous venions d’avoir Vous veniez d’avoir Ils venaient d’avoir FUTURE ANTERIOR. I was going to have &e. J’allais avoir Tu allais avoir Il allait avoir Nous allions avoir Vous alliez avoir ls allaient avoir CONDITIONAL IMPERFECT. I was to have §e. Je devais avoir Tu devais avoir Il devait avoir Nous devions avoir Vous deviez avoir Is devaient avoir 3 FUTURE PROXIMATE. 7 am going to have yu. Je vais avoir Tu vas avoir Il va avoir Nous allons avoir Vous allez avoir Ils vont avoir FUTURE INDEFINITE. I am to have &c. Je dois avoir Tu dois avoir N doit avoir Nous devons avoir Vous devez avoir Ils doivent avoir VERBS. CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 1 ought or should have &e. Je devrais avoir Tu devrais avoir Il devrait avoir Nous devrions avoir Vous devriez avoir Ils devraient avoir CONDITIONAL ANTERIOR. 1 ought or should have had &c. J’aurais di avoir Tu aurais dû avoir Il aurait dû avoir Nous aurions dû avoir Vous auriez dû avoir Ils auraient dû avoir Read and translate. Je viens de voir vos sœurs dans la rue. L’ambassadeur vient de partir pour Vienne. Nous venions de déjeuner avec le général. Ces messieurs venaient de sortir lorsque j'ai reçu votre lettre. Je vais parler à son maître. Allez-vous faire une visite au duc? Nous allions nous embarquer lorsque le feu éclata dans le vais- seau. Vous ne devriez pas inviter cet homme-là chez vous ; j'aurais dû vous le dire plus tôt. Vous allez avoir un congé aujourd’hui. Je devais partir ce matin pour Boulogne, mais le mauvais temps m'a retenu. N’allez-vous pas vous enrhumer, si vous laissez la fenêtre ouverte? Quand votre père doit-il publier son nouvel ouvrage? Va-t-il l’annoncer dans les journaux ? N’alliez-vous pas écrire à votre libraire ? Exercise on the Idiomatic Tenses. I have just spoken’ to his father. We have just arrived (from the?) Continent. The children have just had their dinner. My brother had just written® to you about! our affair. You had just passed when I saw® him. I am going to learn® German. Is he not going to buy a house? We are going to have an (evening party”). They are going to sell their furniture’. Weare to go® to the opera to-morrow evening. Is net your brother to marry'® my cousin? I was going to ask you to come'! with us. We were going to take!’ our lesson when the queen arrived in the school. Are you not to see him this evening? Your son should ride'® every morning for his health. You should go to' Scotland in summer. He ought to have given you something (to eat'®). Yparler Zdu 3écrire “au sujet de 5vis Sapprendre 7 soirée f. 8 meubles 9 aller 10 épouser M venir 12 prendre !3 monter A cheval !‘en !° à manger. 104 FRENCH GRAMMAR. IRREGULAR VERBS. 206 All those verbs that are not conjugated in all their tenses and persons like the models already given, are called irregular. Alphabetical List of the Irregular and Defective Verns. In the following list, all the irregularities of the verbs are given in tall; but when the tenses of a verb are regular, the first person only is given. ‘The verbs printed in black letters, as Absoudre, are defective (133) The tenses are placed in the following order :— i 1 INFINITIVE 6 PAST DEFINITE » 2 PARTICIPLE PRESENT 7 FUTURE 3 PARTICIPLE PAST 8 CONDITIONAL PRESENT 4 INDICATIVE PRESENT 9 IMPERATIVE 5 IMPERFECT 10 SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT 11 IMPERFECT —_— ABATTRE, to pull down. Conjugated like Battre ; which see. Absoudre, fo absolve. 2 Absolvant; 3 absous, m., absoute, f. 4 J’absous, absous, absout ; absolvons, absolvez, absolvent. 5 J'ab- solvais. 7 J’absoudrai. 8 J’absoudrais. 9 Absous; absolvons. -ez. 10 Que jabsolve. Abstraire, lo abstract ; like Traire. ACCOURIR, to run, to hasten ; like Courir. Accroire, only used in the infinitive with fuire; as, fuire accroire, to impose upon, to make one believe, ACCUEILLIR, to receive, to welcome ; like Cueillir. ACQUERIR, to acquire. 2 Acquérant; 3 acquis. 4 J'acquiers, acquiers, acquiert; acquérons, acquérez, acquièrent. 5 J'acquérais. 6 J’ac- quis. 7 J'acquerrai.* 8 J’acquerrais. 9 Acquiers ; acquérons, -ez. 10 Que j'acquière, -es, -e; que nous acquérions, -iez, qu’ils acquièrent. 11 Que j'acquisse. 4 7 * Nore—The double r in the future and the conditional must be soundai | strongly. ‘This applies also to the verbs courir and mourir. À ADMETTRE, {0 admit ; like Mettre. “ ÀLLEP, lo go. va ; allons, allez, vont. 9 Va, qu’il aille ; allons, allez, qu’ils aillent. Ex. 2 Allant ; 3 allé Que jallasse. 208 Note. —We use both être allé and avoir été for the compound tenses of this verb. Etre alié signifies to be gone, and avoir été signifies to have been or returned. elle est allte à Paris elle a été deux fois à Paris VERBS. (être allé or avoir été). 5 J’allais. 6 J'ailai. 7 J'irai she is gone to Paris : she has been twice to Paris 103 4 Je vais, vas, 8 J’irais. 10 Que j'aille. 11 209 ler is often used as a reflective verb with ez ; as s’en aller to go away. INFINITIVE. Simple Tenses. S'en aller S'en allant Compound Tenses. S’en être allé S’en étant allé INDICATIVE. PRESENT. I am going away §c- Je m'en vais Tu t’en vas 11 s’en va Nous nous en allons Vous vous en allez Ils s’en vont Je men allais, &c. Je m’en allai, &c. Je m’en irai, &c. Je m’en irais, &c. Que je m’en aille, &c. Que je m’en allasse, &c. PAST INDEFINITE. I have gone away $c. Je m’en suis allé I'u ten es allé Il s’en est allé Nous nous en sommes allés Vous vous en êtes allés Ils s'en sont allés Je m'en étais allé, &e. Je m en fus allé, &c. Je m'en serai allé, &c. Je m'en serais allé, &e. Que je m’en sois allé, &c. Que je m'en fusse allé, &c. IMPERATIVE. Affirmatively. Va-t’en Qu'il s’en aille Allons-nous-en Allez-vous-en Qu’ils s’en aillent Negatively. Ne t’en va pas Qu’il ne s’en aille pas Ne nous en allons pas Ne vous en allez pas Qu'ils ne s’en aillent pas 210 Note.—The Imperative »a takes an s for the sake of euphony when followed hy adverb, Or en pronoun ; as vas-y, vas-en chercher. infinitive of a verb, va does not take s ; as va y porter mes ordres. when followed by the preposition en ; as va en Italie. APPRENDRE, fo learn ; ASsSAILLIR, to attack, to assuil, to assault. 4 J’assaill-e, -es, e; assaill-ons, -ez, -ent. 8 J’assaillirais. saillis. saille. ASSEOIR (8), to sit down. 2 7 J'assaillirai. 11 Que j’assaillisse. S’asseyant ; 3 assis. like Prendre 5 J’assaillais. 9 Assaille. But when y precodes the present Va does not take s 2 Assaillant ; 3 assailli. 6 J’as- 10 Que j'as- 4 Je m’assieds, tu t'assieds, il s’assied; nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s’asseyent. m’asseycral. 5 Je m’asseyais. S Je m’assiérais cr m’asseyerais. a F à 6 Je m’assis. 7 Je m'’assiérai or 9 Assieds toi 106 FRENCH GRAMMAR qu'il s’asseye ; asseyons-nous, asseyez-vous, qu'ils s'asseyent 10 Que je m’asseye. 11 Que je m’assisse. Asscoir is also frequently used as an active verb; as asscycx cel enfant. Attraire, to allure (seldom used) ; like Traire. Avenir or Advenir, to happen (an } ,-, : impersonal verb seldom used) ; like Venir. BATTRE, to beat. 2 Battant; 3 battu. 4 Je hats, bats, bat; pattons, battez, battent. 5 Je battais. 6 Je battis 7 Je battrai. 8 Je battrais. 9 Bats, qu’il batte ; battons, -ez, qu’ils battent. 10 Que je batte. 11 Que je battisse. BÉNIR, to bless, is regular. (See 154.) BorrE, lo drink. 2 Buvant; 3 bu. 4 Je bois, bois, boit; buv-ons, -ez, boivent. 5 Je buvais. 6 Je bus. 7 Je boirai. 8 Je boirais. 9 Bois, qu’il boive ; buvons, -ez, qu’ils boivent. 10 Que je boive, -es, -e; que nous buvions, -ez, qu’ils boivent. 11 Que je busse. BOUILLIR, to boil. 2 Bouillant; 3 bouilli 4 Je bous, bous, bout ; bouill-ons, ez, -eut. 5 Je bouillais. 6 Je bouillis. 7 Je bouil- lirai. 8 Je bouillirais. 9 Bous, qu’il bouille ; bouillons, -ez, qu’ils bouillent. 10 Que je bouille. 11 Que je bouillisse. Bouillir, as an active verb, is only used in the infinitive mood with faire ; as faites bouillir cette viande boil that meat. Braire, fo bray. 4 Il brait: ils braient. 7 Il braira ; ils brairont. 8 Il brairait ; ils brairaient. Bruire, fo roar, to rustle. 2 Bruyant. 4 Ilbruit 5 Il bruyait and bruissait ; ils bruyaient und bruissaient. 2 Choir, to full. Past part. Chu. CIRCONCIRE, fo cireumcise ; like Jédrre. CIRCONSCRIRE, fo circumscribe ; like Ecrire. Clore, to close, to enclose. 2 Closant; 3 Clos. 4 Je clos, clos, clôt. 7 Je clorai. 8 Je clorais. 9 Clos. 10 Que je close. COMBATTRE, do fight; like Battre, COMMETTRE, to commit ; like Mettre. COMPLAIRE, to please ; like Plaire, COMPRENDRE, to understand; like Prendre. COMPROMETTRE, {0 compromise ; iike Mettre. CONCLURE, fo conclude. 2 Concluant ; 8 conclu. 4 Je concl-us, -us, -ut; concl-uons, -uez, -uent. 5 Je concluais. 6 Je conclus. 7 Je conclurai. 8 Je conclurais. 9 Conclus, qu’il conclue; concluons, -ez, qu’ils concluent. 10 Que je conclue. 11 Que je conclusse. ili deca I LL aa tts alii ag 3 3 5 3 VERBS. 107 CoONCOURIR, fo concur ; like Courir. CONFIRE, fo preserve (in sweets), fo ke Afédire pickle (in vinegar) ; ? CONQUERIR, fo conquer, like Acquérir, but only used in the Infinitive and the following tenses :— Participies, Conquérant, conquis. Past def. Je conquis. Subj. imperf. Que je conquisse. Also in the compound tenses. J'ai conquis, &c CONTREDIRE, to contradict ; like Médire. CONTREFAIRE, to counterfeit ; like Faire. CONVAINCRE, to convince ; like Vaincre, CORROMPRE, lo corrupt; like Rompre. COUDRE, to sew. 2 Cousant ; 3 Cousu. 4 Je couds, couds, coud ; cous-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je cousais. 6 Je cousis. 7 Je coudrai. 8 Je coudrais. 9 Couds, qu’il couse ; cousons, -ez, qu’ils cousent. 10 Que je couse. 11 Que je cousisse. COURIR, to run. 2 Courant; 3 couru. 4 Je cours, cours, court ; courons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je courais. 6 Je courus. 7 Je courrai (207). 8 Je courrais 9 Cours, qu’il coure; courons, -ez, qu’ils courent. 10 Que je coure. 11 Que je courusse. CROIRE, to believe. 2 Croyant; 3 cru. 4 Je crois, crois, croît ; croyons, croyez, croient. 5 Je croyais. 6 Jecrus. 7 Je croirai, 8 Jecroirais. 9 Crois, qu’il croie ; croyons, croyez, qu’ils croient, 10 Que je croie, croies, croie ; que nous croyions, croyiez, croient. 11 Que je crusse. CUEILLIR, fo gather. 2 Cueillant; 3 cuecilli, 4 Je cueill-e, -es, -e; cueill-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je cueillais. 6 Je cueillis. 7 Je cueil- lerai. 8 Je cueillerais 9 Cueille, qu’il cueille; cueillons, -ez, qu’ils cueillent. 10 Que je cueille, 11 Que je cueillisse. DÉBATTRE, to debate ; like Battre, Déchoir, to full, to sink, to decline. (No pres. part) 3 Déchn. 4 Je déchois, déchois, déchoit ; déchoyons, déchoyez, déchoient. 6 Je déchus. 7 Je décherrai. 8 Je décherrais. 10 Que je déchoie. 11 Que je déchusse, Déclore, to unclose ; like Clore. DÉCOUDRE, fo unsew ; like Coudre. DECRIRE, to describe ; like Écrire. DEDIRE, to contradict, to gainsay ; like Médire. DEFAILLIR, fo decay, to fall, to fuint. Past part. Difailli— Indie. plur. Nous défaill-ons, -ez, -ent. Imperfect. Je défaillais. Past def. Je défaillis, DEFAIRE, to undo ; like Faire. 108 FRENCH GRAMMAR, DÉNETTRE, to dislocate, to dismiss ; like Mrêtre, DÉPLAIRE, to displease ; like Paire. Dépourvoir, to deprive. Past part. Dépourvu. DÉSAPPRENDRE, to unlearn ; like Prendre. DEVETIR, to undress; like Vétir. DIRE, to say, to tell. 2 Disant ; 3 dit. 4 Je dis, dis, dit; disons, dites, disent. 5 Je disais. 6 Je dis. 7 Je dirai. 8 Jedirais. 9 Dis, qu’il dise ; disons, dites, qu’ils disent. 10 Que je dise. 11 Que je disse. DISCOURIR, fo discourse ; like Courir. Dissoudre, to dissolve ; like Absoudre. Distraire, to divert ; like Traire. ÉBATTRE (S’), to Le merry ; like Battre. ‘ Ébouillir, do boil away. Past part. Ébouilli. - 3 Nr» , : Échoir, fo expire, lo be due to full, to happen. 2 Iichéant; 3 échm. 4 Il échoit or échet ; ils échoient or échéent. 6 J’échus. 7 J’écher- rai. 8 J'écherrais 10 Que j'échusse. , Éclore, to blow; to hatch. 3 Éclos. 4 Il éclot ; ils éclosent. 7 Il éclora ; ils écloront. 8 II éclorait ; ils écloraient. 10 Qu’il éclose ; qu’ils éclosent. 7 Écrire, to write. 2 EÉcrivant; 3 écrit. 4 J'Ccris, écris, Écrit; écri-vons, -vez, -vent. 5 d’écrivais. 6 J'écrivis. 7 J’écrirai. 8 Wécri-rais 9 Ecris, qu’il écrive ; Écri-vons, -vez, qu’ils écrivent. 10 Que j’écrive. 11 Que j’Cerivisse. ÉuirE, to elect ; like Lire. Emboire, fo imbibe ; like Boire. 3 Énoupre, to whet ; like Moudre. 3 Émouvoir, to stir up ; like Mouroir. i Enclere, lo enclose ; like Clore. 3 Encourir, fo incur; like Courir. ; ENFUIR (s’), to fly; like Fuir. EXQUERIR (8°), to inquire; like Acquérir. ENSUIVRE (8%), to follow (Impers.) ; like Suivre, ENTRELUIRE, lo glimmer ; like Luire. ENTRIMETTRE (S’), to interpose ; like Mettre, ENTREPRENDRE, to vadertake ; lik> Prendre. VERBS. 109 ENTREVOIR, lo have a glimpse of; like Voor. ENvoyEn, fo send. 2 Envoyant; 3 envoye: 4 J'envoi-e, -cs. -e ; envoy-ons, -ez, envoient. 5 J’envoyais. 6 J'envoyai. 7 J'en- verrai. 8 J’enverrais. 9 Envoie, qu'il envoie; envoy-ons, -ez, qu’ils envoient. 10 Que j’envoi-e, -es, -e ; que nous envoy-ions, -iez, envoient. 11 Que j'envoyasse. , . EPrRENDRE (8), to Le smitten ; like Prendre ; but seldom used except in the past participle, épris, m., éprise, f. ph . . ÉquIvALOIR, fo be equivalent; like Valoir EXCLURE, to exclude ; ; like Conclure. EXTRAIRE, fo extract ; like Traire. Faillir, to fuil; to err; to be near. 2 Faillant ; 3 failli. Past. def. Je faillis. Used in the compound tenses with avoir. FAIRE, to make, to do. 2 Faisant ; 3 fait. 4 Je fais, fais, fait ; faisons, faites, font. 5 Je faisais. 6 Jefis. 7 Je ferai. 8 Je ferais. 9 Fais, qu’il fasse; faisons, faites, qu'ils fassent. 10 Que je fasse. 11 Que je fisse. We may write in the pres. of the Ind. fesons or fudisons; in the Imperf. fesais, &e., or faisais ; and in the pres. part. fesant or fuisant. Férir, fo strike, is only uscd in the expression sans coup férir, without striking a blow. FLEURIR. (See 156.) F'orclore, to debur. Past part. Forclos. No other tense. Forfaire, to forfeit. Past part. only, Forfuit. Frire, to fry. Past part. frit. Je fris, tu fris, il frit (no plar.). Fut. Je frirai. Cond. Je frirais. Imperat. 2nd pers. only, fris. In all the other tenses it is conjugated with the verb faire and the infi- nitive frire ; as je fuisais frire; nous fuisons frire, &c. Furr, to fly, to shun. 2 Fuyant; 3 fui. 4 Je fu-is, -is, -it; fuy- ons, -ez, fuient. 5 Je fuyais. 6 Je fuis. 7 Je fuirai. 8 Je fuirais. 9 Fuis, qu’il fuie ; fuy-ons, -ez, qu’ils fuient. 10 Que je fuie. 11 Que je fuisse. The present and imperfect of the subjunctive are scldom used ; they are supplied by que je prenne la fuite ; que je prisse la fuite. Gésir, to lie. Gisant. Ind. pres. Il gît; nous gisons, vous gisez, ils gisent. Imperf. Je gis-ais, -ais, -ait; nous gis-ions, -iez, -aient. The rest is obsolete. Ci git is used on monumental in- scriptions for kic jacet, here lies. Gisart, gisons, gisex, gisent ; je gisais, &c., are pronounced as if written with a double 8: as gissant, je gissais, &c. HAIR, ‘0 Rate 2 Haissant; 3 hal. 4 Je hais, hails, hait ; haïss-ons, 110 FRENCH GRAMMAR. -ez,-ent. 5 Je haissais. 6 Je hais (seldom used). 7 Je haïrai. 8 Je hairais. 9 Hais; haiss-ons,-ez. 10 Que je haïsse. 11 Que je haisse. Honnir, fo dishonour (obsolete). Past part. Honni; as Honni soit qui mal y pense. INSCRIRE, to inscribe ; like Écrire. INTERDIRE, to forbid, to interdict ; like Médire. INTERROMPRE, fo interdict; like Rompre. Issir, to issue (obsolete). Past part. Issu. LIRE, to read. 2 Lisant; 3 lu. 4 Je lis, lis, lit; lis-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je lisais. 6 Je lus. 7 Je lirai 8 Je lirais 9 Lis, qu’il lise ; lis-ons, -ez, qu’ils lisent. 10 Que je lise. 11 Que je lusse. Luire, fo shine, to glitter. 2 Luisant; 8 lui. 4 Je luis, luis, luit ; luisons, luisez, luisent. 5 Je luisais. (No past def.) 7 Je luirai. 8 Je .uirais. 9 Luis. 10 Que je luise. (No imperf. subj.) MAUDIRE, fo curse. 2 Maudissant; 3 maudit. 4 Je maudi-s, -s, -t; -ssons, -ssez, -ssent. 5 Je maudissais. 6 Je maudis. 7 Je maudirai. 8 Je maudirais. 9 Maudi-s, -ssons, -ssez. 10 Que je maudisse. 11 Que je maudisse. - MÉDIRE, to slander. 2 Médisant; 3 médit. 4 Je médi-s, -s, -t; -sons, -sez, -sent. 5 Je médisais. 6 Je médis. 7 Je médirai. 8 Je médirais 9 Médi-s, -sons, -sez. 10 Que je médise. 11 Que je médisse. Méfaire, to do wrong; used only in the Inf. MÉPRENDRE (SE), to mistake; like Prendre. Messeoir, not to become ; like Seoir. METTRE, fo put. 2 Mettant;3 mis. 4 Je mets, mets, met ; mett- ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je mettais. 6 Je mis. 7 Je mettrai. 8 Je mettrais 9 Mets, qu’il mette; mett-ons, -ez, qu’ils mettent. 10 Que je mette. 11 Que je misse. MouprE, to grind. 2 Moulant; 3 moulu. 4 Je mouds, mouds, moud ; moul-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je moulais. 6 Je moulus. 7 Je moudrai. 8 Je moudrais. 9 Mouds, qu’il moule; moul-ons, -ez, qu’ils moulent. 10 Que je moule. 11 Que je moulusse. Mourir, fo die. 2 Mourant; 3 mort. 4 Je meurs, meurs, meurt ; mour-ons, -ez, meurent. 5 Je mourais. 6 Je mourus. 7 Je mourrai (207). 8 Je mourrais 9 Meurs, qu’il meure; mour- ons, -ez, qu’ils meurent. 10 Que je meure. 11 Que je mourusse. Mouvorr, fo move. 2 Mouvant; 3 mi. 4 Je meus, meus, ment; mouv-ons, -ez, meuvent. 5 Je mouvais. 6 Je mus. 7 Je mouvrai. 8 Je mouvrais. 9 Meus, qu’il meuve ; mouv-ons, -ez, qu’ils meuvent. 10 Que je meuve. 11 Que je musse, VERBS. 111 NAITRE, to be born, &c. 2 Naissant; 3 né. 4 Je nais. nais, naît ; naiss-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je naissais. 6 Je naquis. 7 Je naitrai. 8 Je naîtrais. 9 Nais ; naiss-ons, -ez. 10 Que je naisse. 11 Que je naquisse. NUIRE, fo hurt; like Conduire, except the past part., nui. OMETTRE, to omit; like Mettre. Ouir, to Lear ; obsolete except in the past part., oui, followed by dire, as j'ai oui dire. PAÎTRE, to graze, ¢ feed. 2 Paissant; 3 pu (seldom used). 4 Je pais, pais, pait; paiss-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je paissais. 6 (No past def.). 7 Je paitrai. 8 Je paîtrais 9 Pais; paiss-ons, -ez. 10. Que je paisse. 11 (No imperf. subj.) PARCOURIR, to run over ; like Courir. PARFAIRE, to complete ; like Faire. PERMETTRE, to permit; like Mettre. PLAIRE, to please. 2 Plaisant; 3 plu. 4 Je plais, plais, plaît ; plais- ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je plaisais 6 Je plus. 7 Je plairai. 9 Plais ; plais-ons, -ez. 10 Que je plaise. 11 Que je plusse. PLEUVOIR, to rain. (Impersonal.) 2 Pleuvant; 3 plu. 4 Il pleut 5 Il pleuvait. 6 Il plut. 7 Il pleuvra. 8 Il pleuvrait. 9 (No imperative). 10 Qu’il pleuve. 11 Qu’il plût. Poindre, to dawn. Fut. Il poindra. POURSUIVRE, to pursue ; like Suivre. Pourvorr, to provide. 2 Pourvoyant ; 3 pourvu. 4 Je pourvoi-s, -s, -t; pourvoy-ons, -ez, pourvoient. 5 Je pourvoyais. 6 Je pourvus. 7 Je pourvoirai. 8 Je pourvoirais. 9 Pourvois qu’il pourvoie ; pourvoy-ons, -ez, qu’ils pourvoient. 10 Que je pour- voie. 11 Que je pourvusse. Pouvoir, to ze able. 2 Pouvant ; 3 pu. 4 Je puis or peux, peux, peut ; pouv-ons, -ez, peuvent. 5 Je pouvais. 6 Je pus. 7 Je pourrai. 8 Je pourrais. 9 (No imperative). 10 Que je puisse, 11 Que je pusse, PREDIRE, to foretell; like Médire. PRENDRE, to take 2 Prenant; 3 pris. 4 Je prends, prends, | prend; prenons, prenez, prennent. 5 Je prenais. 6 Je pris. | 7 Je prendrai. 8 Je prendrais. 9 Prends, qu’il prenne ; prenons, | prenez, qu’ils prennent. 10 Que je prenne. 11 Que je prisse. | PRESCRIRE, to prescribe ; like Écrire. PRÉVALOIR, to prevail; like Valoir, except the Subj. Pres. Que je prévale, -es, -e ; que nous préval-ions, -iez, qu’ils prévalent, | Prevorr, to Joresee ; like Voir, except the Future. Je prévoirai, | prévoiras, prévoira ; prévoi-rons, -rez, -ront ; and the Condit, Je | prévoirais, &c. 112 FRENCII GRAMMAR, PROMETTRE, lo promise; like Mettre. Promouvoir, to promo’e. Past part. Promu. This verb is seldom used except in the inf, and in the compound tenses ; as il a été promu. PROSCRIRE, to proscrile ; like Eecrire. Quérir, to fetch. Used only in the inf, after aller, venir, envoyer ; as aller quérir. RABATTRE, to abate ; RAPPRENDRE, {0 learn again; RASSEOIR (SE), to sit again ; like Battre. like Prendre. like Asseoir. Ravoir, {o have again. No other tense. REBATTRE, to beat again; REBOIRE, to drink again ; REBOUILLIR, to boil again ; like Battre. like Boire. like Bou:llir. Reclure, to shut up. Used only in the inf, and in the compound tenses with the past part., reclus. Reconqueérir, fo conquer again ; RECOUDRE, fo sew again ; RECRIRE, to write again; RECUEILLIR, fo reap, &c. ; REDEFAIRE, fo undo again; REDIRE, fo say again ; * REELIRE, to re-elect; REFAIRE, to do again ; REFLEURIR. (See Fleurir.) RELIRE, to read again ; Reluire, to shine ; REMETTRE, to put again ; REMOUDRE, to grind again ; RENAÎTRE, to Le born again ; ‘Rentraire, fo darn; RENVOYER, to send buck; REPAITRE, to feed; REPRENDRE, {0 take again; REPROMETTRE, fo prumise again like Conquérir. like Coudre. like Écrire. like Cueillir, like Fuire. like Dire, like Lire. like Faire. like Lire. like Luire. like Mettre. like Moudre. like Naître. like Zraire. like Envoyer. like Puitre. like Prendre, like Mettre. VERBS. 113 REQUERIR, lo require ; like Acquérir. RÉSOUDRE, to resolve. 2 Résolvant ; 3 résolu. 4 Je résou-s, s, -t; resolv-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je résolvais. 6 Je résolus. 7 Je ré- soudrai. 8 Je résoudrais. 9 Résous, qu’il résolve ; résolv-ons, -ez, qu’ils résolvent. 10 Que je résolve, 11 Que je résolusse. When résoudre signifies to change into, its past part. is résous, and has no feminine. Retraire, (0 redeem ; like Traire. Revaloir, to return like for like ; like Valoir. REVETIR, to clothe; like Vétir. REVIVRE, to revive ; like Vivre. REVOIR, to see again ; like Voir. RIRE, to laugh. 2 Riant; 3 ri. 4 Je ris, ris, rit ; rions, riez, rient. 5 Jeriais 6 Jeris. 7 Jerirai. 8 Jerirais. 9 Ris, qu'il rie; rions, riez, qu’ils rient. 10 Que jerie. 11 Que je risse. RomPRE, fo break 2 Rompant; 3 rompu. 4 Je romps, remps, rompt; romp-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je rompais. 6 Je rompis. 7 Je romprai. 8 Je romprais. 9 Romps, qu’il rompe; romp-ons, -ez, qu’ils rompent. 10 Que je rompe. 11 Que je rompisse. Saiilir, to project. 2 Saillant ; 3 sailli Only used in the following forms :—4 11 saille; ils saillent. 5 II saillait ; ilssaillaient. 6 (No past def.) 7 Il saillera ; ils sailleront. 8 Il saillerait; ils sail leraient. 10 Qu'il saille. 11 Qu’il saillit. SATISFAIRE, to satisfy ; like Lure. Savoir, fo know. 2 Sachant; 3 su. 4 Je sais, sais, sait; sav-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je savais. 6 Je sus. 7 Je saurai. 8 Je saurais. 9 Sache, sachons, sachez. 10 Que je sache. 11 Que je susse. Difference between savoir and connaître. (Vide No. 556.) SECOURIR, Lo relieve, to help ; lixe Courir. Secir, /o become, to fit. Impersonal, used only in the following tenses :—Seyant.—11 sied ; ils siéent. —Il seyait ; ils seyaient —Il siéra ; ils siéront— Il siérait, ils siéraient. — Ex. : Cet habit vous sied bien, this coat becomes you well. Secir, to sit, has only the two participles, Séant, sitting, and Sis, m.. Sise, f., situated. SOUMETTRE, fo submit; like Mettre, Sourdre, fo spring out, ll sourd ; ils sourdent. SOURIRE, (0 smile; like Rire. SOUSCRIRE, to subscribe ; like Écrire, SOUSTRAIRE, lo subtract ; like Traire, 114 FRENCH GRA.IMAR. SUFFIRE, fo suffice. 2 Suffisant ; 3 suffi. 4 Je suffis, suffis, suffit; suffisons, -ez, -sent. 5 Je suffisais. 6 Je suffis 7 Je suffrar. 8 Je suffirais. 9 Suffis, qu’il suffise ; suffi-sons, -ez, qu’ils suffisent. 10 Que je suffise. 11 Que je suffisse. SUIVRE, to follow. 2 Suivant ; 3 suivi. 4 Je suis, suis, suit; suiv-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je suivais 6 Je suivis 7 Je suivra. 8 Je suivrais. 9 Suis, qu’il suive; suiv-ons, -ez, qu’ils suivent. 10 Que je suive. 11 Que je suivisse. SURFAIRE, fo surcharge ; like Faire. surgir, fo land, to arise. Frequently used in the 3rd person of some tenses, by modern writers, in the sense of s’élever, naître ; as surgissant ; il surgit ; il surgissait. SURPRENDRE, to surprise; like Prendre, Surseoir, to suspend. 2 Sursoyant; 3 sursis. 4 Je sursoi-s, -s, -t; sursoy-ons, -ez, surso-ient. 5 Je sursoyais. 6 Je sursis. 7 Je surseoirai. 8 Je surseoirais, 9 Sursois 10 Que je sursoie. 11 Que je sursisse. SURVIVRE, fo survive; like Vivre. TAIRE, fo conceal ; like Pluire. TISSER, to weave, is regular, except in the past part, tissu, m., tissue, f. Traire, to milk. 2 Trayant; 3 trait. 4 Je trai-s, -s, -t ; tray-ons, -ez, traient. 5 Je trayais. 6 (Nopastdef.). 7 Jetrairai. 8 Je trairais. 9 Trais, qu’il traie ; tray-ons, -ez, qu’ils traient. 10 Que je traie. 11 (No imperf. of the subj.). T RANSCRIRE, fo transeribe ; like Æcrire. 3 , TRANSMETTRE, to transmit; like Mettre. TRESSAILLIR, fo sturt; like Assaillir, V'AINCRE, to vanquish. 2 Vainquant; 3 vainen. 4 Je vaines, vaincs, vaine; vaing-uons, -uez, -vent. 5 Je vainquais. 6 Je vainquis. 7 Je vaincrai. 8 Je vaincrais. 9 Vaines, qu'il vainque ; vaing- uons, -uez, -uent. 10 Que je vainque. 11 Que je vainquisse. VALOIR, fo be worth. 2 Valant; 3 valu. 4 Je vanx, vaux, vaut ; val-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je valais. 6 Je valus. 7 Je vaudrai. 8 Je vaudrais. 9 (No Imperative). 10 Que je vaiil-e, -es, -e ; valions, valiez, vaillent. 11 Que je valusse. VÉTIR, to dress, to clothe. 2 Vêtant; 3 vêtu. 4 Je vêts, vêts, vêt; vêt-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je vêtais. 6 Je vétis. 7 Je vêtirai. 8 Je vêtirais. 9 Vêts, qu’il vête; vêt ons, -ez, ent. 10 Que je vête, “ 11 Que je vétisse. VIVRE, fo live. 2 Vivant; 3 véeu. 4 Je vis, vis, vit; viv-ons, -ez, -ent. 5 Je vivais. 6 Je vécus. 7 Je vivrai. 8 Je vivrais. 9 Vis VERBS. 115 qu'il vive ; viv-ons, -ez, qu’ils vivent. 10 Que je vive. 11 Que je vécusse. Vorr. tosee. 2 Voyant; 3 vu. 4 Je vois, vois, voit ; voy-ons, -ez, voient. 5 Je voyais 6 Je vis. 7 Je verrai. & Je verrais, 9 Voie ; voy-ons, -ez, qu’ils voient. 10 Que je voi-e, -es, -e ; voy- ions, -iez, voient. 11 Que je visse. VouLorr, fo be willing, to wish. 2 Voulant; 3 voulu. 4 Je veux, veux, veut ; voul-ons, -ez, veulent. 5 Je voulais. 6 Je voulus. 7 Je voudrai. 8 Je voudrais. 9 Veuille ; qu’il veuiile; veuil- lez, qu’ils veuillent. 10 Que je veuill-e, -es -e; voul-ions, -iez, veuillent. 11 Que je voulusse. Veuillez, in the Imperative, is used in the sense of be so good ; as veuillez lui dire que Je l’attends ; but when we command, we use veur, voulons, voulez, which are seldom used ; as, Faites un effort, voulez seulement. — LAMENNAIS, a EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. First and Second Conjugations. Read and translate. 1 Où allez-vous? Je vais à Londres. Les chagrins montent A , . At > Nye . sur le trône et vont s'asseoir à côté du souverain. S’il est vrai que le temps aille sans cesse, il n’est pas moins vrai que nous allons sans cesse avec lui. Irons-nous bientôt à la campagne ? Il faudrait que j'allasse à Paris la semaine prochaine. Souffrons avec résignation les maux que le Ciel nous envoie. Ne vous fiez pas à ce charlatan, il vous enverra dans l’autre monde. Envoyez- moi votre domestique, et je vous enverrai le livre que vous demandez. L’ennemi nous envoya quelques bombes qui se per- dirent dans les tranchdes. 2 Le bruit court que nous allons avoir la guerre. Ces en- fants courraient (207) toute la journée si on le leur permettait. Quand un sauvage meurt l'hiver à la chasse, son corps est conservé dans les branches des arbres. Nous mourrons (207) comme nous aurons vécu. Alexandre conquit l’Asie, et César conquit la Gaule. Les seuls amis solides sont ceux qu’on acquiert par des vertus solides. Les enfants acquièrent des connaissances sans notre secours. Vos sœurs et moi, nous cueillions des fleurs dans la prairie lorsqu'on vint nous dire qu’il était mort. Chacun recueille ce qu’il a semé. Louis XIV accueillait très-favorablement tous les hommes de lettres. Une tempête nous assaillit à la sortie du port. Ses bonnes qualités lui acquirent l’estime de tout le monde, Nos beaux jours fuient rapidement. Zuyons les mauvaises com- pagnies, si nous voulons rester sages. C’est en fuyant que parfois on s’assure le triomphe. Le sang lui bout dans les veines. Vous \mettrez ces œufs dans l’eau aussitôt qu’elle bouillira, 116 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Exercise. I (am going!) to? Ireland. Shall you go to France next® summer? No, I shall not go. Let us go to the garden. We went to pay* a visit to our first minister (the day before yesterday®). I will send® him my servant. We sent some flowers to your sister. We shall go and see you as soon as we can’. When do you (go away®)? I shall go away this evening. Has your uncle gone away? Not yet, but he will soon go away. His father has acquired® great wealth by his industry. His mother died! of grief" They do not hate'” him. The fruits he gathers'* are not ripe. Shall I gather some'* of these flowers? Where have you gathered these flowers ? Does the water boil*? Not yet'S but it will soon boil. Men die!” young in hot climates. Will this young officer die from his wounds? I do not think'S that his father is (&5%) dead. We ran'® to his help when he called® us. The clouds (were flying®) with rapidity. Commerce (was flourishing®) in our country. We acquire new knowledge” every day. I will collect* some useful books. Alexander conquered® a great part of Asia. Our horses ran for? two hours without stopping”. The enemy assailed” us on a sudden. "This bird would die (207) if you (did not give him®) water. I wish'° you would help* this poor family. If I conquer®, you will conquer (207). Did you receive® him well? Yes; but I would have received him better if I had not been unwell. Shall you not reap* the fruit of your labours®? We have clothed® their children. They (ran away”) at the first appearance of danger. Our troops assaulted® the entrench- ments (at daybreak®). l'aller. 2en 3 prochain ‘faire 5 avant hier “envoyer 7 pourrons 8 s’en aller acquérir 19 mourir !! chagrin !Zhaïr !Scueillic !4 quelques-unes !5 bouillir -6 pas encore !7 mourir 18 Je ne crois pas 19 courir Z appeler 2! fuir 2 fleurir 23 connaissance f. pl. recueillir 7 conquérir 6 pendant 7 s’arrêter 28 assaillir 29 ne lui donniez pas de 30 Je désirerais que 3! secourir 32 conquerir 33 accucillir 31 recueillir 35 peines 36 vêtir 37 s’eanfuir 38 assaillir 39 à la pointe du jour. Third Conjugation. Read and translate. ; Je ne veux pas que ma mère sache que je vousaivu. Pourriez- vous me dire combien vaut cette maison? Si peu qu’elle vaille, elle want bien ce que l’on en demande. Quand verrez-vous le propriétaire? Il faut que je le sache, afin que je puisse lui faire mes offres. Je n'avais pas prévu votre arrivée, je ne puis vous le dire maintenant. Asseyez-vous un instant, je vais savoir si nous pourrons lui parler. Nous nous assîmes à l'ombre d’un palmier, et bientôt nous vimes quelques sauvages sortir de la forêt. Je ne savais pas que vous voulussiez partir ce soir. C’est un ressort qui meut toute la machine. Le sort de ses enfants l’émut jusqu’aux larmes, mais la vue du supplice ne put l’émouvoir. Quand saurez- vous vos leçons ? Je les saurai dans une demi-heure. J'aurais voulu que vous les sussiez plus tot. 3 VERBS. 17 Exercise. This house is worth’ fifteen hundred guineas. Is that bill due? to- day? The spring which moves’ the machine is very simple. (Sit down*), gentlemen, and (rest yoursclves®) a little. Shall we see’ your mother this evening? She cannot” come before half-past eight o'clock. You will not know? your lesson, if you do not (make haste’). Should you not foresee'® that event? I sat down under the shade cf a tree. Who will (provide for!!) their wants ? We could" be very useful to your brother on'® that occasion. I think'* it will rain'® (the whole") day. The speaker!” (stirred up'®) the passions of the audience. The judges did put off*® the execution of the arrest. I must” know”? who (is knocking?) at the door. That bonnet does not become” her. He prevailed” upon the others at our last meeting®. Do you think that he wishes?” to buy my oxen? Have you not seen my new purchase? ? 1 valoir 2 devoir 3 mouvoir 4 s’asseoir 3 se reposer © voir 7 ne pouvoir © savoir 9 se dépécher ! prévoir !! pourvoirà 12 pouvoir 13 dans !4 croire 15 pleuvoir 16 toute la !7 orateur 8 émouvoir 19 auditoire 2 surscoir 2! falloir que 22 savoir 2 frapper 21 seoir 2° prévaloir 20 réunion *7 vouloir 2% emplettef. Fourth Conjugation. Neud and translate. Quel auteur lisez-vous dans votre classe? Notre professeur veut que nous apprenions un passage de Virgile tous les jours, On dit que les Russes ont été battus par les alliés ; croyez-vous que la nouvelle soit vraie ? Dites-moi ce que vous en pensez, et buvons à la santé de nos braves qui ont vaincu l’ennemi. Ne faites pas à autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qui vous fût fait à vous- mêmes. Démocrite riaït sans cesse, Héraclite pleurait toujours. Il faudrait que vous écrivissiez votre lettre avant que je fisse aucunes démarches à ce sujet. Tous les enfants qui naquirent le même jour que Sésostris furent amenés à la cour par ordre du roi, Nous naissons et nous vivons pour la société. Ne prenez pas vos amis au hasard ; suivez mon conseil, il est bon. Fontenel3 veeut cent ans. Nous buvions du lait de chèvre tous les mata. Ces jeunes orphelines cousent deux ou trois heures par jour. Avez- vous mis mon cheval dans l’écurie? Je l’y mettrai quand il aura bu. Nous moulons tous les jours beaucoup de café, mais nous en moulions davantage l’année dernière. Avez-vous résolu ce pro- blême? Le feu résout le bois en cendre. Les frictions résclvent les tumeurs. Exercise. These children (are learning!) their lessons. You surprise? me very much. The Russians were beaten® by the allies, The artillery (beat down?) the walls of the fortress. Drink® a little milk every morning, it® will do’ you good®. We did not drink (28) becr whilst l apprendre Zsurnrendre 3 battre “abattre 5boire cela 7 faire du bien 118 FRENCH GRAMMAR. we were in France. We drink (28) wine at dinner. Do you think® that she is (254) happy? We believed (we perceived'®) a vessel in the distance’. I wrote? to him all the particulars of that affair. I do!$ my duty ; do yours. We satisfy!* our masters. Tell’ him that I will write to-morrow. I must say!° my prayers before breakfast. What did you do when we were gone’? Do not read’ so long'?, but take a little recreation. Have you read the paper? No; I shall read it this evening. Follow? the good examples of your forefathers. Did the troops pursue?” the enemy after the battle? The Greeks vanquished® the Per- sians at Marathon, Salamis, and Plata, and thereby transmitted glory to their posterity. Those unhappy people curse® their fate, The Duke of Wellington lived®® above eighty years. The sun was not shining” when we (went out”). They surprised the enemy during the night. You did not hurt®* his interests. Do they elect® a president every year? We laughed® at his cxpense. The flocks (were graz- ing®) in the meadow. They (were milking®) their cows. Have you ground? the coffee for this evening? Do you think I have displeased your father? Napoleon was born® in the island of Corsica, in the year 1769. Did he live long”? He lived fifty-two years; but he would have lived longer, if he had been in a healthier climate, 9 croire 10 apercevoir 1! dans le Jointain 12 écrire !3 faire !# satisfaire 1° dire 16 dire 17 partis 18 lire 19 si longtemps 2° prendre 2!suivre 22poursuivre 23 vain. cre 24 transmettre 2> maudire “vivre 27 luire sortir 29 nuire 30 élire 5) rire 32 paître 33 traire 3! moudre 3%déplaire 36 naitre 37 longtemps, —_ PARTICIPLES. 211 A participle is a word which partakes of the nature of a verb, and of that of an adjective. It has the significa- tion and government of a verb ; as des enfants aimant l’étude children loving study ayunt reçu votre lettre having received your note And, like an adjective, it expresses also the quality or state of persons or things to which it refers; as un champ labouré a ploughed field une fille chérie a beloved daughter There are two sorts of participles; the participle present, ending in ant, as aimant, finissant, often preceded by en, and always invariable; and the participle past, which has various terminations; as aimé, fini, regu, écrit, mis. The latter may agree in gender and number with the noun or pronoun to which it relates. (See the Syntax, No. 478.) ; 3 A ] à 1 3 ADVERBS. 119 ADVERBS. 412 An adverb is a word indeclinable, which mudifies a verb, an adjective, or another adverb ; it is placed near and generally after the verb; as il parle éloquemment he speaks eloquently elle est fort aimable ! she is very amiable il écrit très-souvent he writes very often 213 Most adverbs are formed in French from adjee- tives :— 1 By adding ment to the masculine of the adjective, when it ends with a vowel ; as sage, wise sagement, wisely poli, polite poliment, politely The following take an é before the final ment : — aveuglément, commodément, con- formément, énormément, uniformément. ‘I'he adjectives beau, nouveau, fou, mou, form their adverbs from their feminine, delle, nouvelle, folle, molle ; as bellement, nouvcllement, &c. Inpuni makes impunément, 2 By adding ment to tke feminine termination, when the masculine ends with a consonant ; as doux m., douce f., geniie doucement, gently fort m., forte f., strong fortement, strongly Gentil makes gentiment — Commune, confuse, diffuse, expresse, importune, obscure, précise, profonde, change e mute into é; as communément, confusément, &c. 3 When the adjective ends in ant or ent, the adverb is formed by changing zt into mment ; as savant, learned savamment, learnedly patient, patient patiemment, paliently Lent and présent make lentement, présentement, 214 Adjectives are sometimes used adverbially, as in the following examples :-— parler kaut to speak loud frapper ferme to strike hard sentir bon to smell nice chanter fuux to sing out of tune There are several sorts of adverbs, generally classed according to their signification with reference to time, place, order, manner, quantity, comparison, affirmation, negation doubt, and interrogation. 120 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions most in Use. ADVERES oF TIME. 78105 then anciennement formerly aujourd’hui to-day auparavant before - / aussitôt immediately fois formerly autrefois formery à l’avenir for the future à jamais for ever a I'improviste unexpectedly a présent now ientôt soon ependant in the meun time déjà already demain to-morrow depuis since dernièrement lately dès lors from that time désormais henceforth de suite immediately dorénavant henceforth de bonne heure eur/y 4 abord at first d'ordinaire usualy enfin at last ensuite afterwards hier yesterday jadis formerly jamais never; ever maintenant now parfois . quelquefois } sometumes rarement seldom souvent often sans cesse incessantly sur-le-champ immediatey tantôt by and by ; sometimes tard lute tôt soon toujours always tout a coup suddenly tout a ’heure presentiu tout de suite immediately tout d’un coup all at once Vite quickly ADVERBS oF Price AND ORDER. ailleurs elsewhere alentour around ala fois at once a droite on the right après after auprès near avant before çà et là up and down ci-aprés hereafter dedans within dehors outside derrière behind dessous underneath dessus upon devant before d’ici hence d’où whence en bas below en haut up stairs ensemble together îci here ici bas here below ici près near Pere jusque là so far jusqu’où ? how fur? 1a there là-bas yonder là-haut æbove là dedans within loin far nulle part nowhere où where partout everywhere par où ? which way? par ici this way péle-méle confuscily premièrement first près near proche near puis then sens dessus dessous upside doux séparément separately ! ‘tour-à-tour by turn y there 1 ADVERBS. ; 121 ADVERBS OF MANNER. autrement otherwise mal badly à l’envi vying with one another pis worse a peine scarcely poliment politely a regret with reluctance presque almost bien well prudemment prudiitly exprès on purpose par hasard by chance instamment earnestly sagement wisely lentement slowly sciemment knowingly ADVERBS oF QuaNTITY AND COMPARISON. abondamment plentifully en sus over ~ainsi thus fort very à bon marché cheap guère* but little à peu près nearly mieux better _- assez* enough moins* less aussi also, as, too peu* little autant* so much peu à peu by degrees au moins at least plus* more beaucoup* mueh si so, so very combien* how much, how many suffisamment* sufficiently comme as, how tant* so much, so many davantage more tant soit peu ever so liltle de même so tout-à-fait quite de plus moreover tout au plus at most du moins at least très very encore still, yet trop* too much entièrement entirely ë trop peu foo little environ about un peu a little 215 * The adverbs of quantity marked * take de before the following noun or adjce- tive ; as beaucoup DE pain ; Lrop DE vin ; moins V'argent. 216 t So very is translated merely by si; as she is SO VERY obliging ! elle est st cbligeante! ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, NEGATION, DOUBT, AND INTERROGATION. ; certainement nullement by no means certes oui} yes combien? how much? how many? | _peut-étre perhaps (of distance) how fur? (of probablement very likely- certainly LC time) how long ? pourquoi? why? comment? how ? point du tout not at all en vérité indeed quand? when ? non, ne, ni no, not, nor sans doute without doubt ne...pas volontiers willingly BS (278) ro! vraiment truly, &ec. 217 1 Yes is expressed by cui ; as Avez-vous diné ? Ou1, j’ai diné. But in replying to a question in which there is a negation, or in contradiction to a negative statement, vFs is generally expressed by si; as Est-ce que vous ne venex pas avec nous? SI, j’y vais. (Are you not coming with us? Yes, I am.) 3 G 122 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Read and translate. Quand partez-vous? Je pars demain, ou peut-être aupour- d'hui. Allez-vous souvent à Paris? J'y vais rarement; ordinaire- ment une fois chaque année. Jusqu'où avez-vous appris? Vous êtes arrivé trop tard, venez plus tôt une autre fois. Combieu y a-t-il d’ici à Genève? Je ne sais pas précisément. Combien de temps resterez-vous ici? Pourquoi me faites-vous cette question ? Avez-vous jamais été à Rome? Non, je n’y ai jamais été. Com- ment avez-vous fait cela? À peine ai-je eu le temps de le voir. Par où passerez-vous en allant en France? Nous irons d’abord à Londres, et ensuite à Douvres. Combien coûte le voyage de Londres à Paris? Avez-vous déjà diné? Non, je n'ai pas encore déjeuné. Il lit fort peu, et il Écrit encore moins. Irez-vous loin aujourd’hui? Que ne répondez-vous? Exercise on the Adverbs. You always come! too late. Did (175) you not then live? in® Paris ? Shall we dine soon? He has done! it on purpose. My brother was better yesterday, now he is worse than ever. 1 will write’ to you to-day or to-morrow at latest. Have you not done yet? I have almost finished. How much have you given® for that watch? More than it (is worth”). I have (looked for®) you everywhere, and I have not (been able?) to find you anywhere. Where do you go? Iam going yonder. How do you call this village ? I often (go out'!) carly in the morning, and some- times 1 go very fur. I go sometimes (on foot!?), sometimes on horse- back!s. When will they begin? I do not know'; soon, Thope. Why is he so angry? I have not begun my letter yet. Write it imme- diately, and I will send'® it presently. Perhaps it is too late for the post. {venir 2demeurer 32a 4 fait 5 écrire Sdonné 7 valoir 8 chercher 9 pouvoir 10 appeler !! sortir 123 pied !3 3a cheval !4 savoir 1° en colére !S envoyer pn PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions are invariable words which serve to express the relation which some words have with each other. 218 In French the preposition is always placed before the word which it governs, and never after, as is frequently the case in English ; as je vais à Paris I am going to Paris il vint après vous he came after you il est dans la chambre he is in the room de quoi parlez-vous ? what are you speaking of? Durant is the only exception ; as sa vie durant. PREPOSITIONS. 123 PREPOSITIONS USED MOST FREQUENTLY. à* at, to, in, &£c. à cause de on account of à côté de dy, next to après after à travers* au travers* a through attendu considering au delà de beyond auprès de near autour de around avant* before avec with chez* at, among contre against dans* in de of, from, with depuis* since derrière behind Aes from “ devant* before urant* during en* in entre* between envers* towards environ about excepté except hormis except jusqu’à as far as loin de fur from sers in spite of “ moyennant notwithstanding outre besides par by parmi* among pendant* during pour* for près de Fear proche de quant a as lo, as for sans without sauf except selon according to sous under suivant according to - sur upon touchant concerning vers* towards voici* flere is voila* there is vis-a-vis de opposite 219 The prepositions a, de and en are repeated before every word they govern ; as, Il apprend à danser et à chanter. — Les chemins sont bordés de lauriers, de grenadiers, de jasmins, et d’autres arbres toujours verts et toujours fleuris. (Fénelon.) — La France est fertile en blé, en vin, et en fruits, Read and translate. Jai donné un dictionnaire à votre ami. Avez-vous écrit à votre mère? Nous parlions de voustout à l'heure. Venez-vous de Bordeaux? Je partirai d'ici après déjeuner, et j’arriverai à Paris avant dix heures du soir. Le tombeau de Napoléon est dans la chapelle des Invalides. Nous marchions sur une terre de feu, sous un ciel de feu, entre deux murailles de feu. Vers quatre heures nous doublâmes la pointe d’une presqu'île, et nous jetâmes l’ancre dans une baie abritée par des rochers. Cet argent est pour les pauvres. Nous aperçumes alors à travers le brouillard le corps et les vergues d’un grand vaisseau. J'irai chez vous demain, Mirabeau parlait avec éloquence. Nous irons jusqu’à Bruxelles, et nous partirons le soir par le chemin de fer de Strasbourg. (Chez les Français les modes se succèdent rapidement. Selon | * Sce the Syntax, Remarks on Prepositions (No. 514). a 2 124 2 FRENCH GRAMMAR. moi, il a eu tort d’agir ainsi envers vous. Mon père demeure a Paris, vis-a-vis du Louvre. Quant a moi, je n’entreprendrai rien contre lui. Il m’a parlé touchant cette affaire. Tandis que mes compagnons se chauffaient autour d’un grand feu, je me dirigeai vers la montagne. Il apprend déjà à lire, à écrire et à chanter. La Russie est fertile en blé, en chanvre et en lin. Sa fille prend des leçons de musique, de dessin et de danse. Exercise on the Prepositions. We are going to Edinburgh ; are you not coming? with us? I have not been to Paris since last year. I am not speaking* of you. Do they not come from Italy ? She had always two servants walking* behind her. I have sent* all your books except three. The Alps are situated between France and Italy. London is on the Thames, and Paris on the Seine. Is this parcel® for me or for you? He will do” it in spite of you. Henry the Fourth (250), king of France, was assassinated by Ravaillac. We sat® under a tree, near the bridge. 1 have found’ one of your books among mine. It was (373) the custom among the Gauls to immerge'® their new-born!! children in cold water, to make!” them stronger. We went towards the frontier. That man has been un- grateful towards you. We shall arrive before twelve o'clock; the coach stops!® before the church. Mozart was almost from the cradle! a prodigy of musical genius. The fields are covered with'® vines, fig-trees'®, olive-trees, and orange-trees. He owed!’ his life to the clemency and magnanimity of the king. 1aller 2venir 3 parler 4 qui marchaient 5 envoyer ©paquet 7 faire 5 s'asseoi ; 9 trouver 10 plonger !! nouveau-né 2 rendre 13 s’arréter 14 berccau di 16 figuiers 17 devoir = met CONJUNCTIONS. Conjunctions are invariable, and serve to connect vois and sentences together ; âs ‘ Travaillons sà nous voulons ac- Let us study if we wish to acquir , quérir des talents, car le temps knowledge, for time passes, and s’enfuit et ne revient plus returns no more ; 220 Conjunctions are simple or compound: the simp consist of one word, as et, ou, si, &c. ; the compound a formed of two or more words, such as afin que, à moins que, pourvu que, &c. 1 ; 221 Some conjunctions govern the verb in the indicative mood, others in the subjunctive, and some also in the infinitive. : CONJUNCTIONS. : 126 222 CoNJUNCTIONS GOVERNING THE Indicative. ainsi thus ainsi que as apres que after au lieu que whereas aussitot que as soon as au surplus moreover car for cependant however, yet c’est pourquoi therefure comme as, like d’ailleurs besides depuis que since de plus moreover de sorte que so that dès que as soon as donc then, therefore et and en effet indeed enfin in short lorsque when mais but même even néanmoins never theless ni neither, nor or now ou bien or else ou cither...or outre que besides parceque because pendant que whilst pour lors then pourquoi why, wherefore pourtant however puisque since quand when quand méme though que that savoir namely selon que according as si if sinon or else, if not sitôt que as soon us soit either, or suivant que according as surtout especially tandis que whilst tant que as long as toutefois however 223 CONJUNCTIONS GOVERNING THE Subjunctive. afin que that, in order that à moins que unless avant que before bien que though, although de crainte que for feur de peur que lest en cas que in case that encore que though jusqu’à ce que (ll loin que fur from nonobstant que for all that non pas que not that posé que suppose that pour que that pourvu que provided quoique though, although sans que without sinon que except that soit que whether supposé que suppose 224 CONJUNCTIONS GOVEKNING THE Infinitive. efin de in order to a moins de unless avant de before an lieu de exstead of de crainte de fur fear of de peur de for fear of faute de for want of jusqu’à tl loin de far from r plutôt que de rather than 225 À moins que, unless, when followed by a verb in the Infinitive, requires de without the negation ; as je ne pouvais pas le punir plus sévèrement à moins que DE Le renvoyer, 1 could not punish him more severely unless I dismissed him, See the Syntax, Kemarks on Conjunctions (No. 581). 126 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Read and translate. Ne faites pas cela, cu” vous seriez puni. Les méchants meurent comme ils ont vécu. Croyez-vous donc que la mort n’est rien ? Ces chants sont doux, mais les tristesses ct les joies qu’ils réveillent ne sont nimes tristesses ni mes joies. Ni l’or ni la grandeur ne nous rendent heureux. O7, vous deviez savoir que la chose n’était pas possible. ‘La misère ou le déshonneur attend toujours le joueur. Il faudra qu’il paie, ou bien il ira en prison. On m’a demandé : Pourquoi pleurez-vous? [Et quand je l’ai dit, nul n’a pleuré avec moi, parcequ’on ne me comprenait point. Pourquoi le demander, puisque vous le savez? Je crois que vous gagnerez votre procès. Si Napoléon n’avait pas été si ambitieux, il ne serait pas tombé. Dieu vous place au-dessus des autres afin que vous soyez les pères des peuples. Soit que vous veniez, soit que vous ne veniez pas, je partirai demain. Travaillez avec assiduité, afin de mériter une récompense. Exercise on the Conjunctions. Do not disobey’ your parents, for it is asin. Why did you Hot corne (last night?) ? Because the weather was too bad. If I die® before you, you shall be the father of my children. Since you are ill, you ought“ not to go out. He is rich, but he is not happy. A man lke him cannot be unhappy. His wife is neither pretty nor rich. Though he works a great deal, he makes (very little®) progress. Whether I read or write, I like to be alone. I will go and see you, but I cannot say when. I will go, provided it does not rain. This drawing is well done, yet it might’ be better. Unless you invite him yourself, he will not come. My father and mother are ill, but it is nothing® serious. I think that you will succeed'®, because you have many recommendations. - désobéir à 2 hier soir 3mourir ‘devoir. 5très-peu de ©pleuvoir 7 pouvoir 8 mieux 9riende !V réussir. — INTERJECTIONS. 226 Interjections are invariable words used to express any sudden emotion of the mind. EXAMPLES. y ah! bon! vive la joie! grief and pain hélas! aïe! ah! ouf! fear ha! hé! surprise quot! vraiment! aversion SA! fidone! admiration oh! ah! ' RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 127 encouragement allons! courage! bravo! silence chut! paix! st! calling hola! ho! hé! warning prenez garde! gare! attention tiens ! tenez! voilà ! disbelief ah bah! interrogation hé bien ! EXCLAMATORY EXPRESSIONS IN coMMON USE. au feu ! au feu! ; fire! fire! au secours ! au secours ! help! help! au voleur! au voleur! thieves ! thieves i au meurtre ! on m’assassine ! murder! murder! aux armes! aux armes ! to arms ! to arms! à la garde! à la garde ! police ! police-! — ee Recapitulation on all the preceding Rules (either for written or viva voce practice). From No. 23 To 85.—The horse and the ass are two useful animals. The night was very stormy. Lions are numerous in Africa. Man is the king of nature. We have some pigeons and some hens. They have bread for three days, and flour for the rest of the week. Is the hamlet far from here? Give these oranges to the little boys. Where arc my jewels? I gave them to the jeweller. Spain is under one of the finest skies in Europe. Have you any relations in India? My father and mother live in Calcutta. Iis sister had a white dress and a pink sash. Are those apricots ripe? The ground is very dry, because the heat has been so great. Is her brother older than I? The tiger is more ferocious than the lion, but it is not so strong. I like good beer better than bad wine. Do you know your lesson? No, I do not know it yet. Which is the most precious of metals ?—Gold. That gentle- man has a delightful house on the hill. Your house ard mine were built at the same time. The Loire is less rapid than the Rhine, but it is wider. The French and English generals were of the same opinion. The enemy had twelve hundred horses, ten thousand five hundred and fifty men, and eighty pieces of cannon. The English watches are much stronger than the French watches. I like Italian music. Is German music as good as the Italian? His mother was a Spanish lady. From No. 86 To 118. Pronouns..—Are you pleased with (con- tent de) him ? I see her in the garden. Has she taken her bonnet? Are you going to London? Have you spoken to him? Do you give them lessons in French? Is this book for me or for him ? No, it is for her. Who has called me? Is it you? Who said so? is it he ? No, sir; it is I. Bring me my hat, and give him his gloves. Do not give them beer. His house is much larger than mine. Your father is much younger than his. It is the queen of England who 128. FRENCH GRAMMAR. fired the first shot. That is very true. He who does not like work is unhappy. Those who flatter us deceive us. That is the one which I have chosen. The man that we saw yesterday is the one who bought my house. The lady to whom Iwas speaking is a very good musician. Who has sung that duet ? The two ladies we heard last night. Of whom are you speaking? What will you do, if he does not come? What day will you come and see me? Every one works for himself. Everybody complains of his memory, but no one complains of his judgment. Whoever flatters his masters, betrays them. I know no- thing more absurd. Both were very distinguished men. From No. 111 To 226.—Verbs.— Were you at the concert last week ? No, I did not go. I was hunting in the country when I re- ceived your letter. The guns of the allies demolished the fortress. After having given a first assault, they retreated. When do you dine ? We breakfasted very early, I-begin to be hungry. Would he come if I was to go with him ? = We shall set off in a few days; if you like to come with us, make haste to pack up your things. You should not go out without telling your father. He will consent to it if you ask him. Do you think that these pencils belong to your master? I was returning from town when I met your brother. Do you know my uncle? I only know him by (de) sight. We have caught a great many fish. Can you translate Milton into French? I do not think I can do it. Do you instruct your son yourself ? He has lost all his fortune. Do you think he will lose his lawsuit? I believe he will gain it. Take these ladies to the drawing-room, and give them some refreshment. I do not fear that man. Is there anybody (quelqu’un) in the room? No, there is nobody. Then sit down and warm yourself until I come back. At what o'clock do you go to bed? I goto bed at eleven o’clock, and I get up in the morning at seven. You must do your exercise, or else your master wili be angry. Make haste to dress yourself, it is very late. Has he done his duty? Do not go out yet, it is too cold. Do you think it will be warmer this afternoon? There was some ice this morning. Now rest yourself. Your brother always comes after the others. I have never seen him here. When will he come? He will not come unless you tell him. But do you think he will come if I tell him? Yes, Le will, because he told me #0. de Part LE. SYNTAX. Syntax is the construction of words and sentences according to the rules of grammar. —— SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 227 GENERAL RULE.—The article 1e, 1a, 1', or 1es is used in French before substantives common, taken in a general or individual sense, or designating a whole kind or species ; as 22 les hommes sont mortels men"are mortal la gloire du héros the glory of the hero le livre que je lis the book which I read nous apprenons lu gcographie we learn geography Repetition of the Article. 228 The article must be repeated in French before every substantive, whether subject or object of any sentence, when it is already expressed before the first; as le coton, la laine et la soie sont cotlon, wool, and silk are very useful des étoffes très-utiles stuffs la France produit de argent, du France produces silver, copper, cuivre, du fer, du plomb, &c. iron, lead, $c. 229 The article is also repeated before plus, moins, and mieux, when they modify several adjectives qualifying a substantive 3 as Londres est la ville la plus riche London is the richest and most et lu plus peuplée de l’Europe populous town in Europe a 3 159 FRENCE GRAMMAR. Read, translate, and urite, Le lion est le roi des animaux. Ja neige blanchissait les toits. L'homme est le roi de la nature. L’olivier est l’emblême de la paix. Les hommes sont nés pour lz société. L’honneur aux grands cœurs est plus cher que ia vie. Le père, la mère, et les enfants sont sortis. Les principaux produits de la Russie sont le blé, le chanvre, le lin, le bois de charpente, le fer, les fourures, les cuirs, et le suif. ZL’écrivain le plus pur et le plus correct. Les vers les plus touchants et les plus harmonieux. Les livres les mieux écrits et les mieux pensés. L’honnêteté est préférable à tout l’or du monde. Exercise on the Article. The love of glory!, the fear of shame?, and the design (of making”) 3 one’s fortune, are often the cause of that valour* (so much*) prized® among’ men. Charity® is the greatest° of all Christian virtues'>. Men | are seldom (satisfied with") their lot'2 Clemency, wisdom', and courage are finer'! ornaments in a prince than" the jewels'® with which!” he is covered’. Man (was born'®) for society ; beasts, fishes, birds, and even reptiles, were created® for his use?. History, geo- graphy, and mathematics”? are necessary sciences”, Study nourishes® wouth®, amuses (old age’), adorns” prosperity, and comforts® us in adversity. Gold, silver, copper, lead, and iron, are the principal metals. (Let us avoid?) idleness and intemperance. The novel® of Paul and Virginia is the most interesting and most elegantly written book I know? 1gloiref. 2hontef. 3defaire “valeur f, 5si Svanté 7 parmi Bcharitéf 9 plus grande !°vertuf. !!content de !Zsort !3 sagesse f. !4 de plus beau pl. 15 que !S6bijou !7 dont 18couvert !Pestr£ ?9créer ?! usage m. 72 mathéma- tiques pl. des sciences nourrir 2 jeunezze 25 vicillesse 7 orner 28 soulager 2 éviter 30 paressef. 3! roman 32 connaître. 230 The article is used in French before names of coun- tries, kingdoms, provinces, mountains, rivers, seas, lakes, &c.; as l'Europe et l’Asie Europe and Asia U Angleterre et la France England and France aimez-vous l’Italie ? do you like Italy ? la Bourgogne et la Flandre Burgundy and Flanders les Alpes et les Pyrénées the Alps and the Pyrenees le Rhône et la Seine the Rhone and the Seine l’océan et la Méditerrance the ocean and the Mediterranean 231 ExcEPTION.— These nouns usually take mo article when they are preceded by the preposition de, expressing the qualification, nationality, or origin of the persons or things Po SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 131 mentioned, and after the preposition en (to or in), or the verbs aller, arriver, venir, partir, sortir ; as le royaume de France the kingdom of France la reine d'Angleterre the queen of England du vin de Champagne Champaign wine du cuir de Russie Russian leather j'ai voyagé en Italie I have travelled in Italy il est en Allemagne he is in Germany il vient de Russie he comes from Russia 232 However, the names of some distant countries always take the article ; such are, le Bengal, le Canada, le Mexique, le Pérou, le Brésil, &c. Thus we say : je vais AU Bengal, and not EN Bengal ; l'or pu Pérou, and not DE Pérou. Read, translate, and write. Les principaux pays de Europe sont la France, I’ Angleterre, la Russie, I’ Autriche, la Prusse, l’Espagne, et Italie. La Sicile, la Sardaigne, et la Corse sont des îles importantes situées dans la Méditerranée. Les principaux fleuves de la France sont le Rhône, le Rhin, le Loire, la Seine, la Meuse, et la Garonne. Napoléon franchit les Alpes avec son armée en 1800. Ze Mont-Blanc est la plus haute montagne des Alpes. I. acier d’ Angleterre, le cuir de Russie, les vins de France et d’Espagne sont très-estimés. Je suis né en France, mais j'ai voyagé en Russie, en Italie, en Allemagne, et en Ecosse. Mon frère ira aux Indes, et de là au Japon. Aimez-vous le vin de Bordeaux? Moi, j'aime mieux le vin de Bourgogne. L'empereur de Russie, Nicolas, mourut en 1855, pendant la guerre de Crimée. Le coton d’Amérique n’est-il pas plus estimé que celui des Indes ? Exercise. Europe, Asia, Africal, and America® are the four parts® of the world. England* and France are the two most® powerful countries® in” Europe. Burgundy® and Champaign® are two provinces of France celebrated for?® their fine" wines. The eruption of Vesuvius'? causes great devasta- tions. The emperor of Austria'®* was obliged (to leave!*) Vienna at the revolution of 1848. The cloth'® of England is more durable (than that'®) of France, but not!” so fine's, Have you read Thiers’ History of France? I hope I shall go'® to” Switzerland” next year. Have you ever? been to? Germany? ? My father spent® last winter in Italy, and he intends? to spend the summer in England. Shall you go to Canada with your brother? No, I am going to Mexico”, The shawls® of India® are in great repute“. I come from Brazil®! ! Afrique Z Amérique 3 partie 4 Angleterre 5 plus 6paysm. 7de 8 Bour ogne f. 9 Champagne f. 19 par bon 12 Vésuve m. 13 Autriche 14 de quitter >drap m. que celui pas 8 fin Malier 2 en 2 Suisse 22 jamais 23 en 14 Allemagne passer 2 sc proposer (de) 27 Mexique m. 28 chile 29 Inde 30ré. putation 3! Brésil m. 132 ... FRENCH GRAMMAR. 233 The article is generally used in French before nouns of title, dignity, profession, &c.; as la princesse Marie Princess Mary le maréchal Soult Marshal Soult le général Bertrand General Bertrand le docteur Orfila Doctor Orfila 234 When any of these denominations, duc, duchesse, comte, comtesse, &c., are used formally, they take the word monsieur or madame with the article; as, Comment se porte mynsieur le duc ? Madame la comtesse est-elle chez elle? But when used familiarly, both monsieur, &c., and the article are omitted; as, Bonjour, comie, comment allez-vous? 235 The article le, la, les, is used with nouns of measure, weight, and number, in speaking of the price of a thing, whereas a or an is used in English; as cinq francs le boissean five francs a bushel deux schellings la livre two shillings a pound trois francs la douzaine three francs a dozen 236 In speaking of portions of time, or of what is paid for salary, wages, fees, or admittance to public places, we use in French the preposition par; whereas the English employ a or an; as cent guinées par an a hundred guineas a year dix francs par jour ten francs per day six schellings par billet six shillings a ticket 237 Du, de la, des, are used before substantives common having a partitive sense, that is, denoting a part, a portion of the persons or things spoken of, and whenever some or any precedes, or might precede, a noun in English; as il a du papier he has some paper donnez-moi de la bière give me some beer nous avons des amis we have friends 4 avez-vous des sœurs? have you any sisters? â Read, translate, and write. Le prince Louis Napoléon fut nommé président de la République en 1848. Le cardinal Wolsey était un célèbre ministre de Ienri VIII. Ze comte de Chambord est l'héritier légitime du trône de France. Le général Pélissier est maintenant le Maré- chal, duc de Malakoff. Le bon vin de Bordeaux se vend de 250 a 450 francs la feuillette. Le thé, en France, cofite douze francs la SYNTAX OF MIE ARTICLE. 133 livre. On vend les pommes de terre à là livre. Notre premier professeur a kuit cents livres sterling par an. Combien prenez- vous par leçon? Je prends dix guinées par trimestre. Le diner est à trois francs par téte. Ces pommes me coûtent deux schel- lings la douzaine. Etes-vous le Professeur Gellert? Non ; je suis le Docteur Muller. Ces malheureux ont-ils du pain et de la viande? Il a de l’argent, des terres, et du crédit. Exercise. General Kleber was killed! in Egypt. Admiral Nelson fell? at the battle of Trafalgar. Captain Cook was one of the most celebrated navigators of his age’. We saw* Prince Albert at the opening® of the (Crystal Palace®). The Prince of Wales”, son of Victoria, queen of England, (was born®) in 1841. King Louis the Sixteenth died on the scaffold. We expect Professor Wilson. Good wine (is sold?) for five shillings a bottle’, and beer for two shillings a gallon. He sells sugar at seven pence'® a pound. Corn'® is generally sold in France at four francs a bushel'S, and hay for thirty francs a (thousand-weight!?). (How much'®) a dozen? My brother receives three hundred guineas a year'®, and he pays® twenty shillings a week‘! for his apartments. I give three shillings a day®* to my gardener. Give me some bread and some butter, some beer or some water. Spain produces® lemons®, oranges, and olives. Money“® gives to a woman credit, friends, birth”, and beauty. Have you any books for me? Has he any paper? We have friends who come? this evening. 1tuer 2tomber 2sitclem. 4 voir 5 ouverturef 6 palais de cristal m. 7 Galles Best né 9sevendre !° bouteille. !galonm. !2vendre 13 pence M livre f 15 blé mm. 16 boisseau m. 17 muliier 22. 8 Combien !Pan payer 2! semaine 22 jour 2 Espagne 21 produire 23 citron 26 argent 27 naissance f. 8 venir. Suppression of the Articie. 238 No article is used before proper names of persons, towns, and villages ; as lacine et Molière Racine and Molière Londres et Paris London ard Paris 239 Iowever, a few proper names of persons are excepted from this rule, such as l’Arioste, le Tusse, le Dunte, le Titien, le Poussin, le Cor- rêge, &c., which always take the article in imitation of the Italians. 2420 There are also some towns whose names are always preceded by the article; as le Havre, le Mans, la Rochelle, la Flèche, la Haye, lu Mecque, &c. The article is also used when some expression particu- larising the name of the town precedes or follows it; as le Paris du XVe siècle, 241 If a substantive, taken in a partitive sense, is pre- ceded in French by an adjective or an active verb with a 13:4 FRENCH GRAMMAR, negation, the preposition de is used for both genders and numbers, instead of the article du, de la, des ; as donnez-moi de bon pain give me good bread J'ai de bonne viande I have good meat il a de beaux chevaux he has fine horses _ ils n’ont pas de vin they have not any wine n’avez-vous pas d’amis ? have you no friends ? 242 Observe, however, that if an adjective forms a part of a com- pound word, or is essential to the sense, as in beau-père, belle-mère, petit-pain, jeunes gens, beau monde, beau temps, &c., the article must be used ; as // y a DES belles-mères qui valent de vraies mères— Voilà DES jeunes gens studieuxr— Apportez-moi DES petits-pains — Aurons-nous DU beau temps ? 243 In interrogative negative sentences, the article du, de la, or des, is used or suppressed according to the partitive or negative sense intended to be given to the sentence ; as Partitive. n’avez-vous pas des enfants ? have you not children ? n’avez-vous pas du pain ? have you not bread ? Negative. n’avez-vous point d’enfants? have you no children? n’avez-vous point de pain ? have you no bread? Without the article, the interrogation is a mere question, implying doubt; whereas with the article it means that you have children and bread. 244 No article is used in French after collective substan tives, or adverbs of quantity ; the preposition de alone being employed ; as une foule de gens a crowd of people une troupe de soldats a troop of soldiers beaucoup de courage a great deal of courage trop de vanité too much vanity 245 ExceprroN.—When the substantive is taken in a specified sense, the article must be expressed ; as un grand nombre des personnes que j'ai vues. It is also used after la plupart and bien ; as la plupart des hommes ; bien des amis. Read, translate, and write. Londres et Paris sont les deux plus grandes capitales de l'Europe. Avez-vous jamais été à Berlin? Frédéric IT, roi de Prusse, était un grand guerrier. Alexandre, Annibal, César, et SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 135 Napoléon étaient de grands capitaines. Le Corrége, et le Titien étaient deux grands peintres italiens, Il y a de très-beaux arbres dans la forêt de Fontainebleau. Il n’y a pas de maisons sur cette route. Comment pouvez-vous vous ennuyer? n’avez-vous pas des livres? Je ne puis lire, puisque je n'ai pas de livres. Bou- langer, avez-vous des petits-pains? Une troupe de nymphes cou- ronnées de fleurs nageaient en foule derrière le char de la ‘déesse. Je n'ai pas beaucoup de temps i vous donner. A-t-elle versé beaucoup de larmes? Il a trop de bon sens pour agir ainsi. Nous avons traversé une forêt de sapins. Tant d'hommes ne seraient pas si insolents, si tant d’autres n'étaient pas si bêtes. Il y a bien des personnes curieuses dans le monde. J'ai goûté du bon fromage que vous avez acheté hier. Exercise. Rome and Carthage were for! a long time fighting? for® the empire of the world Shakespeare and Milton are the two greatest® poets of England. Titian® is one of my favourite’ painters. We have fine pears and good peaches in our garden. Great events® happened? in February, 1848. Those soldiers (had no'°) shoes!, and often no” bread. They have no pencils and no pens. Have you no horses? How can you stay at home ? have you not horses? Our young officers showed! (a great deal!'*) of courage on'® that occasion. A great number of men were killed! under the walls of the town. What!” a crowd of people! That man has (too much'S) pride. Most" (young men”) boast?! too much. We have many enemies and few friends. ! pendant 2 combattre 3 pour 4 monde 5 plus grand © Titien 7 favori 8 événe- ment Y arriver 10 n’avoir pas !! sculier !? pas !3 montrer !4 beaucoup de 15 dans 16 tuer 17 Quelle 18 trop de !9 La plupart “ jeunes gens 21 se vanter 246 No article is used before common nouns preceded by the words sans, avec, entre, de, soit, par, pour, ni, sur, jamais, comme, or en, when the sense is vague and indeter- minate ; as un homme sans mérite a man without merit combattre avec courage to fight with courage entre amis, on n’a pas de secrets between friends one has no secrets une vie pleine de charmes à life full of charms il n’a n? père ni mère he has neither father nor mother comme poète et historien as a poet and historian il mourut ex héros he died as a hero 247 No article is used before common substantives, when they form but one idea with the verb which precedes them ; as avoir besoin, fo want avoir peur, to be afraid avoir envie, to wish avoir pitié, to pity 136 FRENCE GRAMMAR. avoir froid, to be cold ‘ mettre fin à, to put an end to avoir soif, to Le thirsty porter envie, to bear envy avoir soin, (o take care porter malheur, to bring bad luck faire peur, to frighten prendre garde, fo take care faire tort, to wrong prendre plaisir, to delight faire voile, to set sail rendre grâce, to return thanks 248 The article is omitted in French in proverbial sen- tences, in enumerations, and before nouns used exclama- tively ; as pauvreté n’est pas vice poverty is no vice hommes, femmes, enfants, tout périt! men, women, children, all perished! soldats! la patrie compte sur vous soldiers! the country relics on you 249 No article is placed before a substantive used ad- jectively, that is, to qualify or particularise another which precedes it; as Frédéric roi de Prusse Frederick the king of Prussia Paris capitale de la France Paris the capital of France Corneille auteur dramatique Corneille a dramatic author 250 The article is omitted in French before any number used after substantives to indicate rank or order ; as livre premier book the first chapitre dix chapter the tenth Henri quatre Henry the Fourth Charles douze Charles the Twelfth 251 No article is used in French, as in English, before a noun expressing the nationality, profession, or trade of the individual, the noun being then a mere adjective ; as Calvin était Français Calvin was a Frenchman Garrick était comédien Garrick was an actor je suis médecin I am a physician son père est avocat his father is a barrister 252 But un, une, or des for the plural, must be used when the sen- tence begins with cest, ce sont, c’était, &c.; as c'est UN Français ; c'était UN Anglais. 253 The article is omitted in French when the substan- tive begins the title of a book or the heading of a chapter; as grammaire française a French grammar voyage en Chine a voyage to China essai sur l’homme an essay on man SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 137 254 The article is omitted after quel, what. used in ex- clamations ; as quel homme ! what a man! - quelle femme ! what a woman ! quel beau chateau ! what a beautiful castle ! 255 The English article the, when used before more or less, repeated in a sentence, is not expressed in French; as plus on a, plus on veut avoir the more we have, the more we wish to have Read, translate, and write. Les hommes sans passions, sans vertus, et sans vices, n’ont qu’un seul sentiment : la vanité mal déguisée. Entre voisins, on se parle avec franchise. Lequel préférez-vous comme poète épique d’Homère ou de Virgile? Homère, comme génie créateur, mérite la préférence. Jamais père ne fut plus heureux que vous l’êtes. Cette bonne action vous portera bonheur. Paul et Virginie s’assirent sous un arbre, accablés de lassitude, de faim et de soif. Soldats, s’écrie Bonaparte, songez que du haut de ces monuments, quarante siècles vous contemplent! Z'émérité n’est pas prudence. Vieillards, femmes, enfants, tous voulaient me voir. La Bour- gogne, province de France, est fertile en vins. Minerve, déesse de la sagesse, conduisait Télémaque. Louis quatorze protégeait les bommes de lettres. Charles douze fut vaincu à Pultava. Son frère est peintre, et sa sœur est musicienne. Sa mere est Française, mais son père était Allemand. C’est un Italien qui a attenté à la vie de Napoléon trois. Voici le titre de l’ouvrage : Essai sur l’histoire de France, par Guizot. Quel malheur, qu’il soit mort si jeune! Quel tableau ravissant présentent les campagnes! Exercise. Where did you buy! that fine marble (chimney-piece?)? Human life is full® of disappointments*, Those’ who speak without? reflection are (exposed to’) many® errors. If you are (endowed with?) wit!® and judgment, be'not (puffed up with") pride. - Do you consider him as a poet or as a moralist ? : Have pity (on the!?) poor; and- (return thanks'?) to God for (that which!) you have received from Him. I am dying" of thirst. Have you (a mind'®) (to go for") a walk? l'emerity is not prudence. Fortune, credit, esteem, all'® was lost” in one day. Friends, I leave?! you for ever! Mountains, valleys, and you, charm- ing village, I shall never (see you again)! The Duke of Orleans, the eldest son of Louis-Philippe the First, was killed? by an accident ! acheter 2cheminge f. 3 plein ‘revers 5 Ceux ©sans 7 exposer à 8 beauroup de 9douéde 10esprit 1 gonflede !2des 13 rendre grâce - M ce que’ !15 mourir $ envie !7 defaire 18 promenade f. 19tout perdre ZI quitter Z vous revoir Balné “tuer 188 FRENCH GRAMMAR. on the 13th of July, 1842. Charles the Tenth, king of France, lost his throne at the Revolution of 1830. Willian the Third, king of England, married® the Princess Mary,” daughter of James” the Second. You will find‘? that history at page ten, book the third, chapter™® the second. Walter Scott was a Scotchman. Her husband was a general. Her father is a tailor. What is the title of his book ? A French and English dictionary. What a handsome woman! What a large® house! What a pity® to destroy it! The less you spend®, the more you will have. 25 épouser 2 Marie 27 Jacques 28 trouver chapitre 30 grand 3! dommage m 32 dépenser. —— SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. The difference of construction, in French and in English, of such sentences as, my father’s house, la maison de mon père ; the queen’s carriage, la voiture de la reine, &c., has already been shown (No. 26). 256 When by the ’s the words house, dwelling, &c., are understood, the French use chez; as, there was an even- ing party at Mr. Cobden’s, il y avait une soirée cHEz M. Cobden ; he is gone to his uncle’s, il est allé cHEZ son oncle. Of Compound Substantives. 257 In French, the latter of two substantives having re- lation to each other is always preceded by a preposition, as de or à. The preposition de is used (27) when made of, coming from, of the, or belonging to can be understood, and the word standing last in English comes first in French. with de between the two; as une table de marbre a marble talle une chaîne d’or a gold chain du vin de Bourgogne Burgundy wine de l’huile d'olive olive oil une robe d'hiver a winter dress 258 The preposition à is placed between the two words when one expresses the use or purpose of the other, and _ also when by means of, with, or having, can be understood, the last word in English being put first in French ; as des armes à feu fire-arms un pot à eau a water-pot une salle à manger a dining-room un bateau à vapeur a steam-boat une voiture à deux roues a two-wheeled carriage SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 139 259 The preposition a with the article is used before a noun representing what is sold in a place, or when the first word is intended to contain the second ; as le marché au blé the corn-market la foire aux bestiaux the catile-fair la boite aux lettres the letter-box l’armoire au linge the linen-press la cave à la bière the beer-cellar Read, translate, and write, La Notre-Dame de Paris de Victor Hugo est un roman hig- torique du plus grand intérêt. Il sait par cœur la plupart des fables de La Fontaine. La chambre de ma mère a un papier bleu. Monsieur B—— est-il chez lui? Dites-lui que je serai chez moi toute la matinée. Avez-vous été au jardin d'hiver ? Elle avait des bas de soie et des souliers de satin. Combien coûte une bouteille de win de Bourgogne? Je préfère une branche de lilas à un pot de giroflée. ll a fait bâtir un moulin à vent, un moulin à eau, ct un moulin à vapeur. Une voiture à quatre roues paie plus d'impôt qu’une voiture & deux roues. J'aime beaucoup la chasse au renard. C'est une belle fille aux yeux noirs. Où est mon mouchoir de poche? Dans la chambre à coucher. Pouvez-vous me dire où est la boîte aux lettres? Elle est au coin du marché au poisson. Exercise on the Substantive. You will find! that book in my father’s library®>. Have you read? Shakespeare’s tragedies and Molière’s comedies? Cicero’s* eloquence and Cato’s® virtue will always be the admiration of posterity”, The character“ of Æsop’s’ fables is simple nature. I shall call’ at your house to-morrow. Go to my tailor’s, he works! well, Is there a ball at the French ambassador’s? The galleries’? of the house are supported!? by several iron pillars’. The Spanish’ wool is one of the ‘best! of Europe. I always keep! fire-arms in my bedroom for my safety’ during the night. Where is the milk-pot? Port"° wine is very dear in England. Shall you build” à three-story®? house? Where is the hay-market? It is near the flower-market. You have broken? the mustard-pot. The inventor of gunpowder was a German monk, named Schwartz. ltrouver ,? bibliothèque 3lire 4 Cicéron ® Caton © faire 7 postérité f. 8 carac- fêre m. 9 Esope !9 passer !! travailler I= galerie f. pr 13 soutenir 14 pilier 1» Es- pagne !Smeilleur !7 tenir! chambre à coucher !9sûretéf. “Oporto ?! bâtir 22 trois étages Z casser. Of Collective Nouns. | There are two sorts of collective nouns, the ecllective general and the collective partitive, 140 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 2¢0 The collective general represents the whole object or collection, as l’armée, le peuple, la flotte, la famille, &c., and requires that the werd, adjective, or pronoun to which it has reference should always be put in the singular; as la famille est partie the family are gone le peuple est mécontent the people are dissatisfied 261 The collective partitive represents only a portion of the whole object, or collection, as une foule, une multitude, une infinité, &c., and requires that the verb to which it re- lates should be generally in the plural* ; as : une troupe de soldats l’entourèrent a troop of soldiers surrounded him une foule d’enfants le suivaient a crowd of children followed him NoTE.—A verb is always put in the plural after la plupart, unless it is followed by a substantive in the singular ; as la plupart le disent ; la plupart du monde le dit. 3 Number of Proper Names. 262 GENERAL RULE.—In French, proper names of indi- : viduals do not take the mark of the plural ; as x les deux Corneille sont nés à the two Corneilles were born at Rouen Rouen 263 Sometimes the plural article les, des, or aux, is à placed before proper names, though denoting only one person, but they do not take the mark of the plural ; as 1 les Corneille et les Racine ont Corneille and Racine have illus- illustré la scène française trated the French stage 3 264 LExcrprions.—Proper names become common nouns whenever they refer to individuals resembling those cele brated characters whose names are used to denote qualifi- cations, and tlien they take the mark of the plural; as la France a eu ses Césars et ses France has had her Cæsars and Pompées,—des généraux com- Pompeys,— generals like Cæsar me César et comme Pompée and like Pompey * But this cannot be given as a rule, as we find many examples in which the verb is 4 put in the Daguien In such cases we must consider which of the two words commande the agreement ; as 4 une foule d’ennemis s’affrit à nous. une troupe d'hommes armés parut à mes yeux. Fous une foule de soldats y furent noyés.— VOLTAIRE. SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 14} 265 We write also in the plural: les Bourbons, let Condeés, les Guises, les Stuarts, &c., when these names are used only as titles and surnames belonging to particular families. Plural of Compound Substantives. Besides the words just mentioned (257 and following), there are many compound substantives not formed accord- ing to the rules already given, and whose plural offers some difficulty. The following illustration will elucidate the subject. 266 When a compound noun 1s formed of a substantive and an adjective, both take the mark of the plural; as une basse-taille des basses-tailles une basse-cour des basses-cours 267 When a compound noun is formed of two substan- tives not separated by a preposition, both take the mark of the plural ; as : un chef-lieu des chefs-lieux un chou-fleur des choux-fleurs un oiseau-mouche des oiseaux-mouches 268 Wlien a compound noun is formed of two substantives separated by a preposition, the first alone takes the mark of the plural; as un arc-en-cel des arcs-en-ciel un chef-d'œuvre des chefs-d’œuvre 269 When a compound noun is formed of a substantive and an invariable word, such as a preposition, an adverb, or a verb, the substantive alone takes the mark of the plural, if required by the sense ; as un avant-coureur des avant-coureurs une arriére-saison des arriére-saisons une garde-robe des garde-robes But we write with an s in the singular as well as in the plural : un or des essuie-mains ; un or des porte-mouchettes, &c, because plurality is implied. 270 If one of the two words does not qualify the other, then the use of the number for both depends on the par- 142. FRENCH GRAMMAR. ticular sense which they suggest. Thus we write in French :— un appui-main, des appuis-main ; des appuis pour la main un brèche-dents, des brèche-dents ; qui ont une brèche aux dents un garde-côte, des gardes-côtes; des gardes des côtes un abat-jour, des abat-jour ; fenêtres qui abattent le jour un coupe-gorge, des coupe-gorge ; lieux où l’on coupe lu gorge Read, translate, and write. Tout le peuple, à grands cris, applaudit sa victoire. La mul- titude des étoiles ajoute à la beauté des nuits. Un corps de Spartiates font tomber sur lui une grêle de traits. Une troupe d'hommes armés parut à mes yeux. Les uns courent se jeter dans la rivière de Nerwa, et une foule de soldats y furent noyés. L'Espagne s’honore d’avoir vu naître les deux Sénèque. Le même roi (Louis XIV) qui sut employer les Condé, les Turenne, les Luxembourg, les Créqui, les Catinat, les Villars dans ses armées, les Colbert et les Louvois dans son cabinet, choisit les Racine et les Boileau pour écrire son histoire ; les Bossuet et les Fénelon pour instruire ses enfants; les Fléchier, les Bourdaloue et les Massillon pour l'instruire lui-même. Il ne faut qu’ un roi littérateur pour enfanter des Corneilles et des Racines. N’admirez- vous pas les chefs-d’œuvre de Racine et de Molière? La femme est le chef-d'œuvre de la nature. En France, il y a un préfet dans tous les chefs-lieux de département. Exercise. The whole! fleet (will set sail’) in the course® of the month. A great number of soldiers lost' (their lives®) in that battle. A crowd of nymphs® crowned with’ flowers swam® behind the car of the goddess’. The people wish"® for peace; but the parliament'!, who (know best!?) the interests of the nation, have voted'® for the continuation of the war. Are not most men (of opinion!*) that happiness is in virtue? The combat of the three Horatii! against the three Curiatii'® (took place'”) in the reign of Tullus Hostilius, third king of Rome. Nature seldom produces!$ (writers like!) Homer”, Virgil", Demosthenes, and Cicero®. The Shakespeares and the Racines are not less rare than the Marl- boroughs and the Turennes. Do you see? those kites?! over the hill? Gardener, you shall clean® these flower-borders® to-morrow. We saw two rainbows?” yesterday evening. I have bought® two corkscrews® for my dining-room. Where have you bought these beautiful fenders®? I want three “counterpanes® for my bed-rooms, and a dozen towels®. 1toutela 2 metire A la voile 3 courant. perdre 5lavie © nymphes 7 de € nager 9 déesscf. 10 désirer !! parlement mz. !?connaître mieux 13 voter 14d'avis !> Horace 16 Curiace !7 avoir lieu 18produire !9des 7 Homère 2! Virgile Z Cicéron 23 voir Z! cerf-volant Z nettoyer 20 plate-bande 7 arc-en-ciel Zacheter * tire. bouchon 30 garde-feu 3! couvre-pied 32 essui-mains SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 145 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES, Agreement of Adjectives. 271 GENERAL Rune. — Adjectives in French agree in gender and number with the substantives or pronouns to which they relate (42); as un homme heureux a happy man une femme heureuse a happy woman sont-elles heureuses ? are they huppy ? 272 When two or more substantives or pronouns occur in a sentence, the adjective referring to them is put in the plural; and if the substantives or pronouns are of different genders, it remains in the masculine ; as le roi et le berger sont égaux the king and the shepherd are equal après la mort ‘after death sa mère et sa sœur sont heureuses his mother and sister are happy mon père et ma mère sont Fran- my father and mother are French çais — -+ tement EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING RULES. 273 An adjective placed after two or more substantives agrees with the last: — 1 When the substantives are synonymous, or cenvey nearly the same meaning ; as Toute sa vie n’a été qu’un travail, qu’une occupation continuelle. MassiLLoN 2 When the substantives are united by the conjunction ou ; as Un courage ou une prudence étonnante. La mort ou la captivité paraissait inévitable.—VOLTAIRE. 3 When the substantives form a gradation ; as Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est toute prête. —RAcINE. 274 The adjectives nu bare, demi half, the participies supposé, excepté, arc invariable when placed before substan. 144 FRENCH GRAMMAR. tives; the adjective few, late, is also invariable before an | article or a pronoun ; as Invariable. Variable. il est nu-pieds il va les pieds nus une demi-heure une heure et demie supposé ces projets ces projets supposés excepté vos sœurs vos sœurs erceptéus Jeu la reine la feue reine - feu ma mère ma feue mère 275 The adjective franc is invariable in france de port when it precedes the substantive, and variable when it comes after ; as J'ai reçu FRANC DE PORT foutes ses toutes ses lettres soni FRANCHES lettres de port i 276 The compound words ci-joint, ci-inclus, are inva- riable at the beginning of a sentence, or when joined to a substantive used without an article, but they agree with the substantive if it is preceded by the article; as ; ci-joint (or ci-inclus) la copie du jugement vous trouverez CI-JOINT (Or CI-INCLUS) copie du traité vous trouverez CI-JOINTE (Or CI-INCLUSE) la copie du traité 277 Adjectives used adverbially, that is, to py verbs, are always invariable; as ces livres coûtent cher these books cost dear ces fleurs sentent bon these flowers smell nice elle chante faux she sings out of tune Read, translate, and write. Milton était aveugle et tourmenté de la goutte. Une vie étroite et pauvre, de nombreux ennemis, le sentiment amer de ses illusions démenties, le poids humiliant de la disgrâce publique, la tristesse de l’âme et les souffrances du corps, tout accablait Milton. Les femmes et les enfants furent massacrés dans les maisons. Je. tâche de rendre heureux ma femme, mon enfant, et même mon chien. Ma mère et ma sœur sont parties ce matin. Il s’exprime avec une grâce, une politesse parfuite. Il aura le mépris onla confiance Publique, selon qu'il agira bien ou mal. Diogène mar- chait nu-pieds et couchait dans un tonneau. Les demi- “dieux des anciens n’étaient que des hommes remarquables par leur valeur et leur vertu. Il y a une demi-heure qu’il est sorti, et il ne revien- dra qu’à dix heures et demie du soir. Les bourgeois vinrent pieds æus lui remettre les clés de la ville. Vous recevrez franc de SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 145 port toutes les lettres que je vous enverrai. Je vous envoie ci- incluse la lettre de mon correspondant. Cette huile coûte-t-elle cher? Je ne l’aime pas, elle sent fort. Exercise on the Adjective. Oar minister has profound judgment!, invariable industry? and a very extensive? knowledge! of the interests of foreign® courts’. The victory which Caesar” obtained® on the plains of Pharsalia’ was perni- cious to his country’, and dismal? (to human nature). French literature had a great influence under Louis the Fourteenth. Modesty and disinterestedness!! deserve'® to be praised!’® and admired. That young man renders” his father and mother happy. My sister and daughter will be (very glad'®) to see you. The troops fought! with wonderful® courage and intrepidity. ‘The soldiers of the army (were walking?) bare-footed. I want half® a pound® of tea, and a pound and a half of sugar. I sent“ all my letters post paid. The enclosed * letter is a copy of that which I received yesterday. Was not the late Duke? of Wellington the greatest man of his age®? Do these books cost? dear? These boys speak® too loud®. Does not the meat® which the butcher has given you smell® bad** ? lun jugement 2industrief. 3 étendu 4 connaissance f. 5 étranger cour f. 7 César 8 gagner 9 Pharsale 10 pernicienx 11 pays sm. 12 désastreux 13 pour le genre humain _!4 désintéressement m. 15 mériter 16 lcuer 17 rendre 18 bien aise 19 combattre 20 étonnant 2 marcher 22demi 2 livre f. 24 envoyer 2° franc de port 2 ci-inclus 27 duc m2. 28sièclem. 29 coliter 30 parler 3! haut 32 viande f. 33 sentir 31 mauvais. Position of Adjectives. We have seen (p. 27, No. 56) that adjectives in French are ‘usually placed after the substantives; but this cannot be ‘given as a rule, since a great number of adjectives precede ‘or follow, just as taste or sound directs. | 278 Those adjectives that must precede the substantive (58) require to be repeated when there are several in the sentence ; as les Arabes ont de belles armes et the Arabs have beautiful arms and de beaux chevaux horses | | 279 Adjectives expressing shape, colour®, flavour, nu- tionality, in short, any physical or accidental quality, follow their substantives; as | un chapeau rond a round lat un habit noir a black coat des amandes douces sweet almonds un brick français a French brig * NoTe.— When the colour is expressed by a compound adjective, such as blcu-clasr, y bleu-foncé, the two words remain invariable: une robe GROS-VERT ; des Rubits BLAU- ONCE ; des cheveur BLOND-CENDRE, CHATAIN-CLAIR, &c. H 146 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 280 But we say : les vertes prairies, les blonds épis, la blanche aubépine, les noirs soucis, &c., because the adjective precedes its sub- stantive whenever it expresses an habitual or inherent quality. Thus we say : un fidèle ami, but not un fidèle homme ; une basse intrigue, but not une basse action. 281 When two or more adjectives have relation to the same substantive, they generally follow it, the last being preceded by et; as une mère bonne et sensible a good and sensible mother une femme jeune, belle, et vertu- a young, beautiful, and virtuous euse woman 282 However, we see sometimes a noun between two adjectives, or the two adjectives before the noun, in sentences like the following: — un grand homme sec a tall thin man un petit chapeau bleu a little blue bonnet | un bon petit diner a nice little dinner i 283 The participles past of verbs, when used adjective, are placed after their substantives ; as un homme instruit a learned man une action défendue a forbidden action 284 OpservEe.— The meaning of some adjectives differs according to their position, before or after the ps as the following examples will show :— Before. After. ancien ami, old friend Rome ancienne, ancient Rome brave* homme, honest man homme brave, brave man 1 digne homme, worthy man air digne, dignified air franc coquin, downright rogue cœur franc, open heart grand homme, great man homme grand, tall man honnéte homme, honest man homme fonnéte, polite man maigre diner, poor dinner cheval maigre, lean horse pauvre poète, sorry poet poète pauvre, needy poet propres mains, own hands mains propres, clean hands simple soldat, common soldier homme simple, artless man ] Read, translate, and write. Pourquoi as-tu quitté cet heureux nid, et tes pebts enfants, et ta. vieille mère, et cette vallée charmante ? ur le penchant de quel- * With the exception of homme, femme, garçon, fille, &c., the adjective brave, ¢ courageous,” always precedes ; as braves camarades, braves soldats, E + 'This applies to komme only ; with any other noun, grand must ris precede; as, une grande femme, un grand cheval, &c. a SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 147 que agréuble colline bien ombragée, j'aurais une petite maison rustique, une maison blanche avec des contrevents verts. Il vint à passer un petit monsieur poudré, sec, vif, et À qui Antoine adressa son mémento criard. Que de types divers et touchants! La figure vénérable du soldat, la physionomie si bonne et si tendre de ma mère adoptive, et le frais et charmant visage d’Angèle souriant à son pelt enfant, la douce mélancolie de la Mayeux, appuyant de temps à autre ses lèvres sur la tête blonde et rieuse du fils aîné d’Agricole. La différence entre un pauvre auteur et un auteur pauvre est que le premier est sans mérite et le second sans fortune. Exercise. You have sold! me a bad? (58) horse. A good king often loses*, by the ill-conduet! of his ministers, the affection of his subjects. A little child is the emblem® of innocence. I have seeu® pretty ribbons and flowers in that shop. That gentleman has always very fine horses and logs. Had he not a blue coat” (embroidered with®) gold? Napoleon I. often wore’ a grey coat'°, buttoned over the chest!!, and a round hat {with broad brim'). You sent me bitter!® beer,and I like mild'* ale. We had two grey horses and a yellow carriages. There were two French brigs and three English frigates. The qucen had a fine blue dress and a long white shawl. A plain'?, simple, and natural style. ‘Great and extensive'® projects, conducted!® with wisdom, constitute? the ‘great minister. A tall” man is not always a great’ man. I expect® rom you a written exercise? I (do not like’°) spoiled children. They sent” a large” army to the succour of the besieged® town. I ive® in a pretty little cottage situated on the hill. Has he not a new j1at? When you go to town, bring” me some new books to read. There \s a great difference between a polite (honnête) man and an honest nan. } !vendre ? mauvais 3 perdre ‘ conduite f. 5emblème 6 voir 7 habit zm. 8 brodé fe 9 porter 10 redingotef. !! poitrine f. ‘2 à larges bords !3 amer !4 doux ! aile f. ) € voiture f. 17 uni !2vaste 19 conduit faire 2! grand Z2grand 23 attendre (Athéme 72. 25 n’aimer pas 26 gâté 27 envoyer 28 grand 29 assiégé 30 demeurer |! apporter. Government of Adjectives. 3 i 285 The government or object of adjectives is a substan- \iive, a pronoun, or a verb preceded by a preposition, such \1s à, de, dans, en, envers, sur, pour, &c. ; as digne de récompense worthy of reward ; propre à la guerre Jit for war il est bon envers moi he is kind to me 1 il est prét a partir he is ready to start kb i 286 Some adjectives have no government, having of H ? . 148 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Ci a IE PRE themselves a complete meaning, such as inviolable, vertueux, honnête, &c. les droits sacrés de l’amitié sont the sacred rights of friendship inviolables are inviolable 287 Some adjectives, as prêt, utile, fier, heureux, &c., are occasionally used with prepositions, and others, like enclin, comblé, doué, &c., are indispensably combined with them; as l’ignorance toujours est prête à s’admirer lorsque vous viendrez, je serai prét il est enclin à la paresse Adjectives governing the Preposition DE. 288 Adjectives which denote plenty, scarcity, or want, and in general all those followed in English by the prepo- sitions of; from, or with, require the preposition de Lefore the noun which they govern ; as 4 il est comblé d’honneurs he is loaded with honours 1 je suis privé de tout I am deprived of everything Adjectives requiring DZ. absent absent fou mad accusé accused furieux furious avide greedy glorieux glorious capable capable heureux happy chéri cherished honteux ashamed comblé loaded ivre intoricated content happy, satisfied jaloux jealous connu known joyeux joyful couvert covered las weary dénué destitute orgueilleux proud désireux desirous plein full digne worthy ravi delighted enchanté delighted rempli filled envieux envious satisfait satisfied exempt free soigneux careful fier proud sur sure fort strong triste sad Note.—After the impersonal verb à est, il était, or c’est, c'était, all adjectives take de; as il est difficile DE le contenter it is difficult to please him. 289 Adjectives which denote aptnress, fitness, necessity inclination, readiness, or any habit, require the preposition a before the noun which they govern; as cet officier est utile à son pays this officer is useful to his country il est attentif à sa leçon he is attentive to his lesson . SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 149 fdjectives requiring A. accessible accessible accoutumé accustomed agréable agreeable attentif attentive cher dear contraire contrary convenable suitable difficile difficult égal equal enclin inclined exact punctual facile easy favorable favourable funeste fatal habile clever nuisible hurtful odieux odious opposé contrary pareil similar porté inclined préférable preferable préjudiciable injurious prêt ready prompt ready, quick propice propitious propre fit sensible sensible sourd deaf sujet liable utile useful 290 Some adjectives govern sometimes one preposition, sometimes another; as affable à or envers tout le monde. Others change the preposition they govern, according as they are followed by a noun of person or thing, by a sub- stantive or a verb ; as reconnaissant® ENVERS une personne —reconnaissant D’un bienfait—habile DANS la or EN peinture —habile À se déguiser. affable à or envers ardent à or pour assidu à or auprès de coupable de or envers fidèle à, en, or dans inférieur à or en injurieux à nr psur inquiet de or sur nécessaire à or pour reconnaissant de or envers redevable à or de redoutable à or dans responsable à or envers sévère envers, à, Or pour Read, translate, and write. Ceux qui sont avides de louanges sont prodigues d'argent. Fier de sa noblesse, jaloux de sa beauté, le cygne semble faire parade de tous ses avantages. Apres une si longue absence, êtes-vous fâché de vous revoir dans votre royaume? Je ne suis pas fâché contre vous. Nos soldats sont revenus d’Italie couverts de gloire. Ceux qui ne sont contents de personne sont ceux même dont personne n’est content. Ce peuple belliqueux accoutumé à des conquêtes, accoutumé au travail, à la peine et au mépris de la vie. La respi- ration est mécessaire à la vie. St. Louis, roi de France, était affable envers tous et bienveillant pour chacun. Les riches sont portés à croire qu’ils sont supérieurs aux autres hommes. Ce * Adjectives expressing ‘behaviour towards others require the preposition envers ; as, do not be cruel to animals ne soyez pas CRUEL ENVERS les animaux. 150 FRENCH GRAMMAR. passage n’est pas fucile à comprendre. Il est fucile de se tromper. Ce jeune homme est assidu à son devoir et très-assidu auprès du prince. Ne soyez pas sourds à la voix de la religion. j Exercise on the Government of Adjectives. I am tired" with running®. Human life is never free? from trouble. Most! men are dissatisfied® with their condition. It is sweet® to observe the laws of friendship. That young man’ is esteemed by all® who know? him. The trees of my garden are loaded'® with fruit. Is it not glorious to be useful to one’s fellow-creatures' ? Gustavus the Great was hid! in a waggon® filled! with straw. Voltaire was very greedy’ of praise, and insatiable of glory. Are you not uneasy'® about that affair? He is slow" to punish and prompt in rewarding's. This is contrary to all thecrules of good breeding. Is your father angry® with you? Louis IX. was liberal, just, and affable to everybody. Are these apples fit? for eating? He is very clever” in drawing A Christian ought? to be ready? to die (rather than?) to deny® his faith. Most children are inclined® to idleness. That is easy® to say His daughter is subject® to frequent headaches*. o ! fatigué 2 courir 3 exempt 4 La plupart des 5 mécontent 6doux 7 jeune homa ; 8 tous ceux 9 connaître 10 chargé !! semblables 12caché 13 chariot !* rempli 15 avide 16 inquiet 17 lent 18 récompenser 19savoir-vivre 20 faché 2! tout le mond 22bon habile 2!dessin 2 devoir 26 prét 7 plutôt que 23 renier 29 enclin . 30 facile 3! sujet 32 mal de tête. 3 Adjectives of Dimension. 291 Adjectives relating to the dimensions of objects ar expressed in French in different ways. The English gene- rally use adjectives with the verb fo be, whereas the French use avoir (to have) and nouns preceded by de; as À Avoir* instead of to be. that river is six hun- f cette rivière a six cents pieds de largeur or de large dred feet wide cette rivière est large de six cents pieds Without the Verb. a tower a hundred { une tour de cent pieds de hauteur or Je haut feet high une tour haute de cent pieds J une table de dix pieds de longueur or de long @ table ven feet Pong Lune table longue de dix pieds 292 By or and, denoting comparative dimensions, or relative proportions, is rendered in French by sur, a follows :— Ë a drawing-room thirty feet long by uz salon de trente pieds de lon- (or and) sixteen wide gueur sur seize de largeur * In speaking of age, the French use avoir instead of être; as Quel dge avez-vous d'a dix-huit ans. How old are you? 1 am eighteen. (dn is never understood.) SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 151 Comparatives and Superlatives. 203 By after a comparative and before a noun of mea- sure, weight, or number, is always expressed by de; as I am taller than you by the whole je suis plus grand que vous de head toute la tête he is heavier than I by ten pounds il est plus lourd que moi de dix livres 294 Than after more or less is always expressed by de when followed by a numeral ; as he has more than ten horses il a plus de dix chevaux 295 Than after a comparative is expressed by que de before an infinitive mood, and by que nme before any tense of the indicative or conditional mood ; as it is more noble to forgive than to il est plus noble de pardonner revenge que de se venger he is richer than I thought il est plus riche que je ne pensais 296 The ne is omitted when the first part of the sentence is either interrogative or negative, or when there is a con- junction or an adverb between que and the verb ; as* is ke richer than he was ? est-il plus riche qu’il l’était ? he is not richer than he was il n’est pas plus riche qu’il l’était he is better than when he was in il se porte mieux que quand il India était aux Indes 297 The more or the less, when repeated in comparatives of proportion, is expressed in French by plus, or moins, without an article. Z%e is also omitted in French before any comparative when repeated ; as the more I study this language, plus j’étudie cette langue, plus je the more I like it l’aime the longer the day, the shorter plus le jour est long, plus la nuit the night est courte 298 So much the more and so much the less are expressed in French by d’autant plus, d'autant moins ; as he is <0 much the more guilty il est d’autant plus coupable he is so much the less to be pitied il est d’autant moins à plaindre ® However, if the subordinate proposition be intended to convey a negative meaning, ne must be used before the verb ; as He is not better to-day than he was yesterday. 11 w’est pas mieux aujourd’hui qu’il ne l’était hier. 152 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 299 The more or the less... for it, is expressed by en “before the verb, and plus, davantage, or moins after it; us lie is only the more guilty for it il n’en est que plus coupable he is not the less happy for it il n’en est pas moins heureux 300 More and less are rendered in French by de plus and de moins, in sentences like the following :— a day more or less un jour de plus ou de moins give him one pound more . _ donnez-lui une livre de plus 301 In, after a superlative, is expressed by de; as England is one of the richest I’ Angleterre est un des plus riches countries in Europe pays de l’Europe 302 If the substantive precedes the superlative, both | take the article le, la, les; if not, the superlative alone takes the article ; as the most powerful navy in the world la marine la plus puissante du monde la plus puissante marine du monde Read, translate, and write. La tour de la cathédrale de Strasbourg a 149 mètres de hauteur. Ce chêne a 90 pieds de hauteur sur 18 de circonférence. Les fossés de la ville ont 45 pieds de largeur sur 10 pieds 6 pouces de pro- fondeur. La rue de Rivoli à Paris a environ un mille et demi de longueur sur soixante pieds de largeur. La ville est entourée d’un mur de 20 pieds de hauteur sur G pieds d'épaisseur. Vous êtes plus petit que moi de 3 pouces. ll y avait plus de 400 mille hommes engagés à la bataille de Solferino. L'Impératrice Eugénie est plus jeune que l’Empereur Napoléon de dix-huit ans. Elle est plus âgée que je ne pensais. Elle n’est pas plus heureuse qu’elle l’était. Un homme peut-il être plus heureux que vous l’êtes ? Plus un peuple est malheureux, plus il est à craindre. Il ressent d'autant plus cette insulte qu’il la méritait moins. ll n’en est que nlus estimable. Qu’importe un mois de plus ou de moins? La France est la plus ancienne monarchie de l’Europe. Exercise on Adjectives of Dimension. The Monument of London! is a round pillar of the Dorie? order, two hundred feet® high. The walls of Algiers? are sixteen feet thick, and thirty high. London bridge? is nine hundred and twenty feet long, fifty-five high, and fifty-six wide. The hall® of the palace” is sixty- ! Londres 2 Dorique 3 pied 4 Alger 5 Le pont de Londres Ssallef. 7 palais m. _ SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 158 two feet long, by forty-four wide. The (Crystal Palace®) is one thousand six hundred and eight feet long, by three hundred and eighty- four feet wide, and onc hundred and sixty-eight feet high. Iam (older than®) you by two years!®; yet'! you are taller’? than I by two inches! The lion' is bigger than the dog'® by much'”, Louis the Fourteenth, in'® 1681, had sixty thousand sailors’, and more than a hundred men? of war. The Duke of Wellington was”? more than eighty years” old when he died”, Do (175) you not think that it® is greater to overcome? one’s*” pas- sions than to conquer® whole?” nations? It is easier®® to command?! than to obey®’. You make®® greater progress® than I should have thought®, and you behave®® better” than when you were young. Is your son® more obedient® than he was last® year? The more a man is adorned*? with moderation, temperance, and justice, the more valuable®® he is. The more attentive! you are, the less trouble* you will have. Your action is so much the more laudable!. She is so much the less happy”. I thank you the more for it. He will not be the less admired” forit. A few pounds more or less make no difference. Pekin, the capital of China, is the most populous”! in the world. Lyons®* is the most commercial® city* in France. 8 palais de cristal m2. 9 plus 4gé que 10ans !! cependant !"plus grand 13 moi 14 pouce pl. 13 lion mm. chien ze. 17 beaucoup Sen 19 matelot pl. 2 vaisseau pl. 21 guerre 22 avoir 23 ans 24 mourir 2° il 6 vaincre 27 ses 28 conquérir 29 entières 30 facile 3! commander 32 obéir 33 faire 31 progrés mm. 35 croire 38 se conduire 37 mieux 38fils m. 39 obéissant 40 dernier 4: année f. “2doué 43 estimable 41 attentif 45 peine 46 louable 47 heureux 48 remercier 49 admiré - 50 Chine /. 51 peuplé 52 Lyon 53 commerçante 54 ville f. ct = POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 303 The possessive adjectives (page 30) are repeated in French before every noun to which they relate, and agree with it in gender and number; as mon père, ma mère, et mes sœurs my father, mother, and sisters are sont à Paris in Paris 304 In addressing relations, the French use the posses- sive adjectives mon, ma, mes, before the names of relation- ship, though they are not used in English; as où êtes-vous, mon père? where are you, futher? me voici, ma mere here I am, mother ma sœur, viens avec moi sister, come with me bonjour, mon oncle good morning, uncle 305 In addressing a person, and inquiring about his relations, it is generally the custom in France to use, as a H 3 = 134 FRENCII GRAMMAR. mark of respect, one of the qualifications, monsieur, mes- sieurs, madame, mesdames, mademoiselle, mesdemoiselies ; as comment se porte monsieur votre père? how is your father? madame votre mère est-elle ici ? is your mother here? où sont mesdemoiselles vos sœurs ? where are your sisters? OBSERVE.— Monsieur and messieurs are used as substantives, and may be preceded by an article or another pronoun; as le monsieur que j'ai vu; ces messieurs sont arrivés. But the possessive adjective is always ‘left out before dame and demoiselle used substantively ; as cette dame, cette demoiselle. and not cette madame, &c. Te, Ia, les, USED INSTEAD OF mon, ton, son, &c. 306 The French generally use the article le, la, les, in- stead of the possessive adjective mon, ton, son, &c., before à the parts of the body, whenever the sense clearly shows the possessor ; as ouvrez la bouche open yoar mouth il avait les yeux ouverts he had his eyes open il a perdu le bras he has lost his arm 307 In speaking of an action over any part of the body or intellectual faculty, we use the reflective form of the verb, if we express a thing done to ourselves, and by our- selves, and then no possessive adjective, but the article, is used before the noun ; as il s’est coupé le doigt he has cut his finger je me lave les mains 1 wash my hands elle se chauffe les pieds she warms her feet 308 If we express a thing done to another, we use a con- junctive personal pronoun in the dative case (87), before the verb, and no possessive adjective appears before the part of the body mentioned; as je lui tâtai le pouls I felt his pulse il m’a blessé à la main he has hurt my hand vous lui tournez l’esprit you turn his mind 209 But we use mon, ton, son, &c., before the parts of the body, when the possessor is not clearly indicated ; as je vois que mon pied enfle 1 see that my foot swells sa jambe se guérit his leg heals SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 156 310 Observe the following expressions :— Jai mal à la tête my head aches elle a mal aux dents her teeth ache avez-vous froid aux pieds ? are your feet cold ? il a mal aux yeux he has sore eyes vous m'avez coupé au* doigt you have cut my finger # NoTe.— Couper à, as couper au doigt, means to cut slighily, but couper without the preposition @, as couper le doigt, would mean to cut off: Its, their, EXPRESSED BY son, &c., OR BY en AND le, la, les. 311 When the possessive adjectives its and their relate tc things, they are expressed by son, sa, ses, leur, leurs, only when they refer to a subject mentioned in the same pro- position, or when they are preceded by a preposition; as the country has its pleasures la campagne a ses agréments I admire the beauty of its trees j'admire la beauté de ses arbres 812 But when äs or their can be turned into of à or of them, it is expressed by er before the verb, and le, la, les, before the substantive ; as I live in the country, its pleasures j'habite la campagne, les agré- are innumerable ments en sont sans nombre the Louvre is a magnificent build- le Louvre est un édifice magni- ing, I admire its architecture fique, j’en admire l’architecture Read, translate, and write. Apportez-moi mon chapeau, ma cravate et mes gants. Bonjour, mon oncle, comment vous portez-vous? Je connais monsieur votre père depuis bien longtemps. Mademoiselle votre sœur viendra- t-elle au bal? Messieurs vos frères sont-ils de retour? La dame qui est au piano est la femme de l’ambassadeur. En disant ces mots, les larmes me vinrent aux yeux. Le sang lui sortait par le nez et par la bouche. L’amiral Nelson perdit le bras à l’expédi- tion de Santa-Cruz. Il a le corps trop gros et la tête trop petite. Lavez-vous les mains avant le dîner. Épaminondas tomba percé d'un javelot qui lui resta dans la poitrine. Ils vont me couper la tête et peut-être te faireroi. Ces ouvrages ont leur mérite et leurs défauts. Le temps fuit, la perte en est irréparable. Ezercise on Pgssessive Adjectives. His uncle, aunt, and cousin are dead’. My father and brother are ill. I thank? you, mother, for the fine dress“ you have given* me. Sister, I bring® you some® pretty flowers. Is your father at home”? How is® your mother to-day ? Will? you present!® my compliments to your 1 mort Zremercier 3robef. “donner apporter “de 7chezlui 8 se porter 8 vouloir 10 faire 156 FRENCH GRAMMAR. sisters? His fever left him yesterday. A cannon-ball'! took off? his arm. Will you wash'® your hands before! dinner? Mind! you will break! your neck. Do not tread!” upon my foot. Her father lost' his sight! last year. Can® you cut? my hair immediately? My carriage ran® over his body, and broke? his leg and his right arm? He took my hand and put” a gold ring on my little finger. That town is very small, but it has its pleasures and advantages. London® is a great commercial” city ; its ships bring” (to it”) the riches of all countries”. Paris is a delightful® town, though” its streets are too narrow“, and its houses tco high®. His illness® is dangerous; I know® its origin and effects. The Rhine¥ is a magnificent river ; its banks® are delightful. !l boulet de canon m. !2emporter 13 laver 14.avant 13 prendre garde !6 casser 17 marcher 18 perdre 19 vue f. 20 pouvoir 2! couper 72 passer Z3 casser 24 bras m. 25 mettre 26 Londres 27 de commerce apporter lui 39 pays m. 31 charmant 32 quoique 33 étroit 3 haut 35 maladief. 36 connaitre 37 Rhin zm. 38 bord m, 5 Erg DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 313 The demonstrative adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, al- ways precede a substantive; they must be repeated before every noun, and agree with it in gender and number ; as ce jardin, cette maison, et ces this garden, this house, and these champs sont à vendre fields are to be sold OBSERVE.— Ce, when used as an adjective, must not be confounded with the pronoun demonstrative ce; the latter is always joined to a verb, or followed by qui or que ; as, C’est moi; CE que j'aime. INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 314 Aucun Or nul, signifying pas un, requires ne* before the verb, and admits of no plural; as il n’a aucun ami he has no friend nul hommie n’est parfait no man is perfect 315 Aucun and nul admit of a plural, when the sense requires it, and particularly when they relate to a noun that has no singular; as l’ennemi n’avait fait aucuns pré- the enemy had made no prepara- paratifs tions nulles troupes ne se battent mieux TO troops fight better ce serviteur ne reçoit aucuns gages that servant receives no wages * However, in interrogations or in sentences expressing doubt, aucun and nul do not take ne; as, AUCUN homme fut-il jamais plus favorisé de la fortune? Je doute qu’AUCUR d’eux le fasse. SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 157 OnsErvE.—/Vul and aucun may be used without a substantive :— nul n’est satisfait de sa fortune no one is satisfied with his fortune - aucun nest prophète chez soi no one is a prophet in his own country 316 Quelque, some, a few, being an adjective, agrees in gender and number with the noun which it precedes ; as lisez quelques bons livres read some good books j'aurai quelques amis demain 1 shall have a few friends to-morrow Quelque, meaning whatever, whoever, or however, is used in three ways :— 317 When followed by a verb, it is written in two words, quel que, and then quel, being an adjective, agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb; as quel que soit son talent whatever may be his talent quelle que soit la loi whatever may be the law quels que soient ses amis whoever may be his friends quelles que soient ses richesses whatever may be lis riches 318 When followed by a substantive, it is written as one word, quelque, and agrees with it in number ; as quelques protections que vous ayez whatever protections you may have quelque grande fortune qu’il ait whatever great fortune he may have 319 When followed by an adjective or an adverb, it is written as one word, and remains invariable ; as : quelque puissants qu’ils scient however powerful they may be quelque bruvement qu’ils se battent ~~ however bravely they may fight 320 Chaque, every, each, is always followed by a noun to which it relates. It is of both genders, and without plural ; as chaque pays a ses coutumes every country has its customs chaque age a ses plaisirs every age has its pleasures But when repetition of an action is meant, instead of chaque, we use tous les, m., or toutes les, f., for every ; as il va a Paris tous les ans he goes to Paris every year je lis tous les soirs 1 read every evening 321 Tout, all, whole, as an adjective, agrees in gender 158 FRENCH GRAMMAR. and number with the substantive to which it relates, and is followed by the article; as tous les livres que j'ai all the books I have toute la flotte fut anéantie the whole fleet was destroyed toutes les dames sont ici all the ladies are here 322 Tout is also used in the sense of every, any, and then it is not followed by the article in the singular ; as tout homme est sujet à la mort every man us liable to death toute peine mérite salaire all labour deserves remuneration toute autre personne le ferait any other person would do it 323 Tout is an adverb when placed before an adjective, and signifies quite, entirely, however, although, as, and then is invariable ; as i tout savants qu’ils sont learned as they are elle est tout alarmée she is quite alarmed ces souliers sont tout neufs these shoes are quite new 324 But tout, although an adverb, is variable before an adjective feminine beginning with a consonant or an À aspi- rated, for the sake of cuphony ; as votre sœur fut toute surprise your sister was quite surprised toute hardie qu’elle est bold as she ts -325 Tout may be used as a substantive; as % le tout est plus grand que la partie the whole is greater than the part 326 Même, meaning same, alike, self, very, is an adjec- tive, and as such agrees with the word to which it refers; as ce sont les mêmes hommes que j'ai they are the same men I saw yes- vus hier terday 1 du berger et du roi les cendres of the shepherd and the King the ; sont les mémes ashes are alike nous y avons été nous-mêmes we went there ourselves ce sont scs paroles mêmes those are his very* words EL 327 même, meaning even, also, or blewisep1 is an adverb, and as such remains invariable ; ; as les plus sages méme sont quelque- even the wisest are sometimes de- fois trompés ceived les animaux et méme les plantes animals, and even plants, are sen- sont sensibles sible * The adjective very, which in English precedes the substantive, is expressed in French by méme after the substantive; as the very day of his death le jour méme dg sa mort, à SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 159 328 Tel, such, is either an adjective or a pronoun. As an adjective, it agrees with the noun, and is always pre- ceded, and not followed, by the article un or une, as is the case in English, though the article is often omitted ; as un tel homme, une telle femme such a man, such a woman tel rit aujourd’hui qui pleurera such as laugh to-day will cry to- demain Morrow Read, translate, and write. Ce champ, ces moutons et ces vaches m’appartiennent. Cetle horloge n’est-elle pas en retard ? Aucun chemin de fleurs ne con- duit À la gloire. ll n’y à nuls vices extérieurs et nuls défauts qui ne soient aperçus des enfants. Quelques écrivains ont traité ce sujet. Envoyez-moi les quelques livres que j'ai laissés chez vous. Quelles que soient vos qualités n’en soyez pas orgueilleux. Quel- ques efforts que vous fassiez, vous ne réussirez pas. Quelque méchants que soient les hommes, ils n'oseraient paraitre ennemis de la vertu. Chaque condition a ses dégoûts, et à chaque état sont attachées des amertumes. Nous déjeunons tous les jours à huit heures. Tous les habitants de la ville étaient consternés. Toutes ses pensées, toute sa gloire, était de plaire à Dieu. Tout Rome le sait. Du haut des collines de Montmartre on peut voir tout Paris. Ces hardes sont tout usées, mais tout usées qu’elles sont elles peuvent servir. J'oute faible qu’est sa santé, elle fait beaucoup de bien aux pauvres. Les souverains ont partout les mêmes devoirs à remplir. Les animaux les plus sauvages même nous offrent des exemples de la reconnaissance. Nous avons dîné dans la salle même où il fut assassiné. T'elle femme se croit belle qui souvent ne l’est pas. Un tel homme mérite d’être puni. Exercise on Demonstrative and Indefinite Adjectives. This house, those fields!, that windmill?, and that tree belong? to his father. Who has painted! that portrait and that hunt? That star® is very bright”. Those children want? their dinner. No one likes (to see himself?) as’® he is. We have no poor in that parish!’, Ihad many"? friends ; but not one has relieved! me. Of all the nations of the earth, there is!* none but'* has!® an idea of God. Not one among!” them (escaped from'®) death. Whatever your talents (may be'?), you will not succeed” without application. Whatever your birth may be, despise?” nobody. Whatever faults he has committed®, I forgive* him. If you behave? honestly, you will be esteemed by? all (good men?), in whatever coun- try” you live. However pcwerful® the enemies may be, we do not ! champs m. ? moulin à veut m. 3 appartenir peindre 5 chasse f. 6 étoile f. 7 brillant -8 avoir besoin de se voir !9comme !! paroissef. 12 beaucoup de !3 secourir Miln’yena qui Bait !7de 18 échapper à 9 soient 20 réussir 3 naissance f. Z2 mépriser Z commettre 2 pardonner 5 se conduire 26 de % gens de bien 28 pays m. 79 puissant 160 fear® them“! show® of your knowledge”. Each house has a garden. to choose his proper food”. which renders® it either wholesome® or hurtful. in the park every morning. We must! (struggle against‘?) our passions The whole earth announces®® the glory of God. Every every day. honest man will censure! (such a'®) conduct. The whole army crossed? the river. Wounded® as he was, he fought® till the consider the end. cupy*) the whole house ? last moment. she is, she is very modest. night*). of a shepherd and of a king are alike. to your father. crowds. 30 craindre 3! les 32 savant 33 étalage m. 37 nourriture f. 38 rendre 39 salutaire 40 faire 46 devoir 47 traverser 54 plaire 41 plamer 45 une telle 51 Ce 52 rencontrer 53 hier soir est © mériterait ©! foule f. 55 en — NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Viner and CENT are the only numeral adjectives of the cardinal kind that may be pluralised. 4 329 Vingt and cent take an s when they are multiplied by another number (79); as l’homme vit quatre-vingts ans il avait trois cents hommes 330 LExceprioN. — Although multiplied as above, zingt | - and cent do not take an s when another number, nor when used in the sense of vingtième, centième ; as quatre-vingt-cinq soldats trois cent dix chevaux numéro quatre-vingt page trois cent As dix mille hommes six mille francs FRENCH GRAMMAR. However learned®? you may be, do not make a vain Every animal, save® man, knows*# how There is in every planta certain quality My aunt was quite astonished to see her. Those are the same ladies I met®? (last The same things do not please® at® all times. We saw® him the very day of your arrival. are”) rewarded that deserve® to be punished. I never saw such a 331 mine, à thousand, never takes an s in the plural; We take” a walk In everything we must’ (Do you oe- Handsome as The ashes°* They will write”” themselves (Many 31 science 35 excepté 36 savoir _ Al devoir 42 combattre ‘3 annonce … 48 occuper 49 blesser 59 combattre 56 cendres 57 écrire °8 voir 59 Ter man lives eighty years he had three hundred men immediately followed by 1 eighty-five soldiers three hundred and len horses number eighty page three hundred ten thousand men sir thousand francs SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 161 332 Mille, when speaking of dates, becomes mil; as l’an ml-huit-cent-douze the year 1812 Nore.— Mille, as a substantive, signifying a mile, takes an s in the plural : dix mille milles ten thousand miles. 333 The cardinal numbers, instead of the ordinal, are used in French when speaking of sovereigns, and of the day of the month, except in mentioning the first, and sometimes the second, when speaking of sovereigns; as Henry quatre Henry the Fourth le huit mai or de mai the 8th of Muy François premier Francis the First Charles deux or second Charles the Second le premier mai or de mai the 1st of May Exercise on Numeral Adjectives. There were! two hundred and eighty men killed? and two thousand wounded? in that battle. Leonidas, with three hundred Spartans’, stopped® the whole army of the Persians® at the pass’ of the Ther- mopylæ® Voltaire died® at the age of eighty-four years. Napoleon was born!® on the fifteenth of August’, one thousand seven hun- dred and sixty-nine. Charles the Twelfth, king of Sweden!’ died in his thirty-sixth year. The Duke of Bordeaux, grandson'® of Charles the Tenth, king of France, was born on the fifteenth of July', one thousand eight hundred and twenty. Louis-Philippe the First lost his throne in'® one thousand eight hundred and forty-eight, and died in England!” the twenty-sixth of August, one thousand eight hundred and fifty. Your letter of the first of January'®, antedated!'® December the nineteenth, reached” me on the eleventh of February”, | [I yavoir 2tuer 3 Dblesser 4 Spartiates 5 arréter © Perses 7 défilé m 8 Ther- mopyles 9 mourir 10 paquit Maoût 12 Sudde 3 petit-fils !4 juillet 15 perdre l‘en 17 en Angleterre 18 janvier !9 antidaté 20 parvenir 2! février. — — SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. Position of the Personal Pronouns. 334 The conjunctive personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, (page 87), used as subjects (112), precede the verb (88): je lis, vous écrivez; except—I. In ques- tions—2. In some exclamations—3. In quotations—4. After the subjunctive when no conjunction precedes it—5. Most 162 FRENCH GRAMMAR. frequently after aussi, peut-étre, encore, toujours (still), en vain, à peine, du moins, au moins, &c. ; as parlez-vous français ? que viens-je d’entendre ! venez, dit-il, partons puissiez-vous être heureux ! à peine fut-:/ parti do you speak French ? what have I heard! come, said he, let us go may you be happy! he was scarcely gone Cod COO = Dv WOO = Position of Conjunctive Objective Pronouns. Conjunctive personal pronouns, when used as objects (113) to the verb, are placed before it (89), except when it is in the Imperative used affirmatively. (See No. 90.) These objective pronouns ave me, te, le, la, vous, nous, les, lui, leur. 335 When a verb requires two pronouns before it, the indirect (116) comes before the direct (115) object ; as je vous le promets : 1 promise rt to you il me les donnera he will give them to me 336 But when the two pronouns are in the third person, the direct comes first, as in English; as je le lui prêterai I will lend it to him nous la leur enverrons we shall send her to them On the Imperative Mood. 337 When there are two imperatives affirmative joined by one of the conjunctions et, ou, the pronoun object of the second imperative may precede it ; as lisez-le sans cesse et le relisez read it incessantly and read it again 338 When the verb in the Imperative affirmative go- verns two pronouns, the one in the accusative comes first, except y-moi, y-toi, y-le, y-la ; and m’en, Cen (see 90-92) ; as donnez-le-moi give it me envoyez-y-le send him thither menez-y-moi take me thither prêtez-m’en lend me some But it is better, for the sake of euphony, to say: envoyez-le là ; voulez- vous m’y mener ? NoTE.—An s is added to the imperative mood in the singular, when joined to the pronouns en and y, for euphony’s sake; as, cherches-en ; donnes-y les soins. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 163 339 TABLE Showing the order in which the Personal Pronouns appear, when there are two or three governed by the same verb, and intended also to show not only the relative position of the personal conjunctive pronouns with regard to each other, but also with regard to the verb and other words connected with them in a sentence. je ne| me | le | lui | y | en |auziliary| pas | adverb | particip. *u te |fla’ jleur!.-| | onverb |... | ee ee |. ue il se jersc lies |... (20h00 het nid Tatlin. avs fe tions elle af Balen flore fee [0 os La Eine tdi ere fees nous |... nous. | ofan en (ies be. Won sii uly vous: {a vous) |. [| [nc nn | sald ved gs. Bees ils 1 se F1 20 Lace | 00s van 00e sil eue | 50 00e elles |... | 2} ++ | lee se eue : Examples. je ne me le rappelle pas* I do not remember it je ne le lui ai pas encore dit I have not yet said it to him nous leur en avons envoyé we have sent them some ils ne vous en ont pas donné they have not given you any je lui y en ai envoyé I have sent some to him thither vous les leur porterez you shall bring them to them il la leur y portera he will bring it to them thither le lui avez-vous dit ? “have you said it to him? ne le lui a-t-:/ pas encore dit ? has he not said it to him yet ? Read, translate, and write. Quand vous av2z prié, ne sentez-vous pas votre cœur plus léger, et votre âme plus contente? Que faites-vous sur la terre, et n’avez-vous rien à demander à celui qui vous y à mis? N’avez- vous rien entendu cette nuit? lui demanda-t-il. La joie brilla dans les yeux de Charles : “ A la bonne heure,” dit-il, “ils devien- nent donc plus traitables.” Puissé-je de mes yeux y voir tomber la foudre ! A peine étions-nous sortis que la foudre éclata et mit le toit en feu. À peine le soleil avait-àl paru sur l’horizon, nous marchâmes à l’ennemi. Un homme vous flatte-t-à/? ne vous y fiez pas, il veut vous tromper. Je vous le montrerai demain. II ne me le pardonnera jamais. Si vous avez des lettres pour votre sœur, je les lui porterai; donnez-les moi. Ecrivez-le lui et le lu envoyez. Ne lui y en avez-vous pas déjà envoyé? Ne le lui avez-vous pas encore dit? Si vous avez de l’argent, donnez-m’en. # These examples will show that, whether a sentence be affirmative, interrogative. or negative, the conjunctive pronouns and other words invariably preserve the same relative position, except in interrogations, when the pronoun subject comes after the verb. As to personal pronouns with verbs in the imperative mood, see 338. 164 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Exercise on the Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. J will go! and see you, and we will speak” of that affair. Will he be ready? at ten o'clock ? Does she speak Italian‘? I think® not. Have you written® to your parents? I wrote last’ week. May® you succeed’ in your enterprise! I have!® (on my side), he said, a good cause and a merciful? God. They were scarcely'® gone'* when the fire broke ont!'S. If you cannot'® come, perhaps you will send!” (a) word by your servant'’®, God is a!® father to® those who love Him, and a protector to those who fear?! Him. Vice often deceives? us under the form* of virtue. I have seen? you several times® at” my uncle’s. If you would? obtain’ a friend, you must“? first prove* him, and be not too hasty® to trust® him. Bring® me my gloves, and do not make®! me wait® for half an hour. If you write® to them, tell*” them I am much better®s. If he offers® you money, do not take‘ it. It is your brother’s hat, give*! it to him, if you please*” I am sorry* I cannot give it to you. Then* lend® it to me. Ihave not said* it to him. If you have some French books, bring them to them. Accompany” me there with your brother. ; laller 2parler 3 prêt 4Italien 5croire “écrire 7 dernier 8 Puissiez 9 réussir 10 avoir 1 pour moi !2clément 13 A peine !‘partir !Péclater !6ne pouvoir as 17 envoyer 18 domestique 191e 20de 2! craindre 22 tromper 23 masque 24 voir fois 26chez 27 vouloir 28 avoir 29il faut 30 éprouver 3! prompt 322 vous fier à 33 apporter 34 faire 35 attendre 36 écrire 37 dire 38 mieux 39 offrir 49 prendre M donner 42 plaire 43 fiché que 4% Alors 45 prêter 46dire 47 accompagner Disjunctive Personal Pronouuns. The disjunctive personal pronouns, mot, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles (page 39), are used as subjects and objects in the following cases : — 340 After the verb c'est in all its tenses; and generali? when alone, or separated from the verb ; as c’est moi qui l’ai dit it is I who said so est-ce lui qui l’a fait ? is it he who has done it? ce sont eux qui lisent it is they who read qui parle ?—moi who speaks ?—I qui a fait cela ?—lui who has done that ?—he 341 In comparisons after gue; also after and before et and, ou or, comme as, ni NOr ; as il lit mieux que moi he reads better than I lui et elle he and she c’est elle ou lui it is she or he faites comme eux do as they do ni lui ni toi neither he nor thou SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 165 æ 843 For the sake of emphasis or contrast; as moi, vous abandonner! I, abandon vou! toi, oser le dire! thou, dare to say se ! luz, il a raison he is right eux, ils ont tort they are wrong 843 After a preposition ; as il a parlé de moi he has spoken of me il s’adresse à eux he applies to thera faites-le pour lui do it for him 344 Before relative pronouns (108); as moi, qui vous parle I who speak to you lui, que vous accusez he whom you accuse 345 Before seul, or before a present participle ; as lui seul peut le faire he alone can do it eux, voyant le danger, &c. they, seeing the danger, &e. Read, translate, and write. Qui a cassé ce verre? Ce n’est pas moi, c’est lui. Qui veut venir au palais ? Moi. Mon avocat et lui sont de cet avis. Si ce n’est foi, c’est donc ton frère. Elle et moi nous apprenons la musiqne. Il me verra moi et mon domestique. On dira ce qu’on voudra contre lui; quant à moi, je suis sûr de sa probité. Adressez-vous & eux, et non pas a lui. Mot, je pourrais trahir le Dieu que jaime! Moi, déprécier le commerce! moi, fille et femme de fabricant ! moi qui trouve que c’est l’état le plus utile au pays! Ses sœurs portaient un panier et lui un paquet. Lui seul aux yeux d’un Juif découvrit le dessein de deux traîtres tout prêts à vous percer le sein. Comme eux nous marchons vers la tombe. Il vous aime autant qu’eux. Lui, il va tous les jours à Londres ; moi, rarement. Exercise on the Disjunctive Pronouns. Who (is making!) that noise? It? is not I; it is he. It? is they who (say so?). He alone has done® it. He is taller” than I; but I am stronger® than he. Who will get’ the prize? is it you or he ? Neither he nor I have heard! of your brother. He abandon" you! Never. Those children are afraid? of me. Some one! advising! Philip to expel’® from his dominions'® a man who had spoken ill" of ‘faire ZCe 3 Ce 4le dire ®fait 6le 7grand 8fort Savoir 19 entendu parler : ndonrer 12 avoir peur !3 Quelqu'un 14 cousciller à 13 chasser 0 étate 166 FRENCH GRAMMAR. him ; (I will take care not'® to) do it, replied he; for he would go everywhere and speak ill of me. Your brother and I are very good friends. I, who have seen the horrors of the revolution. Thou alone art my treasure. He has sold? them to me. Has he sold them to you? They wiil not bring? it to us. You must‘ tell it to him. Have you not given® it to her? I will show® it to you, if you bring it to me here. I will carry? you some? thither. 18 ge garder bien de !’aller 2 vendre 2! apporter 22Ilfaut 23 dire 2 donner % montrer 26 porter 27 en Repetition of the Personal Pronoun. 346 A personal pronoun in the nominative is repeated in French before every verb, if those verbs be of different tenses. When the verbs are in the same tense, the pronoun may be repeated or not, as taste may direct* ; as J'étudie et j’étudierai toujours I study, and will always study il dessine et chante très-bien he draws and sings very well 347 It is also repeated in interrogative sentences ; as écrivez-vous et lisez-vous toujours? do you still write and read? 348 When there are two or more pronouns, or a noun and a pronoun, in the nominative case, and of different persons, a resuming pronoun, such as mous, vous, is generally used before the following verb as its subject (409); as vous et moi nous marcherons you and I will walk vous et lui vous irez le voir you and he will go and see him ma sœur et moi nous peignons my sister and I paint But when ni occurs between the subjects, the resuming pronoun is not required ; as ni vous n? lui ne l’aurez neither you nor he shall have it ni ma sœur ni moi ne l’aimons neîther my sister nor I like it 349 The personal pronouns are always repeated in French before every verb by which they are governed ; as il vous flatte et vous loue he flatters and praises you je l’aime et je le respecte I love and respect him 350 When a verb has two direct (115) or two indirect (116) objects, one of which is a personal pronoun, and * In the repetition of personal pronouns, faste or the necessity of clearness must often direct the choice. The repetition gives more energy and gravity to the sentence. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 167 the other a substantive, the pronoun is repeated both be- foro and after the verb, the second being disjunctive ; as il me recevra, moi et mon père he will receive me and my father je lui écrirai, à lui et à sa sœur 1 will write to him and his sister Read, translate, and write. Peignez-vous et dessinez-vous tous les jours? Nous lisons et nous traduisons depuis dix heures jusqu’à midi. Prenez garde, vous gagnez peu et vous dépensez beaucoup. Vous et moi nous ne sommes pas heureux. II était aimé parce qu’il était bon envers tous. I (Polichinelle) s’élance en riant, à tombe, il se relève, à se promène, :/ gambade, ü saute, :l se débat, ül gesticule et retombe démantibulé contre le châssis qui résonne de sa chute. Je crains Dieu, cher Abner, et n’ai point d’autre crainte. Albert et lui sont d'accord. 17 mange et boit bien. Ni mon père ni moi ne le pou- vons. Un auteur qui nous flatte et mous loue, est sûr de nous plaire. Je veux le voir, le prier, le presser, l’importuner, le fléchir. Il me recevra moi et mon domestique. 1l nous doit cette somme, à nous et à nos associés. Exercise on the Repetition of Pronouns. I maintain’ and will always maintain, that we cannot? be happy without practising® virtue. We have spoken®, and will speak again® in® your favour. What’! you know® the beauties of that poem? and you do not read! it! He says" so'?, but he does not think it. Do you read and translate French every day? You and I will go to" the country. You and they will stay'® here till to-morrow. You, he, and she should'® sing!” that picce'® of opera. My sister and I went to the concert. Neither I nor my brother sing. I respect, honour’, and love her. The most beautiful flowers (last but”) a short? time ; the least”? rain tarnishes? them, the wind withers? them, and the sun scorches® them. God hears? and sees us everywhere. I will speak to him and his brother. He struck” me and my son. They will reward? you and your kind friend. Ilend® that book to you and your sister. 1 i 2 i 3 i 4 5 7 à VTE J, SRS Je TS AO 18 morceau !9 honorer 20 ne durer que 2! peu de ?221a moindre 23 ternir 24 flétrir brûler 26 entendre 7 frapper 25 récompenser 29 préter. UsE or THE PRONOUN le, la, les. 351 When the pronoun, le, la, les has reference to a sub- stantive, or to an adjective used substantively, it agrees ‘with it in gender and number ; as êtes-vous la mère de cet enfant ? are you the mother of that child ? — - -oui, je la suis yes, I am 168 FRENCH GRAMMAR. êtes-vous les sœurs de mon ami ? are you my friend’s sisters 2—yes, —oui, nous /es sommes we are 3 êtes-vous la malade?—oui, je lu are you the sick person ?—nes, I suis am 352 When the pronoun le, la, les has reference either to an adjective, to a substantive used adjectively, to a verb, or to a sentence, it is invariable ; as étes-vous malade, madame ?—ouli, are you ill, madam?—yzs, sir, 1 monsieur, je le suis am vos frères sont-ils riches ?—non, are your brothers rich ?—no, they ils ne le sont pas are not 3 êtes-vous mère ?— oui, je le suis are you a mother 2—yes, I am il faut lire autant qu’on le peut we must read as much as we can USE oF soi. 353 The personal pronoun soi generally refers to the singular number; it is used relatively to persons as well as to things; when it relates to persons, it is generally used with indefinite pronouns, such as on, chacun, personne, qui- conque, &e.; as on pense trop à soi we think too much about ourselves chacun agit pour soi every one acts for himself l’aimant attire le fer à soi loadstone attracts iron to itself Read, translate, and write. Êtes-vous le fils de mon jardinier ?— Oui, je le suis. Êtes-vous la fille du concierge ?—Oui, je la suis. Messieurs, êtes-vous les officiers de ce régiment ?—Oui, nous les sommes. Messieurs, êtes- -vous officiers ?—Nous le sommes. Etes-vous les trois Ro- mains qu’on a choisis pour le combat ?—Nous les sommes. ‘Ces enfants ne sont-ils pas malades ?—Non, ils ne le sont pas. tes-vous indisposée, mademoiselle ?— Non, je me le suis pas. Mesdemoiselles, êtes-vous Anglaises ?— Oui, nous le sommes. Mesdames, êtes-vous les Anglaises qu’on m’a recommandées ? — Nous les sommes. Votre frère est-il plus heureux qu’il l’était ?— Oui, mais il n’est pas si riche que vous le pensez. Est-ce là son fils ?—Oui, ce l’est. Sont-ce là vos enfants *—Non, ce ne les sont pas. Âtes-vous la maîtresse de la maison ?°—Oui, je la suis. Dans ce monde, chacun ne pense qu’à soi. Quiconque rapporte tout à soi n’a pas beaucoup d’amis. Aucun n’est prophète chez soi. Un bienfait porte sa récompense avec soi. Le vice est odieux en soi. On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que soi. La franchise est bonne de soz, mais elle a sesexcès, En remplissant les volontés de son père, ce jeune homme travaille pour soi. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 169 Exercise. Are you my friend's sister? No', Iam not. Are you the ministers of the king? Yes, we are. No, I am not. (Are those!) your horses? Yes, they are. ladies, are you the pupils of Mrs. B.? Yes, we are. mistress of the house? No, I am not. Are your sisters married®? Yes, sir; they are. Are you soldiers? Yes, I am. No, they are not. Are they happy? Yes, they are. are. Madam, are you a milliner?? Ladies, are you French? They have been rich, but are not so at present. (We woman? | am. ladies are. must?) oblige others as much as we° can. No, they are not. Are those your sister's gloves? Are you the captain’ of that vessel®? Young Are you the Are his brothers learneds ? Yes, sir; we Are you an English- No, we are not; those Is this your hat? Yes, it is. When (a man loves robody but'°) himself, he is not (fit for!!) society. A thing good in!* itself is not always approved of", It always depends upon® our- selves to act honourably. Virtue has something attractive in itself. I Non 2 capitaine m. 3 vaisseau m. 8 Il faut % on !0 on n’aime que !! propre à 4 Sont-ce là 3savart ‘marié 7 modiste 12en !3 approuvé !4 dépendre 15 de UsE or En AND Y. 354 En is used instead of lui, elle, leur, eux, elles, in speaking of animals, things, and especially of places, when the verb governs de. It is often understood in English ; but when expressed, it may mean of or from it ; of or from them ; and also some, any, or none of it; as ce cheval est très-méchant ; n’en | approchez pas 2 ‘avez-vous besoin de mon canif?— oui, jen ai besoin avez-vous été à la ville ?—oui, j'en viens voulez-vous du pain ?—oui, don- | nez-m’en avez-vous du papier ?—non, je | n’en ai pas ; voilà un bon tableau ; mettez-y un | cadre J lallez-vous en Ecosse ?—non, je n’y vais pas mon livre est-il sur la table ?— oui, il y est this horse is very vicious ; do not go near it do you want my penknife 2—yes, 1 do have you been to toun?—yes, I have just returned will you have some bread ?—yes, give me some have you any paper ?—no, I have none \ 355 Y is used in speaking of animals, things, and espe- cially of places, when the verb governs à, en, dans or sur; as here is a good picture ; put a frame to it are you going to Scotland 2—no. 1 am not is my book upon the table ?— yes, it is 170 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 356 En and ¥ are also used in speaking vaguely of persons ; as c’est un honnête homme, fiez- vous y* pensez-vous à votre fils?—oui, J'Y pense parle-t-il de moi?—oui, il EN parle souvent sont-ils contents de lui?—oui, ils EN sont très-contents he is an honest man, trust him do you think of your son?—yes, 1 do does he speak of me?—yes, he often does are they pleased with him ?—yes, they are very much pleased OBSERVATIONS ON le, la, les, en, y, Used in answering Questions. In answers, the French language is far less elliptical than the En- glish. In the former, itis generally necessary to repeat the verb em- ployed in the interrogation, to supply the place of the noun by some pronoun, and sometimes to repeat the principal words of the question, as will be seen by the following illustrations. 357 When a question is asked with a verb followed by a direct ob- ject, that object is represented in the reply by the pronoun le, la, 7, or les, aceording to gender and number, and the verb of the question must be repeated in the answer, and preceded by the pronoun ; as is Henry taking his German les- son 2—yes, he is have you read his letter?— yes, I have Henri prend-il sa legon d’alle- mand ? — oui, il la prend avez-vous lu sa lettre ?—oui, je l’ai lue 358 The English expressions it is, they are, &c., relating to a sub- stantive used definitely in the question, are expressed by ce l’est, ce les sont ; as is that the book you are looking Jor 2—yes, it is are those the works of Racine ?— yes, they are est-ce là le livre que vous cher: chez ?—oui, ce l’est sont-ce les œuvres de Racine ?— oui, ce les sont 359 When a question is asked with a verb followed by the partitive article du, de la, des, or by de used in a partitive sense (28), and also before a noun or a pronoun, en is required in the answer ; as avez-vous des gants ?— oui, j'en ai a-t-il de l’argent ?—oui, il en a parliez- vous de lui?—non, nous d’en parlions pas venez-vous de la ville ?—oui, j'en viens * Fiez-vous a lui would be more energetic. have you any gloves 2—yes, I havel has he any money ?—yes, he has were you speaking of him ?—no, we were not are you coming from town yes; I am SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 171 360 En is also used in reply to a question formed with a verb having for its direct object a substantive preceded by the indefinite article un or une, which is repeated in the answer; as avez-vous une montre anglaise ? _ — oui, j’en ai une est-ce un chien anglais que vous avez ?—oui, c’en est un have you an English watch #—yes, 1 have is it an English dog you have ?— yes, it is 361 But if the reply is negative, en is used without un or une, except when the verb étre intervenes ; as avez-vous un dictionnaire ?>—non, je n'en ai pas est-ce une montre de Genève ?— non, ce n’en est pas une have you a dictionary ?— no, I have not is it a Geneva watch 2—no, it is not 362 When a question is asked with a verb followed by an indirect ‘object preceded by à, the pronoun lui or leur is used before the verb of the answer ; as ‘avez-vous écrit à votre père ?— oui, je lui ai écrit a-t-il envoyé de l'argent à son ~~ fils?—oui, il lui en a envoyé donnez-vous des prix à vos élè- ves ?— oui, je leur en donne 363 Y is used before the verb places ; as avez-vous été à Rome ?—oui, jy | ai été vos sœurs sont-elles à Paris ?— | non, elles n’y sont pas ma lettre est-elle à la poste ?— oui, elle y est have you written to your father ? — yes, I have has he sent money to his son?— yes, he has do you give prizes to your pupils ? —uyes, I do of the answer with reference to have you been to Rome ?—yes, 1 have are your ststers in Puris?—no, they are not is my letter in the post office 2— yes, it is 364 The English auxiliary verbs do, does, did, shall, will, should, of the question ; as do you dance ?—no, I do not; but my brother does will ke sing ?—yes, he will would, &c., when used to ask questions, are repeated in the answer ; but the French, having no equivalent for these words, repeat the verb dansez-vous ?—non, je ne danse pas ; mais mon frère danse chantera-t-il ?—oui, il chantera 365 Intorrogative exclamations, such as the following :— I am going to Paris.—ARE YOU! his son sings beautifully.—DoES HE! 1 can tell you who did it.—cAN You! ire frequently used in English familiar conversation; but they have no 1 , i I 172 FRENCH GRAMMAR. literal equivalent in French, and must be rendered by a different exclamation, such as ak! vraiment ! 366 The interrogation in French is always expressed by n’est-ce pus in sentences like the following :— il vient, n’est-ce pas? vous avez écrit, n’est-ce pas ? il pleut, n’est-ce pas? he is coming, is he not ? you have written, have you not ? it rains, does it not ? But we use 7 ‘est-ce pas que, if we wish to ascertain the object of the question by another person’s testimony ; ; matin, n’est-ce pas qu’il y en avait?” as, ““ Charles ne veut pas croire qu’il y avait de la neige ce Idiomatic Expressions used in Answers. Avez-vous diné?—Oui, j'ai diné Viendra-t-il ?— Oui, il viendra Amènera-t-il son fils ?—Oui, il l’amènera Lui prêterez-vous votre cheval ? — Oui, je le lui prêterai N'est-ce pas vous qui avez cassé ce verre?—Si, c’est mo N'est-ce pas votre cocher qui m’a apporté la lettre ?—Si, c’est lui N’êtes-vous pas fâché qu’il est parti ?2—Si, j'en suis fâché Votre père est-il Anglais ?—Non, il ne l’est pas Est-il difficile de parler alle- mand ?—Oui, c’est difficile Voulez-vous venir vous prome- ner?—Oui, je veux bien Read, translate, and write. Have you dined 2— Yes, I have Will he come 2— Yes, he will Will he bring his son ?— Yes, he will [ Will you lend him your horse?— Yes, I will | Is it not you who have broken that glass ?— Yes, it is | Was it not your coachman who brought me the letter?— Yes, it was i Are you not sorry he is gone ?— Yes Tam Is your father an Englishman 2— No, he is not i Is it difficult to speak German ?-- ] Yes, it is ] Will you come and take a walk? — Yes, 1 will i Votre père est. pour moi un véritable ami; je n'oublierai jamais les services que j'en ai reçus. Cette maison menace ruine, n'en approchez pas. Avez-vous des chevaux ? Non, je n’en ai pas. Votre sœur a-t-elle un piano? Oui, elle en a un. Pour avoir des amis, il faut étre capable d'en faire et digne d’en avoir. Celui qui est dans la prospérité doit craindre d'en abuser. Combien d'enfants avez-vous? J'en ai deux. C’est un homme équivoque, ne vous y fiez pas. Les choses de la terre ne valent pas qu’on s’y attache. J'ai reçu sa lettre ce matin, j'y répondrai ce soir. Ce cheval est méchant, n’y touchez pas. Cette affaire est importante, donnez-y vos soins. Avez-vous été à la ville? Non, j'y vais. Pensez-vous aux pauvres qui souffrent ? Oui, nous y pensons tous les jours. Quoique je parle beaucoup de vous, ma fille, j'y SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 173 pense encore davantage jour et nuit. lrez-vous en Écosse l’été prochain? Oui, nous irons.* Iriez-vous à Naples si j'allais avec vous? Non, je n’irais* pas. Est-ce là la voiture du duc? Oui, ce l’est. Sont-ce là les chevaux qui ont coûté si cher? Oui, ce les sont. Etes-vous plus fort que vous l’étiez? Marie chante, mais Albert ne chante pas. J'ai vu la princesse de Galles à l'opéra. Ah! vraiment. Vous l’avez vue avec le prince, n’est-ce pas? Exercise on EN and Y. (How many") dogs have you? I have two. (Are you going”) to town? No, I have just returned® Have you any brothers? No, I have none. If I have offended you, I am very sorry for it. If you have bread, give some to that poor woman. Do not speak of it to my father. Is my letter in the post-office ? Yes, it is. Is not your wife in* Paris? No, she is not. Have you been there? Yes, I have. There is a deep ditch, (take care not® to) fall into it. My house is too small, I shall add® a wing’ to it. Is my horse in the stable? Yes, he is. (Are you thinking®) of my friend? Yes, I am. Is your friend rich? No, he is not, but he is not the less happy for it. Has he a house? No, he has not. It is a very unfortunate business, do not speak of it. Does not tea come from China? Yes, it does. Are you going to Switzerland? Yes, we are. Do you work much at your music? No, I do not. You should (205) apply yourself (s'appliquer) to it. Has his uncle sold his house? No, he has not. Have you sent’ my letters? Yes, I have. Do you read the newspapers? Yes, I do. Do you read French novels'® ? No, I do not. Is this your great coat? No, it is not. Are those the queen’s jewels? Yes, they are. Was it not your carriage that I saw in the park yesterday ? Yes, it was. Is not that your house? It was, but I have sold it. Have you any chil- dren? Yes, I have two. Do you remember (se souvenir) the queen's marriage ? Yes, I do. Have you any French wine? Yes, I have, and I drink some every day. Ilas your mother any birds ? No, she has none. When shall you have horses? I shall never have any. Have you ever been to Scotland ? No, I have not. When shall we go there? I think I shall go next year. Have you an umbrella? Yes, 1 have. Isita gold watch you have? Yes, it is. Has he a r:fle’?? No, he has not. Is this an English dog? No, it is not. Have they spoken to your brother ? Yes, they have. Has he sent any clothes'* to his children? Yes, he has. Do you draw!*? No, I do not. Does your sister sing’? Yes, she does. My son is going to Marseilles by the (steam-boat!®). Is he! I have been to India, China, and Persia, Have you! The climate of those countries!’ is very warm'é, is it not? You will come with us, will you not? I told you 80, did I not ? ! Combien de 2 aller 3venir 43 3 prendre garde de Sajouter 7 ailef. 8 penser 9 envoyer 10 romans !! parapluie 72. 12 carabine f. 13 habits 14 dessiner !5 chanter le Lateau à vapeur m. 17 pays !8 chaud * For euphony’s sake, y is omitted before the future and conditional of aller. 174 FRENCH GRAMMAR. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 367 The possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, &c. (page 40), are expressed by a moi, a toi, à lui, à elle, à nous, à vous, à eux, à elies, when they come after the verb être, “to be,” in the sense of appartenir, “to belons ;” as > > DD? ce cheval est à moi this horse is mine ce livre est à lui that book is his il n’est pas à vous it is not yours 368 Le mien, le tien, le sien, &c., are used more especially to distinguish a person’s property from another’s ; as lequel de ces chiens est le vôtre ? which of these dogs is yours ? voici le mien, et voila le sien this is mine, and that is his 369 The English possessive, expressed by ’s, is rendered as follows :— | this is my mother’s carriage voici la voiture de ma mère this gun is my brother’s ce fusil est à mon frère this is my watch, and that 1s my voici ma montre, et voilà celle de ; sister’s ma sœur 370 When mine, thine, his, &c. … are used with of after a substantive, they are expressed in French by mes, tes, ses nos, vos, leurs ; thus :— a friend of mine un de mes amis a sister of yours une de vos sœurs a brother of his un de ses frères 371 Should the substantive be preceded by this, that, these, or those, we simply turn the sentence thus :— THAT horse of YOURS is shy* votre cheval est ombrageux THAT dog of HIS is excellent son chien est excellent where are THOSE gloves of MINE ? où sont mes gants ? 372 My own, thy ewn, his own, &c., are generally eX pressed by the adjective propre, or by the personal pronoun a mot, à toi, à lui, &c.; thus :— he did it with HIS OWN hand il l’a fait de sa propre main I have a house of MY OWN j'ai une maison à moi # This could also be translated, vous avez là un cheval ombrageux. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 175 Read, translate, and write. Ce chapeau est à moi et ce paletot est à lui. Ce n’est pas votre avis, mais c’est le mien. J'attends sa résolution pour prendre Za mienne. Notre maison et la sienne se touchent. À qui sont ces deux cannes? Voici la mienne et voilà la sienne. Ce champ est a mon père. Les exploits de son père sont effacés par les siens. Ces gants sont à moi, où sont les vôtres? Ecoutez mes raisons, j'écouterai les vôtres après. Vos intérêts sont les môtres. Je viens d’apprendre ia mort d’un de mes amis. Un de mes élèves est très-malade. Lamartine est un de nos meilleurs poètes, et Guizot un de nos meilleurs historiens. Cette jeune personne est la fille d’un de mes associés. Voici ma chambre et voilà celle de ma sœur. Je l’ai vu de mes propres yeux. Je prétends vous traiter comme mon propre fils, C'est une voiture a moi. Il demeure dans une maison à lui. Exercise on Possessive Pronouns. Is that! your house? No; it is not mine, (it is?) my brother's. 1 thought? it was yours. This horse* is mine, and that® is his. This is mine and that is his. Whose® is that farm? It was my uncles: it is no longer” his now ; it is ours. Are all these beautiful meadows® yours? No; they are theirs. I wish® they were mine. That gun'® is my father’s. A brother of mine arrived! from Paris yesterday, and he says that several!” friends of his are totally ruined'$ by the last revolution. I have found! a book of yours among'® mine. À relation!“ of ours came to see us last night’, and he spoke'® to us about!” one of your brothers. Is that young lady? a pupil” of yours? Yes, madam ; she is the daughter of a cousin of mine. That horse of yours is very old. She bought?* her horse with her own money. His sister has a carriage of her own. If you have lost your money, it is yonr own fault. Has your brother a house of his own? Yes, he has. This is my room, and that is my comsin’s. Have you a room of your own? No, I have not. \ Est-celà Zelleestà 3 croire ¢cheval-ci 9 celui-‘à 6A qui 7 plus 8 prairie y. 8 Je voudrais 10 fusil #2. 1) estarrivé 12 plusicurs 3 ruiner 1 trouver 3 parmi 16 parent 17 hier au soir 18 parler 19de 2 demoiselle , 2! éléve f. *2 acheter DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Ce INSTEAD OF il, elle, ils, elles. 373 Ce is frequently used before étre, instead of , elle, ils, elles, with reference to persons and things previously 176 FRENCH GRAMMAR. mentioned. Ce, and not ¢, &ec., is used before the verb étre, when followed by a substantive preceded by any de- terminative expression, such as un, le, &c., or one of the per- sonal pronouns mot, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles ; as c’est un de mes amis he is a friend of mine c’est la vérité it is the truth est-ce vous ? is it you ? C’est COMPARED WITH il est. 374 Ce is used for i, when être is followed by an adjec tive only ; as c’est impossible, c’est admirable ; but il only can be used if anything follows the adjective ; as est-il possible d’être heureux sans is it possible to be happy without la vertu?—non, c’est impossible virtue 2—no, it is impossible 375 In speaking of the hour, à is expressed by il; as quelle heure est-il ? what o’clock is it 2 il est dix heures it is ten o’clock But when we hear the clock striking, we must use ce ; as quelle heure est-CE qui sonne ?—c’est dix heures 376 Ce is used with the relative pronoun qui, que, &c. (103), to express the English pronouns what, that which, &c.; as : voici ce qui est arrivé this is what has happened voilà ce que j'aime this is (LOZ) what I like ce dont je parle that which I am speaking of 377 Ce must be used before the verb étre, when a sen- tence is the nominative of this verb; as ce qu’il craint le plus, c’est de what he fears most is to die with- mourir sans vous revoir out seeing you again vivre content de peu, c’est être to be content with little is to be riche rich 378 Ce is also generally used before the verb être in sentences like the following :— la véritable noblesse c’est la vertu virtue is true nobility NoTE.--—Ce is not used before être, if this verb be followed by an adjective ; as ce que je dis est vrai,—not c’est vrai. (CRE EEE ES SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 177 Read, translate, and write. Est-ce le bateau de Douvres qui vient d’arriver ? Non, c’est celui de Folkstone. Qui vous l’a dit? C’est mon domestique. C'était lui qui conduisait les chevaux. Vous avez beaucoup écrit, c'est vrai; mais que d’erreurs dans vos ouvrages! I est bien plus aisé de conquérir des provinces que de dompter une passion. Il est difficile de devenir savant sans travailler beaucoup. C’est vrai, c’est difficile. Quelle heure est-il? I est sept heures. Quelle heure est-ce qui sonne ? C’est trois heures. Ce qui fait le héros dégrade souvent l’homme. Je sais ce que vous voulez dire. Ce qui est certain, c'est que le monde est de travers. Le plus beau présent qui ait été fait aux hommes après la sagesse, c'est l’amitié. Ce que j'aime dans une jeune personne c’est la modestie. Ce qu'il y a de vrai, c’est que l’agriculture était extrêmement honorée chez les anciens Romains. Exercise on Demonstrative Pronouns. Is it a hare that! we have seen?? No; it is a rabbit. Is ita boyor a girl? I think® itis a girl. It is he who (told me so*). Who? is there? is it you, brother? Yes, itis I. Itis we who have paid® for his education. Can” you jump® over that wall? No ; itis too difficult. It is difficult to please! everybody. Can you (let me have'?) my coat'® for next Sunday? No; it is impossible. It is impossible for me to go!! with you to-morrow. Is it true!” that'® war is declared'" between!® those two nations? No; it is not true ; it (is only'®) a rumour. It is not easy” to conquer?! one’s?” passions. Do you think it is* easy ? What o’clock is it? Itistwo o'clock. I hear® a clock striking®, what o’clock is it? It is twelve. Education is to the mind? what cleanliness? is to the body. What 1s agreeable to the taste? is often prejudicial® to the health. I do not know?® of what his servant is accused. You see to what you (engage yourself’). Give me that which you (do not like®). What pleases me most is solitude. What I ask® from you is, a reciprocal® friendship. What I wish® for most is that peace (may be made”). What he fears® is to be discovered. What I dislike® in® him is his pride. What (costs little") is too dear when it (is of no use?). What I have seen was very beautiful. What I have eaten** with you yester- day was delicious. What your brother told*! you is very true. I que 2 voir 3croire 4 me ledire 5 Qui 6 payer 7 pouvoir Bsauter 9 par dessus 10 plaireà }! tout le monde 12me donner 13 habit. 14 aller 15 vrai 16 que I” déclarer 8 entre 19 n’étre que 2° facile 2! vaincre 22ses 23 soit 24 entendre # qui sonne 26 esprit 27 proprete f. 28 got mm. 29 contraire 30 savoir 3! s’engager * n'aimer pas 33le plus 31idemander 3% réciproque 36 désirer 37 on fasse be cramdre 39 détester “en 4) couter peu 42 n’étre d’aucun usage 43 manger C’est, ce sont. 379 Ce hefore the verb être requires this verb in the 13 178 FRENCH GRAMMAR. singular number, except when it is followed by a substan- tive or a pronoun in the third person plural ; as c’est moi itis 1 c’était elle it was she ce fut nous it was we ce sera vous it will be you ce sont eux (or elles) it is they ce sont mes amis these are my frienas sont-ce là vos livres ? are those your books ? Celui, celui-ci, celui-là, ceci, cela. 380 Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are generally used with the relative pronoun qui, que, dont (99), or the preposition de, and are applied to both persons and things; as 3 celui qui parle he who speaks celle que je vois she whom I see ceux qui-Ccoutent they who listen celles dont je parle those of which I speak celui de ma sœur that of my sister 381 Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, ceci, refer to the objects nearest, or last spoken of ; and celui-là, celle-la, ceux-là, celles-làä, cela, have reference to the most distant objects, or those first spoken of; as voici deux livres; lequel voulez- here are two books; which will you vous, celui-ci ou celui-là ? have, this or that? le corps périt, l’âme est immor- the body perishes, the soul is im- telle ; cependant on néglige mortal ; nevertheless, we neglect celle-ci, et on sacrifie tout pour this, and sacrifice everything for celui-là that ceci vaut mieux que cela this 7s better than that Read, translate, and write. Ce n’est pas moi qui l’ai dit, c’est elle. Chez les anciens c’étuient les vieillards qui gouvernaient; chez vous ce sont les jeunes gens. Ce furent les Phéniciens qui inventèrent I'écriture. Nos vrais biens sont ceux de la nature, c’est le ciel, c’est la terre, ce sont ces campagnes, ces plaines, ces forêts, dont elle nous offre la jouissance inépuisable. Quelles sont les trois vertus théologales ? Ce sont la foi, l'espérance, et la charité. Sont-ce là les chiens dont vous ; m’avez parlé? C'était nous qui étions dans la voiture; et c’éfaient eux qui étaient a cheval. Celui qui compte dix amis, n’en a pas un. Malheur à ceux qui remuent le fond d’une nation! L’am- bassadeur de France et celui d’Angleterre. La chambre de ma SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 179 mère et celle de ma sœur sont au premier étage, Celui-ci meurt dens les prospérités et dans les richesses, celui-là dans !a misère et dans l’amertume de son âme. Iléraclite et Démocrite étaient d’un caractère bien différent : celui-ci riait toujours, et celui-le pleurait sans cesse. Ceux-ci font bien, ceux-là font mal C’est, ce sont. = Is it we who ought! to do? it ? No ; it is they. It will be you, gen- tlemens, who will be called* first”. It is they who wii: carry® it to you. It was we who were talking” in the next? room. What are the princi- pal towns in France? They are Paris, which is the finest, Lyons, Marseilles, Bordeaux, Lille, Nantes, Rouen, which are the most im- portant for commerce. He who cannot® keep'® a secret is incapable of governing. They who never (were acquainted with") adversity, have seen’? the world (but on'®) one side. He who (speaks ill") of his fellow-creaturcs'® deserves to be despised. Whose!® is that book? It is my brother’s. Our house is not larger than that of our neighbour!’ The disorders'® of the mind? are more difficult (to be cured®) than those of the body. Virtue and vice have contrary effects : this causes” the misery of men ; that makes? them happy. I donot like this; give me that. Which of these two carriages do you advise?! me to buy®? This will cost? me eighty pounds; and that, ninety. I bring” you some dahlias ; these are red, and those are yellow. 1 devoir 2 faire 3 messieurs 4 appelés 5 les premiers 6 porter 7 parler 8 voisin 3 ne pouvoir 10 garder 1 ont éprouvé 12ne voir 13qued’ 14 meédire 15 pro- chain m. s. 16 A qui !7 voisin 18 maladie f. 19 esprit 20a guérir 2! causer 22rer.- dre 2 Laquelle #! consciller 25 d’acheter 26 cotter 27 apporter. — RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Qui, que. (See page 43.) 382 The relative pronoun always takes the gender, num- ber, and person of its antecedent, that is, of the word which precedes it ; as moî qui suis Français vos sœurs qui sont Anglaises toi qui es Iéclien les plantes auxquelles je donnais elle qui est Allemande mes soins ont été gelées 383 The relative pronoun must always be as near its antecedent as possible. Thus, instead of saying :— Il a donné une montre d’or à son fils, qui a coûté trois cents franes, we must say :— Il a donné à son fils une montre d’or qui à coûté trois ceuts francs 180 FRENCH GRAMMAR, 384 Qui is sometimes used in an absolute manner, that is, without antecedent, and then applies to persons only ; as qui vous a dit cela ? who told you that ? qui croirai-je ? whom shall I believe ? NoTE.—The above examples show that qui used as a pronoun absolute may be the subject or object of the verb. 385 Que, without antecedent, is used in an interroga- tion formed with a verb which governs a direct object, and refers to things only ; as que dites-vous ? what do you say 2 que fait-il ? what is he doing? Quoi — what. 288 Quoi, without antecedent, is used in an interrogation formed by a verb which governs an indirect object; it ap- plies to things only, and always depends on a preposition j as de quoi parlez-vous ? what are you speaking of ? a quoi pensez-vous ? what are you thinking of ? 387 What, meaning that which, is expressed by ce dont if the preposition of is used, and by ce à quoi if to is used ; as what you speak of is true ce dont vous parlez est vrai what I work at is amusing ce à quoi je travaille est amusant 388 Quoi is also used in exclamations ; thus :— quoi de plus beau que la vertu ! what is more beautiful than virtue ! Dont, de qui, duquel. 389 Dont is used for both genders and numbers, and is applied to both persons and things. But if the relative pronoun be separated from its antecedent by another sub- stantive, then instead of dont, we use de qui (applied to persons only), or duquel, de laquelle, desquels, &c., accord- ing to the gender and number of the antecedent :— l’homme dont je parle the man of whom I speak la maison dont vous parlez the house of which you speak l’homme à la probité duquel je the man to whose probity I trust me fie, est très-estimé is much esteemed SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 181 A qui, auquel, &c. 390 A qui is generally used when speaking of persons or personified things; and auquel, a laguelle, auxquels, aux- quelles, when speaking of animals and things, and sometimes of persons, when clearness or euphony requires it ; as l’homme à qui je parle the man to whom I speak le cheval auquel il donne du foin the horse to which he gives hay l’étude à laquelle je me consacre the study to which I um devoted Où, d’où, par où. 391 The pronouns où, d’où, par où, always refer to inani- mate objects, and are often used for auquel, dans lequel, par lequel, &c.; as le but où (auquel) il tend the end he aims at le siècle où nous vivons the age in which we live le lieu d’où* il sort the place wherice he comes le lieu par où j'ai passé the place through which I passed 292 Relative pronouns must always be expressed in French, though omitted in English ; as le livre que je lis the book I read la maison que je vois the house I see Read, translate, and write. Gloire à la main qu: sème, honte à la main qui nuit. Défiez- vous des belles paroles des gens qui se vantent d’être vertueux. Le livre que vous m'avez prêté est très-intéressant. Qui vous a traité de la sorte? Qui demandez-vous? À qui pensez-vous parler? Que ferez-vous s’il ne vous paie pas? Il n’y a rien sur quoi l’on ait tant disputé. De quoi n’est pas capable un cœur que la jalousie noircit et envénime? À quoi vous occupez-vous pendant la matinée? Quoi de plus consolant, à l’heure de la mort, que d'avoir fait des bonnes œuvres! Un plaisir dont on est assuré de se repentir, ne peut jamais être tranquille. Le sénat attachait à Rome des rois dont elle avait peu à craindre. Je sais ce dont vous voulez me parler. Le cheval sur lequel le roi était monté venait d’Espagne. Heureux qui, satisfait de son humble fortune, vit dans l’état où les dieux l’ont caché. D'où lui vient tant d’orgueil ? * But dont, instead of d’où, is used when extraction, birth, or any moral relation is expressed ; as la maison DONT il sort est illustre. FRENCH GRAMMAR. Esercise on Relative Pronouns. Who is in the drawing-room? Itis the lady who spoke to you this morning in the street. What does she want (vouloir)? I donot know. It is I who speak to you. You, who are an Italian, must! find this country very cold. The gentleman? who spoke to you yesterday is a distinguished? officer. The lady' whom we shall see this evening is à very good musician®. The persons® who have said” it are here. Who | has fallen® ? Whom do you expect’? Who will observe! the com- mandments of God shall be saved!!. What do you think'? of that man? Wkat does he eat! for his dinner? What has he written! to you? What shall we do" if he does not come? What have they given to you for your trouble!®? Of what does he complain!” ? In what have I offended!® you? To what do you impute! the fault? It is what you (are mistaken®) in. On what will you interrogate® him? What is more? beautiful than® to forgive? one’s* enemies ? What you apply*® yourself to is useful. What is the name of the gentleman from whom | you (have) received a letter? It is a name which is very difficult to pronounce. With what did you open” the door of my room? With a key which I found in the kitchen. ! devoir . ? monsieur m. 3 distingué 4damef. 5musicienne f © personne f. 7 dire 8 tomber 2 attendre !°observer !! sauver 12 penser 13 manger !* écrire 15 faire 16 pcine 17 se plaindre 1% offenser 19 imputer 20 se tromper 21 interroger 22 de plus 23 que 24 pardonner 2 2 ses 26 s’appliquer 27 ouvrir. Dont, de qui, duquel — à qui, auquel, &c. The young man of whom I have spoken to you deserves! to be eu couraged. The castle, of which we perceive? the towers, belongs? to the Duke d’Aumale. The clemency of which men make* a virtue is .often practised® (out of®) policy”. Alexander®, to whose courage they give (so much?) praise’, died! at thirty-three years (of age'). Of whom do you speak ? From whom do you expect a letter 7 Iti" is evident that (there is'*) a God whom all men must! obey. The glory: to which heroes sacrifice! is often a false glory. ‘To whom has he sold!” his last picture'®? To which of these two pupils'® (must we®) give the prize ? Obedience is a virtue to which (we must?) accustom® children. (‘This is) the place? in which the general of the army was killed®. Many (learned people®®) do not adopt” the principles from. which the system” of Descartes is derived”. This is the door through which the king passed.® The house from which I come® is (to be let®). The house from which the great Condé sprung® was illustrious. The man you saw® (at my house®) is dead. I will never forget® the favour you have done” me. He thinks® it will rain® to-morrow. 1 mériter de 2 apercevoir 3 appartenir faire 5 pratiquer Spar 7 politiqu 8 Alexandre 9tantde 10louange !! mourir !2l’âgede 1311 Milya i 16 sacrifier 17 vendre I8 tableau !Sélève faut-il 21il faut 2? arcoutum 2 Voici 2! lieu m. 2 tuer 26savint 2 adopter système 29dériver 3° passer 31 gortir 32a louer 33 sortir 3%vuir 3% chez moi 3% oublier 37 faire 3% croi » pleuvoir. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. On — one, people, they, we, $e. - 393 The indefinite terms in English, one, they, we, people, it is, &c., are rendered in French by on, with the verb in the third person singular, and it is often employed to avoid the passive form of the verb, which is seldom used in French ; as on trouve des amis partout one finds friends everywhere on croit qu’il a tort they think he is wrong on parle de guerre people talk of war ici on parle Anglais English is spoken here 394 Though on is generally masculine and singulaz, it becomes feminine when it refers personally to a woman ; and plural when it very distinctly represents several per- sons; as ON n’est pas toujours JEUNE et BELLE ON est ÉGAUX quand on s’aime 395 L’on is generally used instead of on, after sè, et, où, and sometimes after que, quoi, for the sake of euphony ; as si l’on est sage, on sera récompensé on estime et l’on respecte l’homme juste on aime toujours à revoir le lieu où l’on à reçu le jour jamais on est grand qu’autant que l’on est juste But on never takes an 0 if it is followed by le, la, les, lui, leur, cr other words beginning with /; as si on le voit; et on le verra ; uot si l’on le voit, &c., which would produce a disagreeable cacophony. Quiconque, qui que, &e.—whoever. 396 Quiconque signifies toute personne qui, “every one who,” and therefore has no plural, and refers to persons only ; as quiconque n’obéira pas à la loi whoever shall not obey the lu sera puni will be punished 397 Whoever, followed by I am, thou art, we are, you are, is expressed by qui que ; as whoever you are qui que vous soyez 184 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 398 Qui que ce soit qui (whoever) refers to persons; and _ quot que or quoi que ce soit que (whatever) refers to things ; as qui que ce soit qui l'ait fait whoever has done it quot que ce soit qu’il fasse whatever he does Chacun — every one, each. 299 [very one, meaning “each in particular,” is expressed by chacun ; butif it means “all,” it is expressed by fous, m., toutes, f. ; as every one lives after his own way chacun vit a sa fagon every one of them was killed ils furent tous tués Chacun (fem. chacune) is always singular. When pre- ceded by a substantive in the plural, it is sometimes fol- lowed by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by leur, leurs. 400 Chacun requires son, sa, ses, when it comes after the direct object to the verb, or when the verb has no such direct object ; as il faut remettre ces livres, chacun you must put these books each in à sa place its place les juges ont opiné, chacun selon the judges gave their opinion, each ses vues according to his own view But we can use also leur, leurs, by putting chacun between two com- mas; as 3 ils ont opiné, CHACUN, selon LEURS vues 401 Chacun requires leur, leurs, whenever it precedes the direct object to the verb, because in this case leur does not refer to ehacun, but to the nominative of the preceding verb; as ; ils ont donné, chacun, leur avis each one has given his opinion ils ont apporté, chacun, leurs they have each of them brought offrandes : their offerings Autrui — others. 402 Awtrur is always used substantively, has no plural, and is generally preceded by a preposition ; as ; il ne faut point désirer le bien we must mot covet other men’s d’autrur goods à SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 188 Personne — nobody, no one. 403 Personne, as an indefinite pronoun, is always mascu- line singular, and means nul, qui que ce soit. In this sense it requires ne before the verb ; as personne n’est assez sot pour croire no one is silly enough to believe un tel conte ‘such a story la fierté ne convient à personne pride becomes nobody 404 Personne is also used in the sense of quelqu'un, “ any- body,” “ any one,” chiefly in sentences implying doubt or interrogation, and then it takes no negation ; as je doute que personne vienne I doubt whether anybody will come personne oserait-il le nier? would any one dare deny it? 405 Personne as a substantive is feminine ; as quelle est la personne assez sotte who is the person foolish enough pour le croire ? to believe it ? L’un l’autre*—one another. L'un et l’autre —boihk. 406 L'un et l’autre, les uns et les autres, simply suggest an idea of plurality, and mean both; whilst l’un l’autre, les uns les autres, add an idea of reciprocity to that of plurality ; as j'aime Racine et Boileau, l’un et 1 like Racine and Boileau, both l’autre furent de grands poètes were great poets ils s’estimaient l'un l’autre they esteemed each other 407 Ni l’un ni l’autre, in English neither, requires ne before the verb, which may be used in the plural or in the i > singular ; as ni l’un ni l’autre ne viendront they will not come, either of them ni l’un ni l’autre ne viendra neither of them will come | | On peut être honnête homme et faire mal des vers. A-t-on Jamais pleuré d’avoir fait son devoir? On s’était cru amis, et l’on \s’est trouvé rivaux. Quand on est belle on ne l’ignore pas. Qui- conque n’a pas de caractère, n’est pas un homme, c’est une chose. Read, translate, and write. || #* Some, repeated in a sentence, is expressed by les uns and les autres; æs les uns | riaient, les autres pleuratent some were laughing, some were crying. ‘ 186 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Passant, qui que tu sois, ne m’envie pas ce peu de terre qui re- couvre ma cendre. Qui que ce soit qui vous lait dit, il s'est’ trompé. Chacun prend son plaisir où il le trouve. Quoi que dise cet auteur, je prétends qu’il a tort. Chacun de nous a ses peines. Ils s’en allèrent chacun de leur côté. Que faites-vous fous les matins? 1ls apportèrent des offrandes au temple, chacun selon ses moyens. lls ont apporté, chacun, leurs offrandes. Ne faites pas à autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qu’on vous fit. Qui ne plaint personne ne mérite pas qu’on le plaigne. Je ne connais personne d’aussi aimable que votre sœur. Personne oserait-il me contredire? Il faut toujours fréquenter les personnes bien élevées. Tous deux s'aidaient l’un l’autre à porter leurs douleurs. | le sont arrivés l’un et l’autre en même temps. Ni l’un ni l’autre r'à fait son devoir. Ni lun ni l’autre n’ont réussi. i Exercise on Indefinite Pronouns. People imagine! that when they are rich they are happy; but they arc very often mistaken® One is not always master of one’s® passions. We attribute! the invention of gunpowder’ to Berthold Schwartz of Friburg®. They say that the cholera is raging” in Russia. If people say that he (is wrong®), they are mistaken. Whoever is modest seldom fails® to gain’ the esteem of those (he converses with''). Whoever does not do'? his duty'® will be punished!’. Isay so to whoever will'® hear me. Whoever we are, (let us not forget’) that we are mortal. Whoever has written that pamphlet is a clever’ man. Whatever you (may do'?) you will not persuade him. Whatever he (may say”) (he is wrong”). Every one thinks? (after his own way”). Every one of them was saved. Every one lives? after his own way. God will reward* every= body (according to?) his works®. These poor people (gens) have brought offerings, every one accord- ing to his means. These two poems® have each their merit; both are full of beauties. Bear® the imperfections of others with patience. (We must?!) never speak il1*? of others. Nobody becomes® vicious or virtuous (on a sudden®). I know® nobody so learned®® as your father. Is there®” any one bold* enough to® do it ? I know a person who will do it. Fire and water destroy® one another. The happiness of the peopled! makes* that of the prince ; their true interests are connected with each other. Turenne and Condé were two great captains ; both obtained*® the esteem and admiration of their contemporaries. Ihave read these two historians, both relate the same event. Where are your cousins (f.) ? I expected them both, but neither will come. 1 g’imaginer 2 se tromper 3ses 4 attribuer 5 poudre à canon © Fribourg 7 sévir 8 avoir tort … 9 manquer 10 gagner Ul avec qui il converse !? faire !3 devoir 14 punir !5le 16 vouloir !7n’oublier pas Bhabile 19 faire 20 dire 2! avoir tort 22 penser 2?àsa manière Zsauver ? vivre 2® récompenser 27 selon 7 œuvre A 79 poème m. 3souffrir 3! Onnedoit 32mal 33devenir 3*tout-à-coup 3° connait 3 savant 37 Ya-t-il 38 hardi 39 pour “°se détruire “! peuplem. “faire li t4 capitaines 49 obtenir 49 contemporain. SYNTAX OF VERBS. 187 SYNTAX OF VERBS. Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 408 The verb agrees in number and person with its sub- ject, whether expressed or understood ; as si vous le voyez, dites-lui que je l’attends la vie est le chemin de la mort les hommes passent comme les fleurs 409 When a verb has several subjects, it is put in the plural number ; and if the subjects are of different persons, the verb agrees with the first in preference to the other two, and with the second in preference to the third. In this case the resuming pronoun, nous or vous, generally pre- cedes the verb (348); as Homère et Virgile sont les princes Homer and Virgil are the princes des poètes of poets vous et moi nous sortirons you and I will go out vous et votre frére vous lirez you and your brother will read c’est vous ou lui qui l’avez it is you or he who have it 410 Nore—The resuming pronoun (348) nous or vous is not repeated when the conjunction ni occurs between the nominatives ; as ni vous ni moi ne sommes contents. But the verb agrees with the last noun, its subject — 411—1 When the different nouns are synonymous, or nearly so, or when they form a climax or gradation ; as son courage, son intrépidité ÉTONNE les plus braves ce sacrifice, votre intérêt, votre honneur, Dieu L’EXIGE 412—2 When the verb comes after rien, tout, chacun. personne, or any expression that recapitulates the preceding nouns acting as subject to that verb; as le temps, les biens, la vie, tout EST à la patrie voisins, amis, parents, chacun l’AIME 413—3 When the words forming the subject are separated by ou; as la mort ou la captivité PARAISSAIT inévitable choisissez : l’un ou l’autre ACHÈVERA mes peines 414 But if the words separated by ou are in different 188 FRENCH GRAMMAR. persons, the verb is put in the plural, and agrees with the | person that has the priority ; as lui ox moi nous PARLERONS vous ou votre frère vous VIENDREZ 415 When the two subjects are united by one of the conjunctions comme, de même que, ainsi que, &c., the verb agrees only with the first subject; as es la vertu, ainsi que le savoir, a son virtue, as well as learning, has prix its value 416 But the verb is put in the plural when any of the foregoing conjunctions express connection, plurality, or simultaneous effects between the nouns, rather than com- parison ; as 7 Dans l’Égypte, Bacchus ainsi qu’Hercule étaient reconnus comme demi-dieux.— VOLTAIRE. 417 When the subjects to the verb are joined by mi repeated, that verb is put in the plural; as ni Por ni la grandeur ne nous neither gold nor grandeur makes rendent heureux us happy 418 However, when the act or state expressed by the verb can only have reference to one subject at a time, the verb is in the singular ; as ri l’un ni l’autre n’obtiendra le neither the one nor the other will prix de français obtain the French prize Read, translate, and write. Nous existons sans savoir comment, et nous pensons sans savoir pourquoi. La religion est une chaîne d’or qui suspend la terre au trône de l'Eternel. Souvent les richesses attirent les amis; et la pauvreté les éloigne. Le riche et le pauvre sont égaux devant la loi. Narbal et moi nous admirions la bonté des dieux. Penses-y bien, jeune homme, que sont dix, vingt, trente ans pour un être immortel? Voisins, amis, parents, chacun préfère son intérêt à celui de tout autre. La faiblesse ou l’inexpérience nous fait com- mettre bien des fautes. Sa fureur, sa rage n’a plus de bornes. C’est vous ou lui qui l’avez dit. L'enfer, comme le ciel, prouve un Dieu juste et bon. L'histoire, ainsi que la physique, n'a commencé à se débrouiller que sur la fin du XVI siècle. La santé, comme la fortune, retirent leurs faveurs à ceux qui en abusent. SYNTAX OF VERRS. 189 Exercise on the Verbs. We are all mortal. He speaks too fast. You work? too much. Virtue and vice have different consequences’. My son and daughter will sing* this evening. You and they were of the same opinion®. You and your brother will go® (on horseback”); your father and I will walk®, He, she, and I will go to the play You and he know'° the state of their affairs. Neither he nor I have ever said so!!, Neither you nor your friend can'? oblige me. Men, women, children, every- thing was consumed by the flames. Threats, entreaties's, tears, nothing could soften' him. (Either) fear or misery has made him guilty. Neither speaks English. Neither he nor your brother will obtain the situation. Envy, like ambition, is a blind passion. Pride'® (as well as'”) anger, lowers!® the character of man. The fear of death, or rather, the love of life, began to revive? in her bosom. Neither your sister nor mine will be invited to the ball. Neither (of them) likes it. vite 2travailler 3 effet m. ‘chanter Pavism. Saller 7a cheval ® marcher 9 spectacle m. 19 connaitre lle !2ne pouvoir !3 supplications i attendrir 15 rendre 16 orgueil 17 ainsi que 8 rabaisser !9 se réveiller Government or Object of Verbs. (See page 47.) 419 Some verbs may have two governments, or objects ; one direct (115), the other indirect (116); as j'ai donné une montre à mon fils I have given a watch to my son 420 But a verb cannot have two direct, or two indirect objects 5 we must therefore say :— c’est de lui que (not dont) je parle it is of him that I speak c’est à lui que (not à qui) je parle it is to him that I speak 421 When two verbs, in the same sentence, do not govern the same case, each verb must have its distinct object ; as he attacked and took the city il attaqua la ville et s’en empara But we cannot say : il attaqua et sempara de la ville. Position of the Object of the Verh. 422 When a verb has two objects of equal length, or nearly so, the direct is placed before the indirect object ; as les Français vainquirent les Autrichiens à Solferino 190 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 423 But when the two objects differ in length, the shorter comes first, unless the sense requires the contrary ; as Les Crétois donnrent à Télémaque toutes les marques d’une amitré sincere. In placing the objects, we should carefully attend to the sense ; thus, we could not say :— croyez-vous ramener ces esprits égurés par la douceur ? But: croyez-vous ramener, par la douceur, ces esprits égarés? Government of Passive Verbs. 424 The object of passive verbs is expressed by de or par : by de when we express a feeling of the heart, a passion, or an operation of the soul ; and by par when we express an action referring exclusively to the mind or the body ; as l’honnête homme est estimé de the honest man 1s esteemed by tout le monde everybody Henri IV fut assassiné par un Henry IV. was murdered by a fanatique Janatic 425 There are often English verbs which require a direct object, whilst the corresponding verb in French re- quires an indirect object, and vice versa. - The prepositions used in such cases are generally a or de: — jai répondu à sa lettre 1 answered his letter il jouit d’une bonne santé he enjoys good health je vous attends I am waiting for you 426 The present Infinitive of a verb may be the object to another verb, either by the insertion of a preposition, or without any intervening word. The prepositions generally used in such cases are à and de EXAMPLES WITHOUT PREPOSITION, allez voir votre mère go and see your mother daignez m’écouter deign to listen to me je n’ose me plaindre 1 dare not complain j'aime mieux ne rien dire I prefer to say nothing EXAMPLES WITH d. il aime à lire l’histoire he likes to read history je vous exhorte à étudier I exhort you to study il apprend à écrire he learns to write accoutumez-vous à travailler accustom yourself’ to work SYNTAX OF VERBS. 191 EXAMPLES WITH de. je vous conseille de rester ici I advise you to stay here il mérite d’être récompensé he deserves to be rewarded je crains de l’offenser 1 fear to offend him il s’abstient de boire du vin he abstains from drinking wine 427 Some verbs take both a and de; such as, commencer, continuer, contraindre, engager, forcer, obliger, soccuper, &c. ; as il commence à bien écrire he begins to write well je commence d’écrire mon thème I begin to write my exercise REMARK.—C’est à vous À (it is your turn) must not be mistaken for c’est à vous DB (it is your right or duty) ; as c’est à vous A parler, it is your turn to speak ; c’est à vous DE parier, it is for you or your duty to speak. NoTE.— Being convinced that practice only will enable the student to know when a verb 1s to be accompanied by a preposition or not, and which preposition is to be then used, no general rules are here given on the subject. Read, translate, and write. Mon oncle m’a donné quatre beaux volumes de Molière. Est-ce la vous ou à votre sœur qu ils étaient destinés? C’est à moi qu’ils les avaient promis. Ce n’est pas de vous que nous parlons. J "ai ‘trouvé un Journal sur votre table, et je m’en suis emparé. Les méchants sont détestés de tout le monde. Les Romains furent vaincus par les Carthaginois à la bataille de Cannes. L’imprimerie fut inventée, dit-on, par Gutenberg. Je compte pas samedi prochain. Aimez-vous mieux attendre j jusqu ’à lundi? La religion nous apprend à respecter nos maîtres, à être affables envers nos ‘inférieurs et à aimer tous les hommes comme nous-mêmes. Nous {limes obligés de passer la nuit dans la forêt. Avertissez votre (ami d’être sur ses gardes, car je connais quelqu’un qui essaie de lui nuire. | Exercise on the Government of Verbs. Take! this letter to your mother. I will give you that book, if yeu learn? your lesson well. He brought® a beautiful watch? to his daugh- ter. It* is of your father that we are speaking®. It was to his son that 1 was speaking. It is from him that I have received’ that present. I found? this pen, and I used® it. Our troops attacked the city and \took!! it. Your father is esteemed by all men of probity. Gaul? was | conquered" by Cwsar'®. Those children were punished by their master. We were attacked by a troop of highwaymen!®. That thief lis well known'® by all the people!” of the village. Was it not from 1 porter 2 apprendre 3 apporter “montre f. 5 Ce 6 parler 7 recevoir 8 trou- ver 9 se servir de 10 attaquer !! s’emparer de 12 Gaules f. pl. !3 conquis 14 César |1* voleurs de grand chemin 18 connaitre 17 gens 192 FRENCH GRAMMAR. your stock-broker'® that you expected a letter yesterday ? No; it is from my banker that I expect a cheque of two thousand francs. I was deceived by the man whom I considered my best friend. I respect my tutor, and obey'® him. 18 agent de change 19 obéir a Who was asking for me? Two gentlemen. Will they wait! for me? They said they would look for you at the railway station. That house would suit? your friend. (For) how much have you sold it? I sold it for fifteen hundred pounds. You will never persuade those men that they (are wrong?®). Do you approve of his plan? I doubt his success. Let us slander! nobody. What dictionary do you use’? Do you remember® the Princess of Wales’ arrival in London? Yes, I remember it well. Does she enjoy good health? Yes, she does. I hope to thank you myself. I wish’ to sce him. Accustom your- selves® to work a little every day. We come to see you. She seems’ to like her French lessons. Do your children learn’ to dance? No, but they learn to draw. I like to walk! in the fields. Has he not in- vited you to go and see him ? His mother has consented to sell her house. I advise'? you to buy it. I forbid you, said the archbishop, to touch any'® of my companions. They! accuse him of having revealed the secret. Do you advise’ me to sell my house? You will do wrong!* to sell it. He had the misfortune to break his leg. Had he not the audacity to invite me after such (828) conduct? We agreed"” to speak on the subject one after the other. Do you not fear to excite him? I defy him to prove what'® he says. 1 attendre Zconvenir a 3 avoir tort 4médire de 3 se servir Ssesouvenir 7 désirer 8 g’accoutumer 9 paraitre 10 apprendre !! se promener !Zengager !3 aucun !4 On 15 conseiller 16 avoir tort 17 convenir 18 ce que Use of Avoir and Etre with other Verbs. 428 All active verbs are conjugated with avoir in their compound tenses; as j'ai parlé I have spoken j'avais écrit 1 had written j'aurai reçu 1 shall have reccived 429 All passive and reflective verbs are conjugated with | étre; as je suis trompé I am deceived je me suis levé 1 have risen je m’étais habill € I had dressed 430 Neuter verbs are generally conjugated with avair ; as j'ai marché I have walked j'avais dormi I had slept j'aurai vécu 1 shall have lived, &ec. : 4 : 4 j : ; ] STNTAX OF VERBS. 193 Except some which are conjugated with être; as je sues allé, il est arrivé, je serais mort, nous sommes venus, &c. (See page 90, No. 187.) 430* Certain neuter verbs are sometimes conjugated with avoir and sometimes with être. This entirely depends on the meaning intended to be conveyed: with avoir they ex- press an action ; with être, the state resulting from that action ; such as augmenter, cesser, déborder, demeurer, de- scendre, disparaître, monter, passer, rester, sortir, &c. (188). EXAMPLES. With Avoir. With ÊTRE. j'ai descendu deux fois est-il descendu ? 1 went down twice is he down 2? il @ monté trop vite est-il monté ? he went up too quickly is he gone upstairs ? le roi a passé ici la pluie est passée the king passed here the rain is over ce mot m’a échappé ce mot m’est échappé I have forgotten the word that word has escaped me cette maison lui a convenu il est convenu du prix that house has suited him he has agreed as to the price — PROPER USE OF THE TENSES OF VERBS. INDICATIVE MOOD (223). The Present Tense. 431 The present of the Indicative is used in French, as in English, to denote a present or habitual action or state ; as je parle de vous J speak of you | vous écrivez bien you write well | nous sommes ici we are here | 432 NoTE.—In English the present is represented under three forms :—1 I speak ; 2 7 am speaking ; 3 1 do speak ; which are all expressed in French by je parle. The second form, I am speaking, may be rendered idiomatically by je suis à parier, | 433 The Present is often used instead of a Past tense | KE { | : 194 FRENCH GRAMMAR. to express, in a more lively and emphatical manner, a thing that happened at a time quite past; as il se lève, il regarde, il voit de tous côtés courir des assassins à pas précipités. — VOLTAIRE. 434 The Present is familiarly used instead of the Future, when the time alluded to is proximate or near ; as je pars demain pour Paris TI set out to-morrow for Paris The Imperfect or Descriptive Tense. 435 The Imperfect is used to denote an action not cons cluded, or going on while another took place ; as j'écrivais quand il entra I was writing when he came in il dinait quand je l’ai vu he was dining when I saw him 436 The Imperfect is used also to express an action /a- bitual * or frequently performed; as : les Grecs cultivaient les arts the Greeks cultivated the arts j'allais à la chasse quand j'étais I went a shooting when I was in a la campagne the country Henri IV était un grand roi, et Henry IV. was a great king, and il aimait son peuple he loved his people 437 The Imperfect is used after the conjunction si “ if” to denote a condition or supposition; as si j’avais le temps, j'irais le voir if I'had time, I would go and see him si vous partiez demain : were you to set out to-morrow The Past Definite Or Historical Tense. 438 The Past Definite is used in French to express a particular fact which has happened but once, or very sel- dom, at a time specified and entirely elapsed; as je traversai le Rhin en 1839 I crossed the Rhine in 1839 César fut tué dans le sénat Cesar was killed in the senate je lui écrivis la semaine dernière I wrote to him last week Louis XIV régna 72 ans Louis XIV. reigned 72 years 4 * The imperfect must be used in French when the English past tense can be formed with used to, or with was or were and the present participle ; as, While 1 read (or was reading), tandis que je Zisais.—1 dined (or used to dine) at six, je dinais & six heures, SYNTAX OF VERBS. 195 The Imperfect and the Past Definite compared. 439 The Imperfect describes persons and things as they were, and the Past Definite mercly states past facts :— Imperfect. Past Definite. La rivière qui coulait à mes pieds, Le roi monta en voiture sans mot tour à tour se perdait dans les dire; Cobbett se présenta pour bois, tour à tour reparaissait y entrer, mais Charles lui barra brillante des constellations de le chemin avec le pied, et fit la nuit, qu’elle répétait dans son fermer aussitôt la portière.—- sein —CHATEAUBRIAND. Guizor. Read, translate, and write. Pendant que nous errions à travers la plaine déserte, une brume épaisse s’étendait sur les flots et commençait à nous envelopper. Nous longeâmes cette île, et le lendemain nous arrivâmes en face de sept montagnes de glace —Marmrer. Le jour commençait à baisser, ils s’embarquèrent pour l’île. Déjà le bruit s’y était répandu que le roi arrivait; beaucoup d’habitants se portèrent à sa rencontre: comme il éraversait les rues de Newport, une jeune femme s’avança vers lui, et lui présenta une rose rouge, éclose malgré la rigueur de la saison. —Gurzor. Nous allâmes chez le gouverneur que nous ne pümes voir parce qu’il éfait malade. Si je ne me rappelle pas ses noms c’est qu’il en avait dix ou douze. — Dr Séaur. Le roi fut fort troublé de cette apparition subite ; sa tête, qui éfait toute faible, en fut ébranlée —DE BARANTE. Exercise. Present. I read! the history of the French revolution. Are yow writing to your mother? They work? nine hours a® day. He seized! him (by the®) collar, threw” him down, and said to him, ‘Surrender? or you are dead!” We shall go this evening to the opera, and I shall (set out’) for Italy to-morrow. Shall you soon have done? Shall you soon be ready ? Imperfect. Frederick the Great was plain’ in his dress, and always wore! a military uniform. I was writing you a letter when I was informed? of your arrival. What!® did you do when you were in!* the country’ ? I rode' every day before breakfast. When my father travelled", I always accompanied him. Marshal Saxe was the greatest general of his day'®. If hewere rich, he would assist all the poor. Past Definite. Louis the Fourteenth ascended" the throne at five llire 2travailler 3 par 4saisir Sau 6collet 7 terrasser 8 se rendre 9 partir simple !! porter 12 informer 13 que i 15campagnef. 16 monter à cheval 7 voyager 18 temps m. 19 monter sur | æ 2 196 FRENCH GRAMMAR. years (of age”), and died in his seventy-seventh year, on the first of September, 1715. Alexander, with forty thousand men, attacked Darius, who had” six hundred thousand ; he gave“? him battle twice. defeated” him, and made his mother, wife, and daughters prisoners The French army landed near Algiers on the 14th of June, 1830, invested” the city, and soon after compelled the Dey to surrender. Examples of both. Two ladies came to rest”® under the tree which covered us with its foliage. An old (blind man?) knocked? at the door of the hall where they were dining. Scarcely had we arrived, when we heard” the sound of a horn. We arrived at the foot of the mountain as the sun (was setting®), and we slept® at a small inn which overlooked™ the whole valley. In the middle of the night we heard the distant noise of a cataract which was falling from a steep rock. We rose at six o'clock, and took a coach which was going to Geneva 20 ’Age de 2! en avoir Z2livrer défaire 24 Alger investir 26 se reposer 27 aveugle 78 frapper Z9entendre 30cor 5! se coucher 32 coucher 33 dominer The Past Indefinite. 440 The Past Indefinite is used to express a thing as having taken place, without specifying when, or which has happened at a time not entirely past ; as this day, this week, this month, this year, &c. ; as il a beaucoup voyagé he has travelled much je l’ai vu cette semaine I have seen him this week je l’ai rencontré ce matin I met him this morning 441 The Past Indefinite is used also instead of the future anterior, to express what is about to take place ; as attendez, j'a: fini dans un instant wait, I shall soon have done 442 Onserve—The Definite and Indefinite past tenses are often used indiscriminately in familiar conversation, though the time be specified and entirely elapsed ; as je le vis, or je l’ai vu “hier. a hah 443 In English the Past Indefinite is used to express 3 action contiaued to the present time, in which case the French use the Present ; as have you been long in England ?* y a-t-il longtemps que vous êtes en Angleterre i I have been waiting for two hours il y a deux heures que j'attends * “ Avez-vous été longtemps en Angleterre?” would imply that you are no longe or m England. SYNTAX OF VERBS. ; 197 The Pluperfect. 444 The Pluperfect expresses an action done before another action. It is used when the action is habitual or repeated, and is generally required after dès que, aussitôt que (as soon as), quand (when), &c.; as j'avais fini quand il entra I had done when he came in il sortait tous les jours, dès qu’il he used to go out every day, as soon avait diné as he had dined 445 The Pluperfect is also used after si ‘“ if”; as si j'avais écrit, il serait venu if Z had written, he would have come The Past Anterior. 446 The Past Anterior is used in speaking of a thing which occurred immediately before an event that is past, and is also generally required after dès que, aussitôt que, quand, &c.; as hier, jeus fini avant lui yesterday, I had done before him il sortit dès qu’il eut diné he went out as soon as he had dined The Future. 447 The Future simply expresses that an action will be done at a time that is not yet come ; as je dinerai avec vous demain I shall dine with you to-morrow ma sœur viendra lundi prochain my sister will come next Monday 448 In English the present tense is often used for the future after when, as soon as, after, as; this cannot be done in French, and the future is always required ; as come when you like venez quand vous voudrez he will go as soon as he has done il ira dès qu’il aura fini CONDITIONAL MOOD. 449 The Conditional is used much in the same way as the corresponding mood in English ; as il viendrait si vous l’invitiez he would come if you invited him vous devriez lire tous les jours you should read every day 198 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 450 Neither the conditional nor the futurecan be used in ¥rench after si, when it means suppose that ; as you will oblige me very much if you vous m’obligerez beaucoup si vous will do it le faites (not ferez) a if you should come, bring your si vous veniez (not viendriez) sister with you amenez votre sœur avec vous 451 But when si expresses a state of doubt, and signi- fies whether, the future and conditional are used after it ; as I do not know whether he will come je ne sais s’il viendra I do not know whether he would come je ne sais s’il viendrait Exercise. Past Indefinite. I received this morning three letters from France, and I have sent! them to your father. What? did you learn’ to-day? I learned some scenes of Racine’s tragedies. How long have you been in Russia? How many years has Queen Victoria reigned? Have you not seen him this week ? Pluperfect. I had breakfasted when your brother came (to ask fort) me. We (used to go®) into his room as soon as we had finished our work. I used to go fishing as soon as I had breakfasted. Past Anterior. Yesterday, when I had taken tea, I went to the concert. As soon as the rain was over’, we started’. When we had reached® the top of the mountain, we saw the sun rising’ under our feet. As soon as I had crossed the bridge it was carried away. Future. As soon as his education is finished, he will go to! Italy to visit the Roman antiquities. My mother and sister will (wait for’) us at the station. Shall I shut the door, or shall I leave it open? When you are ready, we will go and (take a walk'®) in the fields. After you have done your work!) you shall go (to bed"). Shall I light! the candle ? As you please. Conditional. I would go with you, if you would wait for me (a few'”) minutes. I would have lent'® him fifty pounds, if I had known" he wanted” money. They should”! give him more liberty. Do you think that he would be more happy? If I would sell my horse, I could’? have forty pounds (for it*). If you will study only two hours a¥ day, you will make good progress. I do not know? if the weather will be fine to-morrow. Ido not know whether” he would sell his house, if I (were to offer®) him a good price (for it**). Had I known” that you were here, I would have come sooner. 1envoyer 2 Que 3 apprendre 4 demander 5 entrer © passée 7 partir 8 atteindre 9se lever 10en 1 attendre !2laisser 13 se promener !*ouvrage 15 se coucher 16 allumer 17 quelques !® preter 19 savoir 20 avoir besoin de 2! devoir * pouvoir 2 cn avoir 24par 2 grand savoir -7si “Soffrir en 30 savoir. SYNTAX OF VERBS. 149 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 452 The Subjunctive Mood is used after a verb or expres- sion implying any doubt, wish, regret, command, necessity, fear, ignorance, joy, sorrow, &c., or any affection of the mind; as je doute qu’il vienne I doubt whether he will come je souhaite que tu réussisses 1 wish you may succeed je crains qu'il ne soit malade I fear he is ill 453 Howcver, some verbs, such as croire, penser, espérer, s'attendre, se douter, s’imaginer, présumer, &c., although implying some degree of uncertainty, require the Indicative unless used interrogatively or negatively ; as je pense qu’il a raison I think he is right je crois qu'il viendra I think he will come 454 The Subjunctive is required after verbs used énter- rogatively or negatively ; as pensez-vous qu’il ait raison ? do you think he is right ? je ne crois pas qu’il vienne I do not think that he will come 455 However, when the speaker has no doubt of the fact mentioned in the question, or when the interrogation is only an oratorical turn, which aflirms more strongly, the Indicative is used ; as vous ai-je dit que mon père est arrivé ? oubliez-vous donc qu’il est votre père ? 456 The Subjunctive is used after Impersonal verbs, when they imply something uncertain, or when they are used interrogatively or negatively, or preceded by si, “if”; as il faut que j'aille à la ville I must go to town il convient que vous le fussiez it is right that you should do it est-il vrai qu'il soit mort? is it true that he is dead ? il ne paraît pas qu’il soit mieux il does not seem that he is better s’il vous semble que cela soit if it appeurs to you that it is so 457 But the Indicative is used after Impersonal verbs, when they express something certain, or likely ; as il est certain que vous avez tort il parait que vous vous étes trompé il me semble que votre présence me fait du bien 200 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 458 The Subjunctive is used after the relative pronouns, qui, que, dont, lequel, laquelle, ou, to express something uncertain, and when they are preceded by an adjective, in the superlative degree, or by the words le seul, l’unique, le premier, le dernier, when the idea is not positive; also after the words pas un, aucun, rien, peu, preceded by i n’y a, il y a ; àl est, il n’est; as > , 9 je cherche quelqu’un qui puisse parler français son père est le plus savant homme que je connaisse c’est le seul homme qui ait survéeu au naufrage Néron est le premier empereur qui ait persécuté l’Eglise il wy a rien qui rafraichisse le sang comme une bonne action I am seeking some one who may be able to speak French his father is the most learned man I know he is the only man that has sur- vived the shipwreck Nero is the first emperor who per- secuted the Church there is nothing that refreshes the blood so much as a good action 459 But the Indicative is used after the above-men- tioned expressions when the assertion is positive or absolute; as je cherche queiqu’un qui peut m’aider c’est le moindre secret qu’il pouvait nous apprendre. — RACINE. souviens-toi que je suis le seul qui t’a déplu. —FÉNELON. le premier qui fut roi, fut un soldat heureux. — VOLTAIRE. 460 The Subjunctive is required after the words qui que, quelque, quel que, qui que ce soit qui, quoi que, Si... que ; as quelque riche que vous soyez quoi que vous fassiez, vous perdrez si savarts qu’ils soient however rich you may be whatever you may do, you will lose however learned they may Le 3 3 3 à Ê 3 461 The Subjunctive is also used after some conjunctions mentioned at page 125, such as afin que, a moins que, de peur que, &ec. (223); as prêtez-moi votre livre, afin que je le lise je le verrai avant qu’il parte lend me your book, that I may read it 1 shall see him before he sets out 462 Some conjunctions, such as de façon que, de sorte que, de manière que, si ce n’est que, sinon que, &c., require, sometimes the Subjunciive, and sometimes the Indicative 5 they require the subjunctive when joined to a verb ex- SYNTAX OF VERBS. 201 pressing doubt, wish, uncertainty, &c.; and the indicative when the verb expresses affirmation, certainty ; as parlez de manière que l’on vous speak so that people may hear you entende il a parlé de manière qu’on l’a he spoke so as to be heard by entendu everybody 463 The conjunction que, used in the second part of a sentence to avoid a repetition of si, governs the Subjunc- tive; and likewise que used instead of & moins que, avant que, afin que, &c.; as si vous venez, et qu’il fasse beau if you come, and if it is fine, we temps, nous irons pêcher will go a fishing je ne partirai pas (avant) que je I will not set out before I huve ne vous aie vu seen you il ne le fera pas (à moins) que he will not do it, unless you come vous ne veniez avec lui with him 464 Sometimes the governing verb or conjunction is understood, and then the subject generally follows the verb; as veuille le ciel entendre mes vœux ! dussiez-vous en perdre la vie, il le faut! à Dieu ne plaise que j’aie une parcille pensce ! Concord between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and the preceding Verb. As the Subjunctive always depends upon a verb expressed or understood, its tenses are regulated by the preceding verb. The following table will show the concord between the two verbs :— je doute je douterai - que vous étudiez je doute je douterai je doute je douterai je doute je douterai 1 1 Ji 1 4 1 ++ je doutais = que vous ayez étudié que vous éludiassiez que vous cussiez études je doutai j'ai douté j'avais douté je douterais j'aurais douté que vous éfudiassiez 202 FRENCH GRAMMAR, je doutais je doutai j’ai douté j'avais douté je douterais j'aurais douté que vous eussiez étudié 465 RuLe I.—When the first verb is in the present or Suture of the indicative, the second must be put in the present of the subjunctive to express a present or future time, and in the ¢mperfect or preterit to express a time past; as je doute que vous puissiez partir demain je ne croirai pas qu’il vienne ce soir je ne crois pas qu’alors il eût raison sur ce point je ne dirai pas que vous pussiez le faire alors je doute qu’il ait reçu votre lettre je ne crotrai jamais qu’il ait fait une telle action 466 Rue II.—Afier the present and future of the in- dicative, the emperfect of the subjunctive is used instead of the present, and the pluperfect instead of the past, when some conditional expression * follows the verb in the sul- junctive ; as 1 {£ doute je douter i) que vous étudiassiez, si lon ne vous y contraignait 5 nl) que vous eussiez étudié, si l’on ne vous y eût contraint 467 Rure IIIL—After the imperfect, the past definite, the conditional and their compounds, the imperfect of the subjunctive is used to express a present or future time- and the pluperfect to express a past time; as je ne savais pas que vous demeurassiez ici ie ne croyais pas que vous vinssiez si tot J ‘ignorais que vous eussiez obtenu cette place nous n’avions pas cru qu'il eût si bien réussi 3 * Si is not the only conditional expression used with the imperfect or pluperfect ; We | sometimes use sans followed by a noun or a pronoun, as Sans vous, sans (uf, sans celay sans votre aide, &c, SYNTAX OF VERBS. 203 Exceptions to Rule III, No. 467. 468 After the past indefinite followed by afin que, de peur que, quoique, &c., the second verb must be put in the present of the subjunctive to express a present or future state or action ; as il m’a trahi, quoiqu’il soit mon ami Dieu nous a créés afin que nous le servions 469 After the past indefinite it is customary to use the past instead of the imperfect of the subjunctive ; as je n’ai jamais connu personne qui ait tant travaillé Read, translate, and write. Mon père désire que j'apprenne la musique et le dessin. Je m'étonne qu’il ne voie pas le danger ou il est. N’attendez pas que je vous réponde pour venir. J’ignorais que vous fussiez de retour. Pensez-vous qu’il dise cela pour me contrarier? Je ne pense pas qu’il le dise pour cela. Croyez-vous que votre sœur puisse marcher si loin? Il est possible qu’elle soit fatiguée avant d'arriver. Est-il vrai que l’Impératrice Eugénie soit à Londres, et qu’elle ait pris un fiacre pour se rendre à son hôtel? Il faut que je parte par le train de sept heures du matin. L’Evangile est le plus beau présent que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. Le meilleur usage qu’on puisse faire de son esprit est de s'en défier. Athalie est une des dernières tragédies que Racine ait écrites. Quelques talents que vous ayez, soyez toujours modeste. Qui que ce soit qui vienne, ne le recevez pas. Le lion n’attaque jamais l’homme, a moins qu'il ne soit provoqué. Comportez-vous de manière que chacun soit content de vous. Il s’est comporté de manière que chacun a été content de lui. Si vous veniez, et que vous pussiez rester deux ou trois jours avec nous, nous irions voir le lac de Genève. Je voudrais que vous vinssiez la semaine prochaine. Je ne partirai pas que je n’en aie reçu l’ordre. Ils lui conseillèrent de partir afin que sa présence contribuât à rétablir l’ordre. Les plus modérés demandèrent qu’on se saisit de lui, et qu’il fût mis dans les prisons du châtelet. Nous ne savions pas qu’il eût été arrêté, Puissiez-vous réussir dans vos projets ! Exercise on the Subjunctive. He is sorry that you have left! him. Are you not afraid? that your father will scold® you (for going') a hunting® without him ? I doubt 1 quitter 2 craindre 2 ne gronder 94 d’aller 5 à la chasse 204 FRENCH GRAMMAR. whether® you can’ finish before next month. My mother wishes® me to learn® music and dancing’. Do you think that he will write soon ? I do not like you to (que vous) (go out'") alone so'? late in the evening. I did not know'* that it was so late. Do you think it is necessary to take somebody!* with me? Do you forget that her anger can ruin you? Have I told you that my sister is ill ? It is possible that you may obtain!® it. It does not seem that you know'® it. You must! make him (an apology'®) before to-morrow. There is no state! which cannot® be totally ruined by civil wars. It is certain that a nation cannot be happy under a tyrannical government. It is the only thing that can console me. London® is the largest*? town I know”, Give me the best cloth? you have in your shop?. Napoleon is one of the greatest captains that ever? was. There are few” men who can support adversity with courage. Choose a retreat where yon may he quiet and happy. Do you know® (any one”) here who can teach® Italian? He must know?® the language well. 6 que 7 pouvoir 8 désirer que 9 apprendre 10 danse f. sortir !2si 13 savoir | 14 quelqu’un !5 obtenir 16 savoir !7 Il faut que 18 des excuses 19 état m. 20 ne pou- voir 2! Londres 22grand connaître 24 drapm. 2 boutique 26 jamais 7 peu de 28 connaître 29 quelqu’un 3° enseigner 3! savoir Whatever difficulties you may have to' surmount, I sincerely hope you will persevere in your endeavours®. Whatever you may say, they will not believe? you. Whatever you do*, do it well. Whoever may come after five o'clock, do not receive him. He has written to me (in order that”) I may depart to-morrow. Although he has paid® the principal, he has still to pay the interest at five per’ cent. I hope I shall speak German® before long?, thongh Iam convinced that it"! is a very difficult language! Employ all the days of your youth (so that!) you may fulfil'®> honourably all the duties’ of your station. Your son (conducts himself"*) in'° (such a manner”) that he gains general esteem. Behave in a manner that you may deserve the esteem of all (good men”). If you are industrious” and® do your exercise well, you shall have a holiday? Before I form a plan, I shall wai.* till things have a more tranquil appearance. We will not begin ua- less?” you are with us. 13 Zefforts Scroire 4 faire Safinque Spayer 7 pour Ballemand 9 long- temps convaincre !!ce langue f. '3employer ‘4 de manière que 5 remplir 16 devoir !7 état !8se conduire 19 de manière 2! gens de bien 2 diligent et que vous 21 congé m. Z attendre “que 77 que I do not believe! that my friends will come this evening. Do you hope? they will make peace this year? I doubt whether? they will do it inf one day. Do you think they have received the money that 1 sent’ to them last week ? I do not think that you would have ob- tained that appointment* (had you not”) persevered in your application. I doubt whether he would have come, if he had known® you were here. I do not believe that you could have succeeded without his recommenda- tion. We did not know that you lived® so near'® us. The Apostles! 1croire Zespérerque 3que “en 5envoyer 6 place 7 sivousn'aviez @ savoir 9 demeurer !’près de !! Apôtres SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 205 received the gift!? of tongues, that’ they might! preach the Gospel te all the nations of the earth. We (were not aware?) that the gallant” general had been wounded’ in that engagement. I had tired! your brotker, although he is stronger than 1am. I have written® to my agent, in order that he may be here to-morrow morning, 2don m. afin que 1 pouvoir 15 ¢vangile 16ijgnorer 17 brave 18 blesses ® fatiguer 20 Écrire. ; - me SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. The Present Participle and the Verbal Adjective. 470 The Present Participle always ends in ant, and is invariable; as un homme sant un livre a man reading a book utie mère aimant son enfant a mother loving her child des enfants étudiant leurs leçons children learning their lessons 471 The Present Participle must not be mistaken for the Verbal Adjective, ending also in ant. The latter, like any other adjective, agrees in gender and number with the word which it qualifies; as une mère aimante a loving mother des enfants obéissants ohedient children des dames obligeantes obliging ladies 472 The Present Participle, generally preceded by en (sometimes understood), expresses an action, and is almost always followed by a direct object; it may be replaced by another tense of the verb with qui before it; as ils marchaient a la mort en chantant des hymnes un homme lisant (or qui lit) un livre une mere aimant (or qui aime) son enfant 473 The Verbal Adjective denotes the state or manner of being of the word to which it relates, and is never followed dy any object whatever ; it may be construed by one of the tenses of étre preceded by qui; as une mère aimante (or qui est aimante) des enfants obéissants (or qui sont obéissants) 474 OBSERVE.—The participle present can never be pre: 206 FRENCH GRAMMAR. ceded in French by any other preposition than en; the present of the infinitive must be used after any other, such as après, avant, sans, pour, par, de; whereas the corres- ponding English prepositions, after, before, without, for, by, of, require the present participle ; as après avoir lu after having read avant de parler before speaking sans hésiter without hesitating pour avoir désobéi for having disobeyed je suis fatigué de lire I am tired of reading 475 The English present participle is often rendered in French by some personal mood preceded by que, de ce que, à ce que, &c.; as I am sorry at your not having je suis fâché que vous n’ayez pas succeeded réussi 476 The English present participle is often rendered in French by some tense of the indicative; as 1 see him coming je le vois qui vient 1 saw two men running je vis deux hommes qui couraient 477 The English present participle is sometimes ex- pressed in French by the past participle, and sometimes by the noun corresponding to the participle ; as the king was leaning on lis sword le roi était appuyé sur son épée the ringing of the bells le son des cloches The Past Participle. 478 GENERAL RuLe.-—The Past Participle, used with- out any auxiliary, agrees, like an adjective, in gender and number with the word to which it relates; as un homme instruit a learned man une femme instruite a learned woman une colonne brisée a broken column des colonnes brisées broken columns 479 The Past Participle, used with the auxiliary verb être, agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb ; as i le roi est arrivé the king has arrived la reine est arrivée the queen has arrived ma lettre est écrite my letter is written mes lettres sont écrites my letters are written SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 207 Past Participle used with AVOIR. 480 The Past Participle, used with the verb avoir, agrees in gender and number with its direct object, when that object precedes it; as la lettre que j'ai écrite the letter which I have written les livres qu’il a lus the books which he has read il les a rendus he has returned them madame, il vous à trompée madam, he has deceived you 481 But the Past Participle never agrees with the sub- ject, nor does it agree with the direct object, when that object comes after it, or when there is no such object at all ; as ma sœur a écrit une lettre my sister has written a letter sa sœur a chanté au concert lis sister sang at the concert &82 REMARK.—It will be observed from the preceding rule, that the past participle of all neuter verbs conjugated with avoir are always invariable, such verbs having no direct objects :— les dix ans qu’il a VECU, il LES a VECU heureuz les deux heures QUE j'ai DORMI m’ont fait du bien (c’est-à-dire, pendant lesquelles, &c.) 483 The Past Participle of reflective verbs agrees with its direct object, when the object precedes it; and it remains invariable when the direct object comes after, or when there is no such object :— With Agreement. Without Agreement. les lettres qu’ils se sont écrites ils se sont écrit plusieurs lettres the letters which they have written they have written several letters to to one another one another ils se sont blâmés ils se sont succédé they blamed each other they succeeded each other Remarks on the Use of some Participles. 484 The Past Participle of impersonal verbs is always invariable ; as les chaleurs qu’il a fait the heat which we had la misère qu’il y a eu the distress which there hus been 208 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 285 The Past Participle between two gue is also inva- riable ; as les embarras que j'ai su que vous the embarrassments that I knew aviez you had 436 When the Past Participle is immediately followed by an infinitive, the noun which precedes may be the object of the participle or of the infinitive: in the first case, the participle agrees with the object; in the second, it remains invariable :— With Agreement. Without Agreement. la femme que j'ai entendue chanter la romance que j'ai entendu chanter the woman whom I heard sing the song I heard sing I heard — whom ? LA FEMME 1 heard — what? CHANTER la chanter romance 487 The participle fait, immediately followed by an infi- nitive, is always invariable, forming, as it were, but one single verbal expression ; as la maison que j'ai fait bâtir the house which I have had built elle s’est fait mourir she caused her own death 488 The Past Participle used with en is invariable when- ever en is not preceded by a personal or relative pronoun acting as à direct object ; as j'aime les fleurs, et j'en ai cueilli I like flowers, and I gathered some il m’a demandé des livres, et je lui he asked me for books, and 1 gave en ai donné him some But we say with agreement :— cet homme m'a obligé ; les services que j'en ai reçus sont nombreux 489 When the verb avoir, joined to the Past Participle, is preceded by /, this participle is invariable if ?’ has refer- ence to an adjective and stands for cela ; as cette langue est plus facile que je ne l'avais cru that language is easier than I thought But if ?’ has reference to a noun or to a pronoun, the participle agrees ; as cette ville est telle qu’on l’a représentée sa maison est telle que nous l'avons vue il y à vingt ans TE TEA TER TA CAC IE TO TER NE RTE AS ads SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 209 490 When a Past Participle is preceded by two substan- tives united by the preposition de, it agrees with the noun which most attracts attention; as une foule de gens s’est présentée a crowd of people presented itself une foule de jeunes gens se sont a crowd of young men have en- enrôlés dans la milice listed in the militia 491 Le peu with a Past Participle.—Le peu signifies une petite quantité, and signifies also le manque, the want, the lack of. When le peu signifies une petite quantité, the participle agrees with the noun that follows it; when it means le manque, “the want of,” it is with le peu that the participle agrees, and is therefore always putin the masculine singular; as il a profité du peu de legons qu’il he has profited by the few lessons a regues he received le peu d’instruction qu’il a eu le the little instruction he had dis décourage courages him Read, translate, and write. Les personnes aimant tout le monde, n’aiment ordinairement personne. Les Maures descendant de leurs montagnes parcou- raient et pillaient l’Afrique. Les personnes aimantes ont plus de jouissances que les autres. Des aigles, entraînés par le 2uurant d’air, descendent en tournoyant au fond du gouffre. Tntourés de toutes parts, les Russes se crurent perdus, et furent forcés de se rendre. Les montagnes sont couvertes de troupeaux qui fournis- sent des laines fines recherchées de toutes les nations connues. L’ardeur de l’été y est toujours tempérée par des zéphirs rafrat- chissants. Chateaubriand et Mme de Staël ont enrichà notre littérature d’une foule d'ouvrages remarquables. Les meilleures harangues sont celles que le cœur a dictées. Si Dieu nous a dis- tingués des autres animaux, c'est surtout par le don de la parole. Dossuet a créé une langue que lui seul à parlée. Plus de soixante princes se sont succédé sur le trône de France. Ces deux corps de troupes se sont rencontrés et se sont battus. Voici les batailles qu’ils se sont livrées, L'imprimerie est une des inventions les plus utiles qu’il y ait jamais ex. Que de temps, que de réflexions n’a-t-il pas fallu pour connaître les besoins et les ressources de la nature! Les per- sonnes que vous avez entendues chanter, appartiennent à l’opéra. Ces arbres que j'ai vu planter, ont aujourd’hui plus de trente ans. Les bontés que vous m’avez fait sentir me donnent le droit de me yz 210 FRENCH GRAMMAR, servir d’un nom si tendre. Les généraux de 'empereur s'étaient fait battre sur les frontières. La chose était plus sérieuse que nous ne l’avions pensé d’abord. Le peu de vivres qu’on a consernés a suffi pour sauver la population de la ville Exercise on the Participles. Present Participle. (470 To £77.) Brutus saw his two sons expiring! by his order. Those brave soldiers, forgetting? the danger, rushed* on their enemies. That statue represents the queen holding? the sceptre in her hand. The loadstone® has surprising effects. A cooling® breeze calmed the burning heat of the ground. The raling? passion of Cæsar was ambition. Obedient children are loved by?® their parents. TI will give you a convincing? proof of the contrary. That young lady, in obliging her friends, has merited their esteem. Nobody can! be happy without practising virtue. Peter!! the Great built’? a | fortress on an island at the mouth'® of the Neva'* for protecting his conquests, and opening a new channel of commerce. The artist con- ceived the design' of placing the statue on a rock (instead of'®) a pedestal. I am surprised at his having obtained that situation. I attribute his success to his being the nephew of a nobleman. We, could!” see the horses rearing! (pawing'® the sand), and shaking® their manes?! with fury. I hear her crying® in her room. Isaw a man (hiding himself*) behind the door. I. found my servant sleeping?! under a large oak-tree. We heard the bursting’ of the shells, and the whistling? of the balls?” on® all sides. Do you perceive the sailors rowing® towards® the coast ? 1 expirer 2 oublier 3s’élancer “tenir 2 aimant © rafralchir 7 dominer © des 9 convaincre !0 ne pouvoir !! Pierre 12 Dbatir !3embouchure 14 Néva f. 15 des- sein m 18 au lieu de 17 pouvoir !8se cabrer 19 piaffer 20 secouer 2! crinière 22 pleurer 2 se cacher 2! endormir 2 explosion siffler # boulet m. 23 de 29 ramer 30 vers. Past Participle. (478 To 479.) Alms’ given without ostema- tion acquire? a new merit. A noble but confused thought® is a diamond covered with! dust. These broken® columns ornamented® majestic temples; these crumbled’ galleries indicated the publie squares. The two ladies appeared astonished to see me. The ambassador has arrived from Spain? this mcrning. Your mother is afflicted. Are your sisters very busy? France is bounded" (on the') scuth by the Mediterra- nean'* Sea and Spain. The high mountains of Switzerland! are always covered with!'* snow and ice. My sisters were surprised to see you at the queen’s ball’. The king Harold and his two brothers were killed at the battle of Hastings. The town of Moscow was taken!” by the French, and burnt'® by the Russians in* 1812. Were not the Rus- sians beaten? at the battle of the Alma? Yes; and they were also defeated® at Inkerman. 1 aumdnes f. pl. . 2 acquérir 3 pensée f. 4 de 5 briser Corner 7 écrouler © placef B Espagne 10 occuper !!borner 12au !3 Méditerranée !* Suisse f. 'Sde !ébalm. 7 prendre 18 braler !9 Russes Zen “battre défaire. : EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLES. 211 (280 To 283.) The faults he has committed? are pardonable. The house which I have bought is new®. Those ladies are gone; Ihave seen them this morning in their carriage. Do you recollect* all the towns which we have visited? Yes; Thave written their names in my pocket-book®. Tam very thankful” (for the®) services which you have rendered to me. Have you seen the ring® that I have given to my cousin for her birthday? Yes, I have seen it. I have sold my two horses and my carriage. Have you sold them dear? I have sold them for eighty pounds. Ihave received a letter from my son who is in India" My aunt has given a beautiful dress'? to my sister. Has she given her a watch? Not yet. Your daughters have made great progress (in French'®) this year. Have they read the History of the English Revolution, by Guizot ? Yes, they have read it. Have they finished their writing'*? Yes; but they have not learnt'® their lesson. What lessons have you learnt ? Why have you punished this little girl ? I have punished her because she deserved it. The promises which they (made to each other!) are not sincere. Your sister and mine met'? at’® my uncle’s house, but did not (speak to each other). We (wrote to each other”), but we did not (see each other”). Mme de Staél has rendered herself famous® by her writings. Gentlemen, have you washed®® your hands? Yes, sir; we have washed them in your bedroom. } fautesf. 2 commettre 3 neuf 4 partir 5 se rappeler 6 porte-feuille 7 reconnais- sant 8des 9 bague f. 10jour de naissance m. !! Inde 12 robef. !3dansle Francais 14 écriture 15 apprendre 16 se faire 17se rencontrer !8chez 19se parler 20s’¢crire 2! se voir 22célèbre 23 se laver. (28% To &91.) The rain which we have had has spoiled! all the Howers. What heat we have had lately! What advantages have resulted? (from it*)? Nobody knows* the patience which (has been necessary for me®) in order to succeed®in my undertaking. They have obtained” the success which you had foretold® they would obtain. Your servant’ has arrived at the hour which you had promised he would arrives The satisfaction which I had foreseen that his children would give him has been realised', Are your neighbours gone ? No; for I have heard" them talk'? this morning. The lady whom we have seen passing (on horseback!?) is a very good rider. What do you think of the song! which we have heard sung ? His two sisters are very good musicians ; have you heard them sing? The actress whom you have heard applauded this evening is very young. I will send'® you the music which he has forgotten to bring. I bave bought the two houses which he (has built”). The books I ordered'® from Paris cost me (a great deal) of money. The dress which she (has had made”) is too short. Your son asked me for some pens; I have given him some. Your gardener said that you wanted some rose-trees ; I have sent“! you a dozen (of them (en)). The result of his undertaking has not answered” the opinion which he had con- ceived of it. This house is much larger than I had thought®, That 1giter 2résulter 3en a-t-il 4 savoir 5 me falloir 6 réussir 7 obtenir 8 prédire 9 domestique !©réaliser !!entendre !2Zcauser 13a cheval !4écuyèref. 15 remance f. 16 envoyer 17 faire batir 18 faire venir 19 beaucoup faire faire 2 envoyer 2 répondre & 3 croire 212 FRENCII GRAMMAR. actress, such as you have seen her, is more than fifty years old. A flock of sheep was destroyed by fire. A great number of women and children have been massacred. The little? (the lack of) instruction my brother has had, makes him fall? into many” errors. (The few?) men he had brought” with him were killed at their posts. The slight* affection you have shown him has encouraged him, 2 sejraire 25 Le peu de 2 tomber 27 bien des 2% Le peu de ?9 amener 3 L£ peu de, SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 492 Adverbs (page 119) are usually placed after the verbs in the simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in the compound tenses; as il parle souvent de vous he often speaks of you je ne lai jamais vu I have never seen him Proper Use of Negative Expressions. 493 The two principal negations are nom and me, the latter completed by pas, point, &c. Non is used without a verb; as le courrier est-il arrivé ?—non ; je crains ses faveurs, et mon sa colère 494 Ne always precedes the verb or its auxiliary, and pas or point, &c., comes after it ; as je N’ose— je NE crois PAS — je N’ai POINT Cru 495 Besides pas and point, the negation ne is completed > © P by the words jamais, plus, rien, guère, personne, nul, aucun, nullement, aucunement, ni (173); as je ne chante plus I sing no more il ne fait rien he does nothing il ne vit personne he saw nobody DISTINCTION BETWEEN pas AND point. 496 Point is more exclusive than pas. The first denies absolutely, and signifies no¢ at all ; the second is less posi- SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 213 tive. So that point may be said of something permanent and habitual, and pas of something accidental ; as il ne travaille point he never works (at all) il ne travaille pas he does not work (now) 497 In an interrogative sentence, point is used when we doubt of the thing in question, and pas when we are certain of it; as ne vous l’ai-je point dit? (je croyais l’avoir dit) ne vous l’ai-je pas dit? (que cela arriverait) OMISSION OF pas AND point. 498 Pas and point, which usually follow ze, are omitted when there is in the proposition an expression bearing a negative sense ; such as jamais, guère, nul, nullement, aucun, rien, personne, ni repeated, ne.….que, meaning seulement ; and also before such expressions as de ma vie, âme qui vive, qui que ce soit, goutte, mot, &c. ; as elle ne sort jamais le soir she never goes out in the evening il ne sait ni lire nà écrire he can neither read nor write je ne sais que deux fables I only know two fables je ne le verrai de ma vie 1 shall never see him again je ne connais âme qui vive I do not know a single soul je n’y vois goutte I do not see at all 499 Pas and point are generally omitted, for the sake of elegance, with the verbs oser, pouvoir, cesser, and savoir used in the sense of pouvoir ; as je n’ose le faire I dare not do it je ne saurais vous le dire I cannot tell you Note.—Je n’ose pas, je ne puis pas, &c., would be more emphatic. 500 Pas and point are omitted after il y a and depuis que, if the verb is in a compound tense; as il y a six mois que je ne l’ai vu 1 have not seen him for six months depuis que je ne lui ai parlé since I spoke to him 501 But pas or point must be used when the verb is in a simple tense ; as il y a six mois que nous ne nous voyons pas depuis que je ne lui parle plus 214 FRENCII GRAMMAR. 502 Ne is used without pas or point, after the conjunc tion à moins que, de peur que, de crainte que, also after the verbs empêcher, prendre garde ;* as à moins que vous ne lui parliez unless you speak to him partons, de peur qu’il ne plenve let us go, for fear it should rain la pluie empêcha qu’on ne partit the rain prevented our setting off prenez garde qu’on ne vous voie take care that nobody sees you 503 Ne is used without pas or point, after plus, mieux, moins, meilleur, autre, autrement, and after the verbs craindre, avoir peur, trembler, appréhender, used affirma- tively ; as il écrit mieux qu’il ne parle he writes better than he speaks il parle autrement qu’il n’agit he speaks otherwise than he acts je crains qu’il ne vienne I fear he will come 504 But ne is omitted when the verb of the preceding period is accompanied by a negation ; as il ne parle pas autrement qu’il agit ;—je ne crains pas qu’il vienne 505 After craindre, appréhender, avoir peur, trembler, we use ze....pas, when the accomplishment of the action expressed by the subsequent verb is desired, and ne only when the accomplishment is not desired ; as je crains qu’il ne réussisse pas I fear that he will not succeed je crains qu’il ne réussisse I fear that he will succeed 506 The verbs douter, nier, contester, désespérer, discon- venir, are followed by ne only, when they are accompanied by a negation, or used interrogatively; as je ne doute pas que cela ne soit I do not doubt that it is so doutez-vous qu’il ne le ruine ? do you doubt that he will ruin him ? 507 But ne is omitted if the verbs douter, nier, &c., are affirmative, or if we speak of a thing quite certain ; as je nie, je doute que cela SOIT ; personne NE NIE qu’il y AIT un Dieu. * When prondie garde means “ to notice,” “to observe,” the indicative is used with . r me... point ; as, Prenez garde que l’auteur ne dit pas ce que vous pensez, Notice that the euthor does not say what you think. SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 215 508 In reply to a question, pas is frequently used without ne, the ne and the verb being understood ; as comment allez-vous ?—pas très-bien how are you ?—not very well 509 The use or the omission of pas and point aliers sometimes the sense of a sentence ; as je crains qu’il ne vienne I fear lest he should come je crains qu’il ne vienne pas I fear lest he should not come REMARKS ON SOME ADVERBS. Plus—davantage — more. 510 Plus and davantage must not be used indiserimi- nately : plus is followed by de or que; davantage is used alone, and at the end of a sentence; as il a plus de fortune que moi he has more fortune than I je suis plus heureux que lui I am happier than he vous avez beaucoup d’argent, you have much money, but he has mais il en a davantage more REMARK —Davantage may be followed by an object which belongs to a preceding word ; as à est content de vous, mais il l’est bien DAVANTAGE DE votre frère ; i.e. CON- TENT DE votre frère. Si, aussi — tant, autant. 511 In a comparison, aussi, autant, are used in sentences both affirmative and negative, and si, tant, only in negative phrases; as il est aussz riche que vous he is as rich as you il n’est pas si (or aussi) sot que lui he is not so silly as he j'ai autant de livres que lui 1 have as many books as he votre frère n’a pas tant (or:autant) your brother has mot so many de livres que moi books as I Si and aussi are used with adjectives and adverbs; si modeste, aussi éloquemment : tant and autant are applied to substantives and verbs; tant de gloire, autant estimé que chéri, or estimé autant que chéri. Plus tdt— sooner. Plutôt — rather. 512 Plus tôt, in two words, refers to time, and signifies plus vite, sooner ; plutôt, in one word, denotes preference and signifies rather ; as il est arrivé plus tôt que vous he has arrived sooner than you Plutôt mourir que de se rendre rather die than surrender 215 FRENCH GRAMMAR, Tout à coup—tout d’un coup. 513 Tout à coup signifies soudainement, suddenly ; tout d’un coup signifies tout en une fois, all at once ; as sa maison est tombée fout à coup his house fell down suddenly 1l devint pauvre fout d'un coup he became poor all at once Read, translate, and write. Les bienheureux jouiront toujours de la vue de Dieu. Le dogme de l’immortalité de l’âÂme s’est toujours maintenu sur la terre. Contre la médisance il n’est point de rempart. Titus ne passait aucun jour sans faire une bonne action. Je ne connais qui que ce soit dans la ville. Il y avait dix ans que je n’avais vu ma mère. Parlez plus bas, de peur qu’on ne vous entende. Cette langue est plus difficile que je ne le croyais. Paris est plus peuplé que St. Pétersbourg, mais Londres l’est encore bien davantage. La ville de Londres est beaucoup plus grande que celle de Paris, mais elle n’est pas aussi belle. Îtes-vous toujours aussi occupé que vous l’étiez autrefois? out à coup une noire tempête enveloppa le ciel et irrita toutes les ondes de la mer. Cet homme a fait sa fortune tout d’un coup. Nous vous attendions plus tôt, Plutôt souffrir que mourir, c’est la devise des hommes. Exercise on the Adverbs. (&92 To 501.) Never remind' any one? of the services you do? him. We! seldom repent® of talking little, but very often of talking (too much®). We always breakfast at eight o’clock. Have you ever! scen Windsor Castle? They certainly showed® a great deal of courage. Have you been to Scotland? No, never. Not far from Tours is the castle of Loches. He works no more. I have said nothing. The blind man doesnot see. Charles does not work as I should like ; but Alfred does not work at all. Everybody is laughing® ; have I not said some nonsense®? Why do younotcome? Did younot hear me? We never (get up'") before seven o'clock in winter. I do not know'? any one more polite than your father. He has eaten’ nothing since yesterday. He does'* no- thing but'® read from morning till evening. I have never'® seen (so many people'”). He does not say (a word’). I have only lost five francs. My brother has only two children. Has your mother only one servant? I dare not speak to him. He cannot bear? the least noise. You cannot® believe how much I suffer. I have not seen him since? I have been in France. He has not written to his family (for 1 rappeler & 2 personne 3 rendre 4 On 5 sercpentir Strop 7 jamais 8 montrer 9 rire 10 sottise 11 se lever 1% cornaitre 13 manger 14 ne faire !5 que 16 de ma vie 17 tant de monde 18 mot 19 supporter 20 ne savoir (condit. 556) depuis que SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 217 five years”). It is three months since he has spoken to me. Iam better, since I do not drink beer. (502 To 513.) I will not go unless you come with me. Hold* him by the hand (for fear®’) he should fall. TI shall prevent*® him from? going out to-morrow evening. (Take care*) that he does not see you. They? who speak otherwise than they think are despised”. Yon translate“ French better than you speak it“. I fear® your father wilt arrive before you. We tremble lest he should fall into® their hands. 1 do not fear that he will come. I fear he will not pay you. I do not deny**. that I have done it. I doubt whether® the fleet is gone“, Have you done? Not yet. Do you like that drawing? Not much. How is%” your father? Not very well, sir. We fear lest®® the enemy should come. We fear lest the enemy should not come. You have more money than I. He has many® friends, but you have! more. You have had meat enough, you shall have no“! more. The moon appears‘? as large*® as the sun, although she is not so large. Paris is not so populous as London. I have not so much success as he. He spoke so eloquently that (everybody**) shed! tears. Your brother came sooner than [ expected. A good Christian ought? to die rather than deny*® his faith. A terrific storm suddenly (came on“). We lost more than twelve thousand pounds all at once. 22 Jl y a cinq ans que Ztenir 24 de peur que 25 empécher 26 de 27 prendre garde 25 Ceux 29 mépriser 30traduire 3lle 32craindre que 33 entre 34 nier 35 que 36 partir 37 se porter 38 que 39 beaucoup de 40 en avoir 4! pas 4Zparaitre 43 grand 44 peuplé 4° tout le monde 46 verser 47 devoir 48 renier 49 survenir. SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. Remarks on some Prepositions. 514 The preposition a is used for to, at, or in before proper names of places, and the preposition en is used for to or in before names of countries and provinces; as je vais à Paris I am going to Paris il demeure a Londres he lives in London j'irai en France I shall go to France il est en Bourgogne he is in Burgundy (For the repetition of the Propositions, see No. 219, page 123.) T'0y USED BEFORE AN INFINITIVE. 515 When the Infinitive is the subject of the verb, fo is not expressed in French ; as to die for one’s country is glorious mourir pour sa patrie est glorieux L ’ 218 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 516 7o is expressed by de when it can be turned into of; as will you have the kindness to give voulez-vous avoir la bonté de lai (of giving) him this note ? donner cette lettre ? 517 To is expressed by pour when it denotes the end or purpose of the action, or can be rendered by in order to; as we must eat to live, and not live to il faut manger pour vivre, et non eat pas vivre pour manger 518 We have seen (No. 219) that the prepositions a, de, and en, are repeated before every word they govern. The other prepositions may also be repeated before each object, provided these objects are not synonymous ; as Annibal triompha de Rome par la force et par l’adresse Sardanapale passait sa vie dans la mollesse et l’oisiveté Avant — devant (before). 519 Avant refers to time, and denotes also rank ; devant has reference to place, and signifies also ir presence of; as avant la fin du mois _ before the end of the month votre frère est avant moi your brother is before me regardez devant vous look before you il a préché devant la cour he preached before the court Dans — en (in). 520 Dans is used with nouns taken in a determinata sense, that is, preceded by the article or by any deter- minative adjective. En is used with nouns taken in a vague and indeterminate sense, and is not generally to be followed by any of the above-mentioned determinative words ; it is also used before dates and personal pronouns; as With dans. elle est dans le jardin she is in the garden il est dans sa chambre ke is in his room son livre est dans ce tiroir his book is in that drawer SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 219 With en. ma mere est en France my mother is in France i! vit en chambre garnie he lives in a lodging en mil huit cent soixante in 1860 mon espoir est en vous my hope is in you 521 When speaking of time, dans denotes the epoch, and means “at the end of ;” en denotes the duration ; as il viendra dans un mois he will come in à month il a fait le voyage en un mois he performed the voyage in a month Dessus — dessous — dedans — dehors. 522 The adverbs dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, must not be mistaken for the prepositions sur, sous, dans, hors de. The adverbs are never followed by any object, whereas the prepositions are always so followed ; as votre chapeau est SUR (not DESSUS) la table mon livre est DANS (not DEDANS) le tiroir However, dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, are used as pre- positions when they are preceded by one of the prepositions à, de, par, or when we wish to express some opposition ; as ôtez cela DE DESSUS (or DE DESSOUS) la table tl n’est ni DESSUS ni DESSOUS la table NoTE.-— Dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, preceded by à, de, en, par, may also be used as adverbs ; as les enfants de cinq ans et AU-DESSOUS. Depuis — pendant — pour (for). ~ 523 Depuis denotes a point of time, pendant denotes the duration, and peur expresses the end ; as je ne l’ai pas vu depuis un an I have not seen him for a year il a voyagé pendant six mois he has travelled for siz months ils ont du pain pour trois jours they have bread for three days Près de — prêt à. 524 Près de denotes proximity of place or time, and prêt à signifies disposé à, “ to be ready 3” as il est près de mourir he is at the point of death je suis prét a partir I am ready to set off L 2 220 ; FRENCH GRAMMAR. Entre — parmi. 525 Entre rcfers to two objects only, and is also used with a noun in the plural, to express reciprocity: parmi is said of a collection of objects, and requires after it a sub- stantive in the plural, or a noun collective ; as entre voùs et moi, il n’y a rien de commun les Juifs ne se marient qu’entre eux il n’y a rien de solide parmi les hommes parmi la foule des courtisans Au travers —a travers. 526 Au travers is always followed by the preposition de, à travers is not; as il se fit jour au travers des ennemis à travers les rochers la peur les précipite. — RACINE. Quant à — quand. 527 Quant à, preposition, signifies à l'égard de, “as for ;” quand, adverb, signifies lorsque, “when ;” as quant à moi, je pars as for me, I go qwand viendrez-vous ? when will you come ? Voici — voilà. 528 Voici indicates the nearest place or object ; and voilà the most distant. — Voici refers to what follows; voilà to what precedes ; as | voici ma maison, et voilà la sienne voici les Alpes, et voilà les Pyrénées voici la cause de cet accident ; écoutez | soyez sage et laborieux, voila mon désir 3 Envers — vers (towards, to). $29 Envers is used when speaking of behaviour; vers when speaking of motion and time ; as il est charitable envers les pauvres comment s’est-il comporté envers vous ? l'armée s’avança vers la frontière Marseille fut fondée vers l’an 600 avant J.-C. SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. . 221 Chez. 530 Chez, which is so frequently used in French, has no literal equivalent in English, but can generally be expressed by at, to, in the house of, ut home, among ; as je suis chez moi le soir I am at home in the evening je l’ai rencontré chez vous I met him at your house il est chez un banquier he is at a banker’s allez chez mon père go lo my father's chez les Romains among the Romans NoTE.— When chez is united by a hyphen to a personal pronoun, it forms part of a compound noun ; as un chez-mos ** a home,” * a house of my own.” 530* OBservE.—The English preposition on, generally used before the word indicating the day of the week or the date of the month, is never expressed in French; as : 1 shall sce you on Sunday je vous verrai dimanche Read, translate, and write. Quand Charles ira-t-il a Florence? Dans un mois. Restera- t-il longtemps er Italie? Il y va pour apprendre la langue. Aurez-vous le temps de finir votre lettre avant le diner? Non, mais je la finirai après le thé. Qui était roi de France avant Napoléon III? Louis-Philippe, que j'ai vu passer devant ma porte dans un simple fiacre, à son arrivée en Angleterre. Les soldats, qui avaient marché pendant trois semaines, n’avaient rien mangé depuis près de deux jours. Il y a plus de morts parmi les fuyards que parmi les braves. L'homme est placé libre entre le vice et la vertu. La haine entre les grands se calme rarement. Nous aper- çûmes alors à travers le brouillard le corps et les vergues d’un grand vaisseau. Nous perçâmes au travers des bataillons ennemis. Enfants, ne soyez pas ingrats envers vos parents. L'Amérique fut découverte vers la fin du XV° siècle par Christophe Colomb. Je passerai chez vous ce soir. Quand votre père est-il chez lui ? Son fils travaille chez un architecte. La condition des comédiens était infâme chez les Romains, et honorable chez les Grecs. Quand ma sœur aura un chez-elle, j'irai la voir. Exercise on the Prepositions. Were you not in Paris at the moment of the revolution ? No; 1 was in Italy. We are going to Germany’. The king is at Richmond. His father is now in Italy, and he will go to Spain? next winter. To forgive is more noble than to revenge. Shall we have the pleasure of dicing with you next Tuesday? The ambassador was sent to congra- 1 Allemagne 2 Espagne 222 “FRENCH GRAMMAR. tulate the emperor. I shall be there before you. Put* that screen* before the fire. Do not (place yourself*) before me. I have“ to appear” be- fore the judges the third of November next. You will find that book in the library®. My family lives® in Burgundy. I learnt English in ten months, and 1 intend! to begin German in a fortnight. Can you go from Boulogne to Dover in two hours? We have not been to France for a year. Is not my purse upon the sofa? No, it is under it. Is not my carpet-bag under the table ? No, it is upon it. It is neither upon nor under the table. Take that box from under the bed. Your brother and I have walked for six hours. The garrison have provisions for six months. Is not Henry going to London? No; he is going to Scotland" for three months. I am ready to hear you. It is nearly eleven o’clock. I sat between the father and daughter. We perceived the prince among the crowd. The river winds" throngh the charming country that surrounds the town. The chamois bounds'® across the rocks with a wonderful swiftness. As for me, I ask nothing. This is my book, and that is yours. Our examination is on Friday next, and we resume!” our studies on the first of February. Children, fulfil'® your duties towards God, your parents, and your country’. Be grateful® to (towards) your benefactors, We marched towards the sea. Printing? was invented towards the middle of the 15th century. When will your father be at home? Shall you go to my sister’s this evening? It was the custom among the Gauls to plunge their new-born? children into cold water. S mettre 4 écran m. 5 se mettre 6 devoir 7 paraître Sbibliothèque 9 demcurer 10 Bourgogne MW avoir dessein 12 iter B Ecosse H s’asscoir _ 1° serpenter 16 bondir 7 reprendre !#remplir 19 patiie 20 reconnaissant 2! L’imprimerie 22 nouveau-né SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS. Of all the conjunctions, que is that which is the most often used for another; it is applied in several ways : — 531 Que is used to unite two verbs together, or the rela- tive members of a comparison; as je erois que I’ime est immortelle 1 believe the soul is immortal il est plus brave que prudent he is more brave than prudent 532 Que is used in the second part of a sentence to avoid the repetition of such conjunctions as si, quand, lorsque, guoique, puisque, comme, &c. ; as si vous sortez et que vous veniez if you go out and if you come to me voir see me guand on est riche et qu’on est when people are rich and when généreux they are generous SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIONS. a2 533 Que is used in the middle of a sentence for avant que, après que, afin que, pour que, à moins que, de peur que, depuis que, and many other conjunctions ; as je ne partirai point que tout ne I shall not set out before every soit prêt thing ts ready approchez, que je vous parle come near, that I may speak to you ne mangez pas que vous n’ayez do not cat unless you are hungry faim il y a deux ans que je ne l’ai vu it is two years since I have seen him 534 Que is used at the beginning of a sentence for pour- quoi, “why 3” and also for comme, “combien, “how,” ‘how much,” “how many ;” as que ne travaillez-vous ? why do you not work 2 que votre mère est bonne ! how kind your mother is! que de peine jai eue pour réussir how much trouble I have had to dans mon projet ! succeed in my project ! que de malheurs il a éprouvés dans how many misfortunes he has êx- sa vie ! perienced in his life ! Et — ni. 535 The conjunction et unites words or members of a sentence having an affirmative sense; mi is used when the sense 1s negative ; as l’oisiveté étouffe les talents et engendre les vices vous ne devez ri le-dire «à ’écrire However, et may unite two negative propositions when they are independent of one another; as il n’est pas riche et il n’en est pas moins heureux English and French Conjunctions compared. 536 Either... or is expressed in Bro by ou toposes though the first ou is often left out ; either Rome or Carthage ou Rome ou Carthage it is either you or he c’est vous ou lui 537 But before nouns either is often expressed by soit repeated ; as either pride or timidity soit orgueil, soit timidité 224 FRENCH GRAMMAR, 538 Neither. .. nor is expressed in French by ni repeated, with ne before the verb; as she is neither rich nor pretty elle n'est ni riche ni beile he can neither see nor speak il ne peut nt voir ni parler 539 Nor... either is expressed in French by ni... non plus; as I have not dined—nor 1 either je n’ai pas diné—ni moi non plus 540 whether is gencrally rendered by si, but in a sen- tence of two verbs it is sometimes expressed by soit que before the first, and ou que before the second, both being in the subjunctive ; as whether he gains or loses soit qu’il gagne ou qu’il perde 541 Soit is sometimes understood ; as qu’il vienne ou non whether he comes or not Read, translate, and write, Je doute qu’on puisse être heureux lorsqu'on a quelque faute à se reprocher. À quoi vous servira d’avoir de l'esprit, si vous ne l’employez pas, et que vous ne vous appliquiez pas? Quand on ne clierche qu’à faire du bien aux hommes, et qu'on n’offense point le ciel, on ne craint rien ni pendant la vie,ni à la mort. Ne partez pas que je ne vous le dise. Allons, venez tous, que je vous distribue mes ordres. Que le monde est grand! qu’il est magni- fique! Que de beaux jours n’ont pas de beaux soirs! Que lu religion est terrible et puissante! La fortune, soit bonne ou mau- vaise, soit passagère ou constante, ne peut rien sur l’âme du sage. Soit que vous le fassiez ou que vous ne le fassiez pas, vous serez blâmé, Que vous écriviez ou non, il ne viendra pas. Exercise on tho Conjunctions. I think you will see him to-morrow. Do you wish! me to recite? that tragedy ? The south of France is much warmer than the north. If you like to read, and if you wish for books, I will send you some? As you have nothing to do, and as 1 am very busy*, you cught® to help me. Since he is your friend and you know his kindness, why do you not ask him that favour? When (young people®) are inclined’ to study®, and when they will® study, they make a rapid progress. Io ! désirer Zréciter 3en “occupé ° devoir jeunes gens 7 avoir des dispositions 8 étude 9 vouloir }° des progrès OBSERVATIONS ON SOME INTERJECTIONS. 225 not begin unless (everybody) is arrived. We shall not (set out?) be- fore it is light'®, It is'* along time since I have been (to their house). Do not make any'® noise, for fear they should hear us. Why do you not go with them? Why do you not speak, since you know it? How fortunate!” you are! How many persons die victims of their own! follies! It is either you or your brother. Either through weakness or kindness, he has granted it. She is neither an Italian nor a German. I have never been to Spain. Nor we either. Whether he speaks or writes, he is always interesting. Whether you write or not, he will not come. 1 tout le monde 12 partir 1 jour “Ilya !lPchez eux !$de V heureux 8 propre. Notg.— The conjunctions which govern the verb in the subjunctive mood are given at page 125. re pe OBSERVATIONS ON SOME INTERJECTIONS. 542 Ah! Ha! — Ho! Oh! —O! —En! Tel! (Sce page 126.) Aan! expresses joy or gricf: An! quel bonheur ! An! que je souffre ! Ha! cxpresses surprise: ITA! vous voila! Ha! Ha! je n’en savais rien. Ho! serves to call, and expresses surprise: Ho! venez ici. Ilo! que faites-vous là ? is used for the other exclamations: Om! quel bon- o! is used in an address: O mon fils! aimez Dieu. En! expresses grief: En! qui n'a pas pleuré quelque perte cruelle ? Hé1 is used to call, to warn: HE! venez done. HE! que dites-vous ? L3 236 FRENCH GRAMMAR, APPENDIX. OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS. WE have already seen (page 21) that practice and dic- tionaries are, as it were, the only means to determine the gender of nouns of inanimate objects. A few general observations are, however, here given, which will be found of great assistance to the student. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 543 Names of towns are generally masculine, except those ending in e or es, which are generally feminine ; as Masculine Feminine Paris Strasbourg Marseille Nantes Lyon Berlin Rome Naples Bordeaux Madrid, &e. Vienne - Athènes, &c. 544 The names of metals, minerals, and colours Arc masculine ; as or cuivre bleu argent. airain rouge fer platine jaune, &c. 545 The names of days, months, and seasons are mascu- line ; as lundi avril été jeudi mai automne samedi, &c. juin, &e. hiver, &e. 546 The names of trees and shrubs arc masculine ; as chène peuplier myrte hêtre pommier grenadier pin saule rosier, &c Excopt : ébène, épine, aubépine, ronce, vigne, yeuse, OF TIE GENDER OF NOUNS. 227 547 Adjectives, verbs, and prepositions, used substan- tively, are masculine; as l’utile le boire le pour l’agréable le manger le contre, &c. 548 All nouns designating a man are masculine, and those designating a woman are feminine ; as Masculine Feminine père roi mère reine fils due fille duchesse frère berger sœur bergère, &c. Except : une sentinelle, une vedette. 549 All nouns designating the male of an animal are masculine, and those designating the female are feminine ; as Masculine Feminine bœuf chien vache chienne cheval chat jument chatte âne lion anesse lionne, &c. 550 Sometimes the same word is used for the male or female, in which case the word is either masculine or femi- nine, according to its termination ; as Always masculine Always feminine buffle cigne girafe cigogne castor geal hyène perdrix chameau hibou souris pie éléphant saumon, &e. tortue sole, &ec. ReMARK.— When, in speaking of these animals, we wish to distinguish their sex, we are obliged to designate it by adding the word male or femelle ; as le méle de la girgfe, la femelle du chameau ; or, la girafe mâle, le chameau femelle. 551 Nouns having the following terminations are femi- nine; viz.: ADE : ambassade, brigade, promenade, &c. ANCE, ENCE : Constance, diligence, &c. ; except silence ESSE : adresse, caresse, finesse, vitesse, &c. EUR : Chaleur, douceur, &c. ; except honneur, bonheur 18E : bêtise, franchise, gourmandise, &c. ION : ambition, attention, condition, &c. RIE : barbarie, causerie, furie, vanterie, &c. TÉ : bonté, beauté, facilité, nécessité, &e, UDE : étude, servitude, solitude, &c. URE: brûlure, culture, fracture, &e. 228 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 552 All nouns ending in one of the cleven letters b, ¢, d, a hk Lp, q Yÿ, 7, are masculine, without exception; as plomb, banc, bord, rang, almanach, carrick, bal, camp, coq, jury, nez, &c. 553 Substantives of both Genders WHICH OFFER SOME DIFFICULTY. Aigle is feminine when it signifies a standard, a constellation, or the hen eagle : l’uigle ROMAINE ; l’aigle est REMPLIE de tendresse pour ses petits. In all other cases it is masculine : l’uigle est FIER el COURA- GEUX. Amour, used in the singular number, is invariably masculine: un VIOLENT amour. When used in the plural number, in the sense of love between two persons, it is of both genders, but oftener feminine : de FOLLES amours. Couple, denoting only the number deur (two), is feminine : UNE couple d’œufs ; UNE couple de poulets. It is masculine when it signifies two persons united by marriage, by bonds of affection, or unity of pur- pose : un HEUREUX couple, UN couple d’amis ; UN couple de fripons. Délice is masculine for the singular, and feminine for the plural: c'est un GRAND délice ; ce sont mes plus CHERES délices. But when un de precedes délices, it is invariably masculine : un de mes plus GRANDS délices. Enfant, referring to a boy, is masculine : c’est UN BEL enfunt; it is feminine when it refers to a girl : ¢’est UNE BELLE enfunt. In the plural it is always masculine. Foudre, thunderbolt, is always feminine : LA foudre est TOMBEE. It is masculine in poetry and in that style which is called the sublime : être frappé DU foudre VENGEUR. Speaking figuratively of a renowned warrior or a great orator, it is also masculine : c’est UN foudre de guerre ; UN foudre d’éloquence. Gens requires in the feminine the adjectives which precede it, and in the masculine those which follow it: les VIEILLES gens sont SoUP- ÇONNEUX ; TOUTES les MÉCHANTES gens. But fous, m., must be used: 1° When no other adjective precedes gens: Tous les gens d’esprit. 2° When gens is preceded by an adjective of both genders, such as honnête, brave, &c.: Tous les honnêtes gens. 3° When gens is followed by the preposition de and a substantive denoting any profession; de VRAIS gens de let'res; CERTAINS gens d'affaires. Hymne, church song or canticle, is feminine : on a chanté de BELLES hymnes à l’église. It is masculine in other cases: ur hymne GUERRIER ; des hymnes NATIONAUX, Jujube is feminine when it means the fruit so called ; it is mascu- line when meaning the paste made of the fruit. DISTINCTION IN USE OF WORDS IN FRENCH. 229 Œuvre is generally feminine ; it is masculine when it means a work in eievated style, as un œuvre de génie, or the works of a musician or engraver. Orge is feminine, except when coupled with the words mondé, perlé. Orgue is masculine fo~ the singular, and feminine for the plural: un BEL orque; de BELLES orques. But we say, UN des plus BEAUX orgues, to avoid the meeting of the two genders. Période, signifying the Lighest pitch, summit, is masculine : LE plus HAUT période de gloire. In all other cases it is feminine : LA période solaire ; UNE période OBSCURE et EMBARRASSEE. Quelque chose is masculine when it sigmfies une close : quelque chose de MEKVEILLEUX. It is feminine when it means quelle que soit la chose : quelque chose qu’il ait DITE, on ne l’a pas cru. Réglisse is feminine when it means the plant; it is masculine when it means the juice extracted from the plant. Distinction in French between Words WHICH ARE EXPRESSED IN THE SAME MANNER IN ENGLISH. An — Année — year. 554 The word yeo~ is cxpressed by anmée when it is considered as a duration of twelve months ; it is generally rendered by an when we mean only to express one or more units of a twelvemonth, and is generally joined to a numeral adjective ; as il y a deux ans qu’il est mort it is two years since he died il va a Paris tous les ans he goes two Paris every year cette année a été pluvieuse this year has been rainy la dixième année de son règne the tenth year of his reign Jour — Journée — day. Matin — Matinée — morning. Soir — Soirée — evening. 555 The word day is expressed by jour; morning by matin, and evening by soir, when we speak of any part of them ; they are exprese-d by journée, matinée, and soirée, when we express the whole duration ; as il va a Londres tous les jours he goes to London every day la journée a été fort belle the day has been beautiful 280 FRENCH GRAMMAR. je me baigne tous les matins I bathe every morning il a plu toute la matinée it rained all the morning venez demain au soir come to-morrow evening il a passé la soirée avec nous he spent the evening with us Nore.—To-night is rendered in French by ce soir, and last night by hier au soir ; as, Come ?o-night, venez ce soir ; 1 saw him last night, je Iai vu hier au soir. Connaître — Savoir — {0 know, 556 The verb fo know is always expressed by connaître when it signifies fo be acquainted with ; and most commonly by savoir in all other circumstances ; as connaissez-vous ce monsieur ? do you know that gentleman ? savez-vous votre leçon ? do you know your lesson ? NoTE.— Savoir is sometimes used in familiar language in the sense of nof fo be able I cannot, but only in the conditional ; as je ne saurais vous le dire I cannot tell you vous ne sauriez croire you cannot belicve Amener— Apporter — (o bring. 557 The verb to bring is expressed in French by amener when it means to lead, to drive, to conduct; and by apporter when it means to carry; as amenez votre fils avec vous bring your son with you amenez la voiture bring the carriage apportez-moi mes livres bring me my books Mener — Porter — fo carry. 558 The verb mener is used in French in the sense of to lead, to drive, to conduct, to take (without carrying); and porter in the sense of to carry ; as menez mon cheval à l’écurie take my horse to the stable où a-t-il porté mes bottes? where has he carried my boots ? Marcher— Se promener — fo walk. 559 The verb to walk is expressed in French by marcher when we walk for business, and by se promener when we walk for pleasure ; as j'ai marché beaucoup ce matin I walked much this morning la reine s’est promenée dans le the queen has been walking in the parc ce matin park this morning DISTINCTION IN USE OF WORDS IN FRENCH. 231 560 70 walk is also rendered by aller à pied, venir à pied ; as Comment irons-nous au lac? IRoNs-nous A PIED ou en voiture?— Shall we walk or shall we drive ? 5681 Nore.—It must be observed that se promener does not mean properly fo walk, but to take à diversion either by walking, or riding, or driving, or in a boat, &c. ; as se pro- mener a cheval, en voiture, en bateau, &c., all expressions which cannot be translated by fo waik. “To take a walk” is faire une promenade, and “ to take a drive ” is faire une promenade en voiture. Warier — Épouser — Se marier — to marry. 562 Marier means “to give away in marriage,” and épouser “to take any one in marriage.” Se marier merely implies that one enters the matrimonial state, without men- tioning the person that one takes; as ma tante a marié son fils my aunt has married her son elle a épousé un Anglais she married an Englishman quand se marie-t-il ? when is he to be married 2 Neuf — Nouveau — new. 563 The word new is most commonly expressed by neuf, m., neuve, f., when we speak of something which has been recently made, or has not been used since it has been made ; and by nouveau, m, nouvelle, f., when we speak of something of a new kind, a new shape, a new fashion, or different from another used before ; as she has a new dress elle a une robe neuve (newly made). elle a une nouvelle robe (another dress). Pays — Campagne — Patrie — country. 564 Pays means “country” in general; campagne “fields,” and is used in opposition to the town ; patrie, “native country ;” as la France est un beau pays France is a fine country en Angleterre, la campugne cst in England, the country is beaus magnifique tiful ma mère est à la campagne my mother is in the country combattre pour sa patrie to fight for one’s country A la campagne — En campagne. 565 A la campagne means “in the country 3” as je vais a la campagne I am going into the country 232 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Etre en campagne signifies “to be away from home,” “ to be stirring ;” or “to be in the field,” when speaking of troops; as mon père est en campagne my futher is away from kome l’armée est en campagne the army is in the field A la ville — En ville. 566 A la ville, “in town,” “to town,” signifies that the person is not in the country ; as ma mère est à la ville my mother is in town En ville signifies that the person is out or not at home as ma sœur est en ville my sister is not at home Par terre A terre. 567 Par terre refers to things on the ground, and à terre to things above the ground ; thus un arbre tombe par terre les fruits de l’arbre tombent à terre Temps — Fois — time. 568 Time is rendered by temps when it means part of duration ; and by fois when it signifies succession, repeti- tion, or quantity of things, generally with the help of a numeral ; as time passes quickly le temps passe vite it is the first time c'est la première fois three times a week trois fois par semaine Avoir l’air. 569 If the adjective which follows air refers to that noun rather than to the person, this adjective must be put in the masculine ; as cette femme a lair bon ; l’air spirituel But if the adjective refers to the person rather than to the word air, this adjective takes the gender and number of the person; as elle a Yair toute troublée ils ont l’air füchés de partir DISTINCTION IN USE OF WORDS IN FRENCIL 233 In speaking of things, the word air must not be imme- diately followed by an adjective; thus we cannot say: cette viande a l’air frais ; but we say : cette viande a l’air d’être freiche ; cette pomme a l'air d'être cuite, Dormir — Coucher — fc sleep. The verb to sleep is expressed in French by dormu, when it means éo rest, to be asleep ; and by coucher when it means co lie down or spend the night ; as avez-vous bier dormi ? did you sleep well ? ils couchent sous la même tente they sleep under the same tent Read, translate, and write. Mon père reviendra des Indes dans trois ans. Nous allons en France tous les ans. Sa femme a été malade toute l’année. Nous avons eu une très-bonne année. Il a plu toute la journée. Les jours sont plus longs en été qu’en hiver. Il y a huit Jours que je ne l’ai vu. Nos amis sont partis à six heures du matin. Quelle belle matinée! Il vient me voir tous les matins. Les matinées sont froides. tes-vous invité à la soirée de mon oncle? Oui, mais je ne pourrai y aller, car je pars demain au soir. Je travaille tous les soirs jusqu’à onze heures. Connaissez-vous quelqu’un dans cette ville? Non; mais je sais où aller. Savez-vous si le convoi de Paris est arrivé? Non, je ne saurais vous le dire. Amènerez-vous votre cheval? Non, mais je vous amènerai tous mes enfants. Apportez du charbon, et vous porterez ensuite ces lettres à la poste. Mon père nous mènera au spectacle ce soir. Irez-vous à pied ou en voiture? Je crois que nous trons en voiture, parce que nous avons déjà beaucoup marché aujourd'hui. Nous nous sommes promenés toute la matinée dans la forêt. Vou- lez-vous venir faire une promenade en bateau? J'aime mieux aller me promener à cheval. Le prince de Galles à épousé une princesse danoise. La reine d’Angleterre a marié sa fille aînée au prince Frédéric de Prusse. lls se sont mariés la semaine dernière. Qui les a mariés? L’évêque d’Oxford. Avez-vous vu ma nou- velle maison ? Non, pas encore ; est-ce une maison neuve ? Oui, elle n’a jamais été habitée. La Suisse est un pays très-mon- tagneux, la campagne y est fort belle. Votre patrie, c'est le ciel. 11 est glorieux de mourir pour sa pafrie. Nous passons ordinaire- ment quatre ou cinq mois a la campagne, et le reste de l’année à la ville. Madame votre mère est-elle chez elle? Non, monsieur, elle est en ville. Ne perdez pas votre temps. Je l’ai vue hier 234 FRENCH GRAMMAR. pour la première fois. Chaque fois qu'il vient il m'apporte quel- que chose. Nous avons couché à l’hôtel du Louvre. Avez-vous bien dormi? Je dors toujours bien quand je suis fatigué. Mon frère et moi nous couchons dans la même chambre. Exercise on the preceding Idioms. How many years have you been in England? It will be! eighteen years next spring. Do you go to France every year? J sometimes go twice a? year. Shall you go next year? No; but I shall go in two years. We take a walk every morning in the gardens of the Crystal Palace. I think (it will be?) a fine morning. Where shall you spend’ the day to-morrow? I shall spend the morning with my mother, and the evening with my friends. How many days are there® in a year? There are 365 days. Will you come with us to-night? No; I shall not be able to® go, because I am engaged for’ an evening party. Were you not at the opera last night? No; I wasthere the night before last. Do you know what piece they will play this evening? No; I do not. Do you know the actress who played last night? Yes, I do; she is an Italian. Shall you bring your sister with you ? No, she is not well ; but I will bring my two cousins. Do not forget to bring your opera- glass’. Bring also a good cloak, because it will be® very cold. Shall I take your bonnet to the bedroom ? No ; take it to the dressing-room. Will you take these two ladies to the drawing-room ? Shall you take a walk in the park this morning? No, I shall not, because I have to walk a great deal to-day on business’. We walked the whole day without rest and without food. Shall we ride or shall we walk? I think the ladies would prefer driving, Come early!!, and we will go and take a drive in the country. The King of Italy married his daughter to Prince Napoleon. Who married them ? was it not the bishop? Yes, it was. When is your sister to be married? Next month. She will marry a captain in the navy’. Have you not a new servant ? Yes, I have, and I bought him a new coat and a new hat. England and France are two fine countries. Do you like the country? Yes; I prefer the country to the town. Your country will never forget your services. Docs your father dine at home to-day? No; he dines out. How often does he go'® to town? Three or four times a weck. He would be a thousand times happier if he were alone. Time does not belong! to us. Time flies and never returns. Where did you sleep last night? I slept at my grandfather’s. Do you sleep well at night ? No; I sleep very little. If you occupy?’ that room you will never be able to sleep, on account'® of the noise. !Ilyaura Zpar Snousaurons ‘passer 5 y a-t-il 5 je ne pourrai pas y 7 invité à Slorgnette 9ilfera !°pour affaires 1! de bonne heure !# capitaine de vaisseau \3 Va-t-il souvent !“ appartenir !S coucher !6 à cause MODÈLE D’ANALYSE GRAMMATICALE. 235 Modèle d'Analyse Grammaticale. L'analyse grammaticale est la décomposition d’une phrase et l'examen partiel de tous les mots qui la composent. Elle en indique la nature, l’espèce, les variations de genre, de nombre, de mode, de temps et de personne, ct enfin les rapports divers qui existent entre eux. On verra dans la phrase suivante la manière de procéder dans cette ana- lyse :— : Le fleuve Bétis coule dans un pays fertile et sous un ciel doux qui est toujours serein. —FÉNELON. LE art, simple, mase. sing, détermine fleuve FLEUVE subs. com. masc. sing, sujet du verbe coule BÉTIS nom propre de fleuve COULE verbe intransitif à l’ind. prés., 3° pers. du sing, 1° con- jug. Temps primitifs: couler, coulant, coulé, je coule, je coulai DANS préposition simple, qui établit un rapport entre le verbe couler et le nom pays UN art. indéf. masc. sing, détermine pays PAYS subs. com. mase. sing, complément de la prép. dans. FERTILE adj. qualificatif, mase. sing, qualifie pays ET conjonction, qui unit les deux propositions SOUS préposition simple UN déjà analysé CIEL subs., com. masc. sing, complément de la prep. sous DOUX adj. qualificatif, masc. sing, qualifie ciel QUI pron. relatif, sujet du verbe est, et qui rappelle l’idée de ciel EST verbe subs. irrég. au prés. de l’ind, 3° pers. du sing. s’accordant avec son sujet ciel représenté par qu. Temps primitifs : être, étant, été, je suis, je fus TOUJOURS | adverbe simple SEREIN adj. qualificatif, mase. sing., qualifie ciel — œ œ «4, à ov © 10 A SERIES CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS CONTAINING QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. INTENDED FOR VIVA VOCE PRACTICE, AND TO BE REPEATLD, SOMETIMES IN FRENCH AND SOMETIMES IN ENGLISH are Locon. A queile heure vous levez- vous en été ? Je me lève à sept heures Avez-vous déjeuné ? Pas encore ; je vais déjeuner Jean, où est mon habit ? Il est dans votre chambre L’avez-vous brossé ? Oui, monsieur, et le gilet aussi Où avez-vous mis mon col? T1 est dans la boîte Ou allez-vous ? Je vais à l’école Avez-vous vos livres ? Mon frère les a pris Quels livres avez-vous ? J’ai César, Virgile et Homère 'Traduisez-vous déjà le grec ? Je ne fais que de commencer Aimez-vous le latin? Oui; mais j'aime mieux le grec At what o'clock do you get up in summer? I get up at seven o'clock Have you breakfasted 2 Not yet; I am going to breakfast John, where is my cout ? It is in your room Have you brushed it 2 Yes, sir, and the waistcoat also Where have you put my collar 2 It is in the box Where are you going ? 1 am going to school Have you your books ? My brother has taken them What books have you ? 1 have Cesar, Virgil, and Homer Do you already translate Greek? 1 have only just commenced | Do you like Latin? Yes ; but I like Greek best CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. 237 2° Leçon. Où est votre maître ? Il est dans le jardin Que fait-il ? Il taille quelques arbres Pourquoi n’y allez-vous pas aussi ? Parce que je n’ai pas fini mon thème 4 Aurez-vous un congé demain, s’il fait beau ? Je ne sais pas Quel jour sortez-vous ? Le premier jeudi du mois Mes bottes sont-elles cirées ? Oui, monsieur ; les voilà Avez-vous vu ma canne ? Elle est dans le vestibule 8 Quand reviendrez-vous ? Je reviendrai ce soir Vous attendrai-je pour diner? Non, ne m’attendez pas Ou dinerez-vous ? Je dinerai au restaurant Ne ce s er bei © eo Where is your master ? He is in the garden What is he doing ? He is pruning some trees Why do you not go there too ? Because I have not finished ny exercise : Shall you have a holiday to- morrow if it is fine ? I do not know What day do you go out ? The first Thursday in the month Are my boots cleaned ? Yes, sir; there they are Have you seen my stick? It is in the hall When will you return ? I shall return this evening Shall I wait dinner for you? No, do not wait for me Where will you dine ? 1 shall dine at the restaurant 3° Leçon. Avez-vous été en Suisse ? J’y ai demeuré six ans Quelle est la plus haute mon- tagne des Alpes? C’est le Mont-Blanc Pourquoi l’appelle-t-on ainsi ? Parce qu’ilesttoujours couvert de neige A vez-vous été sur le sommet ? Non ; je n’ai jamais essayé Faut-il longtemps pour y mon- ter ? Il faut deux jours Quelle en est la hauteur? Il s’élève à 4,800 mètres au- dessus du niveau de la mer 7 Qui a découvert l’Amérique ? Christophe Colomb 8 Savez-vous où naquit ce grand navigateur? ; Il naquit à Gènes, en 1441 — to co ma Ov >» Have you been to Switzerland ? 1 lived there six years Which is the highest mountain of the Alps ? Mont-Blanc Why is it so called ? Because it is always covered with snow Huve you been on the top ? No ; I have never tried Does it take long to ascend it? It takes two days What is its height 2 It rises 4,800 metres above the level of ihe sea Who discovered America ? Christopher Columbus Do you know where that great na- vigator was born ? He was born at Genoa in 144) 238 © 11 12 — tv œ — Ov [<2] «I œ © 1 — 1 ro Savez-vous la géographie ? Je l’apprends tous les jours La trouvez-vous difficile ? Non, je la trouve très-facile Parle-t-on français en Suisse ? Oui, dans plusieurs cantons Quelle langue parle-t-on ail- leurs ? L’allemand et l'italien FRENCII GRAMMAR. Do you understand geography ? 1 learn it every day Do you think it difficult? No, I think it is very easy Do they speak French in Switzer- land ? Yes, in several districts What language do they speak in other parts ? German and Italian &° Leçon. Quand Napoléon ITI est-il né? 11 est né à Paris, en 1808 Ne fut-il pas fait prisonnier à Boulogne en 1840 ? Si, et il passa six ans en prison à Ham Quand fut-il élu empereur ? Il fut élu par le peuple, le 2 décembre 1852 Qui a-t-il épousé ? La comtesse Eugénie de Mon- tijo de Téba De quelle nation est-elle ? Elle est espagnole L’avez-vous jamais vue ? Oui ; elle est très-belle Ont-ils des enfants ? Ils ont un fils, qui est né en 1856 Comment s’appelle-t-il ? On l’appelle le prince Im- périal Où demeure Napoléon III ? Ordinairement aux Tuileries Quelle est la population de Paris? Elle est de plus d’un million Sur quel fleuve est situé Paris? Sur la Seine, qui le divise en deux Dans quelle mer se jette la Seine ? Dans l’Océan, au port du Havre When was Napoleon III. born? He was born in Paris, in 1808 Was he not taken prisoner at Boulogne in 1840 2 Yes, and he spent siz years in pri- sor at Ham When was he elected emperor? He was elected by the people on the 2nd December, 1852 Whom did he marry 2? The Countess Eugénie de Montijo, de Téba Of what nation is she ? She is a Spaniard Have you ever seen her ? Yes; she is very handsome Have they any children ? They have a son, who was born in 1856 What is his name 2 He is called the Prince Imperial Where does Napoleon III. live ? Generally at the Tuileries What is the population of Paris? It is more than a million On what river is Paris situated 2 On the Seine, which divides it tn two Into what sea does the river Seine Jall? Into the ccean, at the port of Havre — co ou œ sv ® © < — no e Oo +» œ - CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. 239 5° Leçon. Apprenez-vous le français ? Non ; mais je vais l’apprendre Quand le commencerez-vous? Je le commencerai très-pro- bablement le mois prochain L’avez-vous déjà commencé ? Je l’ai commencé le mois der- nier, avec mon frère Le trouvez-vous difficile ? Oui ; mais je l’aime beaucoup Combien de leçons par se- maine prenez-vous? J’en prends deux Qui vous enseigne le français? C’est un professeur de Paris Avez-vous une grammaire ? J'en ai acheté une hier Avez-vous deslivres français ? J'ai toutes les œuvres de La- martine et de Victor Hugo Parlez-vous déjà français ? Je commence à parler un peu Qui parle français avec vous? Mon maître, et aussi ma mère Madame votre mère estelle française ? Non; mais elle a habité Paris six ans Aimeriez-vous aller à Paris? J'espère y aller l’été prochain Do you learn French ? No; but I am going to learn it When will you begin it? I shall very probably begin it next month Have you already begun it? I began it last month, with my brother Do you think it difficult? Yes; but I like it very much How many lessons a week do you take? 1 take two Who teaches you French 2 A professor from Paris Have you a grammar 2 I bought one yesterday Have you any French books? 1 have all the works of Lamartine and Victor Hugo Do you already speak French ? 1 begin to speak a little Who speaks Irench with you? My master, and also my mother Is your mother French ? No; but she lived in Paris for six years Should you like to go to Paris ? 1 hope to go there next summer 6° Leçon. Quand serons-nous a Paris? Nous y arriverons avant midi Sommes-nous arrivés ? Nous avons encore une demi- heure L'hôtel est-il loin de la gare ? Il y a dix minutes de marche À quelle heure dinerons-nous ? Le diner est à six heures Dinons-nous à table-d'hôte ? Comme vous voudrez Quel est le prix du diner? Je crois que c’est six ou sept francs par tête Garçon, où est ma chambre ? Je vais vous y conduire When shall we be in Paris? We shall arrive there before twelve Have we arrived ? We have half an hour more Is the hotel far from the terminus ? It is ten minutes’ walk At what o’clock shall we dine? The dinner is at siz Do we dine at table-d’hôte ? As you like What is the price of the dinner ? I think it is six or seven francs a head Waiter, where ts my room ? I will take you t it 240 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 8 A quel étage est-elle ? Elle est au troisième étage 9 Voulez-vous monter ma malle et mon carton à chapeau ? Oui, monsieur, je vais les monter dans un instant 10 Les fenêtres de ma chambre donnent-elles sur la rue ? Oui, monsieur, et vous avez une vue magnifique 11 Quel est ce jardin en face? C’est le jardin des Tuileries 12 Est-il ouvert au public ? Oui, monsieur, tout le monde peut y aller On what floor 1s it? It is on the third floor Will you carry up my trunk and hat-box ? Yes, sir, I will take them up in a moment Do the windows of my room open on the street ? Yes, sir, and you have a magnifi- cent view What garden is that opposite ? The garden of the Tuileries Is it open to the public? Yes, sir, everybody may go there 7¢ Legon. be A quelle heure se lève-t-on ? Il faut se lever de bonne heure Que verrons-nous demain ? Nous tâcherons de voir quel- ques monuments Quels sont les plus remar- quables ? Le Louvre et les Tuileries N’y a-t-il pas le Palais Royal ? Oui, et bien d’autres encore Quel est ce beau dôme que nous voyons là-bas ? C’est le dôme des Invalides N'est-ce pas aux Invalides que sont les vieux soldats ? Qui; c’est à Louis XIV que nous le devons Avez-vous vu l’église de la Madeleine ? Non, pas encore ; mais j'espère la voir aujourd’hui Voyez-vous ce bel édifice à colonnes? Oui; je devine que c’est l’é- glise 9 Quelle est cette longue rue devant nous? C’est le boulevard des Italiens Que de monde assis sur les trottoirs ! Ce sont des gens qui prennent leur tasse de café no œ Lu or a Lei œ — © At what o’clock shall we get up ? We must rise early What shall we sce to-morrow ? We will try to see some of the pub- lic buildings Which are the most remarkable ? The Louvre and the Tuileries Is there not the Palais Royal? Yes, and many more What fine dome is that we see yonder ? The dome of the Invalides Are not the old soldiers at the Inva- lides ? Yes; and we owe its foundation to Louis XIV. Have you seen the Magdulene Church? No, not yet ; to-day Do you see that fine building with columns 2 Yes; I guess it is the church but I hope to see it What is this long street before us 2 The boulevard des Italiens : How many people are sitting along the pavement ! They are persons taking their cup of coffee - CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. 241 11 Quelle est cette colonne ? What column is that 2 C’est la colonne Vendôme, The Vendome Column, with the avec la statue de Napoléon statue of Napoleon 12 De quoi est-elle faite ? What is it made of 2 Elle est de bronze, faite avec 1t is of bronze, made from cannon des canons 8° Legon. 1 N’y a-t-il pas d’autres monu- Are there not other ouildings to be ments à voir ? seen ? Il y a encore le Luxembourg, There are the Luxembourg, the le Panthéon, la Bourse, Pantheon, the Exchange, the l’Hôtel-de-Ville, l’Arce de Town Hall, the Arc de l'E- l’Etoile, l’Eglise de Notre- toile, the Church of Notre- Dame, &c. Dame, &e. 2 Quelles sont les plus belles Which are the finest walks in promenades de Paris ? Paris? Celles des Champs-Elysces et Those of the Champs-Elysées and du Bois de Boulogne the Bois de Boulogne 3 Irons-nous voir le Bois de Shall we go and see the Bois de Boulogne? Boulogne ? Nous irons demain We will go to-morrow + Avez-vous vu le lac? Have you seen the lake ? Non; on dit qu’il est très-beau No; they say it is very beautiful 5 Irons-nous à pied ? Shall we walk there ? Oui; la promenade est déli- Yes ; the walk is delightful when it cieuse quand il fait beau is fine weather 6 A quelle heure irons-nous? At what o’clock shall we go? Nous partirons après déjeuner We will go after breakfast 7 Etes-vous fatigué ? Are you tired ? Non, pas le moins du monde No, not the least in the world 8 Avez-vous soif ? Are you thirsty ? Je boirais bien un verre de vin, I should like to drink a glass cf ou de la limonade wine, or some lemonade 9 Avez-vous faim ? Are you hungry ? Je commence d’avoir appetit I begin to have an appetite 10 À quelle heure dinerons-nous? At what o’clock shall we dine ? Nous dinerons à sept heures We shall dine at seven o’clock 11 Qui dinera avec nous? Who will dine with us ? Deux de mes amis Two friends of mine 12 Sont-ils Français ou Anglais? Are they French or English? L’un est Italien, l’autre est One is an Italian, the other a Belge Belgian 9° Leçon. 1 Avez-vous été à Versailles ? Have you been tp Versailles ? Non ; mais j'ai l’intention d’y No ; but I intend to go there the aller après demain day after to-morrow M £42 Ne co > er a ~ oo © pt ve ce Par où y va-t-on de Paris ? On peut y aller par deux che- mins de fer Combien y a-t-il de Paris? Il y a vingt kilomètres Qu’y a-t-il à voir a Versailles? Il y a le jardin avec ses eaux, et le château bâti par Louis XIV Le château est-il habité ? Non ; c’est aujourd’hui un mu- sée de tableaux Quels tableaux y remarque-t- on? Les plus remarquables sont les batailles peintes par le cé- lèbre Horace Vernet Voulez-vous venir à la cam- pagne avec nous? J'irai avee plaisir s’il fait beau temps Où irons-nous demain ? Je vous mènerai sur les bords de la Seine Aimez-vous la pèche? Oui, je l'aime assez, mais j'aime mieux la chasse Votre frère ne viendra-t-il pas avec nous? Je crains qu’il n’ait pas le temps de venir demain Ne trouvez-vous pas qu’il fait bien chaud ce matin? Asseyons-nous sous ce chêne Entendez-vous le tonnerre ? Oui, je crois qu’il tonne Avez-vous peur de l’orage ? Je n’aime pas être sous un ar- bre quand il fait des éclairs FRENCH GRAMMAR. How do you go there from Paris $ You can go there by two railways How far 1s it from Paris? It is twenty kilometres What is to be seen at Versailles ? There is the garden with its fuun- tains, and the castle built by Louis XIV. Is the castle inhabited ? No ; at present it is a museum fer pictures What pictures are to be seen there? The most remarkable are the battles painted by the celebrated Horace Vernet Will you come into the country with us? I will go with pleasure if il is fine weather Where shall we go to-morrow 2 I will take you to the banks of the Seine Do you like fishing ? Yes, I like it pretty well, but I like shooting best Will not your brother come with us ? I fear ke will not have time to come to-morrow Do you not think it is very warm this morning? Let us sit under that oak-tree Do you hear the thunder? Yes, I think it thunders Are you frightened at a storm ? I do not like to be under a tree when it lightens 10° Legon. Apprenez-vous la géogra- phie à votre école ? Oui, et j'ai commencé l’his- toire la semaine dernière Quelle histoire apprenez- vous? L'histoire d’Angleterre Aimez-vous mieux les mathé- matiques que l’histoire ? Non ; je préfère l’histoire Do you learn geography at ç'our school ? Yes, and I began history last wee} What history do you learn ? The history of England Do you like mathematics better than history ? No; I prefer history » ov 2% “Tr eo © — — fo vo I m — ve _ er CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS, Prenez-vous des legons de dessin ? J'en prends trois par semaine Quand avez-vous votre exa- men ? Il commence lundi prochain Combien de jours dure-t-il ? Il dure quinze jours Quand finira-t-il ? De samedi prochain en huit Quel âge a la reine Victoria ? Elle est née en 1819 Combien a-t-elle d'enfants ? Je crois qu’elle en a neuf Quel est l’aîné des fils ? C’est le prince de Galles Quand est-il né ? Il est né en 1841 Quand s’est-il marié ? Au mois de mars 1863 Qui a-t-il épousé ? La jeune princesse Alexandra de Danemarc Quand le prince Albert mou- rut-il? T1 mourut en 1861 243 Do you take lessons in drawing ? I take three a week When shall you have mination 2 1t begins next Monday How many days does it last 2 It lasts a fortnight When will it be finished ? Next Saturday week How old is Queen Victoriu ? She was born in 1819 How many children has she ? I believe she has nine Who is the eldest son? The Prince of Wales When was he born? He was born in 1841 When was he married 2 In the month of March, 1863 Whom did he marry ? The young Princess Alexandra of Denmark When did Prince Albert die? your exa- He died in 1861 L1° Leçon. Quels sont les meilleurs vins de France? Le Bourgogne, le Bordeaux, et le Champagne Que boit-on en Angleterre ? La boisson ordinaire est la bière La bière anglaise bonne ? C’est la meilleure que je con- naisse Boit-on de France ? Un peu, mais le vin est la boisson ordinaire Quel vin préférez-vous ? Le Bourgogne est mon vin favori N’aimez-vous pas le Cham- pagne? Si ; mais il me monte à la tête est-elle la bière en M 2 Which are ihe best French wines ? Burgundy, Bordeaux, and Cham- pagne What do theu drink in England ? The ordinary drink is beer Is the English beer good ? It is the best I know Do they drink beer in France ? A little, but wine is the ordinary drink What wine do you prefer ? Burgundy is my favourite wire Do you not like Champagne ? Yes ; but it gets into my head 1 ~ © — rN © > or o “I œo 0 © 44 Ce vin-là est-il cher ? 11 se vend de 2 à 5 francs la bouteille Où sommes-nous à présent ? Nous sommes en Angleterre Où demeurez-vous ? Je demeure tout près du Palais de Cristal Y allez-vous souvent ? J’y vais presque tous les jours Avez-vous un billet de saison ? J'en ai cinq pour ma famille Y a-t-il des concerts? Il y en a deux par jour La musique est-elle bonne ? C’est une des meilleures de Londres Les jardins sont-ils beaux ? Oui, très-beaux ; je m’y pro- mène souvent 12° N’y a-t-il pas un lac? Il y en a un très-joli, avec une foule de petits bateaux Les eaux jouent-elles souvent ? En été elles jouent presque toutes les semaines Y va-t-il beaucoup de monde ? J’y ai vu 93 mille personnes à la fois Quel est le prix d’un billet de saison ? Il est d’une guinée par an Depuis quand le palais est-il ouvert ? Il fut ouvert en 1855 par la reine Victoria Est-il loin de Londres? Il en est à six milles Combien faut-il de temps pour y aller? Il faut à peu près vingt mi- nutes en chemin de fer A quelle heure partons-nous ? Par le convoi de dix heures Avez-vous une montre ? J’en ai une dans ma chambre Va-t-elle bien ? Je crois qu’elle avance un peu FRENCH GRAMMAR. Is that wine expensive ? It is sold from two to five francs a botile Where are we now ? We are in England Where do you live ? I live quite close to the Crystal Palace Do you often go there? I go almost every day Have you a season-ticket ? 1 have five for my family Are there any concerts there 2 There are two every day Is the band good ? At is one of the best in London Are the gardens pretty ? Yes, very pretty ; I often take a walk there Legon. Is there not a luke? There is a very pretly one, with a number of little boats Do the fountains often play 2 In summer they play almost every week : Do many people go there? 1 have seen 93,000 people there at one time What is the price of a season- ticket 2 It is a guinea a year How long has the palace been open ? It was opened in 1855 by Queen Victoria Is it fur from London? It is six miles from it How long does it tuke to go there? It takes about twenty minutes by railway At what o'clock shall we go? By the ten o'clock train Huve you a watch ? 1 have one in my room Does it go right ? I think it is a little fast — tv ma a oo © 1 — 1 ww CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. La votre ne retarde-t-elle pas? Elle retarde de cinq minutes Est-ce une montre de Genève ? Non ; c’est une montre anglaise Combien vous a-t-elle coûté ? Elle m’a coûté douze livres Où avez-vous acheté la chaîne ? Je l’ai achetée à Paris Is not yours slow ? It is five minutes slow Is it a Geneva watch ? No ; it is an English wat k How much did it cost you ? It cost me twelve pounds Where did you buy the chain ? I bought it in Paris 23° Leçon. Avez-vous vu l'Exposition de 1862? Oui; j’y suis allé plusieurs fois Qu’en pensez-vous ? C’était une belie exposition Aimez-vous le bâtiment ? Je ne l’aime pas du tout Sur quel fleuve est Londres ? Sur la Tamise Ou la Tamise a-t-clle son em- bouchure ? Dans la mer du Nord Porte-t-elle vaisseau ? Oui; les vaisseaux arrivent jusqu’au pont de Londres Avez-vous été à Windsor ? Oui; j'ai visité le château royal et les eaux de Virginia Quelle est la seconde ville de France ? Lyon, célèbre par ses soieries Quels sont les deux plus grands ports de mer marchands ? Marseille au sud, le Havre au nord Quel est le principal commerce de Bordeaux ? C’est le commerce des vins Quelle est la capitale actuelle de la Russie ? St. Pétersbourg, situé sur la éva Qui a fondé St. Pétersbourg ? Il fut fondé par Pierre le- Grand en 1703 Quelle était l'ancienne capi- tale de la Russie ? Moscou, pris par les Français, et brûlé par les Russes en 1812 Did you see the Exhibition of 1862 ? Yes; I went there several times What do you think of it? It was a fine exhibition Do you like the building ? I do not like it at all On what river is London 2 On the Thames Where has the Thames its mouth ? In the North Sea Is it navigable ? Yes; ships proceed as far as London Bridge Huve you been to Windsor ? Yes; I have visited the royal castle and Virginia Water Which is the second town inl‘rance? Lyons, celebrated for its silk-manu- factories Which are the two greatest sea- ports for commerce ? Marseilles to the scuth and Havre to the north What is the principal trade of Bor- deaux ? The wine trade What is the present capital of Rus- sia ? St. Petersburg, situated on Neva Who founded St. Petersburg ? the It was founded by Deter the Great in 1703 What was the ancient capital of Russia ? Moscow, taken by the French, and burnt by the Russians in 1812 24b tod 2 y @ ur ES ca co © 10 — wo FRENCH Fait-il froid en Russie ? Oui; le froid y est excessif 3RAMMAR. Is it cold in Russia? Yes ; the cold is extreme there 12° Legon. | Avez-vous froid ? Je n’ai pas très-chaud Voulez-vous un peu de feu ? Non, merci, ce n’est pas nCces- saire Que brile-t-on en France ? On brile beaucoup de bois Le bois est-il cher? Oui, très-cher, surtout à Paris Que brûle-t-on en Angleterre ? On ne brûle que du charbon Je charbon est-il cher? Oui, c’est une grande dépense Aimez-vous le feu de charbon? Je préfère le feu de bois Y a-til des houillières en France ? Oui, mais moins qu’en Angle- terre Avez-vous un cheval? Non ; je n’ai que des chiens Sont-ce des chiens de chasse? Jai trois chiens d’arrêt et deux chiens courants Avez-vous un bon fusil ? J’en ai un qui m’a coûté cinq cents francs Y a-t-il du gibier ici? Il n’y en a pas beaucoup cette année Quel gibier avez-vous ? Des perdrix, des cailles, des faisans, et des lièvres Aimez-vous la chasse renard ? Je préfère la chasse au loup Y a-t-il des loups en France ? 11 y en a beaucoup dans les foréts et les montagnes Sont-ils dangereux ? Quelquefcis, quand ils son: affamés au Are you cold ? I am not very warm 1Vill you have some fire lighted ? No, thank you, it is not necessary What do they burn in France? They burn a great deal of wood Is fuel dear 2 Yes, very dear, especially in Puris What do they burn in England ? They burn coals only Are coals dear ? Yes, they are a great expense Do you like a coal fire? I prefer a wood fire Are there any coal-mines in France? Yes, but fewer than in England Have you a horse? No; I have only dogs Are they hunting dogs ? I have three pointers and (wo hounds Have you a good gun? I have one which cost me five hundred francs Is there any game here ? There is not much this year What game have you ? Partridges, quails, pheasants, and hares Do you like fox-hunting? I prefer wolf-hunting Are there wolves in France? There are many in the forcsts and the mountains Are they dangerous ? Sometimes, when they are furnished CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. 247 15° Leçon. 1 Quand irez-vous au bord de la mer ? J’irai au mois d’aolit prochain Prenez-vous des bains de mer? J’en prends un tous les jours Savez-vous nager ? Je commence à nager un peu Prenez-vous des leçons de natation tous les jours? J'en prends trois par semaine Combien donnez-vous par leçon ? Je donne vingt-cinq francs pour dix leçons Y a-t-il beaucoup de monde cette année ? Moins que l’année dernière Connaissez-vous quelques fa- milles ? J’en connais deux ou trois Y a t-il des soirées ? Il y a un bal tous les jeudis Aimeriez-vous à être marin ? Non; quoique j'aime beaucoup la mer 10 Monsieur votre frère n’est-il pas dans la marine royale ? Si, et il vient d’être nommé capitaine 11 Sur quel vaisseau est-il ? Il est sur la Gloire 12 Où est son vaisseau à present ? Il est en Chine 13 Quels sont les principaux ports militaires de la France ? Brest, Cherbourg, Toulon, et Rochefort 14 Où sont situés ces ports? Brest, Cherbourg, et Roche- fort sont sur l’Occan, et Toulon sur la Méditerranée La marine anglaise est-elle bonne? C’est la meilleure du monde 16 Où Napoléon I se distingua- t-il d’abord ? Au siége de Toulon v ce a or ~ [=] oo D 1 cr When shall you go lo the sea-side? I shall go next August Do you take sea-baths ? I take one every day Can you swim? 1 begin to swim a litile Do you take swimming lessons every duy ? I take three a week How much do you give for a les- son ? I give twenty-five francs for ten lessons Are there many visitors this year ? Fewer than last year Do you know any families ? I know two or three Are there any evening parties ? There is a ball every Thursduy Should you like to be a sailor? No; although I like the sea very much Is not your brother in the roual navy? Yes, he is, and he has just been made a captuin On board what ship is he? He is on board the Gloire Where is his ship now ? She is in China What are the principal military ports of I'rance? Brest, Cherburg, Toulon, and Rochefort Where are those ports situated ? Brest, Cherburg, and Rochefort are on the occun, and Toulon is on the Mediterranean Is the English navy good ? It is the best in the world Where did Napoleon I. first distin- guish himself? At the siege of Toulon 248 — nN he or ® - œ © 15 pot FRENCH GRAMMAR, 16: Leçon. Où Napoléon I naquit-il ? Dans l’ile de Corse, en (769 A qui appartient la Corse ? Elle appartient aux Français Quand vint-il en France ? Il entra à l’école de Brienne en 1779, à l’âge de dix ans Quand entra-t-il dans l’armée? Il fut nommé lieutenant en 1785 Quel âge avait-il alors? Il n'avait que seize ans A quel age fut-il nommé général ? À vingt-quatre ans 7 Qui était sa première femme? Joséphine de Beauharnais Qui épousa-t-il ensuite ? Marie-Louise, fille de l’em- pereur d’Autriche Napoléon eut-il des enfants? Il eut un fils, qui mourut jeune Comment s’appelait-il ? Il eut le titre de roi de Rome A quel âge mourut-il ? A l’âge de dix-huit ans Napoléon avait-il des frères ? Il en avait quatre, dont trois furent rois Dans quelle année mourut- il? Il mourut à Sointe-ITélène, en 1821 Où sont aujourd’hui ses cen- dres ? Elles furent apportées à Paris en 1840 L'empereur Napoléon III est- il son parent ? C’est son neveu De qui est-il fils? Il est le fils de Louis, roi de Hollande Where was Nupoleon I. born ? In the island of Corsica, in 1769 To whom does Corsica belong ? It belongs to the French When did he come to France? Ie entered the school at Brienne in 1779, at the age of ten years When did he enter the army ? He was appointed a lieutenant in 1785 1low old was he then ? Ile was only sixteen years old At what age was he made a gcne- ral? At twenty-four years of age Who was his first wife? Josephine of Beauharnais Whom did he afterwards marry ? Marie-Louise, daughter of the Emperor of Austria TTad Napoleon any children ? He had a son, who died young What was his name ? Ie had the title of King of Tome At what age did he die ? At the age of eighteen Had Napoleon any brothers ? He hud four, three of whum were kings In what year did he die? Île died at St. Helena, in 1321 Where are his ashes now ? They were brought to Paris in 1840 Is the Emperor Napoleon 111 re- lated to him 2 He is his nephew Whose son is he? He is the son of Louis, King of Holland 17° Leç:n. Quel est le roi des animaux ? C'est le lion Which is the king of animals? The lion COXYERSATIONAL LESSONS. 2 GQ trouve-t-on les plus beaux lions ? Dans les montagnes de I’ Afrique 3 Ny en a-t-il pas dans les environs d’Alger ? Si; les plus beaux, dit-on, ha- bitent l’Atlas 4 A qui appartient l’Algérie? Elle est aux Français 5 Depuis quand la possèdent ils? Ils en firent la conquête en 1830 > 6 Qui gouvernait ce pays avant eux ? Un Pacha, nommé Dey 7 Ou est le Nil ? C'est un grand fleuve qui tra- verse l’Egypte 8 Quelle est la capitale de l'E- gypte? Le Caire, situé près de la rive droite du Nil 9 Ne s'est-il pas donné une grande bataille dans les plaines de l'Egypte? C'est là que se donna la bataille des Pyramides 19 Par qui fut-elle gagnée? Par les Français, commandés par Bonaparte 11 Quel est le plus utile des animaux en Egypte? C'est le chameau 12 Où trouve-t-on les éléphants? Dans les grandes Indes 13 L'cléphant est-il fort ? C’est le plus fort et le plus grand des animaux 14 D'où viennent les plus beaux tigres ? Ils viennent du Bengal 15 Aimez-vous la peau du tigre? Oui ; elle est magnifique 16 Quel est le roi des oiseaux? C’est l'aigle 17 Y a-t il des aigles en France? Il y en a beaucoup dans les Alpes 18 Y a-t-il aussi des ours ? Oui; on en trouve dans les montagnes M3 21y Where are the finest lions found ? In the mountains of Africa Are there not some in the ncigh- bourhood of Atgicrs ? Yes; the finest, are said to live in the Atlas To whom does Algeria belong ? It belongs to the French How long have they possessed it? They conquered it in 1830 Who governed that country before them 2 A Dacha, called the Dey Where is the Vile? It is a large river which traverses Egypt What is the capital of Egypt ? Cairo, situated near the right bank of the Nile Wus not a great battle fouglt in the plains of Egypt ? It was there the batile of the Pyra- mids was fought Dy whom was it gained 2 By the French, under the com- mand of Bonaparte Which is the most useful animal in Egypt 2 The camel Where are elephants found? In the East Indies Is the elephant strong ? It is the strongest and largest of animals Where do the finest tigers come from? They come from Bengal Do you like the shin of the tiger ? Yes; it is beautiful Which is the king of birds? The eagle Are there any eagles in France ? There are many in the Alps Are there some bears also? Yes; some are found in the moun- tains 450 FRENCII GRAMMAR. 19 Quels sont les trois animaux les plus utiles en Europe ? Le bœuf, le cheval, et le chien Quelle espèce de chiens pré- férez-vous ? J'aime beaucoup les chiens de Terre-Neuve wo = 28° 1 Quand l’imprimerie fut-elle inventée? Elle fut inventée au XVe siècle ro A qui attribue-t-on I'invention de l’imprimerie ? À Jean Gutenberg de Mayence 8 Qui a inventé la poudre à ca- non ? Un moine allemand, nommé Schwartz 4 Quels sont les deux plus grands poètes français du dix-septième siècle ? Le grand Corneille et Racine Connaissez-vous les comédies de Molière ? J’en ai lu plusieurs Qui était La Fontaine ? C’était un célèbre fabuliste Avez-vous lu ses fables ? Oui, je les ai toutes lues, et j’en sais plusieurs par cœur Lesquelles savez-vous ? La Cigale et la Fourmi, le Renard et le Corbeau, le Chêne et la Roseau, et plu- sieurs autres Quels étaient les trois plus grands prédicateurs du siècle de Louis XIV? Bossuet, Bourdaloue, et Mas- sillon 10 Qui a écrit le Télémaque ? Fénelon, évêque de Cambrai 11 Quel est le plus grand critique de ce siècle? Boileau, auteur de ?’Art Poé tique or o “ a © Which are the three most useful animals in Europe ? The oz, the horse, and the dog What sort of dogs do you prefer? I like the Newfoundland dog very much Leçon. When was printing inventea ? It was invented in the X Vth cen- tury Zo whom is the invention of print- ing attributed ? To John Gutenberg of Mayence Who invented gunpowder ? A German monk, named Schwartz Who were the two greatest French poets of the seventeenth century? The great Corneille and Racine Do you know Moliére’s comedies ¢ I have read several of them Who was La Fontaine ? À celebrated fable writer Have you read his fables? Yes, I have read them all, and I know several by heart Which do you know? The Grasshopper and the Ant, the Fox and the Crow, the Ouk and the Reed, and several others Who were the three greatest preachers of the age of Louis XIV.? Hoss Bourdaloue, and Massil- on Who wrote Telemachus ? Fenelon, Bishop of Cambray Who was the greatest critic of that age ? Boileau, the author of the Art Poctique CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS. 251 12 Quels sont les quatre princi- paux écrivains du XVIII° siècle ? Voltaire, J.-Jacques Rousseau, Montesquieu, et Buffon 13 Voltaire a-t-il écrit en prose ou en vers ? Il est tout à la fois poète, his- torien, philosophe, écrivain universel 14 Quel est l’ouvrage qui a im- mortalisé Buffon ? C’est son histoire naturelle 15 Quels sont les deux grands poètes français de notre époque ? Lamartine et Victor Hugo 16 Aimez-vous la poésie ? Beaucoup, et j'aime surtout celle de Lamartine ; 17 Quels sont nos plus grands historiens ? Guizot, Thiers, De Barante, Thierry, Sismondi, Miche- let, Louis Blanc, &c. 18 Connaissez-vous les romans français ? J’en ai lu quelques-uns 19 Lesquels avez-vous lus ? Corinne, par Mme de Staél; Atala et René, par Chateau- briand ; les Trois Mousque- taires, et Monte-Christo, d’Alexandre Dumas; le Juif Errant, d’Eugène Sue; et Simon et André, par Mme George Sand 20 Qui était Scribe ? C’est le plus célèbre des écrivains dramatiques fran- çais Who were the four principai writers of the XVIIIth cen- tury? Voltaire, Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Montesquieu, and Buflun Did Voltaire write in prose or in verse.? He is ar the same time a poet, an historian, a philosopher, and a universal writer What work has Buffon ? His natural history Who are the two great French poets of our time ? immortalised Lamartine and Victor Hugo Do you like poetry ? Very much, and above all I like that of Lamartine Who are our greatest historians? Guizot, Thiers, De Burunte, Thierry, Sismondi, Michelet, Louis Blanc, &c. Are you acquainted with the French novels 2 I have read some of them Which Lave.you read ? Corinne, by Mme de Stall; Atala and René, by Chateuu- briand; the Three Musketeers, and Monte-Christo, by Aler- andre Dumas; the Wandering Jew, by Eugène Sue; and Simon and André, by Mme George Sund Who was Scribe 2 He was the most celebrated of ihe French dramatic wiiters 262 ENGLISH TRANSLATION OF ALL THE FRENCH EXERCISES GIVEN THROUGHOUT THE BOOK; TO BE RETRANSLATED INTO FRENCH. The Article. Page 20.—The father, the mother, and the children are ill. The uiicle, the aunt, and the nieces are here. The swallow is the harbinger of (the) spring. My brother's son and daughters. (The) spring, (the) summer, (the) autumn, and (the) winter are the four seasons of the year. The doors of the church are shut. The steeple of the village is white. The streets of the town are very wide. Man's life is short. He sings from morning to evening. I have spoken to the father, to the mother, and to the sons. Ie has given his horse to the nephew, and his house to the nieces. Here is some tea, some coffee, some bread, some butter, some meat, and some eggs. My cousin’s hat is in the room. The queen’s garden (26) is large. My sister has (some) pretty dresses. lle has (some) fine horses in his stable. I have a dog, some cows, and some sheep. llave you a pen and a pencil? The crown of a king and of a queen. 1 have spoken to a friend. The Substantive. Page 23.—The house, the roof, the book, the law, the heat, the wood, the son, the progress, the walnut, the gas, the cross, the fire, the hat, the cake, the bolt, the jewel, the general, the hospital, the air- hole, the ball, the sky a Llue eye, the knee, a picture, the grandfather, the remorse. oe THE ADJECTIVE. 25 The Adjective. Page 27.— The garden of the castle is small. The gate of the town is small. The passage is very narrow. The streets of the town are narrow. Ilere are (some) pretty roses and pretty dahlias. Your sister is very good. This little boy is as good as his sister. The duke is generous, but the duchess is not generous. We were under a stormy sky, and on a stormy sea. My friend's father (26) is very active, and his wife is still more active. My son has a new coat, and my daughter a ncw dress. They are very pleased. This wine is good, but that beer is not good ; the wine is cool, and the beer is not cool. It is my first journey and my first visit. My little friends, be docile and a!ten- tive. Give me a white handkerchief, a white cravat, and white gloves. This way is very long. What a long story ! Page 30.—DFGREES oF ConrarisoN.—The Crystal Palace is larger than the Palace of Industry at Paris. The tower of the castle is higher than the steeple of the village. My banker is less rich than vours. (The) French steel is not so much prized as the English stecl. Napoleon was as ambitious as Alexander. Homer is the greatest Greek poet, and Virgil the greatest Latin poet. I am the youngest of the family. (The) autumn is less varied than (the) spring. (The) Queen Victoria is very much esteemed and very popular. The House of Parliament is one of the finest buildings in London. I am very pleased to have seen the Museum. Edinburgh is a very fine town, but Glasgow is the most important town in Scotland. Your wine is good, but mine is still better. The Zouaves are the best soldiers in the French army. Your room is bad, but mine is still worse. My cousin draws weli, but you draw still better. Page 31. — PossEssIVE ADJECTIVES.—I (have) left my hat, my stick, and my gloves in your room. My sister has received a letter from her husband. I regret my old house. Do you know his parents? Your son, your daughter, and your two servants have arrived. They have sold their carriage and (their) horses. Our armies have fought valiantly. Charles has given his watch to his brother, and a bracelet to his sister. I esteem your father, his friendship is precious to me. Good morning, aunt, how do you do (or how are you)? Have you seen my friend? No; but I have spoken to her son. My paper, my pen, and my books are in the drawer. Page 32.—DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.—That buker is very punctual. This hamlet is well situated. That barrister is very elo 254 FRENCH EXERCISES. quent. This orange is bitter. That engraving is not dear. 1 (have) bought these two volumes this morning. I do not like these apricots; these peaches are better. This horse is stronger than that. That house is very damp. That man is not very obliging. This meadow will produce more than that field. These apples are good, but those pears are still better. On that day we were shooting. Page 33.— INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES.— No flowery road leads to glory. I have no anxiety on this affair. 1 have ncticed a certain man in the drawing-room whom I do not like. At certain seasons of the year the river overflows the country. Every climate has its useful birds. (The) sovereigns have everywhere the same duties to fulfil. It is the same woman that I saw this morning. Your father is kindness itself. He came himself to thank me. I saw him the very day of his departure. No man is happy, nothing can make him so. Our troops have fought several battles. I do not know what author (has) said that. What o'clock is it ? What an extraordinary resolution! What men! A certain line being given. Do you know any person here? I have a few pence in my pocket. Whatever efforts you may make, you will not succeed. Like father, like son. Such conduct is unworthy. All the inhabitants of the town came to meet him. Every man must do his duty. Ask me any other question, and I will answer it. Page 37.—NuMERAL ADJECTIVES.— This man, who earns 3 shil- lings a day, has 12 children, 7 boys and 5 girls; the eldest is 18 years old, and the youngest is 6 months old. On the 21st of June the sun rises at 44 minutes past 8 o'clock in the morning, and sets at 18 minutes past 8 in the evening. It is already a quarter to 6 o'clock and I must go at half-past 9. On the 1st of April, 1859, the French army consisted of 568,000 men. France is divided into 89 departments, 373 districts, 2,842 cantons, and 39,381 mayoralties. The army has lost 80 officers and 900 men. I want half a dozen pencils and about 20 pens. The Pronoun. Page 39.— PERrsoNAL Proxouns.—I know that man. Thou studiest thy lesson. He works with application. She is not pretty. We shall go to the play. Have you seen the eclipse of the sun? They are all gone. Have they arrived? I saw them yesterday. We will show you the way. You will tell him that I will write to him to-morrow. He gives me a great deal of work, Give me back the money which I lent THE PRONOUN 253 gou. Do not deceive me, for I should know it. I do not deceive you. If you see him to-morrow, speak to him of me. I will speak to him about it. Do you speak of the war? Yes, we speak of it, He proposes this arrangement to you; do you consent to it? I will never consent to it. We shall go with him. My brother is stronger than I, but I am more learned than he. I am French, but he is an Italian. I wrote to him myself. Go there yourself. Page 41.—PossEssive ProxouNs.—It is not your opinion, but it is mine. He has eaten his share and mine. Itis not my hat, it is thine. Your affairs are mine. I have perceived his sister and thine. This is your bed and that is his. My house and his are new. Show her your jewels, and she will show you hers. Your army is stronger than ours. Your country is more peopled than ours. You have your reasons and we have ours. Our oxen are white, yours are black. Our music is much better than theirs. Is your theatre larger than theirs? My friends are also theirs. I prefer his horse to thine. Do you speak of his father or of mine ? I prefer my house to his. Page 43. —DEMONSTRATIVE ProxouNs.—Is it you who have done that? No, itis not I, it is he. I know what torments him. I will tell you what I have scen, and you shall tell me what you think of it. This is well done, but that is detestable. This dog is not the one I bought. Give me that which is in the room. Your gun is good, but Charles’s is better. That of which TI speak is very dear. The best lesson is that of example. Of all these pictures, this is the most remarkable. Ilere are two pretty dresses; which will you have, this or that? These like work, those like pleasure. This is a beautiful clock ; where did you buy it? I bought this one in Paris, and that one in London, This is what my dog has found. This is what I think. These horses are less strong than those. Of these two watches, this is the one which is for your son. He to whom I spoke is a distinguished general. Page 45. — RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.—It is the sun which lights us, and which ripens the fruits of the earth. It is the postman who brought me this news. Do you know the persons who were in the Queen’s box ? No; who are they? That castle you see on the mountain is very old. The place of which you spoke to me is already taken. To whom have you given that fine nosegay ? What are you thinking of to go so late? Ido not know to which of these two colours to give the preference. Who invented printing? 256 FRENCH EXERCISES. From whom do you expect a letter? Whom do you expect this evening ? What are you doing there? With what did you open the door of my room? What prevents you from coming to-morrow ? For whom do you translate this work? Whom does it belong to? Page 26.— INDEFINITE Proxouns.—These candlesticks cost twenty francs each. Every one takes his pleasure where he finds it. Have you seen my dogs ? No, I have not seen any. They say that Sebas- topol is taken. People think that we shall have war. There is nobody in the room. Was anybody ever satisfied with his lot? Whoever shall not observe this law will be punished. Has any one ever seriously doubted the existence of God? Do not unto others what you would not they should do unto you. Many think that the moon is inhabited. All perished in the midst of the flames. No one is free from error. These two men fear one another. Both are dead. Neither has come. Neither has succeeded. The Verb. Page 53.—Tur VERB Avoir—I havea large garden. Thou hast a spot on thy coat. She has needles and cotton. We have some news from my brother. You have a fine dog. Your sisters have pretty dresses. I had two pounds six shillings in my purse. He had many friends. We had 20,000 men, and they had 30,000. To- morrow you will have his answer, and I shall have time to write my letter. My mother would have invited you if she had not been unwell. We had a great deal of rain on our journey. If I was richer, I would have a pretty house, well furnished. The general had two horses killed under him. We shall have a beautiful concert next Thursday, and I shall have two places to offer you. My son (has) had two prizes this year, but he would have had more if he had worked well. Page 56.—THE VERB Êrre—T am very happy to see yon. Thou art very amiable to give me this beautiful nosegay. Ile is always ill. She is a very good musician. We are three, and you are four. They are poor, but honest. I was in Paris when your letter reached me. Mary Stuart was (possessed) of great beauty. We were on the top of the mountain. Thou wilt be punished if thou art not obedient. My aunt will be here at six o'clock in the evening. These gentlemen will be in London before us. I should be much surprised if he did not come. These young ladies would be very glad to go to Paris. You would be happier if you were in the country. I have THE VERB. 057 been sick on the sea. We should have been more sick if we had been on the other boat. You would be richer if you were more economical. Your parents would have been very pleased if you had had a prize. Page 60.—AVOIR AND Êrre useD INTERROGATIVELY, ETC. — Have you any pens and ink? I am notready. Are you not an Italian? No. Are you a Spaniard? Yes. Have I not a fine blue waistcoat? Had your cousin her pink dress? No; she was not in full dress. Art thou pleased with thy tailor? Will my sister have her new bonnet? Shall you not have some friends this evening ? I was not on the boat. Would you have been frightened if you had been on it? We shall have no rain to-day. Shall you be at home at eleven o’clock ? No; I shall not be at home. Will not your son have a gun? Would your father be pleased if you were to come with me? Are the ladies in the drawing-room? Will not these gentlemen take their coffee soon? Have they had their tea? No; it is not yet ready. Page 65.—Firsr CONJUGATION.—I work six hours a day. Dost thou blame my conduct? My daughter speaks three languages, French, English, and German. We breakfast at eight o’clock in the morning, and we commence study at half-past eight. Do you dine with us to-day ? No. Your two sons draw and sing very well. I admired the happy situation of that great city. Whilst he was thus speaking, Telemachus cast down his eyes. We then lived in the country. The stars shone in the sky. We wandered a long time in the plain. Did these gentlemen arrive in time for the concert? I shall spend a month with my cousin, and we shall go shooting every day. Shall you bring your gun? I should often go shooting if I had time. Would you like to come to Rome with us? These horses would eat all this oats if you were to give it to them. Let us not judge others too severely. We coasted that island, and the next day we arrived opposite seven mountains of ice. The mist began to surround us. What do you call this mountain? It is called Mont Blanc. 1 should like you to speak French. I do not think we shall arrive before night. Page 70.—SECOND CoNgucATION.— This poor woman keeps (nour- rir) her children by her work, and all her children cherish her. Tell him that two of his ships were destroyed last night. The army invaded the whole country. When will you assemble your friends to inform them of this news? We build a church for the inhabitants of this parish. Flowers embellish nature and feed the bees. Have you chosen the flowers that you wish to buy? No; I have not chosen 258 FRENCH EXERCISES. them yet. When will you choose them? I will choose them to-morrow morning, and you shall plant them immediately, for fear they should perish. I must finish my letter before dinner, for if I did not finish it, it would be too late after dinner. Never disobey your parents, God would punish you. Page 74.—IL, III, axp IV. CrassEs.—Do you smell the per- fume of these violets? He foresaw his misfortune. Will he consent to this marriage? When shall we set out for the country? Did not these young gentlemen go out too often? We used to sleep till three o'clock, then we went shooting. Our soldiers covered themselves with glory in the Crimea. Open the window, if you please, for I suffer too much from the heat. Shall you come and see us next Sunday? I do not think he will come, for he went out very late. In coming back we discovered a frightful precipice. 1 always remem- ber with pleasure my journey to Switzerland. The French troops suffered much in the campaign of Egypt, but they served their country with an heroic courage. Does your friend acknowledge his wrongs? Has he obtained the permission which he asked for? Page 77.— THIRD CoNJUGATION.—I perceive the towers of the castle; do you perceive them? You will soon perceive them ; they must be in the direction of the setting sun. I understand that one can- not perceive them if he is short sighted. We received a basket of grapes last week, and we shall receive a basket of peaches next week. Does this architect understand your plan? I do not think he under- stands it well, but perhaps he will understand it better when I shall have explained it to him. They have deceived my dearest hopes. If we were to go up this hill, we should perceive the sea and the ships which sail towards America. I did not know you owed so much money ; if I had known it, I should have been very anxious. Page 81.—Fourru CoNJUGATION.--Do you hear the noise which is made in the mountain? No ; I hear nothing. Have you answered my solicitor’s letter? No; I shall answer it presently. We were waite ing for the postman with great impatience, but he has lost his bag in crossing the mountain. I lost ten thousand francs at once. The Rus- sians defended Sebastopol with much courage and skill. I shall ‘wait until you have remodelled your work to buy a copy of it. My father will sell his carriage as soon as he has soid his horse. My uncle and cousin will wait for you at the railway station, and there you shall take ‘a carriage that will bring you here. The snow would melt if the sun THE VERB. 289 eppeared. Would you sell this farm if you could find a good price for it? Page 84.—II., IIL, axp IV. Crasses.—Do you know this man? No, I do not know him. I was afraid you were ill. The river has swollen (croitre) considerably since yesterday. Do you fear any dan- ger? The empress looked (paraitre) very tired ; I did not recognise her at first. A fire destroyed the famous library of Alexandria. We reached the summit of Vesuvius at seven o’clock in the morning. Thy father has been obliged to pay the whole sum. Do not pity his fate, for he has well deserved it. To-morrow I shall paint the whole morning, and I will meet you again (rejoindre) in the afternoon. Do you paint in water-colours? No ; I paint in oil. Page 96.—REFLECTIVE VERBS.—I generally go to bed at eleven o'clock. We take a walk (se promener) every day about three o’clock in the afternoon. You rise too early. How do you do? I am well, thank you. My sister has caught cold (s’enrhumer) in walking. They repent of what they have done. What is the name of this town? Ido not recollect the name. I complained of a headache. You fatigue your- self too much ; rest a little. We intended (se proposer) to write to you. They will rejoice at (de) your success. Did you wash yourself this morning? No; I rose too late. I shall be angry if that happens (to you) again. Does your brother remember what I told him? Would you not make a mistake in your calculation? They wished that I should conform to the rules of the house. He had used (se servir de) your recommendation to obtain the situation. You would have exposed yourselves to the greatest danger, if you had walked (se promener) on this road. Page 101.—IMPERSONAL VERBS.—How many years have you been in England? It will be fifteen years next January. I did not think it was so long. I must answer my father to-day. I want some paper and envelopes. You should have come sooner. Will there be many people at the evening party of the Russian ambassador? There were not more than a hundred persons last time. Is it far from here to the Lake of Geneva? I think it is about two leagues. Is it neces- sary to ascend to arrive there? No; we shall have ( falloir) to descend. Do you think it necessary to take a carriage? No; I do not think we want one. What sort of weather is it? It is very windy. It would have been necessary to take an umbrella. : Page 103.—IpromaTIc TEnsEs.—I have just seen your sisters in the street. The ambassador has just set out for Vienna. We had just 260 FRENCH EXERCISES. breakfasted with the general. These gentlemen had just gone out when I received your letter. I am going to speak to his master. Are you going to pay a visit to the duke? We were going to embark when the fire broke out in the ship. You ought not to invite that man to your house; I ought to have told you sooner. You are going tc have a holiday to-day. I was to set out this morning for Boulogne, but the bad weather has detained me. Will you not take cold, if you leave the window open? When is your father to publish his new work? Is he going to advertise it in the newspapers? Were you not going to write to your bookseller ? Irregular Verbs. Page 115.—FrrsT CoNJUGATION.— Where are you going? I an. going to London. Sorrows ascend the throne and seat themselves by the side of the sovereign. If it be true that time goes on unceasingly, it is no less true that we go on unceasingly with it. Shall we soon go to the country ? It would be necessary for me to go to Paris next week. Let us suffer with resignation the evils which heaven sends us. Do not trust that charlatan, he will send you to the other world. Send me your servant, and I will send you the book that you ask. The enemy sent us some shells, which were lost in the trenches. SEcoND CoNsUGATION.—'There is a report that we are going to have war. These children would run the whole day, if they were allowed. When a savage dies in the winter whilst hurting, his body is preserved in the branches of the trees. We shall die as we have lived. Alex- ander conquered Asia, and Cesar conquered Gaul. The only solid friends are those which one acquires by solid virtues. Children acquire knowledge without our help. Your sisters and I were gather- ing (sume) flowers in the meadow, when some one came to tell us that he was dead. Every one reaps what he has sown. Louis XIV. re- ceived all literary men very kindly. A tempest assailed us on going out of the harbour. IIis good qualities acquired for him the esteem of everybody. Our happy days fly swiftly. Let us flee bad com- pany, if we wish to remain good. It is by fleeing that one sometimes makes triumph sure. His blood boils in his veins. You shall put these eggs into the water as soon as it boils. Page 116.—Tuirp CoxsucaTioN.—I do not wish my mother to know that I have seen you. Could you tell me what this house is worth ? However little it may be worth, it is well worth what they ask for it. When shall you see the landlord? I must know it, in ADVERBS. , 261 order that I may make him my offers. I had net foreseen your arrival ; I cannot tell you at present. Sit down for a moment; I am going to see whether we can speak to him. We sat under the shade of a palm tree, and soon we saw some savages come out of the forest. I did not know that you wished to go this evening. It is a spring which moves the whole machine. The fate of his children moved him even to tears, but the sight of punishment could not move him. When shall you know your lessons? I shall know them in half an hour. I should have liked you to know them sooner. Page 117.—FOoURTH CoNJUGATION.— What author do you read in your class? Our professor wishes us to learn a passage of Virgil every day. It is said that the Russians have been beaten by the allies; do you believe that the news is true ? Tell me what you think of it, and let us drink the health of our brave soldiers who have vanquished the enemy. Do not do to others that which you would not have done to you. Democritus laughed incessantly, Heraclitus always cried. It would be necessary that you should write your letter before I take any steps in the matter. All the children who were born on the same day as Sesostris were brought to the court by order of the king. We are born and we live for society. Do not take your friends at hazard : follow my advice,—it is good. Fontenelle lived a hundred years. We used to drink goat's milk every morning. These young orphans sew two or three hours a day. Have you put my horse in the stable? I shall put him in when he has drunk. We grind a great deal of coffee every day ; but we used to grind more (of it) last year. Have you solved this problem? Fire resolves wood into ashes. Frictions reduce swellings. > Adverbs. Page 122.— When do you go (partir)? I shall go to-morrow, or perhaps to-day. Do you often go to Paris? I seldom go; generally once a year. How far have you learnt ? You have arrived too late; come sooner another time. Iow far is it from here to Geneva? I do not know exactly. How long shall you stay here? Why do you ask me that question ? Have you ever been to Rome ? No, I have never been. How have you done that? I have scarcely had time to see him. Which way shall you take in going to France ? We shall go first to London, and then to Dover. How much does the journey from London to Paris cost? Have you already dined? No; I have not 262 FRENCII EXERCISES yet breakfasted. He reads very little, and he writes still less. Shall you go far to-day? Why do you not answer? Prepositions. Page 223.—I have given a dictionary to your friend. Have you written to your mother ? We were speaking of you just now. Lo you come from Bordeaux? I shall set out from here after breakfast and I shall arrive in Paris before ten o’clock in the evening. The tomb of Napoleon is in the chapel of the Invalides. We walked upon a fiery ground, beneath a fiery sky, between two wails of fire. Towards four o’clock we doubled the point of a peninsula, and we cast anchor in a bay sheltered by rocks. This money is for the poor. We then perceived through the fog the hull and (the) yards of a large ship. I shall go to your house to-morrow. Mirabeau spoke with eloquence. We shall go as far as Brussels, and we shall set out in the evening by the Strasbourg railway. Amongst the French, the fashions succeed each other rapidly. In my opinion, he was wrong to behave in this manner towards you. My father lives in Paris, opposite the Louvre. As for me, I will not undertake anything against him. He spoke to me about this affair. Whilst my companions warmed themselves around a large fire, I went towards the mountain. He already learns to read, write, and sing. Russia is fertile in corn, hemp, and flax. Conjunctions. Page 126.—Do not do that, for you would be punished. The wicked die as they bave lived. Do you then believe that death is nothing? These songs are sweet, but the sorrows and the joys which they awaken are neither my sorrows nor my joys. Neither gold nor greatness makes us happy. Now, you ought to have known that the thing was not possible. Misery or dishonour always awaits the gam- bler. He must pay, or he will go to prison. People have asked me, Why do you weep? And when I have replied, no one has wept with me, because they did not understand me. Why do you ask it, since you know it? I think you will gain your lawsuit. If Napoleon had not been so ambitious, he would not have fallen. God places you above others in order that you might be the fathers of the people. Whether you come or not, I shall set out to-morrow. Work with assiduity, in order to deserve a reward. SYNTAX Syntax of the Article. Page 130.—The lion is the king of animals. The snow whitened the roofs. Man is the king of nature. The olive tree is the emblem of peace. Men are born for society. Honour is dearer to generous minds than life, The father, mother, and children are gone out. The principal productions of Russia are corn, hemp, flax, timber, iron, furs, hides, and tallow. The purest and most correct writer. The most touch- ing and harmonious verses. The best written and best thought books. Page 131.—The principal countries of Europe are France, Eng- land, Russia, Austria, Prussia, Spain, and Italy. Sicily, Sardinia, and Corsica are important islands situated in the Mediterranean. The principal ‘rivers of France are the Rhone, the Rhine, the Loire, the Seine, the Meuse, and the Garonne. Napoleon crossed the Alps with his army in 1800. Mont Blanc is the highest mountain in the Alps. The English steel, the Russian leather, the French and Spanish wines are very much prized. I was born in France, but I have travelled in Russia, Italy, Germany, and Scotland. My brother will go to India, and from there to Japan. Do you like Bordeaux wine? I like Bur- gundy best. The Emperor of Russia, Nicholas, died in 1855, during the Crimean war. Is not the American cotton more valued than that of India? Page 132.—Prince Louis Napoleon was elected president of the Republic in 1848. Cardinal Wolsey was a celebrated minister of Henry VIII. The Count of Chambord is the legitimate heir to the throne of France. General Pelissier is now marshal, Duke of Malakoff. Good Bordeaux wine is sold at from 250 to 450 francs a half-hogshead. Tea, in France, costs twelve francs a pound. Potatoes are sold by the pound. Our first professor has eight hundred a year. How much do you charge for a lesson? I charge ten. guineas per quarter. The dinner is three francs a head. These apples cost me two shillings a dozen. Are you Professor Gellert ? No; I am Doctor Muller. Have those poor people bread and meat ? He has money, lands, and credit. 2E4 FRENCH EXERCISES. Page 134.— London and Paris are the two largest capitals in Europe. Have you ever been to Berlin? Frederick II, King of Prussia, was a great warrior. Alexander, Annibal, Cæsar, and Napo- leon were great captains. Correggio and Titian were two great Italian painters. There are very fire trecs in the forest of Fontaine- Uleau. There are no houses on this road. How can you feel dull ? have you no books? I cannot read, since I have no books.. Baker, have you any rolls ? A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, swam in a crowd behind the car of the goddess. I have not much time to give you. Did she shed many tears? He has too much sense to act in such a manner. We have traversed a forest of firs. There would not be so many insolent men, if there were not so many stupid ones. There are- many curious people in the world. I have tasted the good cheese you bought yesterday. Page 137.—Men without passions, without virtues, and without vices, have but one feeling—vanity badly disguised. Amongst neigh- bours, one speaks with frankness. Which do you prefer as an epic poet, Homer or Virgil ? Homer, as a creative genius, merits the preference. Never was father happier than you are. This good action will bring you good luck. Paul and Virginia sat under a tree, overwhelmed with fatigue, hunger, and thirst. “Soldiers!” cried Bona- parte, ‘ consider that from the top of these monuments forty ages look upon you!” Temerity is not prudence. Old men, women, children, all wished to see me. Burgundy, a province of France, is fruitful in wine. Minerva, the goddess of wisdom, led Telemachus. Louis XIV. protected literary men. Charles XII. was vanquished at Pultava. His brother is a painter, and his sister is a musician. Her mother is a Frenchwoman, but her father was a German. It was an Italian who made an attempt on the life of Napoleon III. This is the title of the work, “ An Essay on the History of France,” by Guizot. What a misfortune that he died so young! What a ravishing picture the fields offer! Syntax of the Substantive. Page 139.— Victor Hugo’s “ Notre-Dame de Paris” is an historicai novel of the greatest interest. He knows the greater part of La Fon- taine’s fables by heart. My mother’s room has a blue paper. Is Mr. B. athome? Tell him that I shall be at home all the morning. Have you been to the winter garden? She wore silk stockings and satin shoes. How much does a bottle of Burgundy wine cost? I prefer a branch of SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 265 lilac to a pot of gillifiower. He had a wind-mill, a water-mill, and‘ a steam-mill built. A four-wheeled carriage pays more tax than a two- wheeled carriage. I like fox-hunting very much. She is a fine girl, with black eyes. Where is my pocket-handkerchief? In the bed- room. Can you tell me where the letter-box is? It is at the corner of the fish-market. ; Page 122.—All the people applauded his victory with great cries. The multitude of the stars adds to the beauty of the nights. A troop of Spartans poured a shower of darts on him. A troop of armed men appeared before my eyes. Some ran to throw themselves into the river Nerwa, and a crowd of soldiers were drowned there. Spain is proud of having given birth to the two Senecas. The same king (Louis XIV.) who had the wisdom to employ such men as Condé, Turenne, Luxembourg, Créqui, Catinat, and Villars in his armies, Colbert and Louvois in his cabinet, chose Racine and Boileau to write his history ; Bossuet and Fénelon to instruct his children ; Fléchier, Bourdalous, ‘and Massillon to instruct himself. Only a literary king is requisite to produce men like Corneille and Racine. Do you not admire tue masterpieces of Racine and Molière ? Woman is the masterpiece of nature. In France there is a prefect in all the chief towns of the departments. Syutax of the Adjective. Page 144.— Milton was blind and suffered from gout. A straitened and poor life, numerous enemies, the bitter fecling of his deceived illusions, the humiliating weight of public disgrace, sadness of mind and bodily sufferings, everything overwhelmed Milton. Women and children were murdered in the houses. I endeavour to make my wife, my child, and even my dog happy. My mother and sister are gone this morning. He expresses himself with perfect grace and politeness. He will have the contempt or the confidence of the public, according as he behaves well or badly. Diogenes walked bare- footed and slept in a cask. The demi-gods of the ancients were only men, remarkable by their valour and virtue. IIe has been gone half an hour, and he will not return before half-past ten in the evening. The citizens came barefoot to deliver to him the keys of the tow. You will receive prepaid all the letters that I shall send you. 1 here- with send you miy correspondent’s letter. Does that oil cost dear ? I do not like it, it smells strong N 266 FRENCH EXERCISES. Page 146.— Why have you left this happy nest, and your litile children, and your old mother, and that charming valley ? On the declivity of some charming and well-shaded hill, I would have a little rustic house, a white house with green shutters. There came by a little powdered gentleman, thin, brisk, and to whom Antony addressed his shrieking memento. How many different and touching characters! The venerable face of the soldier, the countenance so kind and so tender of my adoptive mother, and the fresh and charming visage of Angele smiling at her little child; the sweet melancholy of Mayeux, pressing her lips from time to time on the fair and laughing head of Agricole’s eldest son. The difference between an indifferent (pauvre) author and a needy (pauvre) author is, that the former is without merit and the latter without fortune. Page 149.—Those who are greedy of praise are prodigal of money. Proud of his nobleness, jealous of his beauty, the swan seems to make a show of all his advantages. After so long an absence are you sorry to see yourself again in your kingdom ? I am not angry with you. Our soldiers have returned from Italy covered with glory. Those who are pleased with nobody are the very persons with whom nobody is pleased. This warlike nation, accustomed to conquests, accustomed to work, to labour, and to the contempt of life. Respira- tion is necessary to life. St. Louis, King of France, was affable to all and kind to every one. Rich people are inclined to think them- selves superior to other men. This passage is not easy to understand. It is easy to make a mistake. This young man is assiduous in his duty and very attentive to the prince. Do not be deaf to the voice of religion. Page 152.—The tower of Strasburg cathedral is 149 metres high. That oak is 90 feet high, by 18 in circumference. The ditches of the town are 45 feet wide, by 10 feet 6 inches deep. The rue de Rivoli, in Paris, is about a mile and a half long, by sixty feet wide. The town is surrounded by a wall, 20 feet high, by 6 feet thick. You are shorter than I by two inches. There were more than 400,000 men engaged at the battle of Solferino. The Empress Eugénie is younger than the Emperor Napoleon by eighteen years. She is older than I thought. She is not happier than she was. Can a man be happier than you are? The more unhappy a people is, the more it is to be feared. He feels this insult so much the more as he deserved it the less. He is only the more to be esteemed for it. What does a month more or less matter? France is the oldest monarchy in Europe. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. “ 967 Page 155.— Bring me my hat, cravat, and gloves. Good morning, uncle, how do you do? I have known your father for a long time. Will your sister come to the ball? Have your brothers returned ? The lady who is at the piano is the ambassador’s wife. In saying these words, tears came into my eyes. Blood came out of his nose and mouth. Admiral Nelson lost his arm at the expedition of Santa-Cruz His body is too big, and his head too small. Wash your hands before dinner. Epaminondas fell pierced by a javelin, which remained in his chest. They will cut off my head, and perhaps make you a king. These works have their merit and their faults. Time flies, its loss is irreparable. Page 159.—This field, these sheep, and these cows belong to me. Is not that clock slow? No flowery path leads to glory. There are no exterior vices, and no faults which are not perceived by children. Some writers have treated that subject. Send me the few books I left at your house. Whatever may be your accomplishments, do not be proud of them. Whatever efforts you may make, you will not succeed. How- ever wicked men may be, they would not dare to appear the enemies of virtue. Every condition has its troubles, and sorrows are attached to each state. We breakfast every day at eight o’clock. All the inha- bitants of the town were in consternation. All his thoughts, all his glory, were to please God. All Rome knows it. From the top of the hills of Montmartre one can see the whole of Paris. These clothes are quite worn out, but worn out as they are, they may be useful. Feeble as her health is, she does a great deal of good to the poor. Sovereigns have everywhere the same duties to fulfil. Even the most savage animals afford us examples of gratitude. We dined in the very room where he was murdered. Such a woman thinks herself handsome who often is not so. Such a man deserves to be punished. Syntax of Pronouns. Page 163.— When you have prayed, do you not feel your heart lighter, and your soul more content? What are you doing on the earth; and have you nothing to ask of Him who placed you there? “Did you hear nothing last night ?”” he asked him. Joy shone in the eyes of Charles. “That is right,” he said; “they are becoming, then, more tract- able.” May I with my own eyes see the thunderbolt fall there! We were scarcely gone when the thunder burst out and set the roof on fire. N 2 268 FRENCH EXERCISES. Scarcely had the sun appeared on the horizon, (when) we marched on the enemy. If a man flatters you, do not trust him, he wishes to deceive you. I will show it you to-morrow. He will never forgive me for it. If you have letters for your sister, I will take them to her ; give them to me. Write it, and send it to him. Have you not already sent some to him thither ? Mave you not told it him yet? If you have money, give me some. Page 165.— Who has broken this glass ? Itis not I,itishe. Who will come to the palace ? I. My solicitor and he are of that opinion. If it is not you, it is your brother. She and I shall learn music. Me will see me and my servant. People may sav what they please against him ; as for me, I am sure of his honesty. Apply to tuem, and not to him. I betray the God I love! I depreciate commerce !—I, daughter and wife of manufacturers!—I, who think it is an esta- Hishment most useful to the country! Ilis sisters carried a basket, and he a parcel. He alone disclosed to the eyes of a Jew the design of two traitors quite ready to pierce your bosom. Like they, we travel towards the grave. He loves you as much as they. lle goes to London every day ; I rarely go. Page 167.—Do you paint and draw every day ? We read and trans- late from ten o’clock till twelve. Take care; you gain little and you spend a great deal. You and I are not happy. Ile was loved because he was kind to all. He (Punch) leaps in laughing, he falls, rises again, walks, gambols, jumps, fights, gesticulates, and falls back dislo- cated against the frame which resounds with his fall. I fear God, dear Abner, and have no other fear. Albert and he agree. He eats and drinks well. Neither my father nor I can do it. An author who flatters and praises us is sure to please us. I wish to see him, to beseech him, to urge him, to importune him, to move him. lle will receive me and my servant. He owes that sum to us and (to) our partners. Page 168.—Are you my gardener’s son ? Yes, I am. Are you the porter’s daughter ? Yes, [ am. Gentlemen, are you the officers of that regiment? Yes, we are. Gentlemen, are you officers? We are. Are you the three Romans chosen for the combat? We are. Are not these children ill? No, they are not. Are you unwell, Miss? No, I am not. Young ladies, are you English ? Yes, we are. Ladies, are you the English ladies recommended to me? We are. Is your brother happier than he was? Yes; but he is not so rich as you think. SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 269 Is this his son ? Yes, it is. Are these your children ? No, they are not. Are you the mistress of the house? Yes, I am. In this world no one thinks of any but himself. Whoever refers everything to him- self, has not many friends. No one is a prophet in his own country. A good action bears its recompense with itself. Vice is odious in it- self. We have often need of some one inferior to ourselves. Frank- ness is good in itself, but it has its excesses. In fulfilling the wishes of his father, this young man is working for himself. Page 172.— Your father is for me a true friend ; I shall never forger the services I have received from him. That house is in a ruinous state; do not go near it. Have you any horses? No; I have none. Has your sister a piano ? Yes, she has one. In order to have friends, a man must be capable of making them, and worthy of having them. IIe who enjoys prosperity should fear to abuse it. How many children have you? I have two. le is a suspicious man, do not trust him. Earthly things are not worth our attachment. I have received his letter this morning; I will answer it this evening. This horse is vicious, do not touch him. This affair is important; give all your attention to it. Ilave you been to town? No; Iam going there. Do you think of the poor who suffer? Yes; we think of them every day. Although I speak a great deal of you, my daughter, I think of ‘you still more, day and night. Shall you go to Scotland next summer ? Yes, we shall. Would you go to Naples if I were to go with you ? No, I would not. Is this the duke’s carriage? Yes, it is. Are those the horses which cost so dear? Yes, they are. Are you stronger than you were ? Mary sings, but Albert does not. 1 have seen the Princess of Wales at the Opera. Ilave you ? You have seen her with the Prince, have you not? Page 175.—This hat is minc, and that great coat is his. It is not your opinion, but it is mine. I am waiting for his decision to take mine. Our house and his touch each other. Whose two canes are these? This is mine, and that is his. This field is my father’s. His father’s achievements are effaced by his. Those gloves are mine, where are ycurs? Mear my reasons, I will hear yours afterwards. Your interests are ours. I have just heard cf the death of a friend of mine. A pupil of mine is very ill. Lamartine is one of our best poets, and Guizot one of our best historians. This young lady is a daughter of one of my partners. This is my room, and that is my sister’s, I have seen it with my own eyes. I intend to treat you as my own son. It is a carriage of my own. He lives in a house of Lis own, 270 FRENCH EXERCISES. Page 177.—Is it the Dover boat that has just arrived ? No; n is the Folkestone boat. Who told you so? My servant. It was he who was driving the horses. You have written a great deal, it is true ; but how many errors there are in your works! It is much easier to conquer provinces than (to conquer) a passion. It is difficult to become learned without working much. It is true, it is difficult. What o’clock isit? It is seven o'clock. What o’clock is that? It is three o'clock. That which makes the hero often degrades the man. I know what you mean. What is certain is that the world is wrong. The finest present that has been made to mankind, after wisdom, is friendship What I like in a young person is modesty. What is true is that agriculture was extremely honoured among the ancient Romans. Page 178.—It is not I who said so, it is she. Among the ancicnts it was the old men who governed; with you it is the young men. It was the Phenicians who invented writing. Our true goods are those of nature ; it is heaven, it is the earth, those fields, those plains, those forests, of which it offers us the inexhaustible enjoyment. Which are the three theological virtues? They are faith, hope, and charity. Are those the dogs of which you spoke to me ? It was we who were in the carriage, and it was they who were on horseback. He who has ten friends has not one. Woe to those who disturb the foundations of a nation! The French Ambassador and that of England. My mother’s room and my sister’s are on the first floor. This one dies in the midst of prosperity, that one in misery and in the bitterness of his soul. Heraclitus and Democritus were of a very different character; the latter was always laughing, and the former was incessantly weeping These look well, those look bad, Page 181.—Glory to the hand that sows, sname to {ne nand that injures! Distrust the fine words of people who boast of being virtuous. The book you have lent me is very interesting. Who has treated you so? Whom do you ask for ? Whom do you think you are speaking to? What will you do if he does not pay you ? There is nothing on which people have disputed so much. Of what is a heart not capable which jealousy blackens and envenoms? To what do you apply yourself during the morning ? What is more consoling at the hour of death than having performed good actions ? A pleasure of which we are sure to repent can never be a peaceful one. The senate gave kings to Rome of whom she had little to fear. Iknow what you want to speak to me about. The horse on which the king was mounted came from Spain. Happy is he who, satisfied with his humble fortune, lives in SYNTAX OF VEREDS. 271 the condition in which the gods have placed him. Whence comes so much pride in him ? Page 185.—One may be an honest man and make bad verses. Has any one ever wept for having done his duty ? We had thought we were friends, and we found ourselves to berivals. When a woman (on) is handsome, she knows it. Whoever has no character is not a man, he is a thing. Passenger, whoever you are, do not envy me this little piece of ground which covers my ashes. Whoever has told you that is mistaken. Every one takes his pleasure where he finds it. What- ever that author may say, I consider he is wrong. Each of us has his troubles. They went off each his own way. What do you do every morning ? They brought offerings to the temple, every one according to his means. They have each of them brought their offerings. Do not unto others what you would not they should do unto you. Who- ever pities no one, does not deserve to be pitied. I know nobody so amiable as your sister. Would any one dare contradict me ? We must always associate with well-bred people. Both helped each other to bear their sorrows. They both arrived at the same time. Neither of them has done his duty. Neither of them has succeeded. Syntax of Verbs. Page 188.— We exist without knowing how, and we think without knowing why. Religion is a chain of gold which connects the earth with the throne of the Eternal. Riches often attract friends, and poverty drives them away. The rich and the poor are equal in the law. Narbal and I admired the kindness of the gods. Consider this well, young man,—what are ten, twenty, thirty years for an immortal being ? Neighbours, friends, relations, every one prefers his own interest to that of any other. Weakness or inexperience makes us commit many faults. His fury, his rage, has no longer any limits. It is you or he who have said so. Hell, as well as heaven, proves a just and kind God. History, as well as natural philosophy, only began to develope them- selves towards the end of the sixteenth century. Health as well as fortune withdraw their favours from those who abuse them. Page 191.—My uncle has given me four beautiful volumes of Molière. Is it for you or your sister that they were destined ? Tt is to me that he had promised them, It is not of you that we are speaking. > 79 FRENCH EXERCISES. I (have) found a newspaper on your table, and I Lave taken it. The wicked are detested by everybody. The Romans were vanquished by the Carthaginians at the battle of Cannæ. Printing was invented, they say, by Gutenberg. I think of going next Saturday. Do you prefer waiting till Monday ? Religion teaches us to respect our masters, to be kind to our inferiors, and to love all men as our- selves. We were obliged to pass the night in the forest. Warn your friend to be on his guard, for I know some one who is trying to injure him. Page 195.— Whilst we were wandering through the deserted plain, a thick mist spread itself over the waves and began to surround us. We coasted this island, and the next day we arrived in front of seven mountains of ice. The day began to decline; they embarked for the island. Already the report had spread that the king was coming ; many of the inhabitants went to meet him. As he went along the streets of Newport, a young woman advanced towards him, and presented him with a red rose, blown, in spite of the rigour of the sea- son. We went to the governor’s house, whom we could not see because he was ill. If I do not recollect his names, it is because he had ten or twelve. The king was very much agitated by this sudden apparition ; his head, which was quite weak, was shaken by it. Page 203.— My father wishes me to learn music and drawing. I am astonished that be does not sce the danger he is in. Do not wait to come until I answer you. I was not aware that you had re- turned. Do you think he says that to tease me? I do not think He says it for that. Do you think your sister can walk so far? It is pos- sible that she may be tired before she arrives. Is it true that the Empress Eugénie is in London, and that she took a cab to go to her hotel ? I must go by the seven o’clock A.M. train. The Gospel is the finest present God has made to men. The best use one can make of his intellect is to distrust it. “Athalie” is one of the last tragedies that Racine wrote. Whatever talents you may possess, always be modest. Whoever comes, do not receive him. The lion never attacks man un- less he is provoked. Behave in such a manner that everybody may be pleased with you. He behaved in sach a manner that everybody was pleased with him. If you should come, and if you could stay two or three days with us, we would go and see the Lake of Geneva. I wish you would come next week. I shall not set out until I have received the order for it. They advised him to go, in order that his presence might contribute to re-establish order. The most moderate asked that they SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 273 should arrest him, and that he should be placed in the prison of the Chatelet. We did not know he had been arrested. May you succeed in your projects! Syntax of Participles. Page 209.— Persons who love everybody, generally love nobody. The Moors, descending from the mountains, overran and pillaged Africa. Affectionate persons have more enjoyments than others, Eagles, carried away by the current of air, descend, in whirling, to the bottom of the gulf. Surrounded on all sides, the Russians believed themselves lost, and were compelled to surrender. The mountains are covered with flocks, which furnish fine wools, sought for by all nations. The summer heat is there always tempered by refresh- ing zephyrs. Chateaubriand and Mme. de Staél have enriched our literature with a number of remarkable works. The best harangues are those dictated by the heart. If God has distinguished us from other animals, it is chiefly by the gift of speech. Bossuet created a lan- guage which he alone has spoken. More than sixty princes have suc- ceeded each other on the throne of France. These two bodies of troops have met and fought. These are the battles which they have fought. Printing is one of the most useful inventions that has ever been made. low much time, how many reflections, have been necessary to understand the wants and the resources of nature! The persons you have heard sing belong to the Opera. The trees that I have scen planted are now more than thirty years old. The kindnesses you have made me to feel give me a right to use so tender a name. The Emperor’s generals had allowed themselves to be beaten on the fron- tiers. The thing was more serious than we had at first thought. The few provisions which they have preserved have sufficed to save the population of the town. Page 216.—The clect will always enjoy the presence of God. The dogma of the immortality of the soul has always maintained itself on the earth. There is no rampart against slander. Titus did not pass a day without doing a gcod action. Iknow nobody in the town. I had not seen my mother for ten years. Speak lower, lest some one should hear you. This language is more diflicult than I thought. Paris is more populous than St. Petersburg, but London is still much more so. The city of London is much larger than (that of) Paris, but N 3 274 FRENCH EXERCISES. it is not so fine. Are you still as busy as you were? Suddenly a dark tempest enveloped the sky and irritated (all) the waves of the sea. This man made bis fortune all at once. We expected you sooner. Rather suffer than die, such is the motto of men. Page 221.— When will Charles go to Florence? In a month. Will he stay long in Italy ? He is going there to learn the language. Shall you have time to finish your letter before dinner? No; but I will finish it after tea. Who was king of France before Napoleon III. ? Louis-Philippe, whom I saw pass before my door in a cab, on his arrival in England. The soldiers, who had walked for three weeks, had not eaten anything for nearly two days. There are more dead amongst the fugitives than amongst the brave. Man is placed free between vice and virtue. Iatred between great people is seldom appeased. We then perceived through the fog the hull and yards of a large ship We cut through the enemy’s battalions. Children, do not be uvgrate- ful towards your parents. America was discovered towards the end of the 15th century by Christopher Columbus. I will cal] at your house this evening. When is your father at home? His son works at an - architect’s. The profession of comedian was infamous among the Romans, and honourable among the Greeks. When my sister has a home, I shall go and sec her. Page 22%.—1 doubt whether one can be happy when he is guilty of some fault. Of what use to you will be the possession of talent if you do not employ it, and if you do not apply yourself? When a person seeks only to do good to men, and does not offend heaven, he fears no- thing, neither during his life nor at his death. Do not go before I tell you. Come here, all of you, that I may distribute to you my orders. How great is the world! how magnificent it is! How many fine days have not fine evenings! How terrible and powerful is religion! For- tune, whether good or bad, whether transient or constant, can have no effect on the mind of the wise man. Whether you do it or not, you will be blamed. Whether you write or not, he will not come. Page 233.— My father will return from India in three years. We go to France every year. His wife has been ill all the year. We have had a very good year. It has rained the whole day. The days are longer in summer than in winter. I have not seen him for eight days. Our friends went away at six o’clock in the morning. What a fine morning! He comes to see me every morning. The mornings are cold. Are you invited to my uncle's evening party? Yes; but I shall | not be able to go, for I set out to-morrow evening. I work every SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 275 evening until eleven o’clock Do you know any one in this town? No; but I know where to go. Do you know if the Paris train has arrived? No, I cannot tell you. Shall you bring your horse? No; but I will bring all my children. Bring some coals, and then you shall take these letters to the post. My father will take us to the play this evening. Shall you walk or (shall you) drive? I think we shall drive, for we have already walked much to-day. We have walked all the morning in the forest. Will you come and have a sail? I prefer having a ride. The Prince of Wales married a Danish princess. The Queen of England married her cldest daughter to Prince Frederick of Prussia. They were married last week. Who married them ? The Bishop of Oxford. Have you seen my new house? Not yet; is it a new house ? Yes; it has never been inhabited. Switzerland is a very mountainous region ; the country there is very beautiful. Your country is heaven. It is glorious to die for one’s country. We generally spend four or five months in the country, and the rest of the year in town. Is your mother at home? No, sir; she is out. Do not lose your time. I saw her yesterday for the first time. Each time he comes he brings me something. We have slept at the Hotel du Louvre. Did you sleep well? 1 always sleep well when T ain tired. My brother pnd I sleep in the same room. 276 FREE EXERCISES FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 2 Good morning, sir; how do you do'? Very well, I thank you: and how are you ? Pretty? well Where are you going so early? I am going to the Bank. I thought it was not yet opened. Yes; it is nearly® ten o’clock. I did not think it was so late. Iam going to fetch some money for my journey. What journey? Did I not tell you* that T was going to* France? When do you start ? To-morrow morning, by the half-past eight o’clock train. Would you oblige me by taking® a small parcel to my brother, who lives in the rue de Rivoli? Certainly, with pleasure. When shall I send it to you? Send it this evening before nine o'clock. By what boat do you leave”? By the boat that sails® from Folkestone to Boulogne. How long® shall you be atsea? If the wind is favourable, we shall only be two hours. 2 Do you go by the express train from Boulogne ? Yes, if we arrive soon enough to catch it. I do not like the slow" trains, I am always so tired. Have you a return ticket? Yes, my ticket is avuil- able’ for a month; and I have sent my luggage by a goods'! train. At what hotel do you stop! in Paris? I think I shall take apartments this time'®. Have you any apartments to let? Yes, sir, I have"" seve- ral. What apartments do you wish to have'®? I want a furnished'® apartment. I have a first and a second floor, that I can let, (either) together or separate. One of them will be enough for me. Let us see the first floor ; is it furnished ? No, not? at present; but I can have 1 comment vous portez-vous? 2 Assez 3 près de 4 Est-ce que je ne vous ai pas dit 5 en 6 Voudriez-vous avoir l’obligeance de porter 7 partir 8 fait ie service 9 Com. bien de temps 19 attraper !! de petite vitesse 12 billet de retour 13 valable 14 train de marchandises 15 descendre 16 foisf. 17 j'en ai 1¥ désirez-vous !9 meublé 2 pas _ FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS. 277 it farnished in a few hours. What is the rent ? A hundred and twenty-five francs a month*. It is very dear. How much do you ask for the second floor ? I cannot let it under” ninety francs a month. I will give you eighty. Very well. When do you wish to take pos- session of i*2? I intend to come (and) sleep®! here to-night. 3 Can you recommend me a good tailor? Yes; go to® my tailor, he will please you®. I want” a coat, a waistcoat, and a pair of trow- sers ; show me your patterns. I have all sorts of colours, and of the finest cloth. I like this light blue®®, but that colour soon fades. It is a colour which is much in” fashion. What do you think of this green ? I like black best. What will you charge for a coat of this cloth? Ninety-five francs, lined with® silk. Take my measure, but remember that 1 will not have the coat too long. When will it be ready ? You shail have it, at latest, next Saturday. Do not disappoint me, for®! 1 am invited to a dinner (on) that day? at the English ambassador's. You may rely on it. At what o’clock do you want-it*? I must have it, at latest, at six o'clock. I will be at your house® at five o’clock. 4 Will you stay and dine with us to-day? You are very kind, madam, I accept with pleasure; but I shall be obliged to leare®™ you early, as I promised to be back®® before ten o’clock. You may go when you please®. At what o’clock do you dine ? We dine at seven o'clock. Will you allow me, then, to go (and) wash my* hands ? The servant will show you the room. John, take this gentleman to"! the spare'? bedroom. Will you have some hot water? 1f you please, and some soap too; I do not see any*® on the washstand. What is that bell? It is the dinner-bell ; but it is only the first bell", you have a quarter of an hour ¢* prepare yourself. The dinner is always served at seven o’clock precisely. Shall I show you the dining-room ? It is the first door to the left. 5 Do you learn French ? Yes, I have been studying it the last six months. Do you find it difficult ? Yes, rather'® difficult, especialy the grammar. Is your pronunciation good ? My master says it is good ; but I had much trouble” in the beginning. It is a very useful language, especially to people*® who travel much; it is now spoken in every country in Europe. Yes, I know it”. Ilow many lessons « 2 par mois 224 moinsde 23 en 2! coucher 2 chez 2 vous cn serez content 27 11 me faut 28 bleu clair 29a la 30 doublé de 3!car 32Ce jour-là 33 vous le faut-il 34 chez vous 9% quitter 36 de retour 37 vous en aller 38 voudrez 39 me laver lcs “© conduire 4) dans 42 d’ami “en 44 le premier coup 4° pour “Gun peu 47 peine Ww pour les gens 9 je le sais 278 FRENCH EXERCISES. weck® do you take? Ihave a lesson every day, and I go three or four times a week to the theatre, in order to hear good pronunciation. I have no doubt! that you will soon speak? French fluently and elegantly. When do you think of going* to England? Not* before the month of May. I hope you will often come (and) see us, and talk French with me ; #5 will be a very good lesson for you. I am very much obliged to you. I can now read and understand all the French works, whether? in prose or” poetry. 6 Do you like shooting®? Yes; but I prefer fox-hunting. Do you often follow the hunt ? I generally go® once a' week, and I would go oftener if I had time. Has not your brother-in-law a pack of hounds ? He had" one, but he (has) sold it. Has he any dogs now? I think he has (en a) three or four. How many horses has he? He has four, two grey horses for his carriage, a saddle-horse for himself, and a pony for his son. Have you seen his stables ? Yes; I saw them last year, and they are really beautiful. Whose'? house is this, that we see on the top of the hill ? It is a rich merchant of London who (has) built it for his family. Do you Anow'® him? No; I only know him by"* sight. I see him every morning going to the railway station. Are there’ many good families in this neighbourhood? We have about half a dozen of them (er) that we know. 7 Have you travelled much? Yes; I have travelled in many countries. I have been to France, Germany'?, Switzerland'®, Italy, and even to Turkey. I am very fond of" travelling. Do you like travel- ling by sea? I should like it very much, if I were not so sick ; but I must confess® I prefer travelling by railway. I suppose you have scen the celebrated cathedral of Strasburg, with its marvellous steeple? Yes; and I have seen many other things well worthy of notice”! : such as Westminster Abbey, proud of the tombs of its kings; the cathedral of Rheims, with stones transparent like lace ; and the church of St. Peter, at Rome, with its wonderful dome. Have you ever seen the banks of the Rhine? They are magnificent. I think everything” is very cheap® in Germany. We stayed a fortnight* at Hamburg, in one of the best hotels, and we found the charges very moderate. You can live well for five francs a day. Spar semaine ! Je ne doute pas Zne parliez bientôt 3aller “Pas 5ce Ssoit 7soû en #chasseaufusil 2Jyvais !°par !enavait !2 Aqui !3 connaitre ! de 15 Y a-t-il 16 dans beaucoup de 7 Allemagne !8Suisse 19 J'aime beaucoup ic dus avouer 2! de remarque 22tout 2 3d trés-bon marché 2 quinze jours B prix BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCIIES. 279 8 When shall you go back to England? I do not think I shall return before next summer ; Z want?" to know German well before I leave the country. I think you speak it very well for the short? time you have been here. Shall you leave your children in school, or shall you take” them with you? They must®™ stay twelve months more where they are, in order to know the language well, and to speck it corrcetly. My eldest son is a very good linguist ; he speaks three lan- gaages fluently. How long® has he been in Germany ? It will be” two years next January. How®* time passes! I should never have thought that it was® so long. The best way to learn a language well and quickly is to go (and) live in the country. What town would you recommend in Germany ? [I think Dresden” is one of the best ; there are some very good schools, and the people speak a very good German. I will now give you a few biographical sketches of the most eminent French writers, from the age of Louis XIV. to the present day” + BICGRAPHICAL SKETCHES. 9 Pierre Corneille, born in 1606, died in 1684.—This great poet, born at Rouen in the beginnicg of the seventeenth century, was the first dramatic author of eminence among the French. To many defects, he joins beauties of the highest order‘; and although he does not possess the pure and delicate taste of Racine, and is inferior to kim* in the art of painting the tender passions, he has more fire and majesty. Z7e flights*? of his imagination are sublime ; the heroes whose characters he delineates are truly great, and his masterpiece, the “Cid,” will ever remain on the French stage*® as a fine monument of his genius. 10 Jean Racine, born in 1639, died in 1699.—Racine studied early, and with care, the Greek tragic poets, and perfected his taste after that reading. This poet is remarkable for the elegance of his style, and for the art with which he delineates the tender passions. His poetry is highly harmonious, correct, and graceful. He is re- proached with* too much sameness in the plot'® of his plays, and in the character of his heroes ; but the beauties he displays are so fur’ supe- rior to his defects, that ke is allowed" the first rank amongst the French "2% retourner 2 je veux 28le peu de 29 emmener 30 Ilfaut qu’ils 3! encore 32 Combien de temps 3311 y aura 3% Comme 35ily avait 36 moyen 37 Dresde 38 depuis 39 jusqu’à nos jours 49 de premier ordre 4! qu’il lui soit inférieur 4? élans 3 gcénef. 41 peint 45 On lui reproche “intrigue “si 4° on lui accorde 280 FRENCII EXERCISES. tragic poets, which is, however, contested by Voltaire. Racine’s son has supported the glory of his father. 1lis poem on religion contains passages of the greatest beauty. His odes are much esteemed, and some of them worthy of Jean-Baptiste Rousseau. 11 Jean-Baptiste Poquelin de Molière was born in Paris in 1622, and died there in 1673. le carly began to play comedies, and travelled in the provinces for twelve years before he began to play in Paris, where he became so celebrated. It is" a received opinion that his comedies surpass the best performances of that kind amongst the ancients; and Voltaire calls him the best comic poet that ever existed. The fertility of his genius was astonishing : he spent the greater part of his time in writing comedies (both) in prose and in verse, which were much applauded. His last comedy was the “ Malade Ima- ginaire” (the Hypochondriac). Whilst Moli¢re was performing the principal character“ of that play, and pretending to be dead’, he was seized with an illness, of which he died the next day. 12 Jean de la Fontaine, who is, perhaps, the most genuine? of all our writers, was born, 1621, at Château-Thierry, in Champagne, a ycar before Molière. As (a) fabulist, he has surpassed every other author, and the name of “ The inimitable La Fontaine” has been given to him 03® common consent. His fables are perfectly natural, without the least affectation, and replete with wit. Ile was a man of extreme simplicity of manners', full of candour and probity; but in society he was always absent and thoughtful, so much so® that he often spoke to his friends without knowing them. Mme. de Sévigné used to say that La Fontaine's fables resembled a pottleS of strawberries, of which we begin by picking oul’ the best, and finish by eating them all. He died in 1625. 13 Boileau Despréaux, born in 1636, died March 13th, 1711, is one of the most celebrated poets of the age of Louis XIV. He is the Juvenal of the French, and in his satires he is far® superior to the Roman writer in point of delicacy and chasteness of style. His productions gained him® great reputation, particularly his “ Art of Poetry,” his * Epistles,” and his * Lutrin.” No French poet has been so correct in his style, and few equal him in strength and harmony. It has been said" of him, that his verses will be read even when the language is obsolete, and will be the last ruins of it. 49 C’est 50 rôle m. ! contrefesait le mort Znaturel Sd'un * mœurs * à un tel point S panier 7 choisir Sbien 9 lui acquirent 10 On a dit BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES. 281 14 Bossuet and Bourdaloue.— Bossuet was born with much more genius than Bourdaloue; however, the sermons of the latter are better written, better finished, and more methodical ; whick'' ought not to surprise us, since they were the only object of his literary labours. If we compare one scrmon with another, Bourdaloue will have the advantage ; but, if we compare passages, he will lose greatly by the comparison. Bossuet is more luminous, original, and rapid ; his style is elevated and strong, his familiarity is noble, the soarings' of his imagination are sublime, his descriptions lofty and striking, his transi- tions sudden, and yet always natural. He reveals profound truths, which are only found by*® diving deeply into our heart ; the majesty of his thoughts, and his strength of expressicn, are truly his own!!. He frightens the sinner, and gives him over to remorse to complete his con- version. Bossuet was born at Dijon, in 1627 ; and Bourdaloue at Bourges, in 1632. ‘They both died in the year 1704. 15 Fénelon (François de Salignac de la Mothe) was born in 1651, at the castle of Fénelon, in Périgord, and died at Cambray in 1715, the same year as Louis XIV., whose grandson he had educated. He preached with success from'* the age of nineteen, and wrote many works which are admired for their beauty of style ; but that which has gained him’ ® the greatest reputation is his * Télémaque,” in which he has displayed all the riches of the French language. No work had ever a greater reputation ; it is written in a lively, simple, natural, and elegant manner ; its features are well imagined, the moral sublime, and the political maxims it contains all tend to the happiness of man- kind. 16 Massillon (Jean-Baptiste), born in 1663, at Hyère, in Pro- vence, died in 1742. This divine is justly considered one of the best and most eloquent of French preachers. Louis XIV. once said of him, “ When I hear other orators, I am pleased with them'” ; but after having heard you, I am displeased with'® myself.” Tt is impossible to read his sermons without becoming better. His style is mild and elegant, and the effect of his declamation was irresistible. 17 Voltaire (François-Marie AROUET DE), born in 1694, died in “ Paris in 1778. This author is considered the most extraordinary genius that France ever produced ; he has written (both) in verse and prose, on almost every subject, and generally with great success. } cequi !Zélans !3 qu’on ne trouve qu’en MA lui dd 16 lw e acquis !7 cop tent d’cux !8 inécontent de , 282 FRENCII EXERCISES. From" his earliest youth he showed® proofs of the acuteness of his wit and brilliant imagination ; such was the precocity of his genius, that at twelve years of age his poetical essays would have done® honour to his riper age’. His tragedies are masterpieces: although below Molière in the comic style®, his comedies are replete with wit. His histories of Charles XII. and Peter the Great are models of historical composi- tion. His “ Henriade ” is a fine epic poem, in which all the characters are well supported®, the passions skilfully laid open, the descriptions striking, and ac~ompanied with* all the enthusiasm of fine poetry : the subject, however, was ill-chosen, being too near® our age ; it shackled his creative imagination, and destroyed the illusion we indulge in when® reading Tusso, Ariosto, Homer, and Virgil. The most perfect of his writings® is his fugitive poetry®, in which he has no rival. 18 Rousseau (Jean-Jacques), the son of a poor watchmaker, was born in 1712, at Geneva, and died in 1778, a few weeks after Voltaire, The life of this strange man and eccentric genius offers an astonishing series of vicissitudes, caused by his disordered imagination. He was of a proud and fretful* disposition®, imagining that there was a con- spiracy of men of letters against him, and that all men were his enemies. No Frenchman, perhaps, equalled him in the eloquence of style. All the secret recesses®® of his heart are laid open*” in his “ Confessions ; ” he casts aside*® the veil which covers hypocrisy, pride, and self-love, and appears a strange mixture of good and evil. There never was a” more paradoxical writer: he declaimed against theatres, and wrote plays; he expressed his contempt for French music, and composed some* which is considered" very good. In his writings sublimity is joined to little- ness ; deep penetration to childish simplicity ; the height'* of reason to folly. Rousseau attacks the Christian religion, praises the Gospel, and draws a*® most beautiful picture of its Divine Author. 19 Montesquieu, born in 1689, died m 1755. His first literary production is entitled “Persian Letters,” and gave proofs of a fine genius. His greatest work, the © Spirit of Laws,” was mach criticised, but has placed its author in the first rank among political writers. Montesquieu has examined his subject with so much clearness and judgment, that his book ought rather to have been named the Code of 18 Ds donna 7! à l'âge de douze ans 22 auraient fait Z âgemûr 2% genre ma. 25 soute:us 26 développées 27de 28trop près de Z'enchaina “à laquelle on s'alandonne en 3! le T'asse, l’Arioste, Homère, ct Virgile 37 ouvrages 33 poésies f. ple St)nquiet 35caractère 36 replis m.pl. 37 mis à découvert 58 il déchire 39 li n’y à jamais eu 4 ilen a composé %! passe pour 4? 1c comble © fait le i BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCIIES, 283 the Laws of Nations. His ‘ Considerations on the Causes of the Rise and Fall of the Romans ” is an excellent work. 20 Buffon, the greatest naturalist of modern times, was born in . 1707, at Montbar, in Burgundy, and died in Paris in 1788. This writer has sometimes erred in his opinions, particularly in his epochs of nature, which he freely confessed, and saw without displeasure the refutations which appeared. His ¢ Natural History ” is written in the most chaste and elegant style, and with surprising eloquence ; it pre- sents a mass, or rather’ an invaluable treasure of facts and observa- tions. He is, perhaps, the most astonishing interpreter of nature that ever existed. 21 Chateaubriand (Frangois-René-Auguste, vicomte de), a statesman, and one of our finest writers, was born'’ at St. Malo in 1768. His father intended him for the navy; but he showed an in- vincible repugnance for that branch of the service. His early" years were passed in solitude and ardent study, from which the attractions of the capital could not divert him®. In 1791, whilst the French re- volution was raging’, he set out for America, where he remained (for) some time, and paid? his respects to General Washington. But having read in an English journal (of) the flight of the royal family of France, and their arrest, he returned with his genius awakened® by the contem- ° plation of nature, as seen® in the wild magnificence of American Savan- nahs, lakes, rivers, and forests. During the Reign of Terror, the young viscount came to live in® London, where he suffered suc/® extreme poverty, that he declares himself to have passed three days without food. Tt was soon after this that he published his “ Génie du Christianisme,” a work which produced a prodigious effect. In 1800 he ventured to return to France ; and his fame becoming more spread by “ Atala ” and “ René.” the first consul, Bonaparte, sent for him” and appointed him, in 1803, secretary to® the legation at Rome, and then minister to Switzerland. The publication of his “ Martyrs,” a sort of prose epic?, confirmed his reputation. In 1806 he paëd'® that pilgrimage to Jeru- salem which produced his finest work, under the title of “ Itinéraire de Paris à Jérusalem.” When Bonaparte was sent to Elba, Chateau- briand, in order to confirm the-new zeal of the country towards the Bourbons, published his “ Bonaparte et les Bourbons.” Louis XVIII. pronounced it worth an army", and, appointed the author ambas- # ceque “° plutôt *° qui ait jamais existé 47 naquit ** 4 “*’ premières “ le dis- traire ! sévissait * présenta ®exalté * telle qu’il l’avait vue “demeurer à “si Ylefitappeler “de ?° poème épique en prose ‘fit "! déclare qu'il lui avait valu une armée, 284 FRENCII EXERCISES. sador to Sweden. He successively represented France at Berlin, London, Verona, and Rome. Besides the works already mentioned, he published several others, “ Les Natchez,” “ Etudes Historiques,” &c. Whatever opinion may be pronounced on his writings, it is certain that they produced great influence on his age'>. He was idolised by the youth of France. He died July 10th, 1848, a few months after the proclamation of the republic he had predicted. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. A Lesson. 22 A friend of Dean Swift one day sent him a turbot, as a present, by a servant who had frequently been on similar errands', but who had never received the most trifling mark of the dean’s generosity. Having gained admission, he opened the door of the study, and abruptly putting down the fish, cried very rudely, Master's has sent you a turbot.” “ Young man,” said the dean, rising from bis easy chair, “is that the way'® you deliver your message? Let me teach you better manners. Sit down in my chair; we will change situations, and I will show you how to behave in future.” The boy sat down, and the dean, going to the door, came up to'" the table with a’® respectful pace, and making a low bow", said, “ Sir, my master presents his kind compliments, hopes you are well, and requests your acceptance of a small present.” “ Does he 2” replied the boy ; “return him my best thanks, and there's half-a-crown for yourself.” The dean, thus drawn into an act of generosity, laughed heartily, and gave the boy a crown for his wit. Napoleon and the British Sailor. 23 Whilst the French troops were encamped at Boulogne, publie attention was much excited by the daring attempt at escape®* made by an English sailor. This person having escaped from the dept, and. gained the borders of the sea, the woods near which” served him fo concealment, constructed, with no other* instrument than a knife, a 12 sidcle m. 13 souvent fait de pareilles commissions 14 Ayant été introduit 15 Mon maître !S est-ce ainsi que 17 s’avanga vers 18dun 19 un profond salut 20 vous pri d’accepter 7! Vraiment! 22d’¢vasion * dent les bois voisins 7} sans autre MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 285 beat entirely of the bark of trees. When the weather was fuir, he mounted a tree and looked out for the English flag ; and having at last olserved® a British cruiser, he ran to the shore with his boat on his back, and was about to?* trust himself in his frail vessel to the waves, when he was pursued, arrested, and loaded with chains. Everybody in the army was anxious to® sce the boat, and Napoleon, having at length heard of the affair, sent for®® the sailor and interrogated him. “ You must,” said Napoleon, “have had a great desire to see your country again, since you could resolve to trust yourself on the open sea in so frail a bark. I suppose you have left a sweetheart there ?” « No,” said the sailor, “ but a poor infirm mother, whom I was anxious to® see.” “ And you shall see her,” said Napoleon, giving at the same time orders to set him at liberty, and to bestow upon him a considerable sum of money for his mother, observing that “she must be a good mother who had so good a son.” Fhe Old Man and his Ass. 2% An old man and a little boy were driving an ass to the next market to sell. “ What a fool is this fellow™!” says a man upon the road®, “to be trudging it on jfoot*® with his sou, that® this ass may go light.” The old man hearing this, set his boy upon the ass, and went whistling by the side of him. ¢ Why, sirrak®!” cried a second man to the boy, “ is it fit for you to be riding, while your poor old father is walking on foot?” The father, upon this rebuke, took down his boy from the ass, and mounted himself. “ Do you see,” says a third, “ how the luzy old knave™ rides along® upon his beast, while his poor little boy is almost crippled with walking®?” The old man 10 sooner heard this, than he took up his son behind him®. “ Pray, honest friend,” says a fourth, “is that ass your own?” “Yes,” says tiie man. “ One would not have thought so,” replied the other, “by your loading him" so un- mercifully. You and your son are better able to carry the poor beast than he you.” “ Anything to please,” says the owner ; and alighting with his son, they tied the legs of the ass together, and by the help of a po'e endeavoured to carry him upon their shoulders over the bridge that led to the town. This was so entertaining a sight, that the people 2 découvert 26 était sur le point de curieux de 28 fit venir 29 désirais 30 Quel imbécille ! 3! passant m. 32 d’aller ainsi péniblement A pied 32 afin que 3! marcher i son aise 35 Comment maraud! 36 ce vieux fainéant 37 chemine 3* n’en peut plus à force de marcher 39 en croupe 40 Dites-moi, mon ami *!en vous voyant le charger 4 Tout & votre service, monsieur 285 FRENCII EXERCISES. ran in crowds to laugh at it, till the ass, conceiving a dislike to the over-complaisance of his master, burst asunder the cords that tied him, slipped from the pole, and tumbled into the river. The poor old man made the best of his way home®, ashamed and vexed that", by endeca- vouring to please everybody, he had pleased nobody, and lost his ass into" the bargain. — ( World.) Anecdote of Frederic IE. 25 This great king, being one day very busy in his study, rang the bell several times, and nobody came. He opened the door, and found his page asleep in an arm-chair. He advanced towards“ him, and was going to awake him, when he perceived the corner of a note peeping out of* his pocket. Ieeling curious to* know its contents, ke took’ and read it. It was a letter from the young man’s mother, who thanked him for sending her® part of his salary to relieve her in her poverty. She concluded by telling him that God would bless him for such con- duct. The king, after reading® the note, returned softly to his room, took a purse full of ducats, and slipped it with the note into the pocket of the page: then going back to* his room, he rang so hard that the page awoke, and went ün°. “You have slept well,” said the king to him. The page wished to excuse himself. In his confusion, he put his hand into his pocket, and felt the purse with astonishment. He drew it out, turned pale’, and looked at the king, shedding a flood of tears, without being able to” utter a word. “ What is it?” said the king; “what is the matter with you® 2” “ Ah! sire,” said the young man, fall- ing on his knees, “somebody wishes to ruin me. I do not know what money this is which I find in my pocket.” ¢ My friend,” said Frederic, “ God often sends us blessings® when we are asleep. Send the money to your mother, salute her on my part, and tell her that I will take care both of her and you.” Rural Life in England. 26 The stranger who would form' a correct opinion of the English - character, must not confine his observations to the metropolis. He 43 s’en retourna chez lui au plus vite 44 de ce que “5 pardessus 46 s’approcha de 47 allait 48 qui sortait de 49 Curieux de! ille prit ? de lui avoir envoyé 3 après l’avoir lu 4 étant retourné 5 entra © pâlit 7 sans pouvoir S qu’avez-vous? ? bien- faits 19 voudrait se former MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 287 must go forth into the country ; he must sojourn in the villages and tamlets ; he must visit castles, villas, farm-houses, cottages ; he must wander through parks and gardens ; along hedges and green lanes; he must loiter about country churches ; attend wakes and fairs, and other rural festivals; and cope with the people in all their'? conditions, and all their habits and humours. In some countries the large cities absorb the wealth and fashion of the nation : they are the only fixed abodes of elegant and intelligent society, and the country is inhabited almost entirely by boorish pea- santry. In England, on the contrary, the metropolis is a mere gather- ing place'', or general rendezvous of the polite! classes, where they devote a small portion of the year to a kurry' of gaiety and dissipation, and having indulged this" carnival, return again to the apparently mor» congenial habits of rural life. The various orders of society are ther.- fore diffused over the whole surface of the kingdom, and the most retired neighbourhoods'® afford specimens of the different ranks. The English, in fact, are strongly gifted with the rural feeling’. They possess a quick sensibility to the*® beauties of nature, and « keen relish for the pleasures and enjoyments of the country. This passion seems inherent in them. Even the inhabitants of cities, born and brought up among brick walls and bustling streets®, enter with facility into rural habits, and evince a turn® for rural occupation. The merchant has his snug retreat in the vicinity of the metropolis, where he often dis- plays as much pride and zeal in the cultivation of his flower-garden, and the maturing of his fruits, as (he does) in the conduct of his busi- ness and the success of his commercial enterprises. Even those less fortunate individuals, who are doomed to pass their lives in the midst of din ars traffic, contrive to have something that shall remind them of the green aspect of nature. In the most dark and dingy quarters of the city, the drawing-room window resembles frequently a bank of Sflowers®'; every spot capable® of vegetation has its grass-plot and flower-bed ; and every square its mimic® park, laid out with picturesque taste and gleaming with refreshing verdure. Those who see the Englishman only in town, are apt to form an un- favourable opinion of his social character. He is either absorbed in business or distracted by the thousand engagements that dissipate time, ‘1 fêtes de village 12 ses !3 caractère m. !4 lieu de réunion 15 élevées 16 au tour- billon 17 après avoir joui des plaisirs de cette espèce de 18 licux 19 ont un profond sentiment des charmes de la campagne 20 Ils sont extrêmement sensibles aux 2! ilg aiment passionnément 22 dans le fracas des rues 73 un goût prononcé 24 un parterre 2 susceptible 76 artificiel JRE FRENCH EXERCISES. thought, and feeling, in this huge metropolis: he has, therefore, too commonly a look of hurry and abstraction”. Wherever he happens to be, he is on the point of going somewhere else ; at the moment he is talking on one subject, his mind is wandering to another; and while paying a friendly visit®® he is calculating how he shall economise time so as to pay the other visits allotted to the morning®. An immense metropolis like London is calculated to make. men selfish and un- interesting. In their casual and transient meetings, they can but deal briefly in commonplaces®. They present but the cold superficies of character—its rich and genial qualities have no time to be warmed into a glow®. It is in the country that the Englishman gives scope to his natural feelings. He breaks loose® gladly from the cold formalities and negi- tive civilities of town ; throws off his habits of shy reserve, and becomes joyous and free-hearted. ile manages to collect around him all the conveniences and elegancies of polite life, and to banish its restraint. 1lis country seat abounds with every requisite, either for studious retirement, tasteful gratification, or rural exercise. Books, paintings, music, horses, dogs, and sporting implements of all kinds, are at hand. 1le puts no constraint either upon his guests or himself, but in the true spirit of hospitality provides the means of enjoyment, and leaves every one to partake according to his inclination. — W AsHINGTON IRVING. Louis XI., King of France, and Fhilippe de Commines, 27 Louis XI. They say that you have written my history.— Com- mines. It is true, sire; and I have spoken of you as a good subject ought to do.— Louis. It is said that you have related many things which cannot but®® displease me.— Com. That may be**: but, after all, 1 have drawn® a very favourable picture of you. Was I to be a flatterer instead of an historian 7— Louis. You ought to have spoken of me as a faithful subject, who loves his king and has his glory at heart.— Com. We seek for" truth in history, and not fine compliments.— Louis. Why must there be people” who have an itch for writing? The dead should be left in peace, and their memory should not be stained.— Com. The good and bad qualities of kings, their virtues and their vices, ought 27 un air inquiet et réveur 28 pendant qu’il est chez un ami qu’il doit rendre dans la matinée ‘ 30 ils ne peuvent que débiter à la hâte quelques phrases banales 3! de se montrer dans tout leur éclat 32s'affranchit 33 ne peuvent que 3% C'est possible 35 fait 36 Nous cherchonsla 37 faut-il qu’il y ait des gens MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 289 faithfully to be transmitted to posterity, in order to serve as lessons and examples. — Louis. What! ought not history to®$ respect kings ?— Com. Let kings®° respect themselves, and they will escape censure. They" who wish to be praised after their death, have but"! one resource, which is, to do good while they live —FÉNELON. The Burning of Moscow (1812). 28 On the 14th September, 1812, while the rear-guard of the Rus- sians were in the act of evacuating Moscow, Napoleon reached the hill called the Mount of Salvation, because it is there that the natives kneel and cross themselves*® at first sight of the Holy City. : Moscow seemed lordly and striking as ever, with the steeples of its thirty churches, and its copper domes glittering in the sun; its palaces of eastern architecture mingled with trees and surrounded with gardens ; and its Kremlin, a huge triangular mass of towers, something between? a palace and a castle, which rose like a citadel out of the general mass of groves and buildings. But no#** a chimney sent up smoke®, not a man appeared on the battlements or at the gates. Napoleon gazed, every moment expecting to see a train of beurded*® boyards arriving to fling themselves at his feet, and place their wealth at his disposal. His first exclamation was, “ Behold at last' that celebrated city!” His next's, © It was full time.” His army, less regardful of the past or the future, fixed their eyes on the goal of their wishes, and a shout of “ Moscow ! Moscow!” passed from rank to* rank. . . . . When he entered the gates of Moscow, Bonaparte, as if unwilling to encounter the sight of the empty streets, stopped immediately on enter- ing the® first suburb. His troops were quartered in the desolate city. During the first (few) hours after their arrival, an obscure! rumour, which could not be traced?, but one of those which are sometimes found to get abroad before the approach of some awful certainty, announced that the city would be endangered by fire in the course of the night. The report seemed to arise from those evident circumstances which rendered the event probable; but no one took any notice of it, until at midnight, when the soldiers were startled from their quarters by the report that the town was in flames. The memorable conflagration 38 l’histoire ne doit-elle pas 39 Que les rois 40 Ceux 4! n’ont que 42 font le signe de la croix 43 tenant le milieu entre 44pas 45 ne fumait 46à longue barbe 47 La vpilà done enfin 48la seconde 49en 503 entrée du ! sourd 2 a l’origine duquel @ ne put remonter oO 290 FRENCH EXERCISES. began amongst the coachmakers’ warehouses and workshops in thi Bazaar, or general market, which was the most rich district of thy city. It was imputed to accident, and the progress of the flames wal subdued by the exertions of the French soldiers. Napoleon, who ha been roused by the tumult, hurried to the spot, and when the alarm seemed at an end, he retired, not to his former quarters in the subur| DS but to the Kremlin, the hereditary palace of the only sovereign whon he had ever treated as an® equal, and over whom his successful* arms had now attained such an apparently immense superiority. Yet h did not suffer himself to be dazzled by the advantage he had obtained but availed himself of the light of the blazing® Bazaar to write to the Emperor proposals of peace with his own hand. They were despatch ed by a Russian officer of rank®, who had been disabled by indisposition | from following the army. But no answer was ever returned. Next day the flames had disappeared, and the French officers em-: ployed themselves in selecting out of the deserted palaces of Moscow that which best pleased the fancy of each for residence. At night the: flames again arose in the north and west quarters of the city. As the greater part of the houses were built of wood, the conflagration spread with the most dreadful rapidity. This was at first imputed to the blazing brands and sparkles which were carried by the wind ; but at} length it was observed that as often as” the wind changed—and it changed three times in that terrible night—new flames broke always, foriié | in that direction where the existing gale was calculated to® direct them on the Kremlin. These horrors were increased by the chance of explo-: sion. There was, though as yet unknown to the French, a magazine of powder in the Kremlin ; besides that, a park of artillery, with its! ammunition, was drawn up under the Emperor’s window. Morning came, and with it a dreadful scene. During the whole night, the me- tropolis had glared with an untimely and unnatural’ light. It was now covered with a thick and suffocating atmosphere of almost palpable smoke. The flames defied the efforts of the French soldiery; and i is said that the fountains of the city had been rendered inaccessible, th water-pipes cut, and the fire-engines destroyed or carried off. Then came the reports of fire-balls having been found" burning o deserted houses ; of men and women that, like demons, had been see openly spreading flames, and who were said"? to be furnished with con bustibles for rendering their dreadful work more secure. Sever Sen 4victorieuses Sen flammes “distingué = 7 toutes les fois que 8 éclatai 0 toujours 9 d’où le vent pouvait 10 lugubre et surnaturelle 17 qu'on avait t ou des globes enflammés 12 qu’on disait MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 291 wretches against whom such acts had been charged were seized upon, and, probably without much inquiry, were shot on the spot. While it was almost impossible to keep'® the roof of the Kremlin clear of the burning brands which the wind showered down, Napoleon watched from the windows the course of the fire which devoured his fair con- quest, and the exclamation burst from him", “ These are indeed Scy- thians 15” The equinoctial gales rose higher and higher upon the'® third night, and extended the flames, with which there was no longer any human power of contending. At (the dead hour of) midnight, the Kremlin itself was found to be on fire. A soldier of the Russian police, charged with being the incendiary, was turned over to the summary vengeance'® of the Imperial Guard. Bonaparte was then, at length, persuaded by the entreaties of all around him'® to relinquish his quarters in the Kremlin, to which, as the visible mark of his conquest, he had seemed to cling with the tenacity of a lion holding a fragment of his prey. He encountered both difficulty and danger in retiring from the palace, and before he could gain the city-gate, he had to traverse with his suite streets arched with fire’, and in which the very air they breathed was suffocating. At length he gained the open country, and took up his abode in a palace of the Czar’s, called Petrowsky, about a Frenck league from the city. As he looked back on the fire, which, under the influence of the autumnal wind, swelled and surged round the” Kremlin, like an infernal ocean around a sable Pandemonium, he could not suppress the ominous expression, This bodes us great misfortune.” The fire continued to triumph unopposed, and consumed in a few days what it had cost centuries to raise. “Palaces and temples,” says a Russian author, “monuments of art, and miracles of luxury, the remains of ages which had passed away, and those which had been the creation of yesterday ; the tombs of ancestors, and the nursery-cradles™ of the present generation, were indiscriminately® destroyed. Nothing was left of Moscow save the remembrance of the city, and the deep resolution to avenge its fall*.”— WALTER SCOTT. 13 (keep clear) débarrasser !4et il lui échappa cette exclamation 15 ce sont -des Scythes 16 de plus en plus la !7 aucune force humaine ne pouvait plus !S8livré à a vengeance 19 de tout ce qui l’entoure 7° recouvertes par les flammes 2 s’élevaient en tourbillons des toitsdu 22 berceau 23 tont fut 24 d’en venger la chute o2 292 FRENCH EXERCISES. The Normans. - 3 29 The Normans were then the foremost race of Christendom. Their valour and ferocity had made them conspicuous® among the rovers whom Scandinavia had sent forsh to ravage Western Europe. Their sails were long the terror of both coasts of the channel’. Their arms were repeatedly” carried far into the heart of the Carlovingian empire, i and were victorious under the walls of Maestricht and Paris. At length one of the feeble heirs of Charlemagne ceded to the strangers a 1 fertile province, watered by a noble river, and contiguous to the sea, which was their favourite element. In that province they founded a mighty state, which gradually extended its influence over the neigh- bouring principalities of Brittany and Maine. Without laying aside® that dauntless valour which had been the terror of every land”, from the Elbe to the Pyrenees, the Normans rapidly acquired all, and more than all, the knowledge® and refinement which they found in the country where they had settled®. Their courage secured their territory against foreign invasion. They established internal order, such as had been long unknown® in the Frank empire. They embraced Christianity, and with Christianity they learned a great part of what the clergy had to teach. They abandoned their native speeci*® and adopted the French tongue, in which the Latin was the predominant element. They speedily raised their new language to a dignity and importance which it had never before possessed. They found it a barbarous jargon; they fixed it in writing, and they employed it in legislation, in poetry, and in romance®. They renounced that brutal intemperance to which all the other branches of the great German family were too much inclined. The polite luzury® of the Norman presented a striking con- trast fo% the coarse voracity and drunkenness of his Saxon and Danish neighbours. He loved to display his magnificence, not in huge piles™ of food and hogsheads‘® of strong drink, but in large and stately edifices, rich armour, gallant horses, choice falcons, well-ordered tournaments, banquets delicate rather than abundant, and wines remarkable rather for their exquisite flavour than for their intoxicating power. That chivalrous spirit which has exercised so powerful an influence on the polities, morals, and manners of all European nations, was found in the highest exaltation’ among the Norman nobles. 'Those nobles were dis- 25 les avaient rendus célèbres 2 Manche f. 27 à plusieurs reprises 28 se dépouiller 2 tout le pays 30 les connaissances 3! ils s’étaient établis 32 qui avait depuis lon temps été inconnu 33 langue maternelle 34 lesromans 5 le luxe raffiné 36 aves #7 dans des monzeaux 38tonnean 39 se trouvait au plus haut degré 3 ®ISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 293 tinguished® by their graceful bearing and insinuating address. They were distinguished*? also by their skill in negotiation, and by a natural eloquence which they assiduously cultivated. It was the boast of one of their historians that the Norman gentlemen were orators from the cradle. But their chief fame was derived®® from their military exploits. * Every country, from the Atlantic Ocean to the Dead Sea, witnessed the! prodigies of their discipline and valour. One Norman knight, at the head of a handful of warriors, scattered the Celts of Connaught. Another founded the monarchy of the Two Sicilies, and saw the emperors, (both) of the East and of the West, fly before his arms. A third, the Ulysses of the first Crusade, was invested by his fellow- soldiers with the sovereignty of Antioch; and a fourth, the Tancred whose name lives in the great poem of Tasso, was celebrated through Christendom as the bravest and most generous of the champions of the Holy Sepulchre. The vicinity of so remarkable a people early began to produce an effect on the public mind of England. Before the Conquest, English princes received their education in Normandy. English sees and English estates were bestowed on Normans. Norman-French was familiarly spoken in the palace of Westminster. The court of Rouen seems to have been to the court of Edward the Confessor what the court of Versailles long afterwards was to the court of Charles IL— Lorp Macauray, History of England. Execution of Mary Stuart. Mary Stuart, the Queen Dowager of France, and the hereditary Queen of Scotland, was, without any exception, the most beautiful and accomplished woman of her time. Her countenance was lovely; she was tall, well-formed, elegant in all her motions, skilled in the exercises of riding and dancing, and possessed of all the female accom- plishments which were fashionable at that period. She was beheaded in 1587, by order of her cousin Elizabeth, the Queen of England, after a captivity of nineteen years. 30 The two Earls of Shrewsbury and Kent came to Fotheringay Castle, and, being introduced to Mary, informed her of their commission, and desired her to prepare for death next morning at eight o’clock. She seemed nowise terrified, though somewhat surprised with the intelli- gence®. She said, with a cheerful and even a smiling countenance’, 49 se distinguaient 4! manières 42 remarquable “3 venait de 4 furent témoins dr 15 dans toute la 46 de cette nouvelle 47 air 294 FRENCH EXERCISES. that she did not think the queen, her sister, would have consented to her death, or have executed the sentence against a person not subject to the laws and jurisdiction of England. “ But as such is her will,” said she, “death, which puts an end to all my miseries, will be to me most welcome ; nor can I esteem that soul worthy the felicities of heaven which cannot support the body under the horrors of the last passage to these blissful mansions”. When the earls had left her she ordered supper to be hastened, that she might have the more” leisure after (it) to finish the few affairs which remained to her in this world, and to prepare for her passage to another. She supped sparingly, as her manner usually was', and her wonted cheerfulness did not even desert her on this occasion. She comforted her servants under the affliction which overwhelmed them, and which was too violent for them to conceal it from her. Towards morning she arose and dressed herself in a rich habit of silk velvet, the only one she had reserved to herself. Having passed into the hall, where was erected the scaffold, covered with black, she saw, with an undismayed countenance, the executioners and all the preparations of death. Here her old servant?, Sir Andrew Melvil, took an affecting leave of her’. The warrant for her execution was then read to her; and during the ceremony she was silent, but showed in her behaviour an indifference and unconcern, as if the busi ness had nowise regarded her. Before the executioners performed their office, the Dean of Peterborough stepped forth*; and though the queen frequently told him that he needed not concern himself about her, that she was settled in the ancient Catholic and Roman religion, and that she meant to lay down her life in® defence of that faith, he still thought it his duty to persist in his lectures and exhortations. She now began, with the aid of her two women, to disrobe herself; and the executioner also lent his hand to assist them. She smiled, and said that she was not accustomed to undress herself before so large a com- pany, nor to be served by such valets. Her servants seeing her in this condition, ready to lay her head upon the block, burst into tears and lamentations. She turned about to them, put her finger upon her lips as a sign of imposing silence upon them®, and having given them her blessing, desired them to pray for her. One of her maids, whom she had appointed for that purpose, covered her eyes with a handkerchief; she laid herself down without any sign of fear or trepidation, and her head was severed from her body at two strokes” by the executioner. He instantly held it up to the spectators, streaming with blood and 18 me sera des plus agréables 49 demeure f. 50 plus de ! selon sa coutume 2 ser= viteur 3 lui fit des adieux touchants 4 se présenta ° de donner sa vie pour % comme pour leur imposer silence 7 au second coup MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 285 agitated with the convulsions of death. The Dean of Peterborough alone exclaimed, “So perish all Queen Elizabeth’s enemies!” The Earl of Kent alone replied, “ Amen!” The attention of all the other spectators was fixed on the melancholy scene before them, and zeal and flattery alike gave place to present pity and admiration of the expiring: princess. Thus perished, in the forty-fifth year of her age, and nine- teenth of her captivity in England, Mary, Queen of Scots ; a woman of great accomplishments both of body and mind, natural as well as acquired. .-~ HoME. The Family of Wakefield before the Loss of their Fortune. 31 I was ever of opinion that the honest man, who married and brought up a large family, did more service than he who continued single®, and only talked® of population. From this motive, I had scarce taken orders a year before J began to think seriously of matrimony, and chose my wife as she did!" her wedding-gown — not for a fine glossy surface, but such qualities as would wear well. To do her justice, she was a good- natured, notable woman, and as for education, there were few country ladies who could show more. She could read any English book without “much spelling? ; but for pickling, preserving'®, and cookery, none could excel her. She prided herself also upon being'* an excellent contriver in housekeeping ; though I could never fird that we grew richer with all her contrivances. However, we loved each other tenderly, and our fondness increased as we grew old. There was, in fact, nothing that could make us angry with the world or each other. We had an elegant house, situate in a fine country and a good neighbourhood. The year was spent in moral or rural amusements, in visiting our rich neighbours, and re- lieving such as were” poor. We had no revolutions to fear, nor fatigues to undergo; all our adventures were by the fireside, and all our migrations from the blue bed to the brown. As we lived near the road, we often had the traveller or stranger to visit us, to taste our gooseberry-wine, for which we had great reputa- tion; and I profess, with the veracity of an historian, that I never Brestait garçon 9 ne parlait que !° il y avait & peine un an que j’avais pris les ordres que 11 choisit 12sans avoir beaucoup a épeler 13 pour les conserves au vinaigre, les confitures 14 d’étre !5ménagère !© se passait 17 ceux qui étaient 296 FRENCH EXERCISES. knew one of them find fault with it®. Our cousins, too, even to the fortieth remove'®, all remembered their affinity, without any help from the herald’s office, and came very frequently to see us. Some of them did us no great honour by these claims of kindred ; as we had the blind, the maimed, and the halt® amongst the number. However, my wife always insisted that, as they were the same flesh und blood, they should sit with us at the same table; so that, if we had not very rich, we generally had very happy friends about us ; for this remark will hold good through life”, that the poorer the guest (297), the better pleased he ever is with being treated ; and as some men gaze with admiration at the colours of a tulip or the wing of a butterfly, so I was by nature an admirer of happy human faces®. However, when any one of our relations was found to be a person of a very bad character”, a trouble- some guest, or one we desired to get rid of, upon his leaving mj house, I ever took care to lend him a riding-coat, or a pair of boots, or some- times a horse of small value, and I always had the satisfaction to find that he never came back to return them. By this the house was clearea of such as® we did not like; but never was the family of Wakefield known to turn the traveller or the poor dependant out of doors. Thus we lived several years in a state of much happiness; not but that we sometimes had those litile rubs® which Providence sends to enhance the value of its favours. My orchard was often robbed by schoolboys, and my wife’s custards plundered by the cats or the chil- dren. The squire would sometimes fall asleep in the most pathetic parts of my sermon, or his lady return my wife's civilities at church with a mutilated courtesy. But we soon got over” the uneasiness caused by such accidents, and usually in three or four days began to wonder how they vexed us. My children, the offspring of temperance, as they were educated without softness, so they were at once well-formed and healthy ; my sons hardy and active, my daughters beautiful and blooming. Our eldest son was named George, after his uncle, who left us ten thousand pounds. Our second child, a girl, I intended to call after her aunt Grissel ; but my wife, who had lately been reading romances, insisted upon her being called® Olivia. In less than another year we had auother daughter, and now I was determined that Grissel should be her name ; but a rich relation taking a fancy to stand godmother, the 18 y trouver à redire 19 degré m. 2 des aveugles, des estropiés, et des boiteux 2! est vrai en tout temps 22 plus l’hôte est pauvre 7 de joyeux visages 24 réputation f 25 était débarrassée de ceux que 26 petites miséres 27 nous surmontions bientôt ? vou- tut qu’elle s’appelât MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 297 girl was by her directions called Sophia : so that we had two romantic names in the family ; but I solemnly protest I had no hand in it”. Moses was our next, and, after an interval of twelve years, we had two. . sons more. It would be fruitless to deny my exultation when I saw my little pnes about me ; but the vanity and satisfaction of my wife were even greater than mine. When our visitors would say, “ Well, upon my word, Mrs. Primrose, you have the finest children in the whole coun- try!” «Ay, neighbour,” she would answer, “they are as Heaven made them—handsome enough, if they be good enough ; for handsome is that handsome does.” And then she would bid the girls hold up their heads, who, to conceal nothing, were certainly very handsome. Mere outside is so very trifling a circumstance with me®, that I should scarce have remembered to mention it, had it not been a general topic of conversation in the country. Olivia, now about eighteen, had that luxuriancy of beauty, with which painters generally draw Hebe—open, sprightly, and commanding®. Sophia’s features were not so striking at first, but often did more certain execution; for they were soft, modest, and alluring, The one vanquished by a single blow, the other by efforts successively repeated. My eldest son, George, was bred at Oxford, as I intended him for one of the learned professions. My second boy, Moses, whom I designed for business, received a sort of miscellaneous education at home. But it is needless to attempt describing the particular characters of young people that had seen but very little of the world®. In short, a family likeness prevailed through all; and, properly speaking, they had but one character—that of being all equally generous, credulous, simple, and inoffensive. — GOLDSMITH. The Family of Wakefield after the Loss of their Fortune. 32 The place of our retreat was in a little neighbourhood, consisting of farmers who tilled their own grounds, and were equal strangers to opulence and poverty. As they had almost all the conveniences of life within themselves, they seldom visited towns or cities in search of™ 29 que je n’y fus pour rien 3° car celui-là est toujours beau qui fait bien 31 pour moi 82 jmposante 33 jeunes gens qui n’avaient vu le monde que fort peu 34 pour y cherche 03 298 FRENCH EXERCISES. superfluities. Remote from the polite®, they still re.awed the primeval simplicity of manners; and frugal by habit, they scarce knew that temperance was a virtue. They wrought with cheerfulness on days of labour, but observed festivals as intervals of idleness and pleasure. They kept up the Christmas carol®, sent true-love-knots on Valentine morning®, eat pancakes on Shrove-tide®, showed their wit on the first of April, and religiously cracked nuts on Michaelmas eve. Being apprised of our approach, the whole neighbourhood came out to meet their minister, dressed in their fine clothes, and preceded by a pipe and tabor: a feast also was provided for our reception, at which we sat cheerfully down ; and what the conversation wanted in wit, was made up in laughter®, Our little habitation was situated at the foot of a sloping hill, shel- tered with a beautiful underwood behind, and a prattling river before; on one side a meadow, on the other a green. My farm consisted of about twenty acres of excellent land, having given a hundred pcunds for my predecessor’s goodwill. Nothing could exceed the neatness of my little enclosures, the elms and hedge-rows appearing with inex- pressible beauty. My house consisted of but one story”, and was covered with thatch, which gave it an air of great snugness ; the walls on the inside were nicely whitewashed, and my daughters undertook to adorn them with pictures of their own designing. Though the same room served us for parlour and kitchen, that only made it the warmer. Be- sides, as it was kept with the utmost neatness, the dishes, plates, and coppers being well scoured and all disposed in bright rows on the shelves, the eye was agreeably relieved, and did not want richer furni- ture. There were three other apartments: one for my wife and me; another for our two daughters within our own; and the third, with two beds, for the rest of the children. The little republic to which I gave laws was regulated in the follow- ing manner : by sunrise we all assembled in our common apartment, the fire being previously kindled by the servant. After we had saluted each other with proper ceremony, (for I always thought fit to keep up some mechanical forms of good-breeding, without which freedom ever destroys friendship,) we all bent in gratitude to that Being” who gave us another day. This duty being performed, my son and I went to pursue our usual industry abroad, while my wife and daughters employed themselves in providing breakfast, which was always ready at a certain 35 Loin du monde poli 36 célébraient Noël 37 des lacs d’amour le jour de Saint Valen- tin 38 pendant le carnaval 39 le rire le suppléa 40 n’avait qu'un étage 4! elle n’en était que plus chaude 42 nous nous agenouillions tous pour remercier l’Etre MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 299 time. I allowed half an hour for this meal, and an hour for dinner; which time was taken up in innocent mirth between my wife and daughters, and in philosophical arguments between my son and me. As we rose with the sun, so we never pursued our labour after it was gone down, but returned home to the expecting family®, where smiling looks, a neat hearth, and pleasant fire were prepared for our reception. Nor were we without guests: sometimes Farmer Flam- borough, our talkative neighbour, and often the blind piper, would pay us a visit, and taste our gooseberry wine ; for the making of which* we had lost neither the receipt nor the reputation. These harmless peopla had several ways of being good company; while one played, the other would sing some soothing ballad, ¢ Johnny Armstrong’s Last Good- night,” or “The Cruelty of Barbara Allen.” The night was concluded in the manner we began the morning, my youngest boys being appointed to read the lessons of the day, and he that read loudest, dis- tinctest, and best, was to have a halfpenny on Sunday to put into the poor’s box. : When Sunday came, it was indeed a day of finery, which all my sumptuary edicts could not restrain. How well soever I fancied my lectures®® against pride had conquered the vanity of my daughters, yet I still found them secretly attached to all their former finery; they still loved laces, ribands, bugles *6, and catgut”; my wife herself retained a passion for her crimson paduasoy, because I formerly happened to say it became her, The first Sunday in particular their behaviour served to mortify me: I had desired my girls the preceding night to be dressed early the next day, for I always loved to be at church a good while before the rest of the congregation. They punctually obeyed my directions ; but when we were to assemble in the morning at breakfast, down came my wife and daughters, dressed out in all their former splendour, their hair plastered up with pomatum, their faces patched to taste*, their trains bundled up into a heap behind, and rustling at every motion. I could not help smiling at their vanity, particularly that of my wife, from whom I expected more discretion. In this exigence, therefore, my only resource was to order my son, with an important air, to call® our coach. The girls were amazed at the command ; but I repeated it with more solemnity than before. Surely, my dear, you jest®!” cried 43 mais nous retournions au milieu de la famille qui nous attendait 44 la fabrication duquel 45 Quoique je m’imaginasse que mes sermons 46 perles de Venise 47 marli (a kind of gauze) ‘8 il m’était jadis arrivé de lui dire qu’il lui allait bien “° tacheté de mouches »° de faire venir 5! Assurément, mon ami, vous plaisantez 300 FRENCH EXERCISES. my wife, “ we can walk (it) perfectly well; we want no coach to carry us now.” “ You mistake, child,” returned I, “ we do want a coach; for if we walk to church in this trim, the very children in the parish will hoot after us.” ¢ Indeed,” replied my wife, “I always imagined" that my Charles was fond of seeing? his children neat and handsome about him.” “ You may be as neat as you please,” interrupted I, “and I shall love you the better for it; but all this is not neatness, but frip- pery. These rufflings, and pinkings, and patchings, will only make us hated by® all the wives of our neighbours. No, my children,” conti- nued I, more gravely, those gowns may be altered into something of a plainer cut, for finery is very unbecoming in us’, who want the means of decency. I do not know whether such flouncing and shredding is becoming even in the rich, if we consider, upon a moderate calculation’, that the nakedness of the indigent world may be clothed from the trimmings of the vain.” This remonstrance had the proper effect’; they went with great com- posure, that very instant, to change their dress; and the next day I had the satisfaction of finding my daughters, at “heir own request, employed in cutting up their trains into Sunday waiswvats for Ted and Bill, the two little ones ; and, what was still more satisfactory, the gowns seemed improved by this curtailing. — GoLDsMITH. 50 nous allons i pied ! je m’étais toujours figuré 2 aimait à voir 3 ne serviront qu'a nous faire détester de 4 trés-déplacée en nous 5 d’aprés un calcul modéré 6 l'effet que j’en attendais. 3 N.B.— Students who have already acquired some knowledge of French, and who want more difficult exercises, will find in the Guide to French Translation” a selection of instructive and entertaining pieces, which, it is hoped, will help them in their progress. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS REFERRING TO THE RULES IN THE GRAMMAR, AND TO BE USED AT EACH LESSON, IN ORDER TO FAMILIARISE THE PUPIL WITH THE QUESTIONS GIVEN IN THE VARIOUS FRENCH EXAMINATIONS. Des Signes Orthographiques. Quelles sont les lettres de l’alphabet (1*) ? Quelles sont les voyelles et les consonnes (2 et 3)? Quel est l’usage des accents, et quels sont-ils (4 et seq.)? Quel est l’usage de l’apostrophe (10)? Quel est l’usage de la cédille (11)? Quel est l'usage du tréma (12)? À quoi sert le trait d’union (13)? Quelles sont les voyelles nasales (15)? Qu'est-ce qu’une diphthongue (16) ? Quels sont les signes de ponctuation (20) ? Combien y a-t-il de parties du discours, et quelles sont-elles (22) ? Quelles sont les espèces de mots variables, et quelles sont les espèces fnvariables ? De l’Article. Qu'est-ce que l’article défini ? Déclinez-le (23). Qu'est-ce que l’élision, et quand a-t-elle lieu (24)? Quelle différence y a-t-il entre l'emploi de l’article en français et l’emploi de l’article en anglais—my brother”s book (26) ? Comment se traduisent en français les expressions suivantes :—a gold watch—a steel pen (27)? Quand met-on du, de la, des, devant les substantifs (28) ? Dans quel cas met-on la préposition de (29) ? Qu'est-ce que l’article indéfini (30) ? Du Substantif. Qu’est-ce que le substantif, et combien y en a-t-il de sortes (31)? Qu’est-ce qu’un nom collectif ? Qu'est-ce que le genre, et combien y en a-t-il (32)? Combien y a-t-il de nombres, et quels sont-ils (383) ? * The figures between parentheses refer to the Rules in the Grammar appticable to the Questions, 302 ; GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. Comment forme-t-on généralement le pluriel d’un substantif (34) ? Quand le singulier est terminé par s, x, 7, comment s’en forme le pluriel (35)? Comment forme-t-on le pluriel des substantifs en au, eu et ou (36 et 37)? Comment se forme le pluriel des substantifs en al et en ail (37)? Quel est le pluriel des mots ciel, œil et aîeul ? Citez quelques substantifs qui n’ont pus de pluriel et d’autres qui v’ont pas de singulier. De l’Adjectir. Comment l'adjectif s’accorde-t-il avec son substantif (42) ? Comment se forme généralement le féminin d’un adjectif (43)? Quand le masculin d’un adjectif est terminé en e muet, comment s’en forme le féminin (44)? Quel est le féminin des adjectifs en 7 et en / (45 et 46)? Comment se forme le féminin des adjectifs en el, eil, jen, on, et, as (47)? Quels sont les adjectifs en et qui ne doublent pas le t pour le féminin? Quel est le féminin des adjectifs en eur (49 et seg.) ? Quel est le masculin devant une voyelle ou un h muet des adjectifs beau, fou, mou, nouveau et vieux (54) ? Quelle est généralement la place des adjectifs (56)? Combien y a-t-il de sortes de comparatifs, et comment se forment-ils (61 et seq)? Combien y a-t-il de sortes de superlatifs, et comment se forment-ils (66 et 67) ? : Quel est le comparatif et le superlatif des adjectifs bon, mauvais, petit, et de leurs adverbes correspondants, bien, mal, peu (68 et 69)? Quels sont les adjectifs possessifs (70)? Comment s’accordent-ils avec le nom qui suit (71)? Qu’arrive-t-il quand ils sont placés devant un nom féminin qui com- mence par une voyelle ou un À muet (72)? Quels sont les adjectifs démonstratifs (74), indéfinis (76), numéraux @7)? : Du Pronom. Quels sont les pronoms personnels, et comment les divise-t-on (86)? Qu'est-ce que le pronom conjonctif (87)? Le pronom sujet se place-t-il devant ou après le verbe (88) ? Le pronom complément (object) se place-t-il devant ou après le verbe qui le régit (89) ? Dans quel cas emploie-t-on les pronoms tu, foi, te, ton, le tien, etc, au lieusde vous, votre, le vôtre (91) ? Qu'est-ce que le pronom disjonctif, et quand l'emploie-t-on (93 et 94)? Quels sont les pronoms possessifs (95), démonstratifs (96), relatifs (103), indéfinis (110)? Peut-on omettre le pronom relatif devant un verbe, comme en anglais :—the man I saw (109) ? GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. … 808 Du Verbe. Qu'est-ce que le sujet ou nominatif d’un verbe (112)? Quel est le régime ou complément (object or government) d’un verbe, et combien y en a-t-il de sortes (113 et seq.)? Qu'est-ce que le verbe substantif (117)? Comment appelle-t-on tous les verbes excepté être ? Qu’appelle-t-on verbe actif ou transitif (118) ? Qu'est-ce qu’un verbe passif (119)? Qu'’appelle-t-on verbe neutre ou intransitif (120) ? Comment connaît-on qu’un verbe est actif ou neutrer Qu’est-ce qu’un verbe réfléchi (121)? Qu'est-ce qu’un verbe impersonnel (122) ? Que veut dire mode, et combien y en a-t-il (123) ? Qu'est-ce que l’infinitif, l’indicatif, le conditionnel, l’impératif, le subjonctif ? Qu’appelle-t-on temps, combien y en a-t-il, et comment se divisent- ils (124 et seq.)? Combien y a-t-il de nombres et de personnes (127 et 128)? Qu’est-ce que conjuguer un verbe ? Combien y a-t-il de conjugaisons, et comment les distingue-t-on (129)? : Quand un verbe est-il régulier (131), irrégulier (132), défectueux (133)? Quels sont les verbes dont les temps composés se conjuguent avec l’auxiliaire avoir (136), avec l’auxiliaire être (137)? Comment exprime-t-on la négation en français (138) ? Comment exprime-t-on l’interrogation (139)? Que fait-on quand la troisième personne du singulier d’un verbe employé interrogativement se termine par un e muet (140)? Que fait-on quand le nominatif du verbe est un nom (141) ? Emploie-t-on de ou l’article du, de la, des devant un nom, compié- ment directe d’un verbe actif employé négativement :—7 have no bread (142) ? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les verbes dont l’infinitif se termine en ger (145) ? Dans quel cas les verbes en cer, comme placer, menacer, prennent-ils une cédille sous le c (146)? Quand les verbes en eler, eter, doublent-ils la consonne / et t (147)? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les verbes en ayer, oyer, uyer (149)? Dans quel cas lé 3 verbes terminés en ier, comme prier, prennent-ils deux i (150)? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les verbes terminés à l’infinitif en éer, comme créer (151)? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur le verbe bénir (153) et le verbe fleurir (154)? Comment traduit-on en français les expressions do, does, did, etc, “ — employées en anglais dans les interrogations, comme Do you sing (175)? Pourquoi écrit-on aimé-je? parlé-je? etc., avec un accent aigu sur l’e (176)? Dans quel cas doit-on se servir de l’expression est-ce que au lieu de la forme ordinaire dans les interrogations (177) ? 304 GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. Qu'est-ce que les temps primitifs (180)? Quels sont les temps formés des temps primitifs, et comment en sont- ils formés (181 et seg.)? Avec quel auxiliaire, avoir ou être, les temps composés des verbes neutres se conjuguent-ils (187)? Comment se conjuguent les verbes réfléchis (189)? Dans quel cas le verbe faire s'emploie-t-il Eripermomnetionitnt (202)? Qu'est-ce qu’un participe, et combien y en a-t-il de sortes (211)? Qu'est-ce qu’un adverbe, et où se place-t-il (212)? Comment forme-t-on généralement les adverbes (213)? Les adjectifs ne s’emploient-ils pas quelquefois adverbialement (214)? Qu'est-ce qu’une préposition, et ou se place-t-elle (218)? Doit-on répéter les prépositions devant chaque mot qu’elles gouver- nent (219)? Qu'est-ce que la conjonction ? Quels modes du verbe les conjonctions gouvernent-elles (221)? Qu'est-ce que l’interjection (226)? Syntaxe de l'Article. L'article le, la, les, s’emploie-t-il devant tous les substantifs (227)? Doit-on répéter l’article devant chaque substantif sujet ou com- plément d’une phrase, quand il est employé devant le premier (228)? Emploie-t-on l’article devant les noms de pays, de montagnes, de ri- vières, etc. (230)? Quelles sont les exceptions à la règle précédente (231) ? Emploie-t-on l’article devant les noms de titre, de dignité, de pro- Session, ete. (233)? Se sert-on de l’article le, la, les, ou de un, une, comme en anglais, avec les noms de mesure, de poids et de nombre (235) ? Quelle différence de construction y a-t-il entre le français et l’anglais dans les phrases comme les suivantes :—ten pounds a year—twe lessons a week (236)? Emploie-t-on l’article du, de, la, des devant les substantifs partitifs (237)? L'article s’emploie-t-il devant les noms de personnes et de villes (238)? Emploie-t-on l’article devant les noms partitifs précédés d’un ad- jectif (242)? Expliquez la différence qu’il y a entre :—N’avez-vous pas des livres ? et N’avez-vous point de livres (243)? Emploie-t-on l’article après les substantifs collectifs ou les adverbes de quantité (244)? L’article se met-il devant les noms communs précédés des mots sans, avec, entre, de, par, etc. (246) ? Emploie-t-on l’article devant les substantifs communs, quand ils n’expriment qu’une seule idée avec le verbe qui les précède (247)? Emploie-t-on l’article dans les phrases proverbiales, les énumérations, et les exclamations (248)? Met-on l’article devant un substantif employé adjectivement (249)? Met-on l’article devant tout nombre employé après un substantif pour indiquer le rang ou l’ordre (250) ? GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 305 Emploie-t-on l’article indéfini un, une, comme en anglais, dans les phrases suivantes:—he is a professor— Mozart was a musician—his father is a Frenchman—what a fine horse ! (251 et seg.) ? Met-on un article devant les mots plus ou moins répétés dans une phrase, comme dans l’anglais:—the more we read, the more we know (255)? Syntaxe des Substantifs. Quelle est la différence de construction entre le français et l’anglais dans ces sortes de phrases:—he is at his uncle’s—go to my banker’s (256)? Quand met-on de, et quand met-on à ou au, entre deux substantifs ayant rapport entre eux, comme dans ces phrases :—a silk dress—a steam-boat—the flower-market (257 et sey.) ? Qu’entend-on par collectif général et collectif partitif (260 et 261)? Quelle est la règle de l’accord du verbe avec les noms collectifs et les noms partitifs (260 et 261)? Les noms propres de personne prennent-ils la marque du pluriel (262 et sey.)? Quelle est la règle pour la formation du pluriel dans les nams com- posés (266 à 270)? Syntaxe des Adjectifs. A quel nombre se met l’adjectif qui se rapporte à plusieuïs substantifs singuliers (272)? A quel genre se met l’adjectif qui se rapporte à plusieurs substantifs de différents genres (272). Citez les exceptions à la règle précédente (273)? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les adjectifs nu, demi, feu, franc, sur les participes supposé, excepté, et sur les mots composés ci-joint, ci-inclus (274 et seg.) ? L’adjectif employé adverbialement s’accorde-t-il avec le nom auquel il se rapporte (277)? Dans quel cas doit-on répéter l’adjectif devant chaque substantif d’une phrase (278)? Quelle est la place des adjectifs qui expriment la forme, la couleur, le goût, la nationalité (279), et citez les exceptions à la règle (280)? Quand plusieurs adjectifs se rapportent au même substantif, où les place-t-on (281 et 282) ? Quelle est la place des participes passés employés adjectivement (283)? Qu’y a-t-il à chserver sur la place des adjectifs quant à leur signifi- cation (284)? Qu'est-ce que le complément (government) d’un adjectif (285) ? Tous les adjectifs ont-ils un complément (286 et 287) ? Quels sont les adjectifs qui régissent la préposition de (288) ? Quels sont les adjectifs qui régissent la préposition à (289) ? N’y a-t-il pas des adjectifs qui régissent tantôt une préposition, tantôt une autre (290) ? 306 GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. Expliquez la différence de construction entre le français et l’anglais avec les adjectifs de dimension :—a house sixty feet high (291). Comment rend-on en français by ou and employés pour désigner une dimension comparative :—ten feet long by six wide (292)? Comment end-on le mot by après un comparatif et devant un nom de mesure, de poids, ou de nombre (293) ? Expliquez la différence de construction dans les phrases comme la suivante :—/ have more than ten pounds (294). ; Comment rend-on en français les mots the more, the less, répétés dans une phrase (297)? Montrez la différence de construction dans les phrases suivantes : — he 2s so much the more happy (298)—he is only the more happy for it (299) —a shilling more or less (300)—the most commercial city in Europe (301 et 302). Les adjectifs possessifs mon, ton, son, etc., doivent-ils se répéter devant chaque nom auquel ils se rapportent (303)? Qu’y a-t-il à observer dans l’usage de ces adjectifs en s’adressant à des parents, ou en s’informant de quelqu’un (204 et 205)? Quand emploie-t-on l’article le, la, les, au lieu de mon, ton, son, etc. (806 et seg.)? Quand doit-on exprimer les pronoms anglais its, their, par son, sa, ses, ou par er avec le pronom le, la, les (311 et 312)? Les adjectifs démonstratifs ce, cet, cette, ces, se répètent-ils devant chaque substantif d’une phrase (313)? Expliquez la différence entre ce adjectif et ce pronom démonstratif. Qu’y a-t-il à observer sur les adjectifs indéfinis aucun et nul (314 et 315)? “Quelles sont les trois manières d’écrire quetque (317 et seq.)? Quand tout est-il adjectif, et quand est-il adverbe (221 et seq.) ? Quand même est-il adjectif, et quand est-il adverbe (226 et seq.) ? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur l’adjectif tel comparé avec l’anglais such (828)? Quand vingt et cent prennent-ïls la marque du pluriel (329 et 330) ? Quelles sont les différentes manières d’écrire le mot mille (331 et 332)? Se sert-on des nombres cardinaux ou ordinaux en parlant du quan tième du mois ou des souverains (333)? Syntaxe des Pronoms. Quelle est la place des pronoms personnels employés comme sujets, ou comme compléments (334) ? . Quand un verbe est précédé de deux pronoms, lequel place-t-on le premier (335 et 336)? piques la règle des pronoms employés avec l’impératif (337 et 338). Citez les cas où l’on doit employer les pronoms personnels disjonctifs, soit comme sujets, soit comme compléments (340 et seq.). Dans quel cas répète-t-on les pronoms personnels employés comme sujets (346 et seg.) ? Répète-t-on les pronoms personnels employés comme compléments (349 et 850)? Dans quel cas le pronom le est-il variable ou invariable (351 et 352)? GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 307 Comment s’emploie le pronom soi (353)? Quand emploie-t-on les pronoms en et y au lieu de lu, elle, leur, eux, elles (854 et seq.) ? Quelles observations y a-t-il a faire sur les pronoms le, la, les, en, y (357 et seq.) ? Comment exprîme-t-on en français les auxiliaires anglais do, does, did, shall, will, should, would, employés dans une interrogation (364 etseg.)? Quand exprime-t-on les pronoms anglais mine, thine, his, etc., par à moi, a tot, a lui, etc, ou par le mien, le tien, le sien, etc. (367 et 368) ? Expliquez la différence de construction dans les phrases suivantes :— this horse is my brother’s—an uncle of mine—that friend of yours—a house of my own (369 et seq.). Quand emploie-t-on ce ou i, elle, ils, elles, devant le verbe étre (373 et seq.)? A quel nombre met-on le verbe étre quand il est précédé du pronom ce (379)? Comment exprime-t-on en français les pronoms he, she, they, suivis d’un pronom relatif who, ete. (380)? Expliquez la différence entre celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, et celui-là, cella-là, ceux-là (381). Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les pronoms relatifs qui, que, etc. (382) ? Quand emploie-t-on dont, de qui ou duquel, à qui, ou auquel (389 et seq.) ? A ei nombre et à quelle personne le pronom indéfini on veut-il le verbe qui le suit (393 et 394)? Quand se sert-on de l’on au lieu de on (395) ? Quand chacun prend il son, sa, ses, ou leur, après lui (400)? Quelle différence y a-t-il entre personne, pronom indéfini, et personne substantif (403 et seq.) ? Quelle différence y a-t-il entre l’un et l’autre et l’un l’autre (406)? A quel nombre met-on le verbe après n? l’un ni l’autre (307)? Syntaxe des Verbes. De quelle manière se fait l’accord du verbe avec son sujet quand ce sujet se compose de plusieurs substantifs ou de plusieurs pronoms ? Citez les exceptions à la règle précédente (411 et seq.). Un verbe peut-il avoir deux régimes directs ou deux régimes indirects (419 et 420)? Dans quel cas deux verbes peuvent-ils avoir ou ne pas avoir le même régime (421) ? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur la place que doivent occuper les régimes d’un verbe (422 et 423)? Quand exprime-t-on le régime des verbes passifs par de ou par par 424)? ¢ I tmitie d’un verbe peut-il être le régime d’un autre verbe (426 et 427)? Avec quel auxiliaire, avoir ou être, les verbes neutres se conjuguent- ils (430)? Peut-on empioyer le présent au lieu du passé et du fueur (433 et 434)? Expliquez la différence, dans leur emploi, entre l’imparfait et le passé défini (485 et seg.) ? 308 GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. Quels sont les cas où l’on emploie le subjonctif (352 et seq.) ? Expliquez l’accord des temps du subjonctif avec le verbe qui précède (465 et seq.). : ; Quelle est la terminaison unique du participe présent (470)? Quelle différence y a-t-il entre le participe présent et l’adjectif ver- bale en ant (471 et seg.). Montrez la différence de construction, en anglais et en français, de certains participes présents (475 et seq.). Avec quoi s'accorde le participe passé, avec ou sans l’auxiliaire être (478 et 479)? Quelle est la règle du participe passé accompagné de l’auxiliaire avoir (480 et seq.) ? Le participe passé des verbes réfléchis s’accorde-t-il avec son régime direct (483) ? Le participe passé des verbes impersonnels est-il variable (484)? Le participe passé suivi d’un infinitif s’accorde-t-il avec son régime (486)? Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur le participe fait suivi d’un infinitif, et sur le peu accompagné d’un participe passé (487 et 491)? Syntaxe des Adverbes. Dans quel cas doit-on omettre pas ou point dans les phrases négatives (498 et seq.)? Quelle est la différence entre plus et davantage—si, aussi et tant, autant—plus tot et plutét—itout a coup et tout d'un coup (510 et seq.)? Syntaxe des Prépositions. Qu’y a-t-il à remarquer sur les prépositions (414 et seg.)? Quelles sont les différentes manières de rendre en anglais la prépo- sition chez (530) ? Quand doit-on exprimer la préposition anglaise to par de, ou par pour (516 et 517)? Quelle est la différence entre avant et devant—dans et en—entre et parmi—au travers et à travers—envers et vers, etc. (519 et seq.) ? Qu’y a-t-il à observer sur le genre des noms (543 et seg. )? Quelle différence y a-t-il entre an et année—connaître et savoir— amener et apporter—marcher et se promener— marier, épouser et se marier —neuf et nouveau —pays, campagne et patrie—dormir et coucher (544 er seq.)? PRINTED BY SPOTTISWOODE AND CO., NEW-STREET SQUARE LONDON ELEMENTARY FRENCH WORKS ForRMING A COMPLETE COURSE OF MODERN FRENCH FOR STUDENTS IN SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES ; And carefully adapted for use in Young Ladies’ Schools. BY LEON CONTANSEAU, PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE LATE ROVAL INDIAN MILITARY COLLEGE, ADDISCOMBE ; MANY YEARS FRENCH EXAMINER FOR MILITARY AND CIVIL APPOINTMENTS. ——o 03 00—— gr Adopted in the Government Colleges, and very generally in Schools and Colleges throughout the United Kingdom, NR EO A NEW PRACTICAL DICTIONARY OF THE FRENGH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. IN TWO PARTS: FRENCH axp ENGLISH—ENGLISH axp FRENCH. Containing the following Improvements : I. New Words in general use in each Language not to be found in other Dictionaries.—2. Compound Words not translated literally.— 8. Prepositions annexed to the French Verbs and Adjectives, showing what case they govern.—4. Acceptations of the Words separated by Figures, with directions as to the proper Word.—5. Examples of the most familiar Idioms and Phrases.—6. The ape Tenses of all Ieregulor Verbs. Latest Edition, in 1 vol. post 8vo. pp. 970, price 3s. 6d. cloth. London : LONGMANS, GREEN, & CO. Contanseau’s Elementary French Works. no SPECIMENS FOR COMPARISON CONTANSEAU’S MATCH, 8. 1. (lucifer) allumette, f.; 2. (artil.) mèche, f.; 3. (marriage) mariage, m., alliance. f.; 4. (person to be married) parti, m.; 5. (equal) égal, pareil, m.; pète égale, f.; 6. sup) assortiment, m.; . (contest) lutte, f., concours, m.; 8. (at play) parte, f.; 9. (in fighting) combat, m.; 10. (in sailing) course, joûte, f. ; 11. (with swords, ete.) assaut, m.; 12. (in wrestling) lutte, joite, f. Lucifer—, allumette chimique. Phos- phorus—, allumette phosphorique. Good —, riche parti, «iche mariage. To bea— for, étre de la taille de or de la force de. To be a bad or a good —, aller mal or bien ensemble. — BOX, 8. porte-allumette,m. — -LOCK, 8. fusil à mèche, m. — -MAKER, 8. 1.fa- bricant d’allumettes, allumettier, m.; 2. (of marriage) marieur, m., -euse, f., fai- seur de mariages, courtier de mariage, m. LEVIZAC AND OTHER DICTIONARIES. Marcw, s. mèche, allumette, partie, f., jeu, m., joûte, f., mariage, parti, pareil, sem- blable, égal, assortiment, m. DICTIONARY. Joncer ; 2. au fond ; ser, diminuer; 4 {gauss em pénétrer ; 5. (to lose height) s’abatssé descendre ; 6. (pers.) se laisser tombe 7. (to be overwhelmed) succomber (to decay) périr; 9. (to be depresset! être abattu, être dans Uabaltemenit 10. (to Quclife) décimer: 11. (to be duced to) dég se tasser, tasser. i To — away, tomber. To — dowi! 1. s’enfoncer, aller au fond ; 2. (to fa prostrate) s’affaisser ; 3. (to lowe! s’abaisser ; 4 (of the sun, etc.) desce dre, se coucher ; 5. (pers.) se laiss tomber ; tomber. To — under, su comber. : À To SINK, pret. sunk, part.sunk, or sunk v. n. couler ou aller à fond, couler bi s’enfoncer, déchoir, décliner, s'abatt diminuer, baisser, 8 affaisser, dégénén enccomber, se perdre. OPINION OF VICE CHANCELLOR SIR W. P. WOOD, (Judgment given in favour of M. Contanseau in Spiers versus Brown.) The learned judge, after having put aside Dr. Spiers’ School Dictionary as ne M. Contanseau’s Practical French Dictionary, says to be compared with « M. Contanseau has produced an entirely different work from that of the plaintiff, and unguestionably a most OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. 4 «A close examination of this volume leads us to prefer it for all ble and ing practical work.” practical purposes to any similar work we have ever met with..... We can con scientiously recommend this volume as the best for practical tuition, and for purposes of general reference, that hes ever fallen under our notice. We do not doubt that the care and intelligence bestowed by Mr. Contanseau on its prepara- tion will Le amply repaid by the standard 1 eputation it must attain.” “ We have no school dictionary of the French and English languages at all approaching to Mr. Contanseaw’s in fullness, correctness, and the assistance which it affords to the pupil.” “ This useful work requires only to be known to supersede our old The carefulness of the whole is worthy, of high torments of the school-room. recommendation.” . % Very portabls as to" its form, and very complete as to its matter. it includes fully the French and English of the present day.” “ It is now the best French dictionary.” * The plan is admirable, and the execution worthyof the plan.” ATH-NÆUM, Press. = 5 £: EEDS MERCURY. LOBE. EXAMINER, JOURNAL OF EDUCATION, D Contanseau’s Elementary French Works. 8 A NEW POCKET DICTIONARY OF THE FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANCUACES; Being a careful abridgement of the Practical French and English Dictionary, preserving all the most useful features of the original work, condensed into a compactly-printed pocket volume, for the convenience of Tourists, Travellers, and English Readers or Students, to whom portability of size is a requisite. Latest Edition, carefully revised, square 18mo. price 1s. 6d. cloth. OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. ¢ There can be no question of the excellence of the work now offered by Mr. Contanseau.” MorNiNe Posr. “ Being of a small and convenient size, and printed in a type singu- larly clear and legible, it is likely to become widely popular. It is assurediy the most lucid of our French pocket dictionaries.” READER. “ There are valuable features in Mr. Contanseau’s Pocket Dictionary which cannot fail to render it popular in schools.” EDUCATIONAL TIMES. “ We have carefully compared it with others, and have no hesitation in pronouncing this the best pocket dictionary extant of the French and English languages.” JOURNAL oF EDUCATION. re GO PG Or Omen THE FIRST STEP IN FRENCH; AN EASY METHOD OF LEARNING THE ELEMENTS OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, AND CONTAINING 2. A Vocabulary of Useful Words intended for Exercises in Pronunci- ation.—®. A few simple Rules of Grammar. — 8. Hasy Exercises both in French and English. —4. Familiar Conversations on ordinary topics.— 8. A selection of easy and entertaining Pieces in French for reading and translation. Latest Edition, carefully aevised and corrected, 12mo. price 2s. 6d. cloth. : OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. “ As a judicious First Book, or Introduction to the French Grammar, we have no hesitation in recommending it to our readers. The vocabulary is well selected ; the grammatical rules are concise, clear, and set forth in a manner to become impressed on the mind of the student; the series of exercises are admirably gra- duated ; and the extracts chosen for practice and commitment to memory are of the most suitable kind.” CIVIL SERVICE GAZETTE. “ There exists no better Elementary Guide within our knowledge.” SPECTATOR. “The clear and logical arrangement, and the eminently practical character of _ the work, are apparent on every page.” ; EDUCATIONAL TIMES. “It is a long time since we have seen such an encouraging introduction to a foreign tongue.” ’ JOHN BULL, “The whele arranged and executed in masterly style.” ATHENZEUM, 4 Contanseau's Elementary French Works. A MODERN FRENCH GRAMMAR IN TWO PARTS: I. ACCIDENCE. II. SYNTAX. With Vocabularies, Conversational Lessons, and copious Exercises with Footnotes, newly compiled from ts Standard Authors of the Present Day. Latest Edition, remodclled and enlarged, 12mo. price 4s. cloth. *,* The AcciDEncE may be had separately, price 2s. 6d. OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. From a careful inspection of the rules, examples, and mode of explaining the idioms, peculiarities, and difficulties of the language, we feel confident in recom- mending this Modern French Grammar to all learners. We know no other book of the kind which conveys the instruction required so 2oncisely, so emphatically, and so judiciously.” Crv:… SERVICE GAZETTE. “ The number of Modern French Grammars is legion, and their character is— very few good, most of them bad, and a considerable portion indifferent. Mr. Contanseau’s must be reckoned as amongst the very best of the first category, since it is not only elaborate, but also simple, the Author’s aim being not to puzzle and bewilder, but to make the road to the acquirement of a most difficult foreign language as easy as possible. The exercises are alone sufficient to render this French manual an invaluable means of instruction.” BELL'S WEEKLY MESSENGER. KEY TO FIRST STEP AND FRENCH GRAMMAR. : New Edition, 12mo. price 3s. bound. PREMIERES LECTURES; OR, SELECTIONS OF INSTRUCTIVE AND ENTERTAINING STORIES FROM THE BEST FRENCH AUTHORS WHO HAVE WRITTEN FOR THE YOUNG. FOLLOWED BY EASY FRENCH POETRY FOR MEMORY. ~ WITH ENGLISH NOTES. ‘Latest Edition, 12mo. price 23. 6d. cloth. OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. “ merit of this reading-book there cannot be two opinions. The pieces ses just those that will enchain the attention of youth, and the notes to help the young student are so carefully fitted to the real points of difficulty, that à very elementary knowledge of the French language will suffice for the pupil to commenee reading with.” ; ; “ It would be difficult, we think, to place a more entertaining little volume fægo the hands of the young boy or girl who had just mastered the rudiments of she French language. Contanseau’s Elementary French Works. 5 'PROSATEURS ET POETES FRANCAIS; OR SELECTIONS FROM THE BEST FRENCH AUTHORS; WITH AN INTRODUCTION OF EASY PIECES. Arranged in Chronological Order, from the Age of Louis XIV. w the \ Present Day. With Biographical Sketches. Latest Edition, 12mo. pp. 552, price bs. cloth. CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. Vingt et un morceaux faciles et amusants extraits de divers auteurs m dernes, et arrangés pour les classes inférieures. ” SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. Bossuet, Condé a la Bataille de Rocroi; Les Romains.—E'énelon, La Ville de Tyr et les Phéniciens ; Télémaque visite les Champs Elysées.—Massillon. De l’Existence de Dieu ; Destinée de l’Homme; De la Vie humaine, EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Voltaire, Bataille de Narva ; Défaite de Charles XII.à Pultava ; Charles XIL. a Bender; Guillaume III. et Louis XIV —Buffon, Le Chien; Le Cygne.— J.J. Rousseau, Le Duel ; Bonheur de J. J. dans la Solitude —Barthélémy, Épaminondas ; Combat des Thermopyles—Marmontel, Bélisaire dans un Château de la Trace—Thomas, Destinée des grands Hommes. —B. de St. Pierre, La Solitude; Un Naufrage à l’Ile-de-France ; Consolations adressées à Paul après la Perte de Virginie; Vie d’un Paria dans l’Inde. —Æ'lorian, Guillaume Tell, Rome guerrière. NINETEENTH CENTURY. Madame de Staël, Saint Pierre de Rome; La Terre de Naples; Venise ; La Gloire de l’Italie—J. de Maistre, Une Nuit d’Été à St. Pétersbourg.— Wolney, Les Ruines de Palmyre.—3. de Maistre, La Mort d'un Ami; Méditation —Michaud, Pierre l’Ermite prêchant la première Croisade ; Prise de Jérusalem par les Croisés —BW”>onaparte, Proclamation à l’Armée.— Chateaubriand, Le Meschacebé ; La Tempête; Aspect de Jérusalem au 5e . Biecle; Aspect de Rome Ancienne ; Les Francs marchant au Combat ; La Mer et la * Terre; Cimetière de Campagne ; Ruines des Monuments Chrétiens —Norvins, Jeunesse de Napoléon ; Bataille des Pyramides ; Passage des Alpes par Bonaparte; Les derniers Jours de Napoléon. —Jouy, La Cour des Messageries à Paris ; Les vavacomives de Fans —Madame GŒuizot, La Vie et l’Argent —Ségur, Moscou avant son Incendie; Incendie de Moscou —Barante, Démence de Charles V1—Eamennais, Les Deux Voisins ; La Prière ; L’Exilé; Le Règne de la Terreur en France —Nodier, Le Loch Lomond.—GŒGuizot, Fuite de Charles ler a I'Ile de Wight; Charles 1er au Château de Hurst ; Charles ler au hâteau de Windsor; Procès de Charles ler; Exécution de Charles ler.— Willemain, Le Siècle de Louis XIV ; Milton composant le Paradis Perdu.— Lamartine, Ruines du Parthénon ; Le Liban ; Portrait de Louis XVI; Portrait de Marie-Antoinette ; Abdication de Louis-Philippe —Xhierry, Débarquement de l’Armée normande en Angleterre; Bataille de Hastings ; Meurtre de Thomas Becket ; Robin Hood. —Salvandi, Napoléon Bonaparte —Wzignet, Prise de la Bastille; Déchéance de la Royauté en France — Thiers, Les derniers Jours de uis XVI; Les Contrebandiers Espagnols —Soulié, Les Marchands de 6 Contanseau’s Elementary French Works. NINETEENTH CENTURY (continued). Nouveautés, Les Quatre Henri—Victor Hugo, Paris au XVme Siècle. Merrimée, Siége de la Rochelle sous Charles IX.—Vermeond, Le Provincial a Paris.—Gérando, Voyage sur la Theiss.—Sue, Une Métairie de la Sologne ; Une Vallée de Désolation.—WZarmier, Le Spitzberg.—Dumas, Le Pont du Gard; Auberge italienne ; Bataille de Montereau; Napoléon et Lucien ; Souvenirs d’un Voyage à Messine. — Janin, Florence; Le Mont-Cénis; Versailles, — Gozlan, Alger —Gautier, Une Jonque chinoise à Londres —Molière, Comédies, L’Avare; Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. ——p— CHOIX DE POESIE. SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. Racine, Athalie (tragédie) —ELa Fontaine, Le Chêne et le Roseau ; Le Corbeau et le Renard ; La Cigale et la Fourmi ; Le Renard et la Cigogne ; Le Chat et le vieux Rat —Boileau, Passage du Rhin par Louis XIV; Les Embarras de Paris—Mme. Deshoulières, Allégorie à ses Enfants. EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Louis Racine, Dieu dans la Nature —Voltaire, Mort de Coligny.— Delille, La Ferme; Les Catacombes de Rome. NINETEENTH CENTURY. Chènedolle,Isaïe —Andrieux, Le Meunier de Sans-Souci -Esménard. La Prière du Soir —Milievoye, L’Anniversaire—Guiraud, Le Petit Savoy- ard —Béranger, La sainte Alliance des Peuples —Delavigne, Mort de Jeanne d’Arc; Christophe Colomb. —Soumet, La Pauvre Fille —Xkamartine, Le Combat; Hymne de l’Enfant à son Réveil; Une Larme, ou Consolation.— Heboul, L’Ange et l’Enfant.—Wictor Hugo, Pour les Pauvres ; Lui— me. EB. de Girardin, Cléopâtre —Ponsard, Lucrèce., OPINIONS OF THE PRESS, « Lerecueil que M. Léon Contanseau, professeur de littérature française au Col- lége Militaire d’Addiscombe, vient d’offrir au public, sous le titre de Prosateurs et Poètes français, est, nous n’hésitons pas à le dire, ce qui a été publié de mieux. Le choix des morceaux, dont le plus grand nombre appartient à nos auteurs modernes, est des plus heureux, et nous ne pouvons que recommander cet excellent volume à la jeunesse des écoles d’Angleterre.”” COURRIER DE L’EUROPE. « Mr. Contanseau’s Prosateurs et Poètes français is, in our opinion, the best end most attractive compilation that has ever made its appearance in this country.” MORNING ADVERTISER. ““ Professor Contanseau’s works are eminently practical, and adapted to their purpose. . . . . The admirable and well-known ‘ Practical Dictionary,’ the ‘ Abrégé d’Histoire de France,’ the ‘ Précis de la Littérature française,’ the ‘ French Grammar,’ the Prosateurs et Poètes françuis, and other works published by M. Contanseau, strikingly demonstrate judgement, combined with knowledge, and the art of smoothing down difficulties in the acquisition of language, without impairing the solidity of the information thus acquired.” CIVIL SERVICE GAZETTE. “ M. Contanseau is already well known as having written several French school-books of considerable excellence ; the present volume is quite worthy of its predecessors.” Critic. Contanseau's Elementary French Works. 7 A GUIDE TO FRENCH TRANSLATION: BEING A SELECTION OF INSTRUCTIVE AND ENTERTAINING PIECES. With Notes to assist in the Translation, and to exhibit a Comparison of French and English Idioms. Taiest Edition, 12mo. 8s. 8d. cloth. CONTENTS. Part I. Great Britain. —France.—Tours and its Castle.—Pau.—Geneva and its Lake.— Russia.—Austria.— Napoleon I.—Prussia.—Dover Castle.—Mozart.— Christiania. —Jerusalem.—Reding’s Speech to his Soldiers.—Ruins of Palmyra.—Battle of Lodi.—The Convent of the Great St. Bernard.—Gustavus the Great.—Constanti- nople.—Alfred the Great.— Ruins of Troy.—Last Moments of Charles I.—Napo- leon crossing the Great St. Bernard.—Voltaire.—Athens.—Jeanne d’Arc.—Des- cription of the Horse.—The Hunting of the Chamois.—Battle of the Pyramids.—On Glory and Ambition.—The Rhine.—Elizabeth, Queen of England.—Cologne.— Charlemagne.—Nelson. Parr IT. Charles XII.—Military Education among the Romans.— Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen. — Ferdinand and Isabella.— Portrait of a true Christian. —Admiral Lord Exmouth.—Bombardment of Algiers.— Peter the Great. — Napoleon at Aus- terlitz. — Frederic II.—Turenne.—Henry IV.—Greatness.—Ruins of Carthage. — Constantine, captured. — Algiers. — History of Fort l’Empereur. — Capture of Ghuznee.—The Fountain of Vaucluse. —Remarks on the utility of Languages. — Benjamin Franklin. — Letter of Lord Chesterfield. — St. Petersburg. — Dialogue between the King of Prussia and Gellert. Parr IIT. Mount Albula, in the Alps.— William Tell and Gesler.—Motion of our Globe.— Abd-el-Kader.—Tunis.—The last Days of the Grand Army.—Pascal.—The Takin of Constantinople by the Turks.—Ancient Customs of the Gauls.—Louis XIV. and his Age.—Newton.—Washington.—Battle of Sobraon.--Letter of Lord Ches- terfield.—On Education.— William Pitt.—Influence of the French Language.—A Family in Distress.—The Spell of Wealth.—A Military Sight before Sebastopol. —Scenes from the ‘‘ School for Scandal.”’”—Scenes from a ¢ Trip to Scarborough.” PoErTRY. fhe Country Curate.—The Lady of the Lake.—On Life, Death, and Immortality. ~Ode on 8olitude.— Cardinal Wolsey’s Speech to Cromwell.—Satan’s, Address to the Sun.—The Storm.—The Destruction of Sennacherib.—St. Agnes. —0 0 ne KEY TO THE GUIDE TO FRENCH TRANSLATION. Adapted to the Latest Edition, 12mo. price 3s. 6d. cloth, ’ OPINIONS OF THE PRESS oN THE GUIDE AND KEY. “ These are two exceedingly valuable manuals on the art of French translation, which cannot fail to have an extensive and permanent circulation. . .... The various exercises are judiciously divided into chapters, each chapter containing a complete subject in history, biography, or travel, which is a great advantage, 28 it does not weary the beginner by a long-sustained narrative, nor tax his powers of endurance for too long a period.” SCOTTISH PRESS. _ “ Professor Contanseau’s Guide to French Translation is one of the most useful little books we know of for learners, consisting of a judicious selection from the most eloquent Authors, with the necessary notes and instructions for translation, For those who study with a master, and for these who study without a master, these books are most excellent.” CIVIL SERVICE GAZETTE. ‘This is one of the very best books of the class to which it belongs that we bave ever met with.” ; BELL’S WEEKLY MESSENGER. 8 Contansean’s Elementary French Course. PRECIS DE LA LITTERATURE FRANCAISE, DEPUIS SON ORIGINE TUSQU’À NOS JOURS. Compiled expressly for the use of Schools, as a Reading-Book, end « Students graduating for Examinations. Latest Edition, 12mo. price 3s. 6d. cloth. — + ABRÉGÉ DE L'HISTOIRE DE FRANCE. From the Earliest Times to the Year 1860. Compiled from the Works of Guizot, Sismondi, De Barante, T'1ier Michelet, &c. expressly for the use of Schools, as a Reading-Boor, and of Students graduating for Examinations. New Edition, 12mo. price 3s. 6d: cloth. NEW SERIES OF ELEMENTARY FRENCH SCHOOL-BOOKS EXPRESSL ADAPTED FOR MIDDLE-CLASS SCHOOLS. I. SMALLER or ELEMENTARY FRENCH GRAMMAF In Two Parts: — Parr I. FRENCH ACCIDENCE, price 8d. 2 Parr II. FRENCH SYNTAX, price 8d. II. FOUR FRENCH EXERCISE-BOOKS. Adapted to the same, and each provided with a VOCABULAR.. 1. FRENCH CONVERSATION-BOOK, price 8d. 2. FIRST FRENCH EXERCISE-BOOK, price 8. 3. SECOND FRENCH EXERCISE-BOOK, price 84. 4. FRENCH TRANSLATION-BOOK, price 8d. for translating English into French, increasing progressively in difficult and corresponding with III. THREE FRENCH CONSTRUING-BOOKS. Adapted to the same, and each provided with a VocABULARY. 1. EASY FRENCH DELECTUS, price 8d. 2. FIRST FRENCH READER, price 8d. 3. SECOND FRENCH READER, price 84. consisting of easy but interesting short Stories. IV. FRENCH AND ENGLISH DIALOGUES. * Containing the most useful Phrases in Every-day Talk, and i1 Railway and Steamboat Tavis price 84. London : LONGMANS, GREEN, & CO. J ) Spottiswoode 3 A 5 243 don. WT le be NEN phen